Yamaha HTR-N5060 de handleiding

Categorie
AV-ontvangers
Type
de handleiding
YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA
6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A.
YAMAHA CANADA MUSIC LTD.
135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA
YAMAHA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H.
SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, GERMANY
YAMAHA ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A.
RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE
YAMAHA ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD.
YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD18 7GQ, ENGLAND
YAMAHA SCANDINAVIA A.B.
J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN
YAMAHA MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD.
17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA
©
2006 All rights reserved.
HTR-N5060
Printed in Malaysia WG73970
HTR-N5060
AV Receiver
Ampli-tuner audio-vidéo
OWNER’S MANUAL
MODE D’EMPLOI
BEDIENUNGSANLEITUNG
MANUALE DI ISTRUZIONI
MANUAL DE INSTRUCCIONES
GEBRUIKSAANWIJZING
ИНСТРУКЦИЯ ПО ЭКСПЛУАТАЦИИ
G
QUAD 60157
QUASAR 60029
RADIOLA 60157
RADIOTONE 60625
RCA 60032, 60179
REALISTIC 60179
RESTEK 60157
REVOX 60157
ROTEL 60157, 60897
SAE 60157
SAMSUNG 60524
SANSUI 60157, 60625
SANYO 60179
SEG 60625
SHARP 60034
SHERWOOD 60426
SIEMENS 60157, 60362
SIMAUDIO 60157
SONIC FRONTIERS
60157
SONY 60000
STS 60018
SUPERTECH 60625
SYNERGY 60625
TAG MCLAREN
60157
TANDY 60032
TEAC 60362, 60393,
60625, 60643
TECHNICS 60029, 60207,
60303
TECHWOOD 60362
THORENS 60157
THULE AUDIO60157
TOSHIBA 60299, 60481
TRAXDATA 60626
UNIVERSUM 60157, 60362,
60524
WARDS 60000, 60032,
60157, 60179
YAMAHA 60036, 61907
YBA 60625
CD RECORDER
DENON 70626, 70766
HHB 70192
JVC 71294
KENWOOD 70626
LG 71208
MARANTZ 70626
NAD 71208
PHILIPS 70626
PIONEER 70192, 71087
RCA 70420
SONY 70000
TDK 71208
TEAC 70420
VICTOR 70072, 71294
YAMAHA 70888, 71292
MD RECORDER
DENON 70873
KENWOOD 70681
OPTIMUS 71063
PIONEER 71063
SHARP 70861, 71684
SONY 70490
TECHNICS 71078
YAMAHA 70490, 70888,
71909
TAPE DECK
AIWA 70029, 70197
AKAI 70189, 70283
ARCAM 70076
CARVER 70029
DENON 70076
EROICA 70189
GARRARD 70308, 70309
GRUNDIG 70029
HARMAN/KARDON
70029
INKEL 70070
JVC 70244, 70273
KENWOOD 70070, 70205
MAGNAVOX 70029
MARANTZ 70029
MITSUBISHI 70189, 70283
MYRYAD 70029
ONKYO 70135, 70282
OPTIMUS 70027, 70220
ORION 70308, 70309
PANASONIC 70229
PHILIPS 70029, 70229
PIONEER 70027, 70220
POLK AUDIO 70029
RADIOLA 70029
RCA 70027, 70220
REVOX 70029
SANSUI 70029
SHARP 70205, 70231
SONY 70170, 70243
TEAC 70283, 70289,
70308, 70309
TECHNICS 70229
THORENS 70029
VICTOR 70244, 70273
WARDS 70027, 70029
YAMAHA 70097, 70205,
70524
TUNER
ACOUSTIC SOLUTIONS
81467
AIWA 80158, 80189
AKAI 80115, 80609
ANAM 80281, 80609
ARCAM 80189
CAIRN 80189
CAMBRIDGE 80189
CAMBRIDGE AUDIO
81455, 81647
CARVER 80189
DENON 80004, 80273
DUAL 80004
GARRARD 80281
GOLDMUND 80189
GOLDSTAR 80281
GOODMANS 80609
GRADIENTE 80281
GRUNDIG 80189, 80281
HARMAN/KARDON
80110, 80189
INKEL 80027, 80066
JBL 80110
JVC 80074
KENWOOD 80027, 80645
LG 80281
LINN 80189
LOEWE 80189
MAGNAVOX 80189
MARANTZ 80189
MEMOREX 80014
MICROMEGA 80189
MUSICAL FIDELITY
80445
MYRYAD 80189
NAD 80320, 80609
NIKKO 80609
ONKYO 80103, 80119
PANASONIC 80309, 80518
PHILIPS 80189
PIONEER 80014
POLK AUDIO 80189
RADIOLA 80189
RESTEK 80189
REVOX 80140, 80189
SANSUI 80189, 80609
SHERWOOD 80066
SIEMENS 80609
SONIC 80281
SONY 80158
SOUNDWAVE 80609
TEAC 80110, 80609
TECHNICS 80309, 80518,
81135
TECHWOOD 80281, 80609
THORENS 80189
UNIVERSUM 80189, 80281,
80609
VICTOR 80074
WARDS 80014, 80158,
80189
YAMAHA 80293, 81908
(TUNER ID1) 81916
(TUNER ID2) 81917
ZENITH 80281
OTHER AUDIO
ACCESSORIES
YAMAHA (iPod) 81981
YAMAHA (NET/USB) 81982
CAUTION: READ THIS BEFORE OPERATING YOUR UNIT.
1 To assure the finest performance, please read this manual
carefully. Keep it in a safe place for future reference.
2 Install this sound system in a well ventilated, cool, dry, clean
place – away from direct sunlight, heat sources, vibration,
dust, moisture, and/or cold. Allow ventilation space of at
least 30 cm on the top, 20 cm on the left and right, and 20
cm on the back of this unit.
3 Locate this unit away from other electrical appliances,
motors, or transformers to avoid humming sounds.
4 Do not expose this unit to sudden temperature changes from
cold to hot, and do not locate this unit in an environment
with high humidity (i.e. a room with a humidifier) to prevent
condensation inside this unit, which may cause an electrical
shock, fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury.
5 Avoid installing this unit where a foreign object may fall
onto this unit and/or this unit may be exposed to liquid
dripping or splashing. On the top of this unit, do not place:
other components, as they may cause damage and/or
discoloration on the surface of this unit.
burning objects (i.e. candles), as they may cause fire,
damage to this unit, and/or personal injury.
containers with liquid in them, as they may fall and
liquid may cause electrical shock to the user and/or
damage to this unit.
6 Do not cover this unit with a newspaper, tablecloth, curtain,
etc. in order not to obstruct heat radiation. If the temperature
inside this unit rises, it may cause fire, damage to this unit,
and/or personal injury.
7 Do not plug in this unit to a wall outlet until all connections
are complete.
8 Do not operate this unit upside-down. It may overheat,
possibly causing damage.
9 Do not use force on switches, knobs and/or cords.
10 When disconnecting the power cable from the wall outlet,
grasp the plug; do not pull the cord.
11 Do not clean this unit with chemical solvents; this might
damage the finish. Use a clean, dry cloth.
12 Only voltage specified on this unit must be used. Using this
unit with a higher voltage than specified is dangerous and
may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury.
YAMAHA will not be held responsible for any damage
resulting from use of this unit with a voltage other than
specified.
13 To prevent damage by lightning, keep the power cable and
outdoor antennas disconnected from a wall outlet or this unit
during a lightning storm.
14 Do not attempt to modify or fix this unit. Contact qualified
YAMAHA service personnel when any service is needed.
The cabinet should never be opened for any reasons.
15 When not planning to use this unit for long periods of time
(i.e. vacation), disconnect the AC power plug from the wall
outlet.
16 Install this unit near the AC wall outlet where the power
cable plug can be reached easily.
17 Be sure to read the “TROUBLESHOOTING” section on
common operating errors before concluding that this unit is
faulty.
18 Before moving this unit, press STANDBY/ON to set this
unit to the standby mode, and then disconnect the power
cable from the AC wall outlet.
CAUTION: READ THIS BEFORE OPERATING YOUR UNIT.
WARNING
TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC
SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS UNIT TO RAIN
OR MOISTURE.
This unit is not disconnected from the AC power
source as long as it is connected to the wall outlet, even
if this unit itself is set to the standby mode. In this
state, this unit is designed to consume a very small
quantity of power.
1 En
PREPARATIONINTRODUCTION
BASIC
OPERATION
SOUND FIELD
PROGRAMS
ADVANCED
OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
English
FEATURES.............................................................2
GETTING STARTED............................................ 3
Supplied accessories.................................................. 3
Installing batteries in the remote control................... 3
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS ......................... 4
Front panel................................................................. 4
Remote control...........................................................6
Front panel display ....................................................9
Rear panel................................................................ 11
CONNECTIONS .................................................. 12
Placing speakers....................................................... 12
Connecting speakers................................................ 13
Information on jacks and cable plugs...................... 16
Audio and video signal flow.................................... 17
Connecting a TV...................................................... 18
Connecting a DVD player, a DVD recorder,
a VCR or an STB................................................. 19
Connecting a CD player, an MD player
or a tape deck....................................................... 21
Connecting a YAMAHA iPod universal dock ........22
Connecting the network........................................... 23
Connecting a multi-format player, an external
decoder or a sound processor .............................. 24
Connecting a game console, a video camera
or a portable audio player.................................... 24
Connecting the FM and AM antennas..................... 25
Connecting the power cable..................................... 26
Setting the speaker impedance................................. 27
Turning on and off the power.................................. 28
BASIC SETUP......................................................29
PLAYBACK.......................................................... 32
USING AUDIO FEATURES............................... 34
Using SILENT CINEMA........................................ 34
Muting the audio output........................................... 34
Selecting the night listening mode........................... 34
Selecting the input mode ......................................... 35
Using the sleep timer ...............................................35
Adjusting the speaker level...................................... 36
Selecting the Compressed Music Enhancer mode... 37
Selecting the MULTI CH INPUT component......... 38
Enjoying multi-channel sources
in 2-channel stereo............................................... 39
Enjoying unprocessed input sources........................ 39
Enjoying pure hi-fi stereo sound.............................. 39
USING VIDEO FEATURES............................... 40
Displaying the input source information ................. 40
Selecting the OSD mode.......................................... 41
Playing video sources in the background ................41
ENJOYING SURROUND SOUND .................... 42
Enjoying multi-channel sources
in 6.1-channel surround....................................... 42
Enjoying 2-channel sources in surround.................. 43
Using Virtual CINEMA DSP .................................. 44
RECORDING ....................................................... 45
FM/AM TUNING..................................................46
Automatic tuning ..................................................... 46
Manual tuning.......................................................... 47
Automatic preset tuning........................................... 48
Manual preset tuning ............................................... 49
Selecting preset stations........................................... 50
Exchanging preset stations ...................................... 51
RADIO DATA SYSTEM TUNING
(EUROPE MODEL ONLY).............................53
Selecting the Radio Data System program.............. 53
Using the Radio Data System station network........ 54
Displaying the Radio Data System information...... 55
SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS .............................57
Selecting sound field programs ...............................57
Sound field program descriptions............................ 58
Changing sound field parameter settings................. 60
SET MENU............................................................66
Using SET MENU...................................................68
1 SOUND MENU.................................................... 69
2 INPUT MENU...................................................... 74
3 NET/USB MENU................................................. 76
4 OPTION MENU................................................... 78
ADVANCED SETUP............................................81
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES ...................83
Controlling this unit, a TV, or other components.... 83
Setting the remote control code............................... 85
Setting library codes................................................ 86
Resetting all remote control codes........................... 87
USING iPod
®
.........................................................88
Controlling iPod ...................................................... 88
USING NETWORK/USB FEATURES...............90
Navigating the network and USB menus ................ 90
Using a PC server or YAMAHA
MCX-2000........................................................... 92
Using the Internet radio ........................................... 93
Using a USB memory device or a USB
portable audio player........................................... 94
RESETTING THE SYSTEM...............................95
TROUBLESHOOTING .......................................96
GLOSSARY.........................................................103
Audio information ................................................. 103
Video information.................................................. 105
Sound field program information .......................... 105
SPECIFICATIONS.............................................106
CONTENTS
INTRODUCTION
PREPARATION
BASIC OPERATION
SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS
ADVANCED OPERATION
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
FEATURES
2 En
Built-in 6-channel power amplifier
Minimum RMS output power
(1 kHz, 0.7% THD, 8 )
Front: 110 W + 110 W
Center: 110 W
Surround: 110 W + 110 W
Surround back: 110 W
Sound field programs
Proprietary YAMAHA technology for the creation of sound
fields
Dolby Digital/Dolby Digital EX decoder
DTS/DTS-ES Matrix 6.1, Discrete 6.1, DTS Neo:6,
DTS 96/24 decoder
Dolby Pro Logic/Dolby Pro Logic II/
Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoder
Virtual CINEMA DSP
SILENT CINEMA
Sophisticated AM/FM tuner
40-station random and direct preset tuning
Automatic preset tuning
Preset station shifting capability (preset editing)
Radio Data System
(Europe model only)
Radio Data System tuning capability
iPod controlling capability
DOCK terminal to connect a YAMAHA iPod universal dock
(such as YDS-10 sold separately), which supports iPod (Click
and Wheel), iPod nano, and iPod mini
Network features
LAN port to connect a PC and YAMAHA MCX-2000 or
access the Internet radio via a LAN
DHCP automatic or manual network configuration
USB features
USB port to connect a USB memory device or a USB portable
audio player
Other features
192-kHz/24-bit D/A converter
OSD (on-screen display) menus that allow you to optimize
this unit to suit your individual audiovisual system
6 additional input jacks for discrete multi-channel input
S-video signal input/output capability
Component video input/output capability
(3 COMPONENT VIDEO INs and 1 MONITOR OUT)
Digital video signal conversion (composite video
S-video component video) capability for monitor out
Optical and coaxial digital audio signal jacks
Sleep timer
Cinema and music night listening modes
Remote control with preset remote control codes,
backlighting input selector buttons, and an iPod (stationed in a
YAMAHA iPod universal dock connected to the DOCK
terminal) controlling capability
Compressed Music Enhancer mode to improve the sound
quality of compression artifacts (such as the MP3 format) to
that of a high-quality stereo
MPEG Layer-3 audio coding technology licensed from
Fraunhofer IIS and Thomson.
This unit contains programs licensed under the GNU General
Public License and GNU Lesser General Public License.
Windows XP, Windows Media Audio, Windows Media Connect
are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft
corporation in the United States and/or countries.
FEATURES
Manu
f
acture
d
un
d
er
li
cense
f
rom Do
lb
y
Laboratories.
“Dolby”, “Pro Logic”, and the double-D
symbol are trademarks of Dolby
Laboratories.
Manu
f
acture
d
un
d
er
li
cense
f
rom D
i
g
i
ta
l
Theater Systems, Inc. “DTS”, “DTS-ES”,
“NEO:6”, and “DTS 96/24” are trademarks
of Digital Theater Systems, Inc. Copyright
1996, 2003 Digital Theater Systems, Inc. All
right reserved.
iPod
®
“i
Po
d”
i
s a tra
d
emar
k
o
f
A
pp
l
e
C
omputer,
Inc., registered in the U.S. and other
countries.
T
hi
s rece
i
ver supports networ
k
connect
i
ons.
“S
ILENT
C
INEM
A”
i
s a tra
d
emar
k
o
f
YAMAHA CORPORATION.
GETTING STARTED
3 En
INTRODUCTION
English
Check that you received all of the following parts.
1 Take off the battery compartment cover.
2 Insert the two supplied batteries
(AA, R6, UM-3) according to the polarity
markings (+ and –) on the inside of the
battery compartment.
3 Snap the battery compartment cover back
into place.
Change all of the batteries if you notice the following
conditions:
the operation range of the remote control decreases.
the TRANSMIT indicator does not flash or its light becomes
dim.
Do not use an old battery together with a new one.
Do not use different types of batteries (such as alkaline and
manganese batteries) together. Read the packaging carefully as
these different types of batteries may have the same shape and
color.
If the batteries have leaked, dispose of them immediately. Avoid
touching the leaked material or letting it come into contact with
clothing, etc. Clean the battery compartment thoroughly before
installing new batteries.
Do not throw away batteries with general house waste; dispose
of them correctly in accordance with your local regulations.
If the remote control is without batteries for more than 2
minutes, or if exhausted batteries remain in the remote control,
the contents of the memory may be cleared. When the memory
is cleared, insert new batteries and set up the remote control
code that may have been cleared.
GETTING STARTED
Supplied accessories
About this manual
y indicates a tip for your operation.
Some operations can be performed by using either the
buttons on the front panel or the ones on the remote control.
In case the button names differ between the front panel and
the remote control, the button name on the remote control is
given in parentheses.
This manual is printed prior to production. Design and
specifications are subject to change in part as a result of
improvements, etc. In case of differences between the
manual and product, the product has priority.
TV MUTE TV INPUT
MUTE
AMP
SOURCE
TV
MENUTITLE
SET MENU
LEVEL
DISPLAYRETURN
BAND
SRCH MODE
ON SCREENDAB MEMORY
A/B/C/D/E
ENTER
PRESET/CH
REC
AUDIO
USB
NET RADIO
PC/MCX
STEREO
1
EFFECT
VOLUME
TV VOL TV CH
TRANSMITCODE SET
STANDBY
POWER
POWERPOWER
CD
AVTV
MULTI CH IN
SLEEP
CD-R
DVD DTV
MD
DOCK USB
CBL
NET
TUNER
V-AU X DVR
STANDARD
5
SPEAKERS
9
MUSIC
2
SELECT
6
ENHANCER
0
ENTERTAIN
3
EXTD SUR.
7
NIGHT
10
MOVIE
4
DIRECT ST.
8
STRAIGHT
ENT.
FREQ/TEXT EONSTARTPTY SEEKMODE
Remote control
Batteries (2)
(AA, R6, UM-3)
Indoor FM antenna
(Canada model)
AM loop antenna
Indoor FM antenna
(Europe and Australia
models)
Installing batteries in the remote
control
Notes
1
3
2
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS
4 En
1 STANDBY/ON
Turns on this unit or sets it to the standby mode
(see page 28).
In the standby mode, this unit consumes a small amount of
power in order to receive infrared signals from the remote
control.
When you turn on this unit, there will be a 4 to 5-second delay
before this unit can reproduce sound.
2 Remote control sensor
Receives signals from the remote control (see page 8).
3 Front panel display
Shows information about the operational status of this unit
(see page 9).
4 PRESET/TUNING, EDIT
Switches the function of PRESET/TUNING l / h
between selecting preset station numbers and selecting
the tuning frequency.
Edits the assignments of preset stations (see page 51).
5 FM/AM
Switches the reception band between FM and AM when
“TUNER” is selected as the input source (see page 46).
6 A/B/C/D/E, NEXT
Selects one of the 5 preset station groups (A to E) when
“TUNER” is selected as the input source (see page 49).
Selects the speaker channel whose output level you
want to adjust when “TUNER” is not selected as the
input source (see page 36).
7 PRESET/TUNING l / h, LEVEL +/–
Selects one of the 8 preset station numbers (1 to 8)
when “TUNER” is selected as the input source. The
colon (:) is displayed in the front panel display (see
page 50).
Selects the tuning frequency when “TUNER” is
selected as the input source. The colon (:) is not
displayed in the front panel display (see page 46).
Adjusts the level of the speaker channel selected using
NEXT when “TUNER” is not selected as the input
source (see page 36).
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS
Front panel
VOLUME
AUTO/MAN'LMAN'L/AUTO FMLEVELNEXTEDIT
EFFECT
MEMORY
FM/AMPRESET/TUNING
A/B/C/D/E
l PROGRAM h
BASS/TREBLE
l PRESET/TUNING h
TUNING MODE
INPUT MODE
TONE CONTROL
STRAIGHT
SPEAKERSPHONES
SILENT CINEMA
STANDBY
/ON
BA
MULTI CH
INPUT
INPUT
VIDEO L AUDIO R
USBVIDEO AUX
K
21347 856
J
9
IGFDBACEH
0
Notes
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS
5 En
INTRODUCTION
English
8 MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM)
Stores a preset station in the memory. Hold down this
button for more than 3 seconds to start automatic preset
tuning (see page 48).
9 TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L)
Switches between automatic tuning (the AUTO indicator
is turned on) and manual tuning (the AUTO indicator is
turned off) (see page 46).
0 VOLUME
Controls the output level of all audio channels.
y
This does not affect the AUDIO OUT (REC) level.
A PHONES (SILENT CINEMA) jack
Outputs audio signals for private listening with
headphones (see page 34).
When you connect headphones, no signals are output at the
SUBWOOFER OUTPUT jack or the speaker terminals.
All Dolby Digital and DTS audio signals are mixed down to the
left and right headphone channels.
B SPEAKERS A/B
Turns on or off the set of front speakers connected to the
FRONT A and/or B terminals on the rear panel each time
the corresponding button is pressed.
C STRAIGHT (EFFECT)
Turns the sound field programs off or on. When the
“STRAIGHT” mode is selected, 2-channel or multi-
channel input signals are output directly from their
respective speakers without effect processing (see
page 39).
D TONE CONTROL
Selects “BASS” or “TREBLE” to adjust the tonal balance
of the front left and right speakers in conjunction with
BASS/TREBLE +/– (see page 33).
E BASS/TREBLE +/–
Adjusts the bass/treble balance of the front left and right
speakers in conjunction with TONE CONTROL
(see page 33).
F PROGRAM l / h
Selects sound field programs (see page 33).
G INPUT MODE
Selects either digital or analog input signals exclusively or
sets this unit to automatically detect the type of input
signals and select the corresponding input signals when
one component is connected via both digital and analog
connections (see page 35).
H INPUT selector
Selects the desired input source.
I MULTI CH INPUT
Selects the component connected to the MULTI CH
INPUT jacks as the input source (see page 38).
The input source connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks takes
priority over the source selected with the INPUT selector on the
front panel (or the input selector buttons on the remote control).
J VIDEO AUX jacks
Input audio and video signals from a portable external
source such as a game console, a video camera or a
portable audio player (see page 24).
y
To reproduce the source signals input at these jacks, select
“V-AUX” as the input source.
The audio signals input at the DOCK terminal on the rear panel
take priority over the ones input at the VIDEO AUX jacks.
K USB port
Use to connect a USB memory device or a USB portable
audio player (see page 94).
Notes
Note
Note
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS
6 En
This section describes the function of each control on the
remote control used to control this unit. To operate other
components, see “REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES” on
page 83.
The operation mode of the remote control buttons in the shaded
area below depends on the component selector switch position.
Set the component selector switch to AMP to control this unit. To
control the TUNER functions, set the component selector switch
to SOURCE and then press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the
input source.
Controlling this unit
Set the component selector switch to AMP to control this
unit.
1 Infrared window
Outputs infrared control signals. Aim this window at the
component you want to operate (see page 8).
2 CODE SET
Use to set up remote control codes (see page 85).
3 Input selector buttons
Select the input source you want to control.
The corresponding input selector button for the currently selected
input source lights up for approximately 5 seconds after you press
any buttons on the remote control, showing which source
component is currently being operated.
4 Sound field program selector buttons
Select sound field programs (see page 57).
Use SELECT to play back 2-channel sources in
surround (see page 43).
Use EXTD SUR. to switch between 5.1 and
6.1-channel playback of multi-channel sources
(see page 42).
Use DIRECT ST. to play back 2-channel sources in
hi-fi stereo sound (see page 39).
5 SPEAKERS
Turns on or off the set of front speakers connected to the
FRONT A and/or B terminals on the rear panel. Press this
button repeatedly to toggle as follows:
6 ENHANCER
Turns on or off the Compressed Music Enhancer mode
(see page 37).
7 LEVEL
Selects the speaker channel to be adjusted and sets the
output level (see page 36).
8 Cursor buttons u / d / j / i, ENTER
Select and adjust the sound field program parameters or
the “SET MENU” parameters.
9 RETURN
Returns to the previous menu level when adjusting the
“SET MENU” parameters.
Remote control
Note
TV MUTE TV INPUT
MUTE
AMP
SOURCE
TV
MENUTITLE
SET MENU
LEVEL
DISPLAYRETURN
BAND
SRCH MODE
ON SCREENDAB MEMORY
A/B/C/D/E
ENTER
PRESET/CH
REC
AUDIO
USB
NET RADIO
PC/MCX
STEREO
1
EFFECT
VOLUME
TV VOL TV CH
TRANSMITCODE SET
STANDBY
POWER
POWERPOWER
CD
AVTV
MULTI CH IN
SLEEP
CD-R
DVD DTV
MD
DOCK USB
CBL
NET
TUNER
V-AUX DVR
STANDARD
5
SPEAKERS
9
MUSIC
2
SELECT
6
ENHANCER
0
ENTERTAIN
3
EXTD SUR.
7
NIGHT
10
MOVIE
4
DIRECT ST.
8
STRAIGHT
ENT.
FREQ/TEXT EONSTARTPTY SEEKMODE
K
0
A
B
C
D
F
E
G
H
I
J
1
2
3
4
5
6
8
9
7
L
M
Note
A on B on
A and B off
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS
7 En
INTRODUCTION
English
0 TRANSMIT indicator
Flashes while the remote control is sending infrared
signals.
A STANDBY
Sets this unit to the standby mode (see page 28).
B POWER
Turns on this unit (see page 28).
C SLEEP
Sets the sleep timer (see page 35).
D MULTI CH IN
Selects the component connected to the MULTI CH
INPUT jacks as the input source when using an external
decoder, etc. (see page 38).
E VOLUME +/
Increases or decreases the volume level.
F Component selector switch
Selects the operation mode of the remote control buttons
in the shaded area.
AMP
Operates this unit.
SOURCE
Operates the component selected with an input
selector button (see page 84).
TV
Operates the TV assigned to either DTV/CBL or
(see page 83).
To set the remote control codes for other components, see
page 85.
When you set the remote control codes for both DTV/CBL and
(see page 85), priority is given to the one set for DTV/
CBL.
G MUTE
Mutes the audio output. Press again to restore the audio
output to the previous volume level (see page 34).
H STRAIGHT (EFFECT)
Turns the sound field programs off or on. When the
“STRAIGHT” mode is selected, 2-channel or multi-
channel input signals are output directly from their
respective speakers without effect processing (see
page 39).
I NIGHT
Turns on or off the night listening modes (see page 34).
J SET MENU
Enters “SET MENU” (see page 68).
K DISPLAY
Selects the on-screen display (OSD) mode for your video
monitor (see page 41).
L Network and USB input selector buttons
Select the sub input source of NET/USB (see page 90).
PC/MCX
Selects a PC server or YAMAHA MCX-2000 as the
sub input source of NET/USB.
NET RADIO
Selects the Internet radio as the sub input source of
NET/USB.
USB
Selects a USB memory device or a USB portable
audio player as the sub input source of NET/USB.
Press NET/USB to select “NET/USB” as the input source
before you press any of the network and USB input selector
buttons stated above to select the corresponding sub input
source of NET/USB.
When you press any of the network and USB input selector
buttons, the contents previously played for the corresponding
sub input source of NET/USB is automatically played.
M Radio Data System tuning buttons
(Europe model only)
FREQ/TEXT
Switches the Radio Data System display between the
PS mode, PTY mode, RT mode, CT mode (if the
station offers the corresponding data services) and the
frequency display (see page 55).
PTY SEEK MODE
Sets this unit to the PTY SEEK mode (see page 53).
PTY SEEK START
Starts searching for a station once the desired program
type is selected in the PTY SEEK mode (see page 53).
EON
Selects a program type (NEWS, AFFAIRS, INFO, or
SPORT) for automatic tuning (see page 54).
Notes
Notes
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS
8 En
Controlling the TUNER functions
Set the component selector switch to SOURCE and then
press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source.
4 Numeric buttons
Use numbers 1 through 8 to select preset stations.
7 BAND
Switches the reception band between FM and AM.
8 Cursor buttons u / d / j / i
Press j / i to select a preset station group (A to E) and
u / d to select a preset station number (1 to 8)
(see page 50).
The printed letters “DAB MEMORY” and “SRCH MODE” are
not applicable to this unit.
Using the remote control
The remote control transmits a directional infrared ray.
Be sure to aim the remote control directly at the remote
control sensor on this unit during operation.
Do not spill water or other liquids on the remote control.
Do not drop the remote control.
Do not leave or store the remote control in the following types
of conditions:
places of high humidity, such as near a bath
places of high temperatures, such as near a heater or stove
places of extremely low temperatures
dusty places
Note
Notes
VOLUME
AUTO/MAN'LMAN'L/AUTO FMLEVELNEXTEDIT
EFFECT
MEMORY
FM/AMPRESET/TUNING
A/B/C/D/E
l PROGRAM h
BASS/TREBLE
TUNING MODE
INPUT MODE
TONE CONTROL
STRAIGHT
SPEAKERSPHONES
SILENT CINEMA
STANDBY
/ON
BA
MULTI CH
INPUT
INPUT
l PRESET/TUNING h
VIDEO L AUDIO R
USBVIDEO AUX
30 30
TV MUTE TV INPUT
MUTE
AMP
SOURCE
TV
MENUTITLE
SET MENU
LEVEL
DISPLAYRETURN
BAND
SRCH MODE
ON SCREENDAB MEMORY
A/B/C/D/E
ENTER
PRESET/CH
REC
AUDIO
USB
NET RADIO
PC/MCX
STEREO
1
EFFECT
VOLUME
TV VOL TV CH
TRANSMITCODE SET
STANDBY
POWER
POWERPOWER
CD
AVTV
MULTI CH IN
SLEEP
CD-R
DVD DTV
MD
DOCK USB
CBL
NET
TUNER
V-AUX DVR
STANDARD
5
SPEAKERS
9
MUSIC
2
SELECT
6
ENHANCER
0
ENTERTAIN
3
EXTD SUR.
7
NIGHT
10
MOVIE
4
DIRECT ST.
8
STRAIGHT
ENT.
FREQ/TEXT EONSTARTPTY SEEKMODE
Approximately 6 m
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS
9 En
INTRODUCTION
English
1 Decoder indicators
The respective indicator lights up when any of the
decoders of this unit functions.
2 ENHANCER indicator
Lights up when the Compressed Music Enhancer mode is
turned on (see page 37).
3 Sound field indicators
Light up to indicate the active DSP sound fields.
4 VIRTUAL indicator
Lights up when Virtual CINEMA DSP is active (see
page 44).
5 Input source indicators
The corresponding cursor lights up to show the currently
selected input source.
6 DOCK indicator
Lights up when you station your iPod in a YAMAHA iPod
universal dock (such as YDS-10 sold separately)
connected to the DOCK terminal of this unit
(see page 22).
7 SILENT CINEMA indicator
Lights up when headphones are connected and a sound
field program is selected (see page 34).
8 CINEMA DSP indicator
Lights up when you select a CINEMA DSP sound field
program (see page 58).
9 AUTO indicator
Lights up when this unit is in the automatic tuning mode
(see page 46).
0 TUNED indicator
Lights up when this unit is tuned into a station
(see page 46).
A STEREO indicator
Lights up when this unit is receiving a strong signal for an
FM stereo broadcast while the AUTO indicator is lit.
B MEMORY indicator
Flashes to show that a station can be stored (see page 48).
Front panel display
p
DVR
p
DVD
p
CD
p
V-AUX
p
DTV/CBL
p
MD/CD-R
p
TUNER
p
NET
USB
96
24
q PL
q EX
q PL
ENHANCER
MATRIX DISCRETE
SILENT CINEMA
NIGHT
DOCK
STANDARD
AUTO
PSHOLD RT
EON
PTYPTY
TUNED
MUTE
VOLUME
MEMORY
SLEEP
VIRTUAL
PCM
q PL x
A B
SP
mS
ft
dB
96/24
HiFi DSP
LFE
LCR
SL SB SR
q
DIGITAL
t
dB
STEREO
CT
2
EHGIJ KMLOND
F
13 45 768 B
0A9C
P
(Europe model only)
Presence DSP sound field
Listening position
Surround left
DSP sound field
Surround right
DSP sound field
Surround back DSP sound field
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS
10 En
C VOLUME level indicator
Indicates the current volume level.
D PCM indicator
Lights up when this unit is reproducing PCM (Pulse Code
Modulation) digital audio signals.
E STANDARD indicator
Lights up when the “SUR. STANDARD” or “SUR.
ENHANCED” program is selected.
F SP A B indicators
Light up according to the set of front speakers selected.
G Headphones indicator
Lights up when headphones are connected.
H NIGHT indicator
Lights up when you select a night listening mode
(see page 34).
I HiFi DSP indicator
Lights up when you select a HiFi DSP sound field
program (see page 59).
J Multi-information display
Shows the name of the current sound field program and
other information when adjusting or changing settings.
K SLEEP indicator
Lights up while the sleep timer is on (see page 35).
L MUTE indicator
Flashes while the MUTE function is on (see page 34).
M 96/24 indicator
Lights up when a DTS 96/24 signal is input to this unit.
N Input channel indicators
Indicate the channel components of the current digital
input signal.
O LFE indicator
Lights up when the input signal contains the LFE signal.
P Radio Data System indicators
(Europe model only)
The corresponding indicator lights up to show the type
of the Radio Data System information.
EON
Lights up when the EON data service is being
received.
PTY HOLD
Lights up while searching for the Radio Data System
stations in the PTY SEEK mode.
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS
11 En
INTRODUCTION
English
1 Video component jacks
See pages 18 and 19 for connection information.
2 Audio component jacks
See page 21 for connection information.
3 MULTI CH INPUT jacks
See page 24 for connection information.
4 SUBWOOFER OUTPUT jack
See page 13 for connection information.
5 DIGITAL OUTPUT jack
See page 21 for connection information.
6 DIGITAL INPUT jacks
See pages 19 and 21 for connection information.
7 DOCK terminal
Use to connect a YAMAHA iPod universal dock (such as
YDS-10 sold separately) where your iPod can be
stationed.
See page 22 for connection information.
8 LAN port
Use to connect a network cable for network connections.
See page 23 for connection information.
9 COMPONENT VIDEO jacks
See pages 18 and 19 for connection information.
0 Antenna terminals
See page 25 for connection information.
A Speaker terminals
See page 13 for connection information.
B AC OUTLET(S)
Use to supply power to your other audiovisual
components.
See page 26 for details.
Rear panel
AUDIO AUDIO OUTPUT DIGITAL INPUT
DVD DVD
COAXIAL
DTV/CBLMD/CD-RMD/CD-R
SUB
WOOFER
SUB
WOOFER
SURROUND
FRONT
OUT
(REC)
IN
(PLAY)
MD/
CD-R
CD
DVD
FM ANT
75
UNBAL.
AM
ANT
GND
TUNER SPEAKERS
DOCK
DTV/CBL
IN OUT
DVR DVD DTV/CBL
IN OUT
DVR
CENTER
DIGITAL
OUTPUT
MULTI CH INPUT
VIDEO S VIDEO
MONITOR
OUT
MONITOR
OUT
FRONT
A
B
SURROUND
CENTER
SURROUND BACK
OPTICAL OPTICAL
MONITOR OUT
DTV/
CBL
DVD
DVR
COMPONENT VIDEO
P
RPBY
LAN
P
RPBY
8 9
654321
0
AB
7
CONNECTIONS
12 En
The speaker layout below shows the standard ITU-R
*
speaker setting. You can use it to enjoy CINEMA DSP and
multi-channel audio sources.
*
ITU-R is the radio communication sector of the ITU
(International Telecommunication Union).
Front left and right speakers (FL and FR)
The front speakers are used for the main source sound plus
effect sounds. Place these speakers at an equal distance
from the ideal listening position. The distance of each
speaker from each side of the video monitor should be the
same.
Center speaker (C)
The center speaker is for the center channel sounds
(dialog, vocals, etc.). If for some reason it is not practical
to use a center speaker, you can do without it. Best results,
however, are obtained with the full system. Place the
center speaker centrally between the front speakers and as
close to the monitor as possible, such as directly over or
under it.
Surround left and right speakers (SL and SR)
The surround speakers are used for effect and surround
sounds. Place these speakers behind your listening
position, facing slightly inwards, about 1.8 m (6 ft) above
the floor.
Surround back speaker (SB)
The surround back speaker supplements the surround
speakers and provides more realistic front-to-back
transitions. Place this speaker directly behind the listening
position and at the same height as the surround speakers.
Subwoofer (SW)
The use of a subwoofer with a built-in amplifier, such as
the YAMAHA Active Servo Processing Subwoofer
System, is effective not only for reinforcing bass
frequencies from any or all channels, but also for high
fidelity reproduction of the LFE (low-frequency effect)
channel included in Dolby Digital and DTS sources. The
position of the subwoofer is not so critical, because low
bass sounds are not highly directional. But it is better to
place the subwoofer near the front speakers. Turn it
slightly toward the center of the room to reduce wall
reflections.
CONNECTIONS
Placing speakers
SW
FR
FL
SB
SL
SR
C
60˚
30˚
SB
FL
FR
C
SL
SR
SR
80˚
SL
1.8 m (6 ft)
13 En
CONNECTIONS
PREPARATION
English
Be sure to connect the left channel (L), right channel (R), “+” (red) and “–” (black) properly. If the connections are faulty,
no sound will be heard from the speakers, and if the polarity of the speaker connections is incorrect, the sound will be
unnatural and lack bass.
Before connecting the speakers, make sure that this unit is turned off (see page 28).
Do not let the bare speaker wires touch each other or do not let them touch any metal part of this
unit. This could damage this unit and/or speakers.
Use magnetically shielded speakers. If this type of speakers still creates the interference with the
monitor, place the speakers away from the monitor.
If you are to use 6 ohm speakers, be sure to set “SP IMP.” to “6MIN” before using this unit (see
page 27). 4 ohm speakers can be also used as the front speakers (see page 82).
A speaker cord is actually a pair of insulated cables running side by side. Cables are colored or shaped differently, perhaps with a stripe,
groove or ridge. Connect the striped (grooved, etc.) cable to the “+” (red) terminals of this unit and your speaker. Connect the plain cable
to the “–” (black) terminals.
Connecting speakers
Note
CAUTION
OUTPUT
SUB
WOOFER
SPEAKERS
FRONT
A
B
SURROUND
CENTER SURROUND BACK
1 2 4 57
63
Subwoofer
Center
speaker
Front speakers (A)
Surround back
speaker
LeftRight
LeftRight
Surround speakers
Front
speakers
(B)
14 En
CONNECTIONS
FRONT terminals
Connect one or two sets of front speakers (1, 2) to these
terminals. If you use only one front speaker system,
connect it to the FRONT A or B terminal.
CENTER terminals
Connect a center speaker (3) to these terminals.
SURROUND terminals
Connect surround speakers (4, 5) to these terminals.
SURROUND BACK terminals
Connect a surround back speaker (6) to these terminals.
SUBWOOFER OUTPUT jack
Connect a subwoofer with a built-in amplifier (7) (such as
the YAMAHA Active Servo Processing Subwoofer
System) to this jack.
7
1
2
6
5
4
3
Speaker layout
15 En
CONNECTIONS
PREPARATION
English
Connecting the speaker cable
1 Remove approximately 10 mm of insulation
from the end of each speaker cable and then
twist the exposed wires of the cable together
to prevent short circuits.
2 Loosen the knob.
3 Insert one bare wire into the hole on the side
of each terminal.
4 Tighten the knob to secure the wire.
Connecting the banana plug
(except Europe model)
The banana plug is a single-pole electrical connector
widely used to terminate speaker cables.
1 Tighten the knob.
2 Insert the banana plug connector into the
end of the corresponding terminal.
10 mm
Red: positive (+)
Black: negative (–)
Banana plug
Red: positive (+)
Black: negative (–)
16 En
CONNECTIONS
Audio jacks
This unit has three types of audio jacks. Connection
depends on the availability of audio jacks on your other
components.
AUDIO jacks
For conventional analog audio signals transmitted via left
and right analog audio cables. Connect red plugs to the
right jacks and white plugs to the left jacks.
DIGITAL AUDIO COAXIAL jacks
For digital audio signals transmitted via coaxial digital
audio cables.
DIGITAL AUDIO OPTICAL jacks
For digital audio signals transmitted via optical digital
audio cables.
You can use the digital jacks to input PCM, Dolby Digital and
DTS bitstreams. When you connect components to both the
COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks, priority is given to the signals
input at the COAXIAL jack. All digital input jacks are
compatible with 96-kHz sampling digital signals.
Pull out the cap from the optical jack before you connect the
fiber optic cable. Do not discard the cap. When you are not
using the optical jack, be sure to put the cap back in place. This
cap protects the jack from dust.
Video jacks
This unit has three types of video jacks. Connection
depends on the availability of input jacks on your video
monitor.
VIDEO jacks
For conventional composite video signals transmitted via
composite video cables.
S VIDEO jacks
For S-video signals, separated into the luminance (Y) and
chrominance (C) video signals transmitted on separate
wires of S-video cables.
COMPONENT VIDEO jacks
For component video signals, separated into the
luminance (Y) and chrominance (P
B, PR) video signals
transmitted on separate wires of component video cables.
y
When “VIDEO CONV.” is set to “ON” (see page 78), the video
signals input at the VIDEO and S VIDEO jacks are converted and
output at the VIDEO, S VIDEO and COMPONENT VIDEO
jacks interchangeably.
Information on jacks and cable plugs
VIDEO S VIDEO
COMPONENT VIDEO
Y P
B
P
R
PB
Y
P
R
S
V
COAXIAL
DIGITAL AUDIO
AUDIO
OPTICAL
DIGITAL AUDIO
R
L
C
O
R
L
Left and right
analog audio
cable plugs
Optical
digital
audio cable
plug
Coaxial
digital audio
cable plug
Composite
video cable
plug
S-video
cable plug
Component
video cable
plugs
Audio jacks and cable plugs Video jacks and cable plugs
(Red)(White) (Orange) (Yellow) (Green) (Blue) (Red)
Notes
17 En
CONNECTIONS
PREPARATION
English
Audio signal flow for AUDIO OUT (REC)
This unit handles digital and analog signals independently. Thus, audio signals input at the analog jacks are output only at the analog
AUDIO OUT (REC) jacks. Likewise, audio signals input at the DIGITAL INPUT (OPTICAL or COAXIAL) jacks are output only at the
DIGITAL OUTPUT jack.
Video signal flow for MONITOR OUT
If video signals are input at the COMPONENT VIDEO, S VIDEO and VIDEO jacks simultaneously when “VIDEO CONV.” is set to
“ON”, the priority order of the input signals is as follows:
COMPONENT VIDEO > S VIDEO > VIDEO
Audio and video signal flow
Note
Note
DIGITAL AUDIO
OPTICAL
DIGITAL AUDIO
COAXIAL
AUDIO
RLRL
Digital output
Output
AUDIO OUT (REC)
Input
Analog output
Digital audio
Analog audio
S VIDEO
VIDEO
COMPONENT
VIDEO
Y P
B
P
R
Y P
B
P
R
Through
Output
(MONITOR OUT)
Input
Video conversion when “VIDEO CONV.” is set to “ON” (see page 78)
Analog video
18 En
CONNECTIONS
Connect your TV to the VIDEO MONITOR OUT jack, the S VIDEO MONITOR OUT jack or the COMPONENT
VIDEO MONITOR OUT jacks of this unit.
Do not connect this unit or other components to the AC power supply until all connections between
components are complete.
Connecting a TV
CAUTION
VIDEO S VIDEO
MONITOR
OUT
MONITOR
OUT
MONITOR OUT
COMPONENT VIDEO
PRPBY
PRPB
V
S
Y
TV
S-video in
Component video in
Video in
19 En
CONNECTIONS
PREPARATION
English
Connect your DVD player, DVD recorder, VCR or STB (set-top box) using the same type of video connections as those
made for your TV (see page 18). The cable TV receiver and the satellite receiver are examples of the STB.
Do not connect this unit or other components to the AC power supply until all connections between
components are complete.
When “VIDEO CONV.” is set to “OFF” (see page 78), be sure to make the same type of video connections as those made for your TV
(see page 18). For example, if you connected your TV to the VIDEO MONITOR OUT jack of this unit, connect your other
components to the VIDEO jacks.
When “VIDEO CONV.” is set to “ON” (see page 78), the converted video signals are output only at the MONITOR OUT jacks. When
recording a source, you must make the same type of video connections between each component.
To make a digital connection to a component other than the default component assigned to each DIGITAL INPUT or DIGITAL
OUTPUT jack, select the corresponding setting for “OPTICAL OUT”, “OPTICAL IN”, or “COAXIAL IN” in “I/O ASSIGNMENT”
(see page 74).
If you connect your DVD player to both the DIGITAL INPUT (OPTICAL) and the DIGITAL INPUT (COAXIAL) jacks, priority is
given to the signals input at the DIGITAL INPUT (COAXIAL) jack.
Connecting a DVD player
Connecting a DVD player, a DVD recorder, a VCR or an STB
Notes
CAUTION
AUDIO DIGITAL INPUT
DVD DVD
COAXIAL
DVD DVD
VIDEO S VIDEO
OPTICAL
DVD
COMPONENT VIDEO
P
RPBY
S
P
RPBY
V
C
LR
O
DVD player
Optical audio out
Coaxial audio out
Video out
Audio out
S-video out
Component video out
20 En
CONNECTIONS
Connecting a DVD recorder or a VCR
Connecting an STB
AUDIO
IN OUT
DVR
IN OUT
DVR
VIDEO S VIDEO
DVR
COMPONENT VIDEO
PRPBY
V
S
V
LR LR
PRPBY
S
DVD recorder or
VCR
Audio in
Audio out
Video in
Video out
Component video out
S-video in
S-video out
AUDIO DIGITAL INPUT
DTV/CBL
DTV/CBL DTV/CBL
VIDEO S VIDEO
OPTICAL
DTV/
CBL
COMPONENT VIDEO
P
RPBY
S
P
RPBY
V
LR
O
Cable TV receiver or
satellite receiver
Optical audio out
Component video out
Video out
Audio out
S-video out
21 En
CONNECTIONS
PREPARATION
English
Connect your CD player, MD player or tape deck via analog and/or digital connections.
Do not connect this unit or other components to the AC power supply until all connections between
components are complete.
To make a digital connection to a component other than the default component assigned to each DIGITAL INPUT or DIGITAL
OUTPUT jack, select the corresponding setting for “OPTICAL OUT”, “OPTICAL IN”, or “COAXIAL IN” in “I/O ASSIGNMENT”
(see page 74).
Connecting a CD player, an MD player or a tape deck
Note
CAUTION
AUDIO DIGITAL INPUT
MD/CD-RMD/CD-R
OUT
(REC)
IN
(PLAY)
MD/
CD-R
CD
DIGITAL
OUTPUT
OPTICAL OPTICAL
LR
LR LR
O
O
CD player
MD recorder or
tape deck
Audio out
Audio out
Audio in
Optical audio out
Optical audio in
22 En
CONNECTIONS
This unit is equipped with the DOCK terminal on the rear panel that allows you to connect a YAMAHA iPod universal
dock (such as YDS-10 sold separately) where you can station your iPod and control playback of your iPod using the
supplied remote control. Connect a YAMAHA iPod universal dock (such as YDS-10 sold separately) to the DOCK
terminal on the rear panel of this unit using its dedicated cable. Once the connection is complete, station your iPod in the
YAMAHA iPod universal dock.
Do not connect this unit or other components to the AC power supply until all connections between
components are complete.
Only iPod (Click and Wheel), iPod nano, and iPod mini are supported.
You need a YAMAHA iPod universal dock (such as YDS-10 sold separately) and its dedicated cable compatible with the DOCK
terminal of this unit.
Do not connect any iPod accessories (such as headphones, a wired remote control, or an FM transmitter) to your iPod when it is
stationed in a YAMAHA iPod universal dock (such as YDS-10 sold separately).
Once your iPod is stationed in a YAMAHA iPod universal dock (such as YDS-10 sold separately) connected to the DOCK terminal of
this unit, this unit begins the signal transmission with your iPod.
Unless your iPod is firmly stationed in a YAMAHA iPod universal dock (such as YDS-10 sold separately) connected to the DOCK
terminal of this unit, audio and/or video signals may not be output properly.
Once the connection between your iPod and this unit is complete, “iPod connected” appears in the front panel display and the DOCK
indicator lights up in the front panel display. If the connection between your iPod and this unit fails, a status message appears in the
front panel display. For a complete list of connection status messages, see the iPod section in “TROUBLESHOOTING” on page 100.
Only analog audio and video signals of your iPod are input at the DOCK terminal, and the analog audio signals can be output at the
analog AUDIO OUT (REC) jacks for recording.
Your iPod battery is automatically charged when your iPod is stationed in a YAMAHA iPod universal dock (such as YDS-10 sold
separately) connected to the DOCK terminal of this unit as long as this unit is turned on.
Depending on the type of iPod, you may need to insert one of the iPod adapters supplied with a YAMAHA iPod universal dock (such
as YDS-10 sold separately) into the dock slot before you station your iPod.
Connecting a YAMAHA iPod universal dock
Notes
CAUTION
DOCK
YAMAHA iPod universal dock
(such as YDS-10 sold separately)
iPod
23 En
CONNECTIONS
PREPARATION
English
To connect this unit to your network, plug one end of a network cable (CAT-5 or higher straight cable) into the LAN port
of this unit, and plug the other end into one of the LAN ports on your router that supports the DHCP (Dynamic Host
Configuration Protocol) server function. The following diagram shows a connection example where this unit is connected
to one of the LAN ports on a 4-port router. To enjoy music files saved on your PC and YAMAHA MCX-2000 or access
the Internet radio, each device must be connected properly in the network.
If the DHCP server function on your router is disabled, you need to configure the network settings manually (see page 76).
Connecting the network
Note
LAN
LAN
WAN
Router
PC
Modem
YAMAHA MCX-2000
Internet
YAMAHA MCX-C15
YAMAHA MCX-A10
(with optional
speakers)
Network cable
24 En
CONNECTIONS
This unit is equipped with 6 additional input jacks
(FRONT L/R, CENTER, SURROUND L/R and
SUBWOOFER) for discrete multi-channel input from a
multi-format player, external decoder or sound processor.
Connect the output jacks on your multi-format player,
external decoder or sound processor to the MULTI CH
INPUT jacks. Be sure to match the left and right output
jacks to the left and right input jacks for the front and
surround channels.
Do not connect this unit or other components to
the AC power supply until all connections
between components are complete.
When you select the component connected to the MULTI CH
INPUT jacks as the input source (see page 38), this unit
automatically turns off the digital sound field processor, and
you cannot select sound field programs.
This unit does not redirect signals input at the MULTI CH
INPUT jacks to accommodate for missing speakers. We
recommend that you connect at least a 5.1-channel speaker
system before using this feature.
When headphones are used, only the signals input at the
FRONT L/R jacks are output at the PHONES jack.
Use the VIDEO AUX jacks on the front panel to connect a
game console, a video camera or a portable audio player to
this unit.
Be sure to turn off the volume of this unit and
other components before making connections.
The audio signals input at the DOCK terminal takes priority over
the ones input at the VIDEO AUX jacks.
Connecting a multi-format player,
an external decoder or a sound
processor
Notes
CAUTION
SUB
WOOFER
SURROUND
FRONT
CENTER
MULTI CH INPUT
L R L R
Multi-format player,
external decoder or
sound processor
Front out
Surround out
Subwoofer out
Center out
Connecting a game console, a
video camera or a portable audio
player
Note
CAUTION
V
VOLUME
AUTO/MAN'LMAN'L/AUTO FMLEVELNEXTEDIT
EFFECT
MEMORY
FM/AMPRESET/TUNING
A/B/C/D/E
l PROGRAM h
BASS/TREBLE
TUNING MODE
INPUT MODE
TONE CONTROL
STRAIGHT
SPEAKERSPHONES
SILENT CINEMA
STANDBY
/ON
BA
MULTI CH
INPUT
INPUT
l PRESET/TUNING h
VIDEO L AUDIO R
USBVIDEO AUX
VIDEO L AUDIO R
VIDEO AUX
LR
Game console,
video camera or
portable audio player
Audio out
Video out
25 En
CONNECTIONS
PREPARATION
English
Both FM and AM indoor antennas are supplied with this
unit. In general, these antennas should provide sufficient
signal strength. Connect each antenna correctly to the
designated terminals.
The AM loop antenna should be placed away from this unit.
The AM loop antenna should always be connected, even if an
outdoor AM antenna is connected to this unit.
A properly installed outdoor antenna provides clearer reception
than an indoor one. If you experience poor reception quality,
install an outdoor antenna. Consult the nearest authorized
YAMAHA dealer or service center about outdoor antennas.
Connecting the AM loop antenna
1 Set up the AM loop antenna.
2 Press and hold the tab of the AM ANT
terminal.
3 Insert one of the AM loop antenna lead wires
into the AM ANT terminal.
4 Release the tab of the AM ANT terminal back
into place.
5 Repeat steps 2 through 4 to connect the
other lead wire to the GND terminal.
y
Once you have properly connected the AM loop antenna to this
unit, orient the AM loop antenna for the best reception when you
tune into AM stations.
Connecting the FM and AM antennas
Notes
FM ANT
75
UNBAL.
AM
ANT
GND
TUNER
AM loop antenna
(supplied)
Ground (GND terminal)
For maximum safety and
minimum interference,
connect the antenna GND
terminal to a good earth
ground. A good earth ground
is a metal stake driven into
moist earth.
Indoor FM antenna
(supplied)
Outdoor AM antenna
Use a 5 to 10 m of vinyl-covered wire
extended from a window.
26 En
CONNECTIONS
Once all connections are complete, plug the power cable into the AC wall outlet.
AC OUTLET(S) (SWITCHED)
Australia model ..................................................... 1 outlet
Other models .........................................................2 outlets
Use these outlet(s) to supply power to any connected
components. Connect the power cable of your other
components to these outlet(s). Power to these outlet(s) is
supplied when this unit is turned on. However, power to
these outlet(s) is cut off when this unit is set to the standby
mode. For information on the maximum power or the total
power consumption of the components that can be
connected to these outlet(s), see “SPECIFICATIONS” on
page 106.
Connecting the power cable
AC OUTLETS
To the AC wall outlet
(Canada model)
Memory back-up
The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data
from being lost even if this unit is in the standby mode.
However, the stored data will be lost in case the power
cable is disconnected from the AC wall outlet or if the
power supply is cut off for more than one week.
27 En
CONNECTIONS
PREPARATION
English
If you are to use 6 ohm speakers, set “SP IMP.” to
“6MIN” as follows BEFORE using this unit. 4
ohm speakers can be also used as the front
speakers.
1 Make sure this unit is set to the standby
mode.
See page 28 for details about turning on this unit or
setting it to the standby mode.
2 Press and hold STRAIGHT (EFFECT) on the
front panel and then press STANDBY/ON to
turn on this unit.
This unit turns on, and the advanced setup menu
appears in the front panel display.
3 Press PROGRAM l / h on the front panel to
select “SP IMP.”.
The following display appears in the front panel
display.
4 Press STRAIGHT (EFFECT) on the front
panel repeatedly to select “6MIN”.
The following display appears in the front panel
display.
5 Press STANDBY/ON on the front panel to
save the new setting and set this unit to the
standby mode.
The setting you made is reflected next time you turn on this unit.
Setting the speaker impedance
CAUTION
VOLUME
AUTO/MAN'LMAN'L/AUTO FMLEVELNEXTEDIT
EFFECT
MEMORY
FM/AMPRESET/TUNING
A/B/C/D/E
l
PROGRAM
h
BASS/TREBLE
TUNING MODE
INPUT MODE
TONE CONTROL
STRAIGHT
SPEAKERSPHONES
SILENT CINEMA
STANDBY
/ON
BA
MULTI CH
INPUT
INPUT
l
PRESET/TUNING
h
VIDEO L AUDIO R
USBVIDEO AUX
32,4
2,5
EFFECT
STRAIGHT
STANDBY
/ON
While holding
down
Note
l PROGRAM h
SP IMP.-8 MIN
EFFECT
STRAIGHT
SP IMP.-6 MIN
STANDBY
/ON
28 En
CONNECTIONS
When all connections are complete, turn on this unit.
Turning on this unit
Press STANDBY/ON on the front panel (or
POWER on the remote control) to turn on this
unit.
Setting this unit to the standby mode
Press STANDBY/ON on the front panel (or
STANDBY on the remote control) to set this unit
to the standby mode.
Turning on and off the power
VOLUME
AUTO/MAN'LMAN'L/AUTO FMLEVELNEXTEDIT
EFFECT
MEMORY
FM/AMPRESET/TUNING
A/B/C/D/E
l
PROGRAM
h
BASS/TREBLE
TUNING MODE
INPUT MODE
TONE CONTROL
STRAIGHT
SPEAKERSPHONES
SILENT CINEMA
STANDBY
/ON
BA
MULTI CH
INPUT
INPUT
l
PRESET/TUNING
h
VIDEO L AUDIO R
USBVIDEO AUX
AMP
SOURCE
TV
VOLUME
TV VOL TV CH
TRANSMITCODE SET
STANDBY
POWER
POWERPOWER
CD
AVTV
MULTI CH IN
SLEEP
CD-R
DVD DTV
MD
DOCK USB
CBL
NET
TUNER
V-AU X D VR
STANDBY/ON
STANDBY
POWER
STANDBY
/ON
POWER
Front panel
or
Remote control
STANDBY
/ON
STANDBY
Front panel
or
Remote control
BASIC SETUP
29 En
PREPARATION
English
The “BASIC SETUP” feature is a useful way to set up your system quickly and with minimal effort.
Make sure you disconnect your headphones from this unit.
If you wish to configure this unit manually using more precise adjustments, use the detailed parameters in “SOUND MENU” (see
page 69).
Altering any parameters in “BASIC SETUP” resets all parameters manually adjusted in “SOUND MENU” (see page 69).
Initial settings are indicated in bold under each parameter.
Press RETURN on the remote control to return to the previous menu level.
1 Set the component selector switch to AMP.
2 Press SET MENU to enter “SET MENU”.
The top “SET MENU” display appears in the OSD.
3 Press u / d to select “BASIC SETUP”.
4 Press ENTER to enter “BASIC SETUP”.
The following display appears in the OSD.
5 Press u / d to select “ROOM” and then j / i
to select the desired setting.
Select the size of the room where you have installed
your speakers. In general, the room sizes are defined
as follows:
Choices: S, M, L
[Canada model]
S (small) 16 x 13ft, 200ft
2
(4.8 x 4.0m, 20m
2
)
M (medium) 20 x 16ft, 300ft
2
(6.3 x 5.0m, 30m
2
)
L (large) 26 x 19ft, 450ft
2
(7.9 x 5.8m, 45m
2
)
[Other models]
S (small) 3.6 x 2.8m, 10m
2
M (medium) 4.8 x 4.0m, 20m
2
L (large) 6.3 x 5.0m, 30m
2
BASIC SETUP
Notes
AMP
SOURCE
TV
VOLUME
TV VOL TV CH
TRANSMITCODE SET
STANDBY
POWER
POWERPOWER
CD
AVTV
MULTI CH IN
SLEEP
CD-R
DVD DTV
MD
DOCK USB
CBL
NET
TUNER
V-AU X D VR
MENUTITLE
SET MENU
LEVEL
DISPLAYRETURN
BAND
SRCH MODE
ON SCREENDAB MEMORY
A/B/C/D/E
ENTER
PRESET/CH
REC
AUDI O
STEREO
1
EFFECT
STANDARD
5
SPEAKERS
9
MUSIC
2
SELECT
6
ENHANCER
0
ENTERTAIN
3
EXTD SUR.
7
NIGHT
10
MOVIE
4
DIRECT ST.
8
STRAIGHT
ENT.
1
3-12
2,13
AMP
SOURCE
TV
MENU
SET MENU
SRCH MODE

SET MENU
.;BASICSETUP
;MANUALSETUP
.;SIGNAL INFO
[ ]/[]:Up/Down
[ENTER]:Enter
p
p
A/B/C/D/E
ENTER
PRESET/CH
;BASIC SETUP
.ROOM: S >M L
SUBWOOFER;;;;YES
SPEAKERS;;;;6spk
SETUP:>OK CANCEL
[]/[]:Up/Down
[<]/[>]:Select
p
p
A/B/C/D/E
ENTER
PRESET/CH
;BASIC SETUP
.ROOM: S >M L
SUBWOOFER;;;;YES
SPEAKERS;;;;6spk
SETUP:>OK CANCEL
[]/[]:Up/Down
[<]/[>]:Select
p
p
A/B/C/D/E
ENTER
PRESET/CH
30 En
BASIC SETUP
6 Press d to select “SUBWOOFER” and then
j / i to select the desired setting.
Choices: YES, NONE
Select “YES” if you have a subwoofer in your
system.
Select “NONE” if you do not have a subwoofer in
your system.
7 Press d to select “SPEAKERS” and then j / i
to select the number of speakers connected
to this unit.
8 Press d to select “SETUP” and then j / i to
select the desired setting.
Choices: OK, CANCEL
Select “OK” to apply the settings you made.
Select “CANCEL” to cancel the setup procedure
without making any changes.
y
You can also press SET MENU to cancel the setup
procedure.
9 Press ENTER to confirm your selection.
If you selected “OK” in step 8, each speaker outputs a
test tone twice in turn. “CHECK:Test Tone” appears
in the OSD for a few seconds and then “CHECK
OK?” appears in the OSD.
y
Check the speaker connections (see page 13) and adjust the
“SPEAKERS” settings back in step 7, if necessary.
Choice Display Speakers
2spk
Front L/R
3spk
Front L/R, Center
4spk
Front L/R, Surround L/R
5spk
Front L/R, Center, Surround L/R
6spk
Front L/R, Center, Surround L/R,
Surround back
A/B/C/D/E
ENTER
PRESET/CH
;BASIC SETUP
ROOM: S >M L
.SUBWOOFER;;;;YES
SPEAKERS;;;;6spk
SETUP:>OK CANCEL
[]/[]:Up/Down
[<]/[>]:Select
p
p
A/B/C/D/E
ENTER
PRESET/CH
;BASIC SETUP
ROOM: S >M L
SUBWOOFER;;;;YES
.SPEAKERS;;;;6spk
SETUP:>OK CANCEL
[]/[]:Up/Down
[<]/[>]:Select
p
p
LL C R
SL SB SR
LL C R
SL SB SR
LL CR
SL SB SR
LL C R
SL SB SR
LL C R
SL SB
SB
SR
LL C R
SL SB SR
A/B/C/D/E
ENTER
PRESET/CH
;BASIC SETUP
ROOM: S >M L
SUBWOOFER;;;;YES
SPEAKERS;;;;6spk
. SETUP:>OK CANCEL
[]/[]:Up/Down
[<]/[>]:Select
p
p
A/B/C/D/E
ENTER
PRESET/CH
;BASIC SETUP
ROOM: S >M L
SUBWOOFER;;;;YES
SPEAKERS;;;;6spk
SETUP:>OK CANCEL
.CHECK:Test Tone
[<]/[>]:Select
;BASIC SETUP
ROOM: S >M L
SUBWOOFER;;;;YES
SPEAKERS;;;;6spk
SETUP:>OK CANCEL
.CHECK OK?;;;;YES
[<]/[>]:Select
31 En
BASIC SETUP
PREPARATION
English
10 Press j / i to select the desired setting.
Choices: YES, NO
Select “YES” to complete the setup procedure if
the test tone levels from each speaker were
satisfactory.
Select “NO” to proceed to the speaker level
adjustment menu in step 12 to balance the output
level of each speaker.
11 Press ENTER to confirm your selection.
If you selected “YES” in step 10, the setup
procedure is completed and the display returns to
the top “SET MENU” display.
If you selected “NO” in step 10, the speaker level
adjustment display appears in the front panel
display.
12 Press u / d to select a speaker and then j / i
to adjust the balance.
The selected speaker and the front left speaker (or the
surround left speaker) output a test tone in turn.
•Press i to increase the value.
•Press j to decrease the value.
Select “FR” to adjust the balance between the front
left and right speakers.
Select “C” to adjust the balance between the front
left and center speakers.
Select “SL” to adjust the balance between the front
left and surround left speakers.
Select “SB” to adjust the balance between the
surround left and surround back speakers.
Select “SR” to adjust the balance between the
surround left and surround right speakers.
Select “SWFR” to adjust the balance between the
front left speaker and the subwoofer.
13 Press SET MENU to exit from “BASIC
SETUP”.
;BASIC SETUP
ROOM: S >M L
SUBWOOFER;;;;YES
SPEAKERS;;;;6spk
SETUP:>OK CANCEL
.CHECK OK?;;;;YES
[<]/[>]:Select
A/B/C/D/E
ENTER
PRESET/CH
A/B/C/D/E
ENTER
PRESET/CH
A/B/C/D/E
ENTER
PRESET/CH

.FR;;;;;;;;;;
 C;;;;;;;;;;
SL;;;;;;;;;;
;BASIC SETUP
-__________+
MENU
SET MENU
SRCH MODE
PLAYBACK
32 En
Extreme caution should be exercised when you play back CDs encoded in DTS. If you play back a CD
encoded in DTS on a DTS-incompatible CD player, you will only hear some unwanted noise that may
damage your speakers. Check whether your CD player supports CDs encoded in DTS. Also, check the
sound output level of your CD player before you play back a CD encoded in DTS.
1 Turn on the video monitor connected to this
unit.
2 Press SPEAKERS A or B on the front panel
(or set the component selector switch to
AMP and then press SPEAKERS on the
remote control repeatedly) to turn on the set
of front speakers you want to use.
Each time you press SPEAKERS A or B, the
respective set of front speakers are turned on or off.
3 Rotate the INPUT selector on the front panel
(or press one of the input selector buttons on
the remote control) to select the desired
input source.
The name of the currently selected input source
appears in the front panel display and in the OSD for
a few seconds.
To enjoy multi-channel sources in surround, connect the
source component via digital connection and set the input
mode to “AUTO” or “DTS” (see page 35).
See pages 42 for details about surround sound.
4 Start playback on the selected source
component or select a broadcast station.
Refer to the operating instructions for the source
component.
See page 46 for details about tuning instructions.
PLAYBACK
CAUTION
VOLUME
AUTO/MAN'LMAN'L/AUTO FMLEVELNEXTEDIT
EFFECT
MEMORY
FM/AMPRESET/TUNING
A/B/C/D/E
l
PROGRAM
h
BASS/TREBLE
TUNING MODE
INPUT MODE
TONE CONTROL
STRAIGHT
SPEAKERSPHONES
SILENT CINEMA
STANDBY
/ON
BA
MULTI CH
INPUT
INPUT
l
PRESET/TUNING
h
VIDEO L AUDIO R
USBVIDEO AUX
766 32
5
TV MUTE TV INPUT
MUTE
AMP
SOURCE
TV
VOLUME
TV VOL TV CH
TRANSMITCODE SET
STANDBY
POWER
POWERPOWER
CD
AVTV
MULTI CH IN
SLEEP
CD-R
DVD DTV
MD
DOCK USB
CBL
NET
TUNER
V-AU X D VR
TV MUTE TV INPUT
MUTE
MENUTITLE
SET MENU
LEVEL
DISPLAYRETURN
BAND
SRCH MODE
ON SCREENDAB MEMORY
A/B/C/D/E
ENTER
PRESET/CH
REC
AUDIO
DISC SKIP
STEREO
1
EFFECT
STANDARD
5
SPEAKERS
9
MUSIC
2
SELECT
6
ENHANCER
0
ENTERTAIN
3
EXTD SUR.
7
NIGHT
10
MOVIE
4
DIRECT ST.
8
STRAIGHT
ENT.
7
5
2
3
2
SPEAKERS
BA
SPEAKERS
9
AMP
SOURCE
TV
Front panel
Remote control
or
Notes
CD
MULTI CH IN
SLEEP
CD-R
DVD DTV
MD
DOCK USB
CBL
NET
TUNER
V-AUX DVR
INPUT
Front panel Remote control
or
DVR
p
DVD CD
V-AUX DTV/CBL
MD/CD-R
TUNER
NET
USB
VOLUME
A
SP
dB
LR
DVD AUTO
Currently selected
input source
Currently selected
input mode
Available input sources
33 En
PLAYBACK
BASIC
OPERATION
English
5 Rotate VOLUME on the front panel (or press
VOLUME +/– on the remote control) to adjust
the volume to the desired output level.
6 Press TONE CONTROL on the front panel
repeatedly to select “TREBLE” or “BASS”
and then press BASS/TREBLE +/– repeatedly
to adjust the corresponding frequency
response level.
Select “TREBLE” to adjust the high-frequency
response.
Select “BASS” to adjust the low-frequency
response.
Speaker and headphone adjustments are stored
independently.
When “TONE BYPASS” is set to “AUTO” (see page 73),
and “BASS” and “TREBLE” are set to 0 dB, audio output
automatically bypasses the tone control circuitry of this
unit.
If you increase or decrease the high-frequency or low-
frequency sound to an extreme level, the tonal quality of
the front speakers may not match that of the other
speakers.
TONE CONTROL is not effective when the “DIRECT
STEREO” mode (see page 39) is selected or when the
component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks is
selected as the input source (see page 38).
7 Press PROGRAM l / h on the front panel (or
press one of the sound field program
selector buttons on the remote control)
repeatedly to select the desired sound field
program.
The name of the selected sound field program appears
in the front panel display and in the OSD.
See page 58 for details about sound field programs.
Choose a sound field program based on your listening
preference, not merely on the name of the program.
When you select an input source, this unit automatically
selects the last sound field program used with the
corresponding input source.
Sound field programs cannot be selected when the
component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks is
selected as the input source (see page 38).
Sampling frequencies higher than 48 kHz (except for DTS
96/24 signals) are sampled down to 48 kHz and then sound
field programs are applied.
To display information about the currently selected input
source in the OSD, see page 40 for details.
Notes
VOLUME
VOLUME
or
Remote control
Front panel
TONE CONTROL
l PROGRAM h
DVR
p
DVD CD
V-AUX DTV/CBL
MD/CD-R
TUNER
NET
USB
VOLUME
A
SP
dB
LR
TREBLE 0dB
Notes
l PROGRAM h
STEREO
1
EFFECT
STANDARD
5
SPEAKERS
9
MUSIC
2
SELECT
6
ENHANCER
0
ENTERTAIN
3
EXTD SUR.
7
NIGHT
10
MOVIE
4
DIRECT ST.
8
STRAIGHT
ENT.
Front panel
or
Remote control
DVR
p
DVD CD
V-AUX DTV/CBL
MD/CD-R
TUNER
NET
USB
VOLUME
A
SP
dB
LR
TV Sports
Currently selected
sound field program
USING AUDIO FEATURES
34 En
SILENT CINEMA allows you to enjoy multi-channel
music or movie sound, including Dolby Digital and DTS
sources, through ordinary headphones. SILENT CINEMA
activates automatically whenever you connect headphones
to the PHONES jack while listening to a source with a
CINEMA DSP or HiFi DSP sound field program (see
page 58). When activated, the SILENT CINEMA
indicator lights up in the front panel display.
SILENT CINEMA does not activate when the component
connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks is selected as the
input source (see page 38).
SILENT CINEMA is not effective when the “DIRECT
STEREO” (see page 39), “2ch Stereo” (see page 39) or
“STRAIGHT” mode (see page 39) is selected.
Press MUTE on the remote control to mute the
audio output. Press MUTE again to resume the
audio output.
y
You can also rotate VOLUME on the front panel or VOLUME
+/– on the remote control to resume the audio output.
You can adjust the muting level by using the “MUTING TYPE”
parameter in “SOUND MENU” (see page 73).
The MUTE indicator flashes in the front panel display when the
audio output is muted and disappears from the front panel
display when the audio output is resumed.
If you change the input source or the sound field program with the
remote control while the audio output is being muted, this unit
resumes the audio output.
The night listening modes are designed to improve
listenability at lower volumes or at night. Choose either
“NIGHT:CINEMA” or “NIGHT:MUSIC” depending on
the type of material you are playing.
1 Set the component selector switch to AMP
and then press NIGHT on the remote control
repeatedly to select “NIGHT:CINEMA” or
“NIGHT:MUSIC”.
Choices: NIGHT:CINEMA, NIGHT:MUSIC, OFF
Select “NIGHT:CINEMA” when watching films to
reduce the dynamic range of film soundtracks and
make dialog easier to hear at lower volumes.
Select “NIGHT:MUSIC” when listening to music
sources to preserve ease-of-listening for all sounds.
Select “OFF” if you do not want to use this feature.
y
When a night listening mode is selected, the NIGHT
indicator lights up in the front panel display.
2 Press j / i on the remote control to adjust the
effect level while “NIGHT:CINEMA” or
“NIGHT:MUSIC” is displayed in the front
panel display.
Choices: MIN, MID, MAX
Select “MIN” for minimum compression.
Select “MID” for standard compression.
Select “MAX” for maximum compression.
USING AUDIO FEATURES
Using SILENT CINEMA
Notes
Muting the audio output
Note
MUTE
Selecting the night listening mode
NIGHT
10
AMP
SOURCE
TV
A/B/C/D/E
ENTER
PRESET/CH
Remote control
Effect.Lvl:MID
35 En
USING AUDIO FEATURES
BASIC
OPERATION
English
y
“NIGHT:CINEMA” and “NIGHT:MUSIC” adjustments are
stored independently.
You cannot use the night listening modes in the following
cases:
when the “DIRECT STEREO” mode (see page 39) is
selected.
when the component connected to the MULTI CH
INPUT jacks is selected as the input source (see
page 38).
when headphones are connected to the PHONES jack.
The effectiveness of the night listening modes may vary
depending on the input source and surround sound settings
you use.
This unit comes with a variety of input jacks. Do the
following to select the type of input signals you want to
use.
y
We recommend setting “INPUT MODE” to “AUTO” in most
cases.
You can adjust the default input mode of this unit by using the
“INPUT MODE” parameter in “INPUT MENU” (see page 75).
To play DTS-encoded CDs when using a digital audio
connection, be sure to set “INPUT MODE” to “DTS”.
DTS decoding may not be performed correctly depending on
the player even if you make a digital connection between this
unit and the player.
1 Rotate the INPUT selector on the front panel
to select the desired input source.
2 Press INPUT MODE on the front panel
repeatedly to select the desired input mode.
AUTO Automatically selects input signals in
the following order:
(1) Digital signals
(2) Analog signals
DTS Selects only digital signals encoded in
DTS. If no DTS signals are input, no
sound is output.
ANALOG Selects only analog signals. If no
analog signals are input, no sound is
output.
When “INPUT MODE” is set to “AUTO”, this unit
automatically switches to the appropriate decoder if a Dolby
Digital or DTS signal is detected.
Use this feature to automatically set this unit to the
standby mode after a certain amount of time. The sleep
timer is useful when you are going to sleep while this unit
is playing or recording a source. The sleep timer also
automatically turns off any external components
connected to AC OUTLET(S) (see page 26).
1 Press one of the input selector buttons on
the remote control to select the desired input
source.
2 Start playback on the selected source
component or select a broadcast station.
Refer to the operating instructions for the source
component.
See page 46 for details about tuning instructions.
Notes
Selecting the input mode
Notes
INPUT
INPUT MODE
DVR
p
DVD CD
V-AUX DTV/CBL
MD/CD-R
TUNER
NET
USB
VOLUME
A
SP
dB
LR
DVD AUTO
Currently selected
input source
Currently selected
input mode
Available input sources
Note
Using the sleep timer
CD
MULTI CH IN
SLEEP
CD-R
DVD DTV
MD
DOCK USB
CBL
NET
TUNER
V-AUX DVR
36 En
USING AUDIO FEATURES
3 Press SLEEP on the remote control
repeatedly to set the amount of time.
Each time you press SLEEP, the front panel display
changes as shown below.
The SLEEP indicator flashes while you are switching
the amount of time for the sleep timer. Once the sleep
timer is set, the SLEEP indicator lights up in the front
panel display, and the display returns to the selected
sound field program.
4 To cancel the sleep timer, press SLEEP on
the remote control repeatedly until “SLEEP
OFF” appears in the front panel display.
The SLEEP indicator turns off, and “SLEEP OFF”
disappears from the front panel display after a few
seconds.
y
The sleep timer setting can also be canceled by pressing
STANDBY/ON on the front panel (or STANDBY on the
remote control) to set this unit to the standby mode.
You can adjust the output level of each speaker while
listening to a music source. This is also possible when
playing sources input at the MULTI CH INPUT jacks.
This operation will override the level adjustments made in
“BASIC SETUP” (see page 29) and “SPEAKER LEVEL” (see
page 71).
1 Set the component selector switch to AMP
and then press LEVEL on the remote control
repeatedly to select the speaker you want to
adjust.
Select “FRONT L” to adjust the front left speaker
output level.
Select “CENTER” to adjust the center speaker
output level.
Select “FRONT R” to adjust the front right speaker
output level.
Select “SUR. R” to adjust the surround right
speaker output level.
Select “SUR. B” to adjust the surround back
speaker output level.
Select “SUR. L” to adjust the surround left speaker
output level.
Select “SWFR” to adjust the subwoofer output
level.
y
Once you press LEVEL on the remote control, you can also
select the speaker by pressing u / d.
SLEEP
SLEEP 90min
SLEEP 60minSLEEP 30minSLEEP OFF
SLEEP 120min
DVR DVD
p
CD
V-AUX DTV/CBL
MD/CD-R
TUNER
NET
USB
VOLUME
SLEEP
A
SP
dB
LR
SLEEP 120min
Flashes
DVR DVD
p
CD
V-AUX DTV/CBL
MD/CD-R
TUNER
NET
USB
VOLUME
SLEEP
A
SP
dB
LR
STRAIGHT
Lights up
SLEEP
DVR DVD
p
CD
V-AUX DTV/CBL
MD/CD-R
TUNER
NET
USB
VOLUME
A
SP
dB
LR
SLEEP OFF
Adjusting the speaker level
Note
TV MUTE TV INPUT
MUTE
AMP
SOURCE
TV
MENUTITLE
SET MENU
LEVEL
DISPLAYRETURN
BAND
SRCH MODE
ON SCREENDAB MEMORY
A/B/C/D/E
ENTER
PRESET/CH
REC
AUDIO
DISC SKIP
STEREO
1
EFFECT
VOLUME
TV VOL TV CH
STANDARD
5
SPEAKERS
9
MUSIC
2
SELECT
6
ENHANCER
0
ENTERTAIN
3
EXTD SUR.
7
NIGHT
10
MOVIE
4
DIRECT ST.
8
STRAIGHT
ENT.
2
3
1
1
AMP
SOURCE
TV
TITLE
LEVEL
BAND
37 En
USING AUDIO FEATURES
BASIC
OPERATION
English
2 Press j / i on the remote control to adjust the
speaker output level.
Press i to increase the value.
Press j to decrease the value.
Control range: –10 dB to +10 dB
y
This operation can also be performed using the control buttons on
the front panel. Press NEXT on the front panel repeatedly to
select the speaker channel whose output level you want to adjust
and then press LEVEL +/– on the front panel to adjust the output
level.
Compression artifacts (such as the MP3 format) are
created by a lossy compression scheme where the audio is
resampled to lower the bitrate and to remove sounds that
are indistinguishable to typical human hearing. The
Compressed Music Enhancer feature of this unit enhances
your listening experience by regenerating the missing
harmonics in a compression artifact. As a result, flattened
complexity due to the loss of high-frequency fidelity as
well as lack of bass due to the loss of low-frequency bass
is compensated, providing the improved performance of
the overall sound system.
The Compressed Music Enhancer mode is compatible with the
PCM signals (48 kHz), the analog 2-channel input sources and
the music data input at the USB port or the LAN port.
The Compressed Music Enhancer mode is not effective with
any of the sound field programs.
When the Compressed Music Enhancer mode is turned on while
an incompatible input source is being played back, “Not
Available” appears in the front panel display and in the OSD.
When the input source is changed to an incompatible input
source while the Compressed Music Enhancer mode is turned
on, the Compressed Music Enhancer mode is automatically
turned off and the incompatible input source is played back in
2-channel or 6-channel stereo.
y
The ENHANCER indicator lights up in the front panel display
when one of the Compressed Music Enhancer modes is selected.
A/B/C/D/E
ENTER
PRESET/CH
Selecting the Compressed Music
Enhancer mode
Notes
38 En
USING AUDIO FEATURES
1 Set the component selector switch to AMP
and then press ENHANCER on the remote
control repeatedly to select the desired
Compressed Music Enhancer mode.
The following display appears in the OSD and the
ENHANCER indicator lights up in the front panel
display.
Choices: 2ch Enhancer, 6ch Enhancer,
Off (previously selected sound field
program)
Select “2ch Enhancer” to play back compression
artifacts in 2-channel stereo.
Select “6ch Enhancer” to play back compression
artifacts in 6-channel stereo.
Select Off (previously selected sound field
program) to turn off the Compressed Music
Enhancer mode.
y
You can also switch between “2ch Enhancer” and “6ch
Enhancer” by pressing j / i on the remote control when the
arrow is located on the left of “2ch Enhancer” or “6ch
Enhancer” in the OSD.
2 Press d once and then j / i on the remote
control to select the desired effect level.
Choices: HIGH, LOW
Select “HIGH” for a high effect level.
Select “LOW” for a low effect level.
Set the effect level to “HIGH” or “LOW” according to the
characteristics of a source. The high-frequency signals of
some sources may be emphasized too much. In this case, set
the effect level to “LOW”.
Use this feature to select the component connected to the
MULTI CH INPUT jacks (see page 24) as the input
source.
Press MULTI CH INPUT on the front panel (or
MULTI CH IN on the remote control) so that
“MULTI CH INPUT” appears in the front panel
display.
When “MULTI CH INPUT” is shown in the front panel display,
no other source can be played. To select another input source with
the INPUT selector on the front panel (or one of the input selector
buttons), press MULTI CH INPUT (or MULTI CH IN on the
remote control) so that “MULTI CH INPUT” disappears from the
front panel display.
Note
ENHANCER
0
MUSIC ENHANCER
. 2ch Enhancer
LOW >HIGH
ENHANCER
AMP
SOURCE
TV
Lights up
A/B/C/D/E
ENTER
PRESET/CH
MUSIC ENHANCER
2ch Enhancer
. LOW >HIGH
Selecting the MULTI CH INPUT
component
Note
MULTI CH
INPUT
MULTI CH IN
Front panel
Remote control
or
MULTI CH INPUT
39 En
USING AUDIO FEATURES
BASIC
OPERATION
English
You can mix down multi-channel sources to 2 channels
and enjoy playback in 2-channel stereo.
Set the component selector switch to AMP and
then press STEREO on the remote control
repeatedly to select “2ch Stereo”.
y
You can use a subwoofer with this program when “LFE/BASS
OUT” is set to “SWFR” or “BOTH” (see page 70).
You can also select the “2ch Stereo” mode by pressing
PROGRAM l / h on the front panel repeatedly.
When this unit is in the “STRAIGHT” mode, 2-channel
stereo sources are output from only the front left and right
speakers. Multi-channel sources are decoded straight into
the appropriate channels without any additional effect
processing.
1 Set the component selector switch to AMP
and then press STRAIGHT on the remote
control to select “STRAIGHT”.
2 To deactivate the “STRAIGHT” mode, press
STRAIGHT on the remote control again so
that “STRAIGHT” disappears from the front
panel display.
The sound effect is turned back on.
y
You can also select the “STRAIGHT” mode by pressing
STRAIGHT (EFFECT) on the front panel.
The “DIRECT STEREO” mode allows sources to bypass
the decoders and DSP processors of this unit so that you
can enjoy pure hi-fi sound from 2-channel PCM and
analog sources.
Set the component selector switch to AMP and
then press DIRECT ST. on the remote control to
select “DIRECT STEREO”.
To avoid unexpected noise, do not play CDs encoded in DTS
when the “DIRECT STEREO” mode is selected.
When multi-channel signals (Dolby Digital and DTS) are input,
this unit automatically switches to the corresponding analog
input. When “DTS” is selected as the input mode (see page 35),
no sound will be output.
No sound will be output from the subwoofer.
“TONE CONTROL” (see page 33) and “SOUND MENU” (see
page 69) settings (except for speaker level settings) are not
effective.
The front panel display automatically dims.
y
You can also select the “DIRECT STEREO” mode by pressing
PROGRAM l / h on the front panel repeatedly.
Enjoying multi-channel sources in
2-channel stereo
Enjoying unprocessed input
sources
STEREO
1
AMP
SOURCE
TV
2ch Stereo
EFFECT
STRAIGHT
ENT.
AMP
SOURCE
TV
STRAIGHT
Enjoying pure hi-fi stereo sound
Notes
AMP
SOURCE
TV
DIRECT ST.
8
DIRECT STEREO
USING VIDEO FEATURES
40 En
You can display the format, sampling frequency, channel,
bit rate and flag data of the current input signal.
1 Set the component selector switch to AMP
and then press SET MENU on the remote
control.
The top “SET MENU” display appears in the OSD.
2 Press d repeatedly to select “SIGNAL INFO”
and then press ENTER.
The following information about the input source
appears in the OSD.
Signal format FORMAT
Signal format display. When this unit cannot detect a
digital signal, it automatically switches to analog
input.
Display status: Analog, Digital, DolbyD, DTS, MP3,
PCM, WMA, ---
“---” appears when this unit cannot detect any signals.
Sampling frequency SAMPLING
The number of samples per second taken from a
continuous signal to make a discrete signal.
Display status: 8kHz, 11kHz, 12kHz, 16kHz,
22.05kHz, 24kHz, 32kHz, 44.1kHz,
48kHz, 64kHz, 88.2kHz, 96kHz, ---
“---” appears when this unit cannot detect the sampling
frequency.
Channel CHANNEL
The number of source channels in the input signal
(front/surround/LFE). For example, a multi-channel
soundtrack with 3 front channels, 2 surround
channels and LFE, is displayed as “3/2/0.1”.
“---” appears when there is no source channel available.
Bit rate BITRATE
The number of bits passing a given point per second.
“---” appears when this unit cannot detect the bit rate.
Flag FLAG
Flag data encoded in DTS, Dolby Digital, or PCM
signals that cue this unit to automatically switch
decoders.
3 Press SET MENU on the remote control again
to exit from “SET MENU”.
USING VIDEO FEATURES
Displaying the input source
information

SET MENU
.;BASICSETUP
;MANUALSETUP
.;SIGNAL INFO
[ ]/[]:Up/Down
[ENTER]:Enter
p
p
AMP
SOURCE
TV
MENU
SET MENU
SRCH MODE
;SIGNAL INFO
FORMAT PCM
SAMPLING 48kHz
CHANNEL 2/0/---
BITRATE ---
FLAG NONE
 [RETURN]:Exit

A/B/C/D/E
ENTER
PRESET/CH
A/B/C/D/E
ENTER
PRESET/CH
Note
Note
Note
Note
MENU
SET MENU
SRCH MODE
41 En
USING VIDEO FEATURES
BASIC
OPERATION
English
You can display the operating information of this unit on a
video monitor. If you display the “SET MENU” and sound
field program parameter settings on a video monitor, it is
much easier to see the available options and parameters
than it is to read the information in the front panel display.
1 Turn on the video monitor connected to this
unit.
2 Set the component selector switch to AMP
and then press DISPLAY on the remote
control repeatedly to toggle between the
OSD modes.
The OSD mode changes in the following order.
Full display
Fully shows the sound field program parameter
settings as well as the contents of the front panel
display.
Short display
Briefly shows the contents of the front panel display
at the bottom of the screen each time you operate this
unit.
Display off
No information is displayed except for the “SET
MENU” screen.
y
You can display a gray background in the OSD when there is not
video signal being input by setting “GRAY BACK” in “OPTION
MENU” to “AUTO” (see page 79).
The OSD signal is not output at the DVR OUT jacks and will
not be recorded.
You must set “VIDEO CONV.” in “OPTION MENU” to “ON”
(see page 78) to display the OSD.
To display the OSD with the component video signals output at
the COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT jacks, set the
OSD mode to the full display mode.
When “GRAY BACK” in “OPTION MENU” is set to “OFF”
(see page 79), the OSD may not be displayed correctly
depending on the conditions of the picture.
You can combine a video image from a video source with
sound from an audio source. For example, you can enjoy
listening to classical music while viewing beautiful
scenery from the video source on the video monitor.
Press the input selector buttons on the remote
control to select a video source and then an
audio source.
y
If you want to enjoy an audio source input at the MULTI CH
INPUT jacks together with a video source, first select the video
source and then press MULTI CH INPUT on the front panel (or
MULTI CH IN on the remote control) to select the component
connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks as the input source
(see page 38).
Selecting the OSD mode
DISPLAY
ON SCREEN
AMP
SOURCE
TV
Full display
Short display
Display off
P02 MUSIC
. Pop/Rock
DSP LEVEL;;;;0dB
P.INIT.DLY;;21ms
P.ROOM SIZE;;1.0
S.INIT.DLY;;25ms
S.ROOM SIZE;;1.0
P02 MUSIC
Pop/Rock
Full display Short display
Notes
Playing video sources in the
background
MULTI CH IN
SLEEP
CD CD-R
DVD DTV
MD
DOCK USB
CBL
TUNER
V-AUX
DVR
CD CD-R
DVD DTV
MD
CBL
NET
TUNER
V-AUX DVR
Audio sources
Video sources
ENJOYING SURROUND SOUND
42 En
If you connected a surround back speaker, use this feature
to enjoy 6.1-channel playback for multi-channel sources
using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx, Dolby Digital EX or
DTS-ES decoders.
1 Set the component selector switch to AMP
and then press EXTD SUR. on the remote
control repeatedly to switch between 5.1 and
6.1-channel playback.
2 Press j / i repeatedly to select a decoder
while “PLIIxMusic” (etc.) is displayed.
Auto AUTO
When a signal flag that can be recognized by this unit is
input, this unit selects the optimum decoder to play back
the signal in 6.1 channels.
If this unit cannot recognize the flag or no flag is present
in the input signal, it cannot automatically be played in 6.1
channels.
Decoders
You can select from the following decoders depending on
the format of the source you are playing.
Off OFF
Decoders are not used to create 6.1 channels.
Some 6.1-channel compatible discs do not have a signal flag
that can be automatically detected by this unit. When playing
these kinds of discs in 6.1 channels, select a decoder manually
from “PLIIxMusic”, “EX/ES” or “EX”.
6.1-channel playback is not possible even if you press EXTD
SUR. in the following cases:
when “CENTER SP” (see page 70), “SUR. L/R SP” (see
page 70) or “SUR. B SP” (see page 70) is set to “NONE”.
when the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT
jacks is being played.
when the source being played does not contain surround left
and right channel signals.
when a Dolby Digital KARAOKE source is being played.
when the “2ch Stereo” (see page 39) or “DIRECT STEREO”
(see page 39) mode is selected.
When this unit is set to the standby mode, this setting will be
reset to “AUTO”.
The Pro Logic IIx decoder is not available when “SUR. B SP” is
set to “NONE” (see page 70).
ENJOYING SURROUND SOUND
Enjoying multi-channel sources in
6.1-channel surround
EXTD SUR.
7
AMP
SOURCE
TV
A/B/C/D/E
ENTER
PRESET/CH
Decoder Functions
PLIIxMusic
Plays back Dolby Digital or DTS signals
in 6.1 channels using the Pro Logic IIx
music decoder.
EX/ES
Plays back Dolby Digital or DTS signals
in 6.1 channels using the Dolby Digital
EX or DTS-ES decoder.
EX
Plays back Dolby Digital or DTS signals
in 6.1 channels using the Dolby Digital
EX decoder.
Notes
43 En
ENJOYING SURROUND SOUND
BASIC
OPERATION
English
Signals input from 2-channel sources can also be played
back on multi-channels.
1 Set the component selector switch to AMP
and then press STANDARD on the remote
control repeatedly to switch between the
“SUR. STANDARD” and “SUR. ENHANCED”
programs or press MOVIE to select the
“MOVIE THEATER” program.
2 Press SELECT on the remote control
repeatedly to select the desired decoder.
You can select from the following modes depending
on the type of source you are playing and your
personal preference.
y
You can also select a decoder by pressing j / i on the remote
control while the decoder type is displayed in the front panel
display.
The Pro Logic IIx decoder is not available when “SUR. B SP” is
set to “NONE” (see page 70).
Enjoying 2-channel sources in
surround
AMP
SOURCE
TV
STANDARD
5
MOVIE
4
or
SELECT
6
SUR. STANDARD Functions
PRO LOGIC
Dolby Pro Logic processing for any
sources
PLII Movie
Dolby Pro Logic II processing for
movie sources
PLII Music
Dolby Pro Logic II processing for
music sources
PLII Game
Dolby Pro Logic II processing for
game sources
PLIIx Movie
Dolby Pro Logic IIx processing for
movie sources
PLIIx Music
Dolby Pro Logic IIx processing for
music sources
PLIIx Game
Dolby Pro Logic IIx processing for
game sources
Neo:6 Cinema
DTS processing for movie sources
Neo:6 Music
DTS processing for music sources
SUR. ENHANCED
or
MOVIE THEATER
Functions
PRO LOGIC
Dolby Pro Logic processing for any
sources
PLII Movie
Dolby Pro Logic II processing for
movie sources
PLIIx Movie
Dolby Pro Logic IIx processing for
movie sources
Neo:6 Cinema
DTS processing for movie sources
Note
44 En
ENJOYING SURROUND SOUND
Virtual CINEMA DSP allows you to enjoy the CINEMA
DSP programs without surround speakers. It creates
virtual speakers to reproduce the natural sound field.
If you set “SUR. L/R SP”
to “NONE” (see page 70),
Virtual CINEMA DSP activates automatically whenever
you select a CINEMA DSP sound field program (see
page 58).
Virtual CINEMA DSP will not activate even when “SUR. L/R
SP” is set to “NONE” (see page 70) in the following cases:
when the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT
jacks is selected as the input source (see page 38).
when headphones are connected to the PHONES jack.
when the “DIRECT STEREO” (see page 39), “2ch Stereo”
(see page 39) or “STRAIGHT” mode (see page 39) is
selected.
Using Virtual CINEMA DSP
Note
RECORDING
45 En
BASIC
OPERATION
English
Recording adjustments and other operations are performed from the recording components. Refer to the operating
instructions for those components.
The DTS signal is a digital bitstream. Attempting to digitally record the DTS bitstream will result in
noise being recorded. Therefore, if you want to use this unit to record sources encoded in DTS, the
following considerations and adjustments need to be made. To play DTS-encoded DVDs and CDs
(when using a digital audio connection) on your DTS-compatible player, follow its operating
instructions to make a setting so that the analog signal will be output from the player.
When this unit is set to the standby mode, you cannot record between other components connected to this unit.
The settings of TONE CONTROL (see page 33), VOLUME, the speaker level (see page 71) and the sound field programs (see
page 58) do not affect the recorded material.
The source connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks of this unit cannot be recorded.
S-video and composite video signals pass independently through the video circuits of this unit. Therefore, when recording or dubbing
video signals input from a video source component that provides only an S-video or a composite video signal, you can record only an
S-video or a composite video signal on your VCR.
Digital signals input at the DIGITAL INPUT jacks are not output at the analog AUDIO OUT (REC) jacks for recording. Likewise,
analog signals input at the AUDIO IN jacks are not output at the DIGITAL OUTPUT jack. Therefore, if your source component is
connected to provide only digital or analog signals, you can only record digital or analog signals.
A given input source is not output on the same OUT (REC) channel.
Check the copyright laws in your country to record from CDs, radio, etc. Recording of copyrighted material may infringe copyright
laws.
The analog audio signals input at the DOCK terminal can be output at the analog AUDIO OUT (REC) jacks for recording.
y
Do a test recording before you start an actual recording.
1 Turn on all the connected components.
2 Rotate the INPUT selector on the front panel
(or press one of the input selector buttons on
the remote control) to select the source
component you want to record from.
3 Start playback on the selected source
component or select a broadcast station.
4 Start recording on the recording component.
RECORDING
Notes
If you play back a video source that uses scrambled or encoded signals to prevent it from being dubbed, the picture
itself may be disturbed due to those signals.
CAUTION
VOLUME
AUTO/MAN'LMAN'L/AUTO FMLEVELNEXTEDIT
EFFECT
MEMORY
FM/AMPRESET/TUNING
A/B/C/D/E
l PROGRAM h
BASS/TREBLE
TUNING MODE
INPUT MODE
TONE CONTROL
STRAIGHT
SPEAKERSPHONES
SILENT CINEMA
STANDBY
/ON
BA
MULTI CH
INPUT
INPUT
l PRESET/TUNING h
VIDEO L AUDIO R
USBVIDEO AUX
2
AMP
SOURCE
TV
VOLUME
TV VOL TV CH
TRANSMITCODE SET
STANDBY
POWER
POWERPOWER
CD
AVTV
MULTI CH IN
SLEEP
CD-R
DVD DTV
MD
DOCK USB
CBL
NET
TUNER
V-AU X D VR
2
INPUT
CD
MULTI CH IN
SLEEP
CD-R
DVD DTV
MD
DOCK USB
CBL
NET
TUNER
V-AUX DVR
or
Front panel Remote control
FM/AM TUNING
46 En
There are 2 tuning methods: automatic and manual. Automatic tuning is effective when station signals are strong and
there is no interference. If the signal from the station you want to select is weak, tune into it manually. You can also use
the automatic and manual preset tuning features to store up to 40 stations (A1 to E8: 8 preset station numbers in each of
the 5 preset station groups). Furthermore, you can recall any preset stations and exchange the assignment of two preset
stations with each other.
Orient the connected FM and AM antennas for the best reception.
Automatic tuning is effective when station signals are
strong and there is no interference.
1 Rotate the INPUT selector to select “TUNER”
as the input source.
2 Press FM/AM to select the reception band.
“FM” or “AM” appears in the front panel display.
3 Press TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L) so that
the AUTO indicator lights up in the front
panel display.
If a colon (:) appears in the front panel display, tuning
is not possible. Press PRESET/TUNING to turn the
colon (:) off.
4 Press PRESET/TUNING l / h once to begin
automatic tuning.
When this unit is tuned into a station, the TUNED
indicator lights up and the frequency of the received
station is shown in the front panel display.
•Press h to tune into a higher frequency.
•Press l to tune into a lower frequency.
FM/AM TUNING
Note
Automatic tuning
VOLUME
AUTO/MAN'LMAN'L/AUTO FMLEVELNEXTEDIT
EFFECT
MEMORY
FM/AMPRESET/TUNING
A/B/C/D/E
l
PROGRAM
h
BASS/TREBLE
TUNING MODE
INPUT MODE
TONE CONTROL
STRAIGHT
SPEAKERSPHONES
SILENT CINEMA
STANDBY
/ON
BA
MULTI CH
INPUT
INPUT
l
PRESET/TUNING
h
VIDEO L AUDIO R
USBVIDEO AUX
3 31
2
4
INPUT
Front panel
FM/AM
or
AMFM
AUTO/MAN'L
TUNING MODE
DVR DVD CD
V-AUX DTV/CBL
MD/CD-R
p
TUNER
NET
USB
AUTO TUNED
VOLUME
A
SP
dB
LR
A AM 1440 kHz
Lights upNo colon (:)
EDIT
PRESET/TUNING
DVR DVD CD
V-AUX DTV/CBL
MD/CD-R
p
TUNER
NET
USB
AUTO TUNED
VOLUME
A
SP
dB
LR
A AM 1530 kHz
LEVEL
l PRESET/TUNING h
Lights up
47 En
FM/AM TUNING
BASIC
OPERATION
English
If the signal received from the station you want to select is
weak, tune into it manually.
Manually tuning into an FM station automatically switches the
tuner to monaural reception to increase the signal quality.
1 Rotate the INPUT selector to select “TUNER”
as the input source.
2 Press FM/AM to select the reception band.
“FM” or “AM” appears in the front panel display.
3 Press TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L) so that
the AUTO indicator disappears from the front
panel display.
If a colon (:) appears in the front panel display, tuning
is not possible. Press PRESET/TUNING to turn the
colon (:) off.
4 Press PRESET/TUNING l / h to tune into
the desired station manually.
Hold down the button to continue searching.
Manual tuning
Note
VOLUME
AUTO/MAN'LMAN'L/AUTO FMLEVELNEXTEDIT
EFFECT
MEMORY
FM/AMPRESET/TUNING
A/B/C/D/E
l
PROGRAM
h
BASS/TREBLE
TUNING MODE
INPUT MODE
TONE CONTROL
STRAIGHT
SPEAKERSPHONES
SILENT CINEMA
STANDBY
/ON
BA
MULTI CH
INPUT
INPUT
l
PRESET/TUNING
h
VIDEO L AUDIO R
USBVIDEO AUX
3 31
2
4
INPUT
Front panel
FM/AM
or
AMFM
AUTO/MAN'L
TUNING MODE
DISPLAY
DVR DVD CD
V-AUX DTV/CBL
MD/CD-R
p
TUNER
NET
USB
TUNED
VOLUME
A
SP
dB
LR
A AM 1440 kHz
No colon (:)
EDIT
PRESET/TUNING
LEVEL
l PRESET/TUNING h
48 En
FM/AM TUNING
You can use the automatic preset tuning feature to store
FM stations with strong signals up to 40 (A1 to E8: 8
preset station numbers in each of the 5 preset station
groups) of those stations in order. You can then recall any
preset station easily by selecting the preset station number.
1 Rotate the INPUT selector to select “TUNER”
as the input source.
2 Press FM/AM to select “FM” as the reception
band.
“FM” appears in the front panel display.
3 Press and hold MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM)
for more than 3 seconds.
The preset station number as well as the MEMORY
and AUTO indicators flashes. After approximately 5
seconds, automatic presetting starts from the current
frequency and proceeds toward the higher
frequencies.
When automatic preset tuning is completed, the front
panel display shows the frequency of the last preset
station.
y
You can specify the preset number from which this unit
stores FM stations and/or begins tuning toward lower
frequencies. For details, see “Automatic preset tuning
options” on page 49.
Any stored station data existing under a preset station
number is cleared when you store a new station under the
same preset station number.
If the number of received stations does not reach 40 (E8),
automatic preset tuning automatically stops after
searching for all the available stations.
Only FM stations with sufficient signal strength are stored
automatically by automatic preset tuning. If the station
you want to store is weak in signal strength, tune into it
manually and store it as described in “Manual preset
tuning” on page 49.
Automatic preset tuning
VOLUME
AUTO/MAN'LMAN'L/AUTO FMLEVELNEXTEDIT
EFFECT
MEMORY
FM/AMPRESET/TUNING
A/B/C/D/E
l
PROGRAM
h
BASS/TREBLE
TUNING MODE
INPUT MODE
TONE CONTROL
STRAIGHT
SPEAKERSPHONES
SILENT CINEMA
STANDBY
/ON
BA
MULTI CH
INPUT
INPUT
l
PRESET/TUNING
h
VIDEO L AUDIO R
USBVIDEO AUX
3
1
2
INPUT
Front panel
FM/AM
FM
Notes
DVR DVD CD
V-AUX DTV/CBL
MD/CD-R
p
TUNER
NET
USB
AUTO TUNED
VOLUME
MEMORY
A
SP
dB
LR
A1:FM 87.50MHz
MAN'L/AUTO FM
MEMORY
Flashes
Flash
49 En
FM/AM TUNING
BASIC
OPERATION
English
Automatic preset tuning options
You can specify the preset number from which this unit
stores FM stations and/or begins tuning toward lower
frequencies.
First carry out steps 1 through 3 in “Automatic preset tuning” on
page 48.
Press A/B/C/D/E and then PRESET/TUNING
l / h to select the preset station number
under which the first station will be stored.
Automatic preset tuning stops when stations have all
been stored up to E8.
Press PRESET/TUNING so that the colon (:)
disappears from the front panel display and
then press PRESET/TUNING l to begin tuning
toward lower frequencies.
You can also store up to 40 stations (A1 to E8: 8 preset
station numbers in each of the 5 preset station groups)
manually.
1 Tune into a station automatically or manually.
See pages 46 and 47 for tuning instructions.
When this unit is tuned into a station, the front panel
display shows the frequency of the station received.
2 Press MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM).
The MEMORY indicator flashes in the front panel
display for approximately 5 seconds.
3 Press A/B/C/D/E repeatedly to select a preset
station group (A to E) while the MEMORY
indicator is flashing.
The selected preset station group letter appears.
Check that the colon (:) appears in the front panel
display.
Note
NEXT
A/B/C/D/E
LEVEL
l PRESET/TUNING h
EDIT
PRESET/TUNING
LEVEL
l PRESET/TUNING h
Manual preset tuning
VOLUME
AUTO/MAN'LMAN'L/AUTO FMLEVELNEXTEDIT
EFFECT
MEMORY
FM/AMPRESET/TUNING
A/B/C/D/E
l
PROGRAM
h
BASS/TREBLE
TUNING MODE
INPUT MODE
TONE CONTROL
STRAIGHT
SPEAKERSPHONES
SILENT CINEMA
STANDBY
/ON
BA
MULTI CH
INPUT
INPUT
l
PRESET/TUNING
h
VIDEO L AUDIO R
USBVIDEO AUX
43 2,5
DVR DVD CD
V-AUX DTV/CBL
MD/CD-R
p
TUNER
NET
USB
TUNED
VOLUME
A
SP
dB
LR
A AM 630 kHz
MAN'L/AUTO FM
MEMORY
MEMORY
Flashes
NEXT
A/B/C/D/E
DVR DVD CD
V-AUX DTV/CBL
MD/CD-R
p
TUNER
NET
USB
TUNED
VOLUME
MEMORY
A
SP
dB
LR
C :AM 630 kHz
Preset station
group
Flashes
Colon (:)
50 En
FM/AM TUNING
4 Press PRESET/TUNING l / h to select a
preset station number (1 to 8) while the
MEMORY indicator is flashing.
Press h to select a higher preset station number.
Press l to select a lower preset station number.
5 Press MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM) while the
MEMORY indicator is flashing.
The station band and frequency appear in the front
panel display with the preset station group and
number you have selected. The MEMORY indicator
disappears from the front panel display.
6 Repeat steps 1 through 5 to store other
stations.
Any stored station data existing under a preset station
number is cleared when you store a new station under the
same preset station number.
The reception mode (stereo or monaural) is stored along
with the station frequency.
You can tune into any desired station simply by selecting
the preset station group and number under which it was
stored.
y
When performing this operation with the remote control, set the
component selector switch to SOURCE and then press TUNER
to select “TUNER” as the input source.
1 Press A/B/C/D/E on the front panel (or
A/B/C/D/E on the remote control) to select
the desired preset station group (A to E).
The preset station group letter appears in the front
panel display and changes each time you press the
button.
Notes
LEVEL
l PRESET/TUNING h
DVR DVD CD
V-AUX DTV/CBL
MD/CD-R
p
TUNER
NET
USB
TUNED
VOLUME
MEMORY
A
SP
dB
LR
C3:AM 630 kHz
Preset station number
Flashes
DVR DVD CD
V-AUX DTV/CBL
MD/CD-R
p
TUNER
NET
USB
TUNED
VOLUME
A
SP
dB
LR
C3:AM 630 kHz
The displayed station has been stored as C3.
MAN'L/AUTO FM
MEMORY
Selecting preset stations
VOLUME
AUTO/MAN'LMAN'L/AUTO FMLEVELNEXTEDIT
EFFECT
MEMORY
FM/AMPRESET/TUNING
A/B/C/D/E
l
PROGRAM
h
BASS/TREBLE
TUNING MODE
INPUT MODE
TONE CONTROL
STRAIGHT
SPEAKERSPHONES
SILENT CINEMA
STANDBY
/ON
BA
MULTI CH
INPUT
INPUT
l
PRESET/TUNING
h
VIDEO L AUDIO R
USBVIDEO AUX
21
2
1
NEXT
A/B/C/D/E
A/B/C/D/E
ENTER
PRESET/CH
or
Front panel
Remote control
51 En
FM/AM TUNING
BASIC
OPERATION
English
2 Press PRESET/TUNING l / h on the front
panel (or PRESET/CH u / d on the remote
control) to select the desired preset station
number (1 to 8).
The preset station group and number appear in the
front panel display along with the station band and
frequency.
You can exchange the assignments of two preset stations
with each other. The example below describes the
procedure to exchange preset station “E1” with “A5”.
1 Select preset station “E1” using A/B/C/D/E
and PRESET/TUNING l / h.
See “Selecting preset stations” on page 50.
2 Press and hold EDIT for more than 3
seconds.
“E1” and the MEMORY indicator flash in the front
panel display.
LEVEL
l PRESET/TUNING h
DVR DVD CD
V-AUX DTV/CBL
MD/CD-R
p
TUNER
NET
USB
TUNED
VOLUME
A
SP
dB
LR
E1:FM 87.50MHz
A/B/C/D/E
ENTER
PRESET/CH
or
Front panel
Remote control
Exchanging preset stations
VOLUME
AUTO/MAN'LMAN'L/AUTO FMLEVELNEXTEDIT
EFFECT
MEMORY
FM/AMPRESET/TUNING
A/B/C/D/E
l
PROGRAM
h
BASS/TREBLE
TUNING MODE
INPUT MODE
TONE CONTROL
STRAIGHT
SPEAKERSPHONES
SILENT CINEMA
STANDBY
/ON
BA
MULTI CH
INPUT
INPUT
l
PRESET/TUNING
h
VIDEO L AUDIO R
USBVIDEO AUX
1,32,4
EDIT
PRESET/TUNING
DVR DVD CD
V-AUX DTV/CBL
MD/CD-R
p
TUNER
NET
USB
TUNED
VOLUME
MEMORY
A
SP
dB
LR
E1:FM 87.50MHz
Flashes
Flashes
52 En
FM/AM TUNING
3 Select preset station “A5” using A/B/C/D/E
and PRESET/TUNING l / h.
“A5” and the MEMORY indicator flash in the front
panel display.
See “Selecting preset stations” on page 50.
4 Press EDIT again.
“EDIT E1–A5” appears in the front panel display and
the assignments of the two preset stations are
exchanged.
DVR DVD CD
V-AUX DTV/CBL
MD/CD-R
p
TUNER
NET
USB
TUNED
VOLUME
MEMORY
A
SP
dB
LR
A5:FM 90.60MHz
NEXT
A/B/C/D/E
LEVEL
l PRESET/TUNING h
Flashes
Flashes
DVR DVD CD
V-AUX DTV/CBL
MD/CD-R
p
TUNER
NET
USB
TUNED
VOLUME
A
SP
dB
LR
EDIT E1-A5
EDIT
PRESET/TUNING
RADIO DATA SYSTEM TUNING (EUROPE MODEL ONLY)
53 En
BASIC
OPERATION
English
Radio Data System (Europe model only) is a data transmission system used by FM stations in many countries. The Radio
Data System function is carried out among the network stations. This unit can receive various Radio Data System data
such as PS (program service), PTY (program type), RT (radio text), CT (clock time), and EON (enhanced other
networks) when receiving Radio Data System broadcasting stations.
Use this feature to select one of the 15 Radio Data System
program types and search for all the available preset
stations of the selected program type.
1 Press TUNER on the remote control to select
“TUNER” as the input source.
2 Press PTY SEEK MODE on the remote
control to set this unit to the PTY SEEK
mode.
The name of the program type or “NEWS” flashes in
the front panel display.
y
To cancel the PTY SEEK mode, press PTY SEEK MODE
on the remote control again.
3 Press PRESET/CH u / d on the remote
control to select the desired program type.
The name of the selected program type appears in the
front panel display.
RADIO DATA SYSTEM TUNING
(EUROPE MODEL ONLY)
Selecting the Radio Data System
program
AMP
SOURCE
TV
VOLUME
TV VOL TV CH
TRANSMITCODE SET
STANDBY
POWER
POWERPOWER
CD
AVTV
MULTI CH IN
SLEEP
CD-R
DVD DTV
MD
DOCK USB
CBL
NET
TUNER
V-AU X D VR
MENUTITLE
SET MENU
LEVEL
DISPLAYRETURN
BAND
SRCH MODE
ON SCREENDAB MEMORY
A/B/C/D/E
ENTER
PRESET/CH
REC
AUDIO
USBNET RADIOPC/MCX
EFFECT
9010
ENT.
FREQ/TEXT
EONSTARTMODE PTY SEEK
1
2
3
4
TUNER
STARTMODE PTY SEEK
NEWS
Flashes
Program type Descriptions
NEWS
News
AFFAIRS
Current affairs
INFO
General information
SPORT
Sports
EDUCATE
Education
DRAMA
Drama
CULTURE
Culture
SCIENCE
Science
VARIED
Light entertainment
POP M
Popular music
ROCK M
Rock music
M.O.R. M
Middle-of-the-road music (easy-
listening)
LIGHT M
Light classics
CLASSICS
Serious classics
OTHER M
Other music
A/B/C/D/E
ENTER
PRESET/CH
POP M
Lights up
54 En
RADIO DATA SYSTEM TUNING (EUROPE MODEL ONLY)
4 Press PTY SEEK START on the remote
control to start searching for all the available
Radio Data System preset stations.
The name of the selected program type flashes and
the PTY HOLD indicator lights up in the front panel
display while this unit is searching for stations.
y
To stop searching for stations, press PTY SEEK START on
the remote control again.
This unit stops searching for stations when a station
broadcasting the selected program type is found.
If the station found is not the one you desire, press PTY
SEEK START again to resume searching for another
station broadcasting the same program type.
Use this feature to receive the EON (enhanced other
networks) data service of the Radio Data System station
network. Once you select one of the 4 Radio Data System
program types (NEWS, AFFAIRS, INFO, or SPORT), this
unit automatically searches for all the available preset
stations that are scheduled to broadcast the EON data
service of the selected program type for a certain duration
of time. When the scheduled EON data service starts, this
unit automatically switches to the local station
broadcasting the EON data service and then switches back
to the nationwide station once the EON data service ends.
You can use this feature only when the EON data service is
available.
The EON indicator lights up in the front panel display only
when the EON data service is being received from a Radio Data
System station.
1 Press TUNER on the remote control to select
“TUNER” as the input source.
2 Make sure the EON indicator is lit in the front
panel display.
If the EON indicator is not lit in the front panel
display, select another Radio Data System program so
that the EON indicator lights up.
Notes
STARTMODE PTY SEEK
POP M
PTY HOLD
Flashes Lights up
Using the Radio Data System
station network
Notes
AMP
SOURCE
TV
VOLUME
TV VOL TV CH
TRANSMITCODE SET
STANDBY
POWER
POWERPOWER
CD
AVTV
MULTI CH IN
SLEEP
CD-R
DVD DTV
MD
DOCK USB
CBL
NET
TUNER
V-AU X D VR
FREQ/TEXT
EONSTARTMODE PTY SEEK
1
3
TUNER
55 En
RADIO DATA SYSTEM TUNING (EUROPE MODEL ONLY)
BASIC
OPERATION
English
3 Press EON on the remote control repeatedly
to select one of the 4 Radio Data System
program types (NEWS, AFFAIRS, INFO or
SPORT).
The name of the selected program type appears in the
front panel display.
y
To cancel the EON feature, press EON on the remote control
repeatedly until the name of the program type disappears
and “EON OFF” appears in the front panel display.
Use this feature to display the 4 types of the Radio Data
System information: PS (program service), PTY (program
type), RT (radio text) and CT (clock time). The
corresponding indicators light up in the front panel
display.
You can select one of the Radio Data System modes only when
the corresponding Radio Data System indicator lights up in the
front panel display. It may take a while for this unit to receive
all of the Radio Data System data from the station.
You can select only the available Radio Data System modes
being offered by the station.
If the signals being received are not strong enough, this unit
may not be able to utilize the Radio Data System data. In
particular, the “RT” mode requires a large amount of data and
may not be available even when the other Radio Data System
modes are available.
In case of poor reception conditions, press TUNING MODE
(AUTO/MAN’L) on the front panel so that the AUTO indicator
disappears from the front panel display.
If the signal strength is weakened by external interference while
this unit is receiving the Radio Data System data, the reception
may be cut off unexpectedly and “...WAIT” appears in the front
panel display.
When the “RT” mode is selected, this unit can display the
program information by a maximum of 64 alphanumeric
characters, including the umlaut symbol. Unavailable characters
are displayed with the “_” (underscore).
If the reception is cut off when the “CT” mode is selected, “CT
WAIT” appears in the front panel display.
1 Press TUNER on the remote control to select
“TUNER” as the input source.
EON
NEWS
Lights up
Displaying the Radio Data System
information
Notes
AMP
SOURCE
TV
VOLUME
TV VOL TV CH
TRANSMITCODE SET
STANDBY
POWER
POWERPOWER
CD
AVTV
MULTI CH IN
SLEEP
CD-R
DVD DTV
MD
DOCK USB
CBL
NET
TUNER
V-AU X D VR
MENUTITLE
SET MENU
LEVEL
DISPLAYRETURN
BAND
SRCH MODE
ON SCREENDAB MEMORY
A/B/C/D/E
ENTER
PRESET/CH
REC
AUDIO
USBNET RADIOPC/MCX
EFFECT
9010
ENT.
FREQ/TEXT
EONSTARTMODE PTY SEEK
1
2
TUNER
56 En
RADIO DATA SYSTEM TUNING (EUROPE MODEL ONLY)
2 Press FREQ/TEXT on the remote control
repeatedly to select the desired Radio Data
System display mode.
Select “PS” to display the name of the Radio Data
System program currently being received.
Select “PTY” to display the type of the Radio Data
System program currently being received.
Select “RT” to display the information on the
Radio Data System program currently being
received.
Select “CT” to display the current time.
FREQ/TEXT
CTRTPTYPS
Frequency display
SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS
57 En
SOUND FIELD
PROGRAMS
English
What really creates the rich, full tones of a live instrument are the multiple reflections from the walls of the room. In
addition to making the sound live, these reflections enable us to tell where the player is situated as well as the size and
shape of the room in which we are sitting.
Elements of a sound field
There are two distinct types of sound reflections that combine to make up the sound field in addition to the direct sound
coming straight to our ears from the player’s instrument.
Early reflections
Reflected sounds reach our ears extremely rapidly (50 ms to 100 ms after the direct sound), after reflecting from one
surface only (for example, from a wall or the ceiling). Early reflections actually add clarity to the direct sound.
Reverberations
These are caused by reflections from more than one surface (for example, from the walls, and the ceiling) so numerous
that they merge together to form a continuous sonic afterglow. They are non-directional and lessen the clarity of the direct
sound.
Direct sound, early reflections and subsequent reverberations taken together help us to determine the subjective size and
shape of the room, and it is this information that the digital sound field processor reproduces in order to create sound
fields.
If you could create the appropriate early reflections and subsequent reverberations in your listening room, you would be
able to create your own listening environment. The acoustics in your room could be changed to those of a concert hall, a
dance floor, or a room with virtually any size at all. This ability to create sound fields at will is exactly what YAMAHA
has done with the digital sound field processor.
Choose a sound field program based on your listening preference, not merely on the name of the program.
When you select an input source, this unit automatically selects the last sound field program used with the corresponding input source.
Sound field programs cannot be selected when the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks is selected as the input
source (see page 38).
Sampling frequencies higher than 48 kHz (except for DTS 96/24 signals) are sampled down to 48 kHz and then sound field programs
are applied.
Front panel operations
Press PROGRAM l / h on the front panel
repeatedly.
The name of the selected sound field program appears in
the front panel display and in the OSD.
Remote control operations
Set the component selector switch to AMP and
then press one of the sound field program
selector buttons on the remote control
repeatedly.
The name of the selected sound field program appears in
the front panel display and in the OSD.
SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS
Selecting sound field programs
Notes
VOLUME
AUTO/MAN'LMAN'L/AUTO FMLEVELNEXTEDIT
EFFECT
MEMORY
FM/AMPRESET/TUNING
A/B/C/D/E
l
PROGRAM
h
BASS/TREBLE
TUNING MODE
INPUT MODE
TONE CONTROL
STRAIGHT
SPEAKERSPHONES
SILENT CINEMA
STANDBY
/ON
BA
MULTI CH
INPUT
INPUT
l
PRESET/TUNING
h
VIDEO L AUDIO R
USBVIDEO AUX
PROGRAM l / h
TV MUTE TV INPUT
MUTE
AMP
SOURCE
TV
PRESET/CH
STEREO
1
EFFECT
VOLUME
TV VOL TV CH
STANDARD
5
SPEAKERS
9
MUSIC
2
SELECT
6
ENHANCER
0
ENTERTAIN
3
EXTD SUR.
7
NIGHT
10
MOVIE
4
DIRECT ST.
8
STRAIGHT
ENT.
AMP
Sound field program
selector buttons
58 En
SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS
This unit is equipped with a variety of precise digital decoders that allow you to enjoy multi-channel playback from
almost any stereo or multi-channel sound source. This unit is also equipped with a YAMAHA digital sound field
processing (DSP) chip containing several sound field programs which you can use to enhance your playback experience.
y
The YAMAHA CINEMA DSP modes are compatible with all Dolby Digital, DTS, and Dolby Surround sources. Set “INPUT MODE”
to “AUTO” (see page 35) to enable this unit to automatically switch to the appropriate digital decoder according to the input signal.
The DSP sound field programs of this unit are recreations of real-world acoustic environments made from precise measurements taken
in the actual concert hall, music venue, movie theater, etc. Thus, you may notice variations in the strength of the reflections coming
from the front, back, left and right.
Choose a sound field program based on your listening preference, not merely on the name of the program itself.
For movie/video sources
You can select from the following sound fields when playing movie or video sources. The sound fields marked “MULTI”
can be used with multi-channel sources, like DVD, digital TV, etc. Those marked “2-CH” can be used with 2-channel
stereo sources like TV programs, video tapes, etc.
y
Press PROGRAM l / h on the front panel repeatedly (or set the component selector switch to AMP and then press one of the sound
field program selector buttons on the remote control) to select the desired sound field program (see page 57).
Sound field program descriptions
Notes
Remote
control
button
Sound field program Features Sources
1
STEREO
2ch Stereo
Downmixes multi-channel sources to 2 channels or plays back 2-channel
sources as they are.
MULTI
2-CH
2
MUSIC
Pop/Rock
CINEMA DSP processing. This program creates an enthusiastic atmosphere
where you can feel as if you are in an actual jazz or rock concert.
3
ENTERTAINMENT
TV Sports
CINEMA DSP processing. This program reproduces the sound environment of a
large concert hall using the surround sound field to enhance your experience of
watching various TV programs such as news, variety shows, music programs or
sports programs.
ENTERTAINMENT
Mono Movie
CINEMA DSP processing. This program reproduces monaural video sources
(such as old movies) at the optimum reverberation level to create sound depth
using only the presence sound field.
ENTERTAINMENT
Game
CINEMA DSP processing. This program adds a deep and spatial feeling to
video game sounds.
59 En
SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS
SOUND FIELD
PROGRAMS
English
For music sources
You can select from the following sound fields when playing music sources, like CD, FM/AM broadcasting, tapes, etc.
y
Press PROGRAM l / h on the front panel repeatedly (or set the component selector switch to AMP and then press one of the sound
field program selector buttons on the remote control) to select the desired sound field program (see page 57).
4
MOVIE THEATER
Spectacle
CINEMA DSP processing. This program reproduces the extremely wide sound
field of a 70-mm movie theater in detail, making both the video and the sound
field incredibly real. This is ideal for any kind of video source encoded in Dolby
Surround, Dolby Digital or DTS, especially large-scale movie productions.
MULTI
2-CH
MOVIE THEATER
Sci-Fi
CINEMA DSP processing. This program reproduces dialog and sound effects in
the latest sound form for science fiction films, thus creating a broad and
expansive cinematic space amid silence. You can enjoy science fiction films
encoded in Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital or DTS in a virtual-space sound field
employing the most advanced techniques.
MOVIE THEATER
Adventure
CINEMA DSP processing. This program reproduces the sound design of the
newest 70-mm and multi-channel soundtrack films similar to the sound field of
the newest movie theaters, so the reverberations of the sound field itself are
restrained as much as possible.
MOVIE THEATER
General
CINEMA DSP processing. This program reproduces sounds from 70-mm and
multi-channel soundtrack films characterized by soft and extensive sound field.
5
SUR. STANDARD
Standard processing for the selected decoder.
SUR. ENHANCED
Enhanced processing for the selected decoder.
Remote
control
button
Sound field program Features Sources
Remote
control
button
Sound field program Features Sources
1
STEREO
2ch Stereo
Plays back 2-channel sources.
2-CH
STEREO
6ch Stereo
Plays back 2-channel sources from all speakers in 6.1 channels, providing a
larger sound field ideal for background music at parties, etc.
2
MUSIC
Hall in Vienna
HiFi DSP processing. This program reproduces a classic shoe-box type concert
hall with approximately 1700 seats. Pillars and ornate carvings create extremely
complex reflections which produce a very full, rich sound.
MULTI
2-CH
MUSIC
The Bttm Line
HiFi DSP processing. This program reproduces the stage front in “The Bottom
Line”, a famous New York jazz club where 300 people can be seated.
MUSIC
The Roxy Thtr
HiFi DSP processing. This program reproduces the dynamic rock music
environment of “The Roxy Theatre”, one of the hottest rock clubs in L.A. The
listener’s imaginary seat is at the center-left of the hall.
3
ENTERTAINMENT
Disco
HiFi DSP processing. This program reproduces the acoustic environment of a
lively disco in the heart of a big city to create a highly concentrated and
energetic sound.
5
SUR. STANDARD
Standard processing for the selected decoder.
SUR. ENHANCED
Enhanced processing for the selected decoder.
60 En
SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS
You can enjoy good quality sound with the initial factory
settings. Although you do not have to change the initial
factory settings, you can change some of the parameters to
better suit the input source or your listening room.
Use the “PARAM. INI” feature in “OPTION MENU” to
initialize the parameters of each sound field program within a
sound field program group (see page 80).
When you set a sound field parameter to a value other than the
initial factory settings, an asterisk mark (*) appears by the
sound field parameter name in the OSD.
You cannot change the sound field parameter values when
“MEMORY GUARD” in “OPTION MENU” is set to “ON”
(see page 79). If you want to change the sound field parameter
values, set “MEMORY GUARD” to “OFF”.
y
For details about the function and control range of each sound
field parameter, see page 61.
Repeat steps 3 and 4 as necessary to change other sound field
program parameter settings.
The available sound field parameters for some of the sound field
programs may be displayed on more than one page in the OSD.
In this case, press u / d to scroll through pages.
If you press and hold j / i to change the sound field parameter
value, the initial factory settings are shown momentarily in the
front panel display.
1 Set the component selector switch to AMP.
2 Turn on the video monitor and then press
DISPLAY on the remote control.
The following display is shown in the OSD.
3 Press one of the sound field program
selector buttons repeatedly to select the
desired sound field program you want to
adjust.
4 Press u / d to select the desired sound field
parameter and then j / i to change the
selected sound field parameter value.
•Press i to increase the value.
•Press j to decrease the value.
Changing sound field parameter
settings
Notes
AMP
SOURCE
TV
VOLUME
TV VOL TV CH
TRANSMITCODE SET
STANDBY
POWER
POWERPOWER
CD
AVTV
MULTI CH IN
SLEEP
CD-R
DVD DTV
MD
DOCK USB
CBL
NET
TUNER
V-AU X D VR
TV MUTE TV INPUT
MUTE
MENUTITLE
SET MENU
LEVEL
DISPLAYRETURN
BAND
SRCH MODE
ON SCREENDAB MEMORY
A/B/C/D/E
ENTER
PRESET/CH
REC
AUDI O
STEREO
1
EFFECT
STANDARD
5
SPEAKERS
9
MUSIC
2
SELECT
6
ENHANCER
0
ENTERTAIN
3
EXTD SUR.
7
NIGHT
10
MOVIE
4
DIRECT ST.
8
STRAIGHT
ENT.
2
4
1
3
AMP
SOURCE
TV
DISPLAY
ON SCREEN
P02 MUSIC
. Pop/Rock
DSP LEVEL;;;;0dB
P.INIT.DLY;;21ms
P.ROOM SIZE;;1.0
S.INIT.DLY;;25ms
S.ROOM SIZE;;1.0
Sound field program category
Sound field parameters Sound field parameter
values
Cursor
STEREO
1
EFFECT
STANDARD
5
SPEAKERS
9
MUSIC
2
SELECT
6
ENHANCER
0
ENTERTAIN
3
EXTD SUR.
7
NIGHT
10
MOVIE
4
DIRECT ST.
8
STRAIGHT
ENT.
A/B/C/D/E
ENTER
PRESET/CH
61 En
SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS
SOUND FIELD
PROGRAMS
English
Sound field parameter descriptions
You can adjust the values of certain digital sound field parameters so that the sound fields are recreated accurately in your
listening room. Not all of the following parameters are found in every program.
y
To change sound field parameter settings to suit your listening environment, see page 60 for details.
Sound field parameter Features
DSP LEVEL
DSP level. Adjusts the level of all the DSP effect sounds within a narrow range. Depending on
the acoustics of your listening room, you may want to increase or decrease the DSP effect level
relative to the level of the direct sound.
Control range: –6 dB to +3 dB
INIT.DLY
P.INIT.DLY
S.INIT.DLY
SB INI.DLY
Initial delay. Presence, surround, and surround back initial delays. Changes the apparent distance
from the source sound by adjusting the delay between the direct sound and the first reflection
heard by the listener. The smaller the value, the closer the sound source seems to the listener. The
larger the value, the farther it seems. For a small room, set to a small value. For a large room, set
to a large value.
Control range: 1 to 99 ms (INIT.DLY and P.INIT.DLY)
1 to 49 ms (S.INIT.DLY and SB INI.DLY)
Source sound
Early
reflections
Time
Time
Time
Delay
Delay
Delay
Sound source
Reflection face
Level
Small value = 1 ms Large value = 99 ms
Level
Level
62 En
SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS
ROOM SIZE
P.ROOM SIZE
S.ROOM SIZE
SB ROOM SIZE
Room size. Presence, surround, and surround back room sizes. Adjusts the apparent size of the
surround sound field. The larger the value, the larger the surround sound field becomes. As the
sound is repeatedly reflected around a room, the larger the hall is, the longer the time between
the original reflected sound and the subsequent reflections. By controlling the time between the
reflected sounds, you can change the apparent size of the virtual venue. Changing this parameter
from one to two doubles the apparent length of the room.
Control range: 0.1 to 2.0
LIVENESS
S.LIVENESS
SB LIVENESS
Liveness. Surround and surround back liveness. Adjusts the reflectivity of the virtual walls in the
hall by changing the rate at which the early reflections decay. The early reflections of a sound
source decay much faster in a room with acoustically absorbent wall surfaces than in one which
has highly reflective surfaces. A room with acoustically absorbent surfaces is referred to as
“dead”, while a room with highly reflective surfaces is referred to as “live”. This parameter lets
you adjust the early reflection decay rate and thus the “liveness” of the room.
Control range: 0 to 10
Sound field parameter Features
Level
Level
Level
Time Time Time
Source sound
Early
reflections
Small value = 0.1
Large value = 2.0
Sound source
Source sound
Level
Level
Level
Dead
Live
Time
Time Time
Small reflected
sound
Large reflected
sound
Small value = 0 Large value = 10
63 En
SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS
SOUND FIELD
PROGRAMS
English
REV.TIME
Reverberation time. Adjusts the amount of time taken for the dense, subsequent reverberation
sound to decay by 60 dB at 1 kHz. This changes the apparent size of the acoustic environment
over an extremely wide range. Set a longer reverberation time for “dead” sources and listening
room environments, and a shorter time for “live” sources and listening room environments.
Control range: 1.0 to 5.0 s
REV.DELAY
Reverberation delay. Adjusts the time difference between the beginning of the direct sound and
the beginning of the reverberation sound. The larger the value, the later the reverberation sound
begins. A later reverberation sound makes you feel as if you are in a larger acoustic environment.
Control range: 0 to 250 ms
Sound field parameter Features
Reverberation
Reverberation
60 dB 60 dB 60 dB
Source sound
REV.TIME
REV.TIME
REV.TIME
Sound source
Short
reverberation
Long
reverberation
Small value = 1.0 s Large value = 5.0 s
Early reflections
(dB)
60 dB
Level
Source sound
Reverberation
REV.TIME
REV.DELAY
Time
64 En
SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS
REV.LEVEL
Reverberation level. Adjusts the volume of the reverberation sound. The larger the value, the
stronger the reverberation becomes.
Control range: 0 to 100%
2ch Stereo
DIRECT
2-channel stereo direct. Bypasses the decoders and DSP processors of this unit for pure hi-fi
stereo sound when playing 2-channel analog sources.
Choices: AUTO, OFF
y
The “AUTO” setting bypasses the decoders and DSP processors only when “BASS” and
“TREBLE” are set to 0 dB (see page 33).
When multi-channel signals (Dolby Digital and DTS) are input, they are downmixed to 2
channels and output from the front left and right speakers.
The low-frequency signals input from the front left and right speakers are redirected to the
subwoofer in the following cases:
“LFE/BASS OUT” is set to “BOTH” (see page 70).
“FRONT SP” is set to “SMALL” (see page 69) and “LFE/BASS OUT” is set to “SWFR”
(see page 70).
6ch Stereo
CT LEVEL
SL LEVEL
SR LEVEL
SB LEVEL
6-channel stereo center, surround left, surround right and surround back levels. Adjusts the
volume level of each channel in the 6-channel stereo mode.
Control range: 0 to 100%
Sound field parameter Features
Source sound
Level
REV. LEVEL
Time
65 En
SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS
SOUND FIELD
PROGRAMS
English
y
The “PRO LOGIC IIx Music”, “PRO LOGIC II Music”, and “DTS Neo:6 Music” parameters can be set only when “SUR.
STANDARD” is selected. Set the component selector switch to AMP and then press STANDARD on the remote control repeatedly to
select “SUR. STANDARD” (see page 43).
PRO LOGIC IIx Music
PRO LOGIC II Music
PANORAMA
Pro Logic IIx Music and Pro Logic II Music panorama. Sends stereo signals to the surround
speakers as well as the front speakers for a wraparound effect.
Choices: OFF, ON
PRO LOGIC IIx Music
PRO LOGIC II Music
DIMENSION
Pro Logic IIx Music and Pro Logic II Music dimension. Adjusts the sound field either towards
the front or towards the rear.
Control range: –3 (towards the rear) to +3 (towards the front)
Initial setting: STD (standard)
PRO LOGIC IIx Music
PRO LOGIC II Music
CENTER WIDTH
Pro Logic IIx Music and Pro Logic II Music center width. Moves the center channel output
completely towards the center speaker or towards the front left and right speakers. A larger value
moves the center channel output towards the front left and right speakers.
Control range: 0 (center channel sound is output only from the center speaker) to
7 (center channel sound is output only from the front left and right speakers)
Initial setting: 3
DTS Neo:6 Music
C.IMAGE
DTS Neo:6 Music center image. Adjusts the front left and right channel output relative to the
center channel to make the center channel more or less dominant as necessary.
Control range: 0.0 to 1.0
Initial setting: 0.3
Sound field parameter Features
SET MENU
66 En
You can use the following parameters in “SET MENU” to adjust a variety of system settings and customize the way this
unit operates. Change the initial settings (indicated in bold under each parameter) to reflect the needs of your listening
environment.
Basic setup BASIC SETUP
Use this feature to set up your system quickly and with minimal effort (see page 29).
Manual setup MANUAL SETUP
Use this feature to manually adjust speaker and system parameters.
Sound menu 1 SOUND MENU
Use this menu to manually adjust any speaker settings, alter the quality and tone of the sound output by the system or
compensate for video signal processing delays when using LCD monitors or projectors.
Input menu 2 INPUT MENU
Use this menu to manually reassign the input/output jacks, select the input mode or rename the input source.
SET MENU
Parameter Features Page
A)SPEAKER SET
Selects the size of each speaker, the speakers for low-frequency signal output, and the
crossover frequency.
69
B)SPEAKER LEVEL
Adjusts the output level of each speaker.
71
C)SP DISTANCE
Adjusts the delay time of each speaker.
72
D)CENTER GEQ
Adjusts the tonal quality of the center speaker.
72
E)LFE LEVEL
Adjusts the output level of the LFE channel for Dolby Digital or DTS signals.
72
F)DYNAMIC RANGE
Adjusts the dynamic range of Dolby Digital or DTS signals.
73
G)AUDIO SET
Adjusts the muting level, audio delay and tone bypass settings.
73
Parameter Features Page
A)I/O ASSIGNMENT
Assigns the input/output jacks of this unit according to the component to be used.
74
B)INPUT MODE
Selects the initial input mode of the source.
75
C)INPUT RENAME
Changes the name of the input source.
75
D)VOLUME TRIM
Adjusts the output volume of each jack.
76
67 En
SET MENU
ADVANCED
OPERATION
English
Network and USB menu 3 NET/USB MENU
Use this menu to manually adjust the network and USB system parameters.
Option menu 4 OPTION MENU
Use this menu to manually adjust the optional system parameters.
Signal information SIGNAL INFO
Use this feature to check audio signal information (see page 40).
Parameter Features Page
A)NETWORK
Configures the network settings automatically or manually.
76
B)PLAY STYLE
Adjusts the playback style.
77
C)INFORMATION
Displays the network system information.
78
Parameter Features Page
A)DISPLAY SET
Adjusts the brightness of the display and converts video signals. Sets the OSD display time as
well as the front panel display scrolling mode.
78
B)MEMORY GUARD
Locks sound field program parameters and other “SET MENU” settings.
79
C)PARAM. INI
Initializes the parameters of a group of sound field programs.
80
D)MULTI ZONE SET
Specifies the location of the speakers connected to the SPEAKERS B terminals.
80
68 En
SET MENU
Use the remote control to access and adjust each
parameter.
y
You can change the “SET MENU” parameters while this unit is
reproducing sound.
If you press one of the sound field program selector buttons
during the “SET MENU” operation, the “SET MENU”
operation is canceled.
Repeat the following procedure to select and adjust each
parameter setting.
Press RETURN to return to the previous menu level.
You cannot change some “SET MENU” parameters when
“NIGHT:CINEMA” or “NIGHT:MUSIC” is selected as the night
listening mode (see page 34).
1 Set the component selector switch to AMP
and then press SET MENU to enter “SET
MENU”.
The top “SET MENU” display appears in the OSD.
2 Press u / d to select “MANUAL SETUP”.
3 Press ENTER to enter “MANUAL SETUP”.
The “MANUAL SETUP” display appears in the
OSD.
4 Press u / d repeatedly and then press
ENTER to select and enter the desired menu.
The following displays are examples where “SOUND
MENU” is selected.
Using SET MENU
Note
TV MUTE TV INPUT
MUTE
AMP
SOURCE
TV
STEREO
VOLUME
TV VOL TV CH
CD
AVTV
MULTI CH IN
SLEEP
CD-R
DVD DTV
MD
DOCK USB
CBL
NET
TUNER
V-A UX DV R
MUSIC ENTERTAIN MOVIE
MENUTITLE
SET MENU
LEVEL
DISPLAYRETURN
BAND
SRCH MODE
ON SCREENDAB MEMORY
A/B/C/D/E
ENTER
PRESET/CH
REC
STEREO
1
EFFECT
STANDARD
5
SPEAKERS
9
MUSIC
2
SELECT
6
ENHANCER
0
ENTERTAIN
3
EXTD SUR.
7
NIGHT
10
MOVIE
4
DIRECT ST.
8
STRAIGHT
ENT.
1
2-6
1,7
MENU
SET MENU
SRCH MODE

SET MENU
.;BASICSETUP
;MANUALSETUP
.;SIGNAL INFO
[ ]/[]:Up/Down
[ENTER]:Enter
p
p
AMP
SOURCE
TV

SET MENU
;BASICSETUP
.;MANUALSETUP
.;SIGNAL INFO
[ ]/[]:Up/Down
[ENTER]:Enter
p
p
A/B/C/D/E
ENTER
PRESET/CH
;MANUAL SETUP
.1SOUNDMENU
2INPUTMENU
3NET/USBMENU
4OPTIONMENU
[]/[]:Up/Down
[ENTER]:Enter
p
p
A/B/C/D/E
ENTER
PRESET/CH
.A)SPEAKERSET
B)SPEAKERLEVEL
C)SPDISTANCE
D)CENTER GEQ
[]/[]:Up/Down
[ENTER]:Enter
1 SOUND
MENU 1/2
p
p
.E)LFE LEVEL
F)DYNAMIC RANGE
G)AUDIO SET

[]/[]:Up/Down
[ENTER]:Enter
1 SOUND
MENU 2/2
p
p
A/B/C/D/E
ENTER
PRESET/CH
A/B/C/D/E
ENTER
PRESET/CH
69 En
SET MENU
ADVANCED
OPERATION
English
5 Press u / d repeatedly and then press
ENTER to select and enter the desired
submenu.
The following display is an example where
“SPEAKER LEVEL” is selected.
6 Press u / d to select the desired parameter
and then j / i to change the parameter
settings.
Press i to increase the value.
Press j to decrease the value.
7 Press SET MENU to exit from “SET MENU”.
Use this menu to manually adjust any speaker settings or
compensate for video signal processing delays when using
LCD monitors or projectors.
Speaker settings A)SPEAKER SET
Use this feature to manually adjust any speaker settings.
y
If you are not satisfied with the bass sounds from your speakers,
you can change these settings according to your preference.
Front speakers FRONT SP
Choices: SMALL, LARGE
Select “SMALL” (small) if you have small front
speakers that do not reproduce low-frequency signals
effectively. The low-frequency signals of the front left
and right channels are directed to the speakers selected
in “LFE/BASS OUT” (see page 70).
Select “LARGE” (large) if you have large front
speakers that reproduce low-frequency signals
effectively. All the front left and right channel signals
are directed to the front left and right speakers.
If “LFE/BASS OUT” is set to “FRNT” (see page 70), the LFE
signals found in Dolby Digital or DTS sources, the low-frequency
signals of the front left and right channels, and the low-frequency
signals of other speakers set to “SML” (or “SMALL”) are all
directed to the front left and right speakers regardless of the
“FRONT SP” setting.
Memory back-up
The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data
from being lost even if this unit is in the standby mode.
However, the stored data will be lost in case the power
cable is disconnected from the AC wall outlet or if the
power supply is cut off for more than one week.

.FL;;;;;;;;;;
FR;;;;;;;;;;
 C;;;;;;;;;;
B)SPEAKER
LEVEL
-__________+
A/B/C/D/E
ENTER
PRESET/CH
A/B/C/D/E
ENTER
PRESET/CH
A/B/C/D/E
ENTER
PRESET/CH
A/B/C/D/E
ENTER
PRESET/CH
MENU
SET MENU
SRCH MODE
1 SOUND MENU
Note
.A)SPEAKERSET
B)SPEAKERLEVEL
C)SPDISTANCE
D)CENTER GEQ
[]/[]:Up/Down
[ENTER]:Enter
1 SOUND
MENU 1/2
p
p
.E)LFE LEVEL
F)DYNAMIC RANGE
G)AUDIO SET

[]/[]:Up/Down
[ENTER]:Enter
1 SOUND
MENU 2/2
p
p
  SMALL>LARGE
FRONT SP
70 En
SET MENU
Center speaker CENTER SP
Choices: NONE, SML, LRG
Select “NONE” (none) if you did not connect a center
speaker. The center channel signals are directed to the
front left and right speakers.
Select “SML” (small) if you have a small center
speaker that does not reproduce low-frequency signals
effectively. The low-frequency signals of the center
channel are directed to the speakers selected in “LFE/
BASS OUT”.
Select “LRG” (large) if you have a large center speaker
that reproduces low-frequency signals effectively. All
the center channel signals are directed to the center
speaker.
Surround left/right speakers SUR. L/R SP
Choices: NONE, SML, LRG
Select “NONE” (none) if you did not connect surround
speakers. This unit is set to the Virtual CINEMA DSP
mode (see page 44) and “SUR. B SP” is automatically
set to “NONE”.
Select “SML” (small) if you have small surround left
and right speakers that do not reproduce low-frequency
signals effectively. The low-frequency signals of the
surround left and right channels are directed to the
speakers selected in “LFE/BASS OUT”.
Select “LRG” (large) if you have large surround left
and right speakers that reproduce low-frequency
signals effectively. All the surround channel signals are
directed to the surround left and right speakers.
Surround back speakers SUR. B SP
Choices: NONE, SML, LRG
Select “NONE” (none) if you did not connect a
surround back speaker. The surround back channel
signals are directed to the surround left and right
speakers.
Select “SML” (small) if you have a small surround
back speaker that does not reproduce low-frequency
signals effectively. The low-frequency signals of the
surround back channel are directed to the speakers
selected in “LFE/BASS OUT”.
Select “LRG” (large) if you have a large surround back
speaker that reproduces low-frequency signals
effectively. All the surround back channel signals are
directed to the surround back speaker.
Bass out LFE/BASS OUT
Use this feature to select the speakers that output the LFE
(low-frequency effect) and the low-frequency signals.
Choices: SWFR, FRNT, BOTH
Select “SWFR” (subwoofer) if you connected a
subwoofer. The LFE signals as well as the low-
frequency signals of other speakers set to “SML” (or
“SMALL”) are directed to the subwoofer.
Select “FRNT” (front) if you did not connect a
subwoofer. The LFE signals, the low-frequency signals
of the front left and right channels, and the low-
frequency signals of other speakers set to “SML” (or
“SMALL”) are all directed to the front left and right
speakers regardless of the “FRONT SP” setting (see
page 69).
Select “BOTH” (both) if you connected a subwoofer.
The low-frequency signals of any source are output
from the subwoofer. The LFE signals as well as the
low-frequency signals of other speakers set to “SML”
(or “SMALL”) are directed to the subwoofer. The low-
frequency signals of the front left and right channels
are directed to the front left and right speakers and the
subwoofer regardless of the “FRONT SP” setting (see
page 69).
NONE>SMLLRG
CENTER SP
NONE>SMLLRG
SUR. L/R SP
 NONE>SML LRG
SUR. B SP
SWFRFRNT>BOTH
LFE/BASS OUT
71 En
SET MENU
ADVANCED
OPERATION
English
Crossover CROSSOVER
Use this feature to select a crossover frequency of all the
speakers set to “SML” (or “SMALL”) or to “NONE” in
“SPEAKER SET” (see pages 69 and 70). All frequencies
below the selected frequency will be sent to the subwoofer
or to the speakers set to “LRG” (or “LARGE”) in
“SPEAKER SET” (see pages 69 and 70).
Choices: 40Hz, 60Hz, 80Hz, 90Hz, 100Hz, 110Hz,
120Hz, 160Hz, 200Hz
Subwoofer phase SUBWOOFER PHASE
Use this feature to switch the phase of your subwoofer if
bass sounds are lacking or unclear.
Choices: NORMAL, REVERSE
Select “NORMAL” if you do not want to reverse the
phase of your subwoofer.
Select “REVERSE” to reverse the phase of your
subwoofer.
Speaker level B)SPEAKER LEVEL
Use this feature to manually balance the speaker levels
between the front left or surround left speakers and each
speaker selected in “SPEAKER SET” (see page 69).
Control range: –10.0 to +10.0 dB
Control step: 1.0 dB
Initial setting: 0 dB
Select “FL” to adjust the balance of the front left
speaker.
Select “FR” to adjust the balance of the front right
speaker.
Select “C” to adjust the balance of the center speaker.
Select “SL” to adjust the balance of the surround left
speaker.
Select “SR” to adjust the balance of the surround right
speaker.
Select “SB” to adjust the balance of the surround back
speaker.
Select “SWFR” to adjust the balance of the subwoofer.
“C”, “SL”, “SR”, “SB” and “SWFR” cannot be adjusted if
“CENTER SP” (see page 70), “SUR. L/R SP” (see page 70),
“SUR. B SP” (see page 70) and “LFE/BASS OUT” (see page 70)
are set to “NONE” respectively.
FREQ;;;80Hz
CROSSOVER
>NORMALREVERSE
02ASUBWOOFER PHASE
Note

.FL;;;;;;;;;;
FR;;;;;;;;;;
 C;;;;;;;;;;
B)SPEAKER
LEVEL
-__________+
72 En
SET MENU
Speaker distance C)SP DISTANCE
Use this feature to manually adjust the distance of each
speaker and the delay applied to the respective channel.
Ideally, each speaker should be the same distance from the
main listening position. However, this is not possible in
most home situations. Thus, a certain amount of delay
must be applied to the sound from each speaker so that all
sounds will arrive at the listening position at the same
time.
Unit UNIT
Choices: meters (m), feet (ft)
Initial setting:
[Canada model]: feet (ft)
[Other models]: meters (m)
Select “meters” to adjust speaker distances in meters.
Select “feet” to adjust speaker distances in feet.
Speaker distances
Control range: 0.30 to 24.00 m (1.0 to 80.0 ft)
Control step: 0.10 m (0.5 ft)
Select “FRONT L” to adjust the distance of the front
left speaker.
Initial setting: 3.00 m (10.0 ft)
Select “FRONT R” to adjust the distance of the front
right speaker.
Initial setting: 3.00 m (10.0 ft)
Select “CENTER” to adjust the distance of the center
speaker.
Initial setting: 3.00 m (10.0 ft)
Select “SUR. L” to adjust the distance of the surround
left speaker.
Initial setting: 3.00 m (10.0 ft)
Select “SUR. R” to adjust the distance of the surround
right speaker.
Initial setting: 3.00 m (10.0 ft)
Select “SUR. B” to adjust the distance of the surround
back speaker.
Initial setting: 2.10 m (7.0 ft)
Select “SWFR” to adjust the distance of the subwoofer.
Initial setting: 3.00 m (10.0 ft)
“CENTER”, “SUR.L”, “SUR.R”, “SUR.B” and “SWFR” cannot
be adjusted if “CENTER SP” (see page 70), “SUR. L/R SP” (see
page 70), “SUR. B SP” (see page 70) and “LFE/BASS OUT” (see
page 70) are set to “NONE” respectively.
Center graphic equalizer D)CENTER GEQ
Use this feature to adjust the built-in 5-frequency band
(100Hz, 300Hz, 1kHz, 3kHz and 10kHz) graphic
equalizer for the center channel so that the tonal quality of
the center speaker matches that of the front speakers. You
can make adjustments while listening to the currently
selected source component or a test tone.
Control range: –6 to +6 dB
Control step: 0.5 dB
Initial setting: 0 dB
Test tone TEST
Choices: OFF, ON
Select “OFF” to stop test tones and output the currently
selected source component.
Select “ON” to output test tones from the front left and
center speakers, and adjust the tonal quality of the
center speaker.
y
Press u / d to select a frequency band and j / i to adjust the
selected frequency band.
Low-frequency effect level E)LFE LEVEL
Use this feature to adjust the output level of the LFE (low-
frequency effect) channel according to the capacity of
your subwoofer or headphones. The LFE channel carries
low-frequency special effects which are only added to
certain scenes. This setting is effective only when this unit
decodes Dolby Digital or DTS signals.
Control range: –20 to 0 dB
Control step: 1 dB
Speaker SPEAKER
Adjusts the speaker LFE level.
Headphone HEADPHONE
Adjusts the headphone LFE level.
Depending on the settings of “LFE/BASS OUT” (see page 70),
some signals may not be output at the SUBWOOFER OUTPUT
jack.
Note
. UNIT;;;;;;meters
FRONTL;;;;3.00m
FRONTR;;;;3.00m
CENTER;;;;;3.00m
[]/[]:Up/Down
[<]/[>]:Adjust
C)SP
DISTANCE
p
p
Note
.TEST>OFFON

100Hz ;;;;;; 0dB
300Hz ;;;;;; 0dB
1kHz ;;;;;; 0dB
3kHz ;;;;;; 0dB
10kHz ;;;;;; 0dB
[]/[]:Up/Down
[<]/[>]:Adjust
D)CENTER GEQ
-______+
p
p
.SPEAKER;;;;;;0dB
HEADPHONE;;;;0dB
[]/[]:Up/Down
[<]/[>]:Adjust
E)LFE
LEVEL
p
p
73 En
SET MENU
ADVANCED
OPERATION
English
Dynamic range F)DYNAMIC RANGE
Use this feature to select the amount of dynamic range
compression to be applied to your speakers or
headphones. This setting is effective only when this unit is
decoding Dolby Digital and DTS signals.
Speaker SP
Adjusts the speaker compression.
Headphone HP
Adjusts the headphone compression.
Choices: MIN, STD, MAX
Select “MIN” (minimum) if you regularly listen at low
volume levels.
Select “STD” (standard) for general use.
Select “MAX” (maximum) to preserve the greatest
amount of dynamic range.
Audio settings G)AUDIO SET
Use this feature to adjust the overall audio settings of this
unit.
Muting type MUTING TYPE
Use this feature to adjust how much the mute function
reduces the output volume (see page 34).
Choices: FULL, –20dB
Select “FULL” to completely mute all the audio
output.
Select “–20dB” to reduce the current volume by 20 dB.
Audio delay AUDIO DELAY
Use this feature to delay the sound output and synchronize
it with the video image. This may be necessary when
using certain LCD monitors or projectors.
Control range: 0 to 160 ms
Control step: 1 ms
Tone bypass TONE BYPASS
Use this feature to select whether audio output bypasses
tone control circuitry when “TREBLE” and “BASS” are
set to 0 dB (see page 33).
Choices: AUTO, OFF
Select “AUTO” if you want signals to bypass tone
control circuitry to provide the purest signal possible.
Select “OFF” if you do not want signals to bypass tone
control circuitry.
.SP:MINSTD>MAX
HP:MINSTD>MAX
[]/[]:Up/Down
[<]/[>]:Select
F)DYNAMIC RANGE
p
p
.MUTING TYPE;FULL
AUDIO DELAY;;0ms
TONE BYPASS;AUTO
[]/[]:Up/Down
[<]/[>]:Select
G)AUDIO SET
p
p
74 En
SET MENU
Use this menu to reassign the input/output jacks, select the
input mode or rename the input source.
Input/output assignment
A)I/O ASSIGNMENT
Use this feature to assign the input/output jacks according
to the component to be used if the initial settings of this
unit do not correspond to your needs. Change the
following parameters to reassign the respective jacks and
effectively connect more components.
Once the input/output jacks are reassigned, you can select
the corresponding component by using the INPUT
selector on the front panel (or the input selector buttons on
the remote control).
For COMPONENT VIDEO jacks A, B and C
CMPNT-V INPUT [A]
CMPNT-V INPUT [B]
CMPNT-V INPUT [C]
Choices: [A] DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX, DVR
[B] DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX, DVR
[C] DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX, DVR
For OPTICAL OUTPUT jack 1 OPTICAL OUT (1)
Choices: CD, MD/CD-R, DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX,
DVR
For OPTICAL INPUT jacks 2, 3 and 4
OPTICAL IN (2)
OPTICAL IN (3)
OPTICAL IN (4)
Choices: (2) CD, MD/CD-R, DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX,
DVR
(3) CD, MD/CD-R, DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX,
DVR
(4) CD, MD/CD-R, DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX,
DVR
For COAXIAL INPUT jack 5 COAXIAL IN (5)
Choices: (5) CD, MD/CD-R, DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX,
DVR
You cannot select a specific item more than once for the same
type of jack.
When you connect a component to both the DIGITAL INPUT
(COAXIAL) and DIGITAL INPUT (OPTICAL) jacks, priority
is given to the signals input at the DIGITAL INPUT
(COAXIAL) jack.
2 INPUT MENU
.A)I/OASSIGNMENT
B)INPUTMODE
C)INPUTRENAME
D)VOLUME TRIM
[]/[]:Up/Down
[ENTER]:Enter

2
INPUT
MENU
p
p
.[A];;;;;DVD
(DVD)
[B];;;;;DTV/CBL
(DTV/CBL)
[C];;;;; DVR
( DVR )

CMPNT-V
INPUT
.(1);;;;;MD/CD-R
(MD/CD-R )

OPTICAL
OUT
Notes
.(2);;;;;MD/CD-R
(MD/CD-R)
(3);;;;; DVD
(DVD )
(4);;;;;DTV/CBL
(DTV/CBL )

OPTICAL
IN
.(5);;;;; DVD
( DVD )

COAXIAL
IN
75 En
SET MENU
ADVANCED
OPERATION
English
Input mode B)INPUT MODE
Use this feature to set this unit to reset “INPUT MODE”
back to “AUTO” (see page 35) regardless of the previous
setting or to recall the last input mode (“AUTO”, “DTS”,
or “ANALOG”) used for that source whenever you turn on
this unit.
Choices: AUTO, LAST
Select “AUTO” to reset “INPUT MODE” back to
“AUTO” (see page 35) regardless of the previous
setting whenever you turn on this unit. This unit
automatically selects input signals in the following
order:
(1) Digital signals
(2) Analog signals
Select “LAST” to set this unit to automatically recall
the last input mode (“AUTO”, “DTS”, or “ANALOG”)
used for that source whenever you turn on this unit.
Input rename C)INPUT RENAME
Use this feature to change the name of the input source
that appears in the OSD and in the front panel display.
1 Press one of the input selector buttons on
the remote control to select the input source
you want to change the name of.
2 Press j / i on the remote control to place the
“_” (underscore) under the space or the
character you want to edit.
3 Press u / d to select the character you want
to use and then press j / i to move to the
next space.
You can use up to 8 characters for each input.
•Press d to change the character in the following order, or
press u to go in the reverse order:
A to Z, a space, 0 to 9, a space, a to z, a space, symbols (#,
*, +, –, etc.)
4 Repeat steps 1 through 3 to rename each
input source.
5 Press ENTER on the remote control to exit
from “INPUT RENAME”.
>AUTOLAST
[<]/[>]:Select
[ENTER]:Return

B)INPUT
MODE
DVD-> DVD
[<]/[>]:Position
[]/[]:Chara.

C)INPUT
RENAME
p
p
CD
MULTI CH IN
SLEEP
CD-R
DVD DTV
MD
DOCK USB
CBL
NET
TUNER
V-AUX DVR
Notes
A/B/C/D/E
ENTER
PRESET/CH
A/B/C/D/E
ENTER
PRESET/CH
A/B/C/D/E
ENTER
PRESET/CH
A/B/C/D/E
ENTER
PRESET/CH
76 En
SET MENU
Volume trim D)VOLUME TRIM
Use this feature to adjust the level of the signal input at
each jack. This is useful if you want to balance the level of
each input source to avoid sudden changes in volume
when switching between input sources.
Choices: CD, MD/CD-R, TUNER, DVD, DTV/CBL,
V-AUX, DOCK, DVR, PC/MCX, USB, NET
RADIO, MULTI CH IN
Control range: –6.0 to +6.0 dB
Control step: 1.0 dB
Initial setting: 0.0 dB
Use this menu to adjust the network and USB system
parameters.
Network settings A)NETWORK
Use this feature to view the network parameters (IP
address, etc.) or to change them manually.
The above display is an example.
DHCP DHCP
When this parameter is set to “ON”, network parameters
for “IP”, “SUBNET”, “GATEWAY”, “DNS (P)” and
“DNS (S)” obtained from a DHCP enabled router are
displayed. If DHCP server function is not available, set
this parameter to “OFF” to configure the network
parameters manually.
Choices: ON, OFF
IP address IP
Use this parameter to specify an IP address assigned to
this unit. This value must not duplicate the one used for
other devices in the target network.
Subnet mask SUBNET
Use this parameter to specify the subnet mask value
assigned to this unit.
y
For most of the cases, the subnet mask value can be set as
“255.255.255.0”.
Default gateway GATEWAY
Use this parameter to specify the IP address of the default
gateway.
 DVD
DVD-> 0.0dB
[<]/[>]:Adjust
[RETURN]:Exit

D)VOLUME TRIM
3 NET/USB MENU
Note
.A)NETWORK
B)PLAY STYLE
C)INFORMATION
[]/[]:Up/Down
[ENTER]:Enter

3
NET/USB
MENU
p
p
. DHCP ON
IP 192.168.000.002
SUBNET 255.255.255.000
GATEWAY 192.168.000.001
DNS (P) 192.168.000.001
DNS (S) 000.000.000.000
SET >CANCEL
[]/[]:Up/Down
[ENTER]:Enter

A)NETWORK
p
p
77 En
SET MENU
ADVANCED
OPERATION
English
Primary DNS server DNS (P)
Secondary DNS server DNS (S)
Use this parameter to specify the IP address of the primary
and secondary DNS (Domain Name System) servers.
If you have only one DNS address, enter the DNS address in
“DNS (P)”. If you have two or more DNS addresses, enter one of
them in “DNS (P)” and another in “DNS (S)”.
1 Press u / d on the remote control repeatedly
and then press ENTER to select and enter
the desired network parameter.
When “DHCP” is set to “ON”, you cannot select and adjust
any other network settings. To specify the other parameters,
you need to first set “DHCP” to “OFF”.
2
To specify the parameter, press
u
/
d
repeatedly
to change the number and press
j
/
i
to select
the digit to change.
3 Press ENTER to confirm the parameter.
4 Repeat steps 1 through 3 to configure each
network parameter.
5 Select “SET” and then press ENTER to finish
configuration.
In case you have changed your network configuration, you may
need to reconfigure the network settings again.
y
You can reset the network settings of this unit to the initial factory
settings by using “N-RESET” in the advanced setup menu (see
page 82).
Playback styles B)PLAY STYLE
Use this feature to adjust the playback style according to
your preference. You can shuffle songs in a random order
or repeat one specific song or a sequence of songs.
Repeat REPEAT
Use this feature to set this unit to repeat one song or a
sequence of songs.
Choices: OFF, SINGLE, ALL
Select “OFF” to deactivate this feature.
Select “SINGLE” to set this unit to repeat one song.
Select “ALL” to set this unit to repeat a sequence of
songs.
When “REPEAT” is set to a setting other than “OFF”, the
highlighted letter “R” appears in the top right corner of the
playback status screen while one song or a sequence of songs
are being repeated.
If “REPEAT” is set to “SINGLE”, the setting will be reset to
“OFF” when this unit is set to the standby mode.
Shuffle SHUFFLE
Use this feature to set this unit to play songs or albums in a
random order.
Choices: OFF, ON
Select “OFF” to deactivate this feature.
Select “ON” to set this unit to play songs or albums in a
random order.
When “SHUFFLE” is set to “ON”, the highlighted letter “S”
appears in the top right corner of the playback status screen while
songs or albums are being shuffled.
Note
Note
Note
Notes
Note
.REPEAT;;;;;;;OFF
SHUFFLE;;;;;;OFF
[]/[]:Up/Down
[<]/[>]:Select

B)PLAY STYLE
p
p
78 En
SET MENU
Network information C)INFORMATION
Use this feature to display the network system
information.
The above display is an example.
MAC (Media Access Control) address
MAC ADDRESS
This information displays the MAC address that is
assigned to this unit.
Status STATUS
This information displays the current link status of the
network.
Display status: 10BASE-T, 100BASE-TX,
FULL-DUPLEX, HALF-DUPLEX,
NO LINK
“NO LINK” appears when network connection is not made.
Use this menu to adjust the optional system parameters.
Display settings A)DISPLAY SET
Dimmer DIMMER
Use this feature to adjust the brightness of the front panel
display.
Control range: – 4 to 0
Control step: 1
•Press j to make the front panel display dimmer.
•Press i to make the front panel display brighter.
Video conversion VIDEO CONV.
Use this feature to set whether to convert the video signals
input at the VIDEO and S VIDEO jacks.
Choices: ON, OFF
Select “ON” to convert composite and S-video signals
interchangeably and up-convert composite and S-video
signals to component video signals.
Select “OFF” not to convert any signals.
The converted video signals are only output at the MONITOR
OUT jacks. When recording a video source, you must make the
same type of video connections between each component.
When composite video or S-video signals from a VCR are
converted to component video signals, the picture quality may
suffer depending on your VCR.
You must set “VIDEO CONV.” to “ON” to display the OSD.
Unconventional signals input at the composite video or S-video
jacks cannot be converted or may be output abnormally. In such
cases, set “VIDEO CONV.” to “OFF”.
Note
Note
 MAC ADDRESS
XX:XX:XX:XX:XX:XX
STATUS
10BASE-T
FULL-DUPLEX
[ENTER]:Return

C)INFORMATION
4 OPTION MENU
Notes
.A)DISPLAYSET
B)MEMORYGUARD
C)PARAM.INI
D)MULTI ZONESET
[]/[]:Up/Down
[ENTER]:Enter

4
OPTION
MENU
p
p
.DIMMER;;;;;;;;;0
VIDEOCONV.;;;ON
OSD SHIFT;;;;;;0
GRAY BACK;;;AUTO
[]/[]:Up/Down
[<]/[>]:Select

A)DISPLAY
SET
p
p
.ON SCREEN;;;;10s
FL SCROLL;;;CONT

[]/[]:Up/Down
[<]/[>]:Select

A)DISPLAY
SET
p
p
79 En
SET MENU
ADVANCED
OPERATION
English
OSD shift OSD SHIFT
Use this feature to adjust the vertical position of the OSD.
Control range: –5 (upward) to +5 (downward)
Control step: 1
Initial setting: 0
•Press j to raise the position of the OSD.
•Press i to lower the position of the OSD.
Gray back GRAY BACK
Use this feature to display a gray background in the OSD
when there is no video signal being input.
Choices: AUTO, OFF
Select “AUTO” to display a gray background in the
OSD when there is no video signal being input.
Select “OFF” not to display any background in the
OSD.
Depending on the video signals being input or the system
setting of your video monitor (NTSC or PAL), the OSD may be
displayed abnormally. In such cases, set “GRAY BACK” to
“OFF”.
Even when “GRAY BACK” is set to “OFF”, the OSD may not
be displayed correctly depending on the conditions of the
picture.
On-screen display time ON SCREEN
Use this feature to set the amount of time to display the
iPod menu or NET/USB menu in the OSD after you
perform a certain operation.
Choices: ON, 10s, 30s
Select “ON” to display the OSD unceasingly during an
operation.
Select “10s” to turn off the OSD 10 seconds after you
perform a certain operation.
Select “30s” to turn off the OSD 30 seconds after you
perform a certain operation.
Front panel display scroll FL SCROLL
Use this feature to set whether to display the information
(such as song title or channel name) in the front panel
display in a continuous manner or by the first 14
alphanumeric characters after scrolling all characters once
when “DOCK” or “NET/USB” is selected as the input
source.
Choices: CONT, ONCE
Select “CONT” to display the operation status in the
front panel display in a continuous manner.
Select “ONCE” to display the operation status in the
front panel display by the first 14 alphanumeric
characters after scrolling all characters once.
Memory guard B)MEMORY GUARD
Use this feature to prevent accidental changes to DSP
program parameter values and other system settings.
Choices: OFF, ON
Select “OFF” to turn off the “MEMORY GUARD”
feature.
Select “ON” to protect:
DSP program parameters
all “SET MENU” items
all speaker levels
When “MEMORY GUARD” is set to “ON”, you cannot select
and adjust any other “SET MENU” items.
Notes
Note
>OFFON
[<]/[>]:Select
[ENTER]:Return

B)MEMORY
GUARD
80 En
SET MENU
Parameter initialization C)PARAM. INI
Use this feature to initialize the parameters of each sound
field program within a sound field program group. When
you initialize a sound field program group, all of the
parameter values within that group revert to their initial
factory settings.
Press the corresponding sound field program selector
buttons on the remote control to select the sound
field
program that you want to initialize.
An asterisk (*) appears to the left of the sound field
program names that have been changed from their initial
factory settings.
Choices: STEREO, MUSIC, ENTERTAINMENT,
MOVIE THEATER, STANDARD
You cannot automatically revert to the previous parameter
settings once you initialize a sound field program group.
You cannot separately initialize individual sound field
programs.
You cannot initialize any sound field program groups when
“MEMORY GUARD” is set to “ON” (see page 79).
Zone set D)MULTI ZONE SET
Use this feature to specify the location of speakers
connected to the SPEAKERS B terminals of this unit.
Speaker B setting SP B
Use this feature to select the location of the front speakers
connected to the SPEAKERS B terminals.
Choices: FRONT, ZONE B
Select “FRONT” to turn on or off SPEAKERS A and B
when the speakers connected to the SPEAKERS B
terminals are set in the main zone.
Select “ZONE B” if the speakers connected to the
SPEAKERS B terminals are set in another zone. If
SPEAKERS A is turned off and SPEAKERS B is
turned on, all the speakers including the subwoofer in
the main zone are muted and this unit outputs sound at
the SPEAKERS B terminals only.
If you connect headphones to the PHONES jack of this unit, the
sound is output from both headphones and the SPEAKERS B
terminals when “SP B” is set to “ZONE B”.
If a DSP program is selected when “SP B” is set to “ZONE B”,
this unit automatically enters the Virtual CINEMA DSP mode
(see page 44).
Notes
STEREO
*MUSIC
ENTERTAINMENT
MOVIE THEATER
*STANDARD
Press DSP key

C)PARAM.
INI
Notes
.SPB;;;;;;;FRONT

[<]/[>]:Select
[ENTER]:Return

D)MULTI ZONE
SET
ADVANCED SETUP
81 En
ADVANCED
OPERATION
English
This unit has additional menus that are displayed in the front panel display. The advanced setup menu offers additional
operations to adjust and customize the way this unit operates. Change the initial settings (indicated in bold under each
parameter) to reflect the needs of your listening environment.
The settings you make are reflected next time you turn on this unit by pressing STANDBY/ON on the front panel (or POWER on the
remote control) (see page 28).
Only STANDBY/ON, STRAIGHT (EFFECT) and PROGRAM l / h are effective while you are using the advanced setup menu.
All the other operations cannot be made while you are using the advanced setup menu.
The advanced setup menu is only available in the front panel display.
1 Press STANDBY/ON on the front panel to set
this unit to the standby mode.
2 Press and hold STRAIGHT (EFFECT) on the
front panel, and then press STANDBY/ON to
turn on this unit.
This unit turns on, and the advanced setup menu
appears in the front panel display.
3 Press PROGRAM l / h on the front panel
repeatedly to select the parameter you want
to adjust.
The name of the selected parameter appears in the
front panel display.
See page 82 for a complete list of available
parameters.
4 Press STRAIGHT (EFFECT) on the front
panel repeatedly to change the selected
parameter setting.
5 Press STANDBY/ON on the front panel to
save the new setting and set this unit to the
standby mode.
y
The settings you made are reflected next time you turn on this
unit.
ADVANCED SETUP
Notes
VOLUME
AUTO/MAN'LMAN'L/AUTO FMLEVELNEXTEDIT
EFFECT
MEMORY
FM/AMPRESET/TUNING
A/B/C/D/E
l PROGRAM h
BASS/TREBLE
TUNING MODE
INPUT MODE
TONE CONTROL
STRAIGHT
SPEAKERSPHONES
SILENT CINEMA
STANDBY
/ON
BA
MULTI CH
INPUT
INPUT
l PRESET/TUNING h
VIDEO L AUDIO R
USBVIDEO AUX
32,4
1-2,5
STANDBY
/ON
STANDBY
/ON
EFFECT
STRAIGHT
While holding
down
l PROGRAM h
SP IMP.-8 MIN
Currently selected
parameter setting
Currently selected
parameter
EFFECT
STRAIGHT
STANDBY
/ON
82 En
ADVANCED SETUP
Speaker impedance SP IMP.
Use this feature to set the speaker impedance of this unit
so that it matches that of your speakers.
Choices: 8MIN, 6MIN
Select “8MIN” to set the speaker impedance to 8 .
Select “6MIN” to set the speaker impedance to 6 .
*
The Canada model cannot use two separate speaker systems
(A and B) simultaneously when “SP IMP.” is set to “8MIN”.
Factory presets PRESET
Use this feature to reset all the parameters of this unit to
the initial factory settings (see page 95).
Choices: CANCEL, RESET
Select “CANCEL” not to reset any parameters of this
unit.
Select “RESET” to reset the parameters of this unit.
This setting completely resets all the parameters of this unit
including the “SET MENU” parameters. However, the
advanced setup menu parameters will not be initialized.
The initial factory settings are activated next time you turn on
this unit.
Network reset N-RESET
Use this feature to reset the network settings of this unit
(see page 76) to the initial factory settings.
Choices: CANCEL, RESET
Select “CANCEL” not to reset any network settings of
this unit.
Select “RESET” to reset the network settings of this
unit.
The initial factory settings are activated next time you turn on
this unit.
When the network settings are reset, “DHCP” in “NET/USB
MENU” is automatically set to “ON” (see page 76) and the
registered client ID of this unit on your YAMAHA MCX-2000
is cleared (see page 92).
Remote control AMP ID REMOTE AMP
Use this feature to set the AMP ID of this unit for remote
control recognition (see page 86).
Choices: ID1, ID2
Select “ID1” when the remote control AMP ID library
code is set to “00001”.
Select “ID2” when the remote control AMP ID library
code is set to “00002”.
You need to set the corresponding remote control AMP library
code for the remote control (see page 86).
Remote control TUNER ID REMOTE TUN
Use this feature to set the TUNER ID of this unit for
remote control recognition (see page 86).
Choices: ID1, ID2
Select “ID1” when the remote control TUNER ID
library code is set to “81916”.
Select “ID2” when the remote control TUNER ID
library code is set to “81917”.
You need to set the corresponding remote control TUNER library
code for the remote control (see page 86).
SP IMP. Speaker Impedance level
8MIN
Front
If you use one set (A or B),
the impedance of each
speaker must be 8 or
higher.
If you use two sets (A and
B), the impedance of each
speaker must be 16 or
higher.
*
Center
The impedance of each
speaker must be 8 or
higher.
Surround
Surround back
6MIN
Front
If you use one set (A or B),
the impedance of each
speaker must be 4 or
higher.
If you use two sets (A and
B), the impedance of each
speaker must be 8 or
higher.
Center
The impedance of each
speaker must be 6 or
higher.
Surround
Surround back
Notes
Notes
Note
Note
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES
83 En
ADVANCED
OPERATION
English
In addition to controlling this unit, the remote control can also operate other audiovisual components made by YAMAHA
and other manufacturers. To control your TV or other components, you must set the appropriate remote control code for
each input source (see page 85).
Controlling this unit
Set the component selector switch to AMP to control this
unit.
*1
These buttons always control this unit regardless of the
component selector switch position.
*2
These buttons control this unit only when the component
selector switch is set to AMP.
Controlling a TV
Set the component selector switch to TV to control your
TV. To control your TV, you must set the appropriate
remote control code for DTV/CBL or (see page 85).
When you set the remote control codes for both
DTV/CBL and , priority is given to the one set for
DTV/CBL.
*1
These buttons always control your TV regardless of the
component selector switch position.
*2
These buttons control your TV only when the component
selector switch is set to TV. For details, see the “Digital TV/
Cable TV” column on page 84.
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES
Controlling this unit, a TV, or other components
Notes
TV MUTE TV INPUT
MUTE
AMP
SOURCE
TV
MENUTITLE
SET MENU
LEVEL
DISPLAYRETURN
BAND
SRCH MODE
ON SCREENDAB MEMORY
A/B/C/D/E
ENTER
PRESET/CH
REC
AUDIO
USB
NET RADIO
PC/MCX
STEREO
1
EFFECT
VOLUME
TV VOL TV CH
TRANSMITCODE SET
STANDBY
POWER
POWERPOWER
CD
AVTV
MULTI CH IN
SLEEP
CD-R
DVD DTV
MD
DOCK USB
CBL
NET
TUNER
V-AU X DV R
STANDARD
5
SPEAKERS
9
MUSIC
2
SELECT
6
ENHANCER
0
ENTERTAIN
3
EXTD SUR.
7
NIGHT
10
MOVIE
4
DIRECT ST.
8
STRAIGHT
ENT.
FREQ/TEXT EONSTARTPTY SEEKMODE
*1
*2
Notes
Remote control Digital TV/Cable TV
TV POWER Turns on or off the power.
TV VOL +/–
Increases or decreases the volume
level.
TV CH +/– Changes the channel number.
TV MUTE Mutes the audio output.
TV INPUT Changes the input source.
TV MUTE TV INPUT
MUTE
AMP
SOURCE
TV
MENUTITLE
SET MENU
LEVEL
DISPLAYRETURN
BAND
SRCH MODE
ON SCREENDAB MEMORY
A/B/C/D/E
ENTER
PRESET/CH
REC
AUDIO
USB
NET RADIO
PC/MCX
STEREO
1
EFFECT
VOLUME
TV VOL TV CH
TRANSMITCODE SET
STANDBY
POWER
POWERPOWER
CD
AVTV
MULTI CH IN
SLEEP
CD-R
DVD DTV
MD
DOCK USB
CBL
NET
TUNER
V-AU X DV R
STANDARD
5
SPEAKERS
9
MUSIC
2
SELECT
6
ENHANCER
0
ENTERTAIN
3
EXTD SUR.
7
NIGHT
10
MOVIE
4
DIRECT ST.
8
STRAIGHT
ENT.
FREQ/TEXT EONSTARTPTY SEEKMODE
*1
*2
84 En
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES
Controlling other components
Set the component selector switch to SOURCE to control
other components selected with the input selector buttons,
or the blank button on the right of MD/CD-R. You
must set the appropriate remote control code for each
input source (see page 85). The following table shows the
function of each control button used to control other
components assigned to each input selector button,
and the blank button on the right of MD/CD-R. Be advised
that some buttons may not correctly operate the selected
component.
*1
This button is operational only when the original remote control supplied with the component has a POWER button.
*2
These buttons control your VCR or DVD recorder only when you set the appropriate remote control code for DVR (see page 85).
*3
When you use this button to record a source, press it twice repeatedly to prevent a malfunction.
*4
Press and hold to search backward or forward.
*5
Press and hold to store your favorite Internet radio stations with bookmarks (see page 93).
*6
These buttons are not operational when the Internet radio is selected as the sub input source of NET/USB.
TV MUTE TV INPUT
MUTE
AMP
SOURCE
TV
STEREO
1
VOLUME
TV VOL TV CH
TRANSMITCODE SET
STANDBY
POWER
POWERPOWER
CD
AVTV
MULTI CH IN
SLEEP
CD-R
DVD DTV
MD
DOCK USB
CBL
NET
TUNER
V-A UX D VR
MUSIC
2
ENTERTAIN
3
MOVIE
4
UU
U
MENUTITLE
SET MENU
LEVEL
DISPLAYRETURN
BAND
SRCH MODE
ON SCREENDAB MEMORY
A/B/C/D/E
ENTER
PRESET/CH
REC
AUDIO
USB
NET RADIO
PC/MCX
STEREO
1
EFFECT
STANDARD
5
SPEAKERS
9
MUSIC
2
SELECT
6
ENHANCER
0
ENTERTAIN
3
EXTD SUR.
7
NIGHT
10
MOVIE
4
DIRECT ST.
8
STRAIGHT
ENT.
FREQ/TEXT EONSTARTPTY SEEKMODE
2
3
4
7
9
5
6
8
1
Remote control
DVD player/
recorder
VCR
Digital TV/
Cable TV
LD/CD player
MD/CD
recorder
Tuner
iPod
®
PC/MCX-2000/
Internet radio/
USB
1 AV POWER
Power *1 Power *1 Power *2 Power *1 Power *1
2 1-9, 0, +10
Numeric
buttons
Numeric
buttons
Numeric
buttons
Numeric
buttons
Numeric
buttons
Preset stations
(1-8)
3 TITLE
Title Band Bookmark *5
4 PRESET/CH
u
Up VCR channel up Up
Preset up
(1-8)
Up Up
PRESET/CH
d
Down
VCR channel
down
Down
Preset down
(1-8)
Down Down
A/B/C/D/E j Left Left
Preset down
(A-E)
Previous menu Previous menu
A/B/C/D/E i Right Right
Preset up
(A-E)
Subsequent
menu
Subsequent
menu
ENTER Enter Enter
Subsequent
menu
Subsequent
menu
5 RETURN
Return Return
6 REC
Disc skip
(player)
Rec (recorder)
*3
Rec *3 Rec *2*3
Disc skip
(CD player) Rec *3 Select PC/MCX
p Play Play Play *2 Play Play Play Play
w
Search
backward
Search
backward
Search
backward *2
Search
backward
Search
backward
Search
backward *4
Select
NET RADIO
f
Search
forward
Search
forward
Search
forward *2
Search
forward
Search
forward
Search
forward *4
Select USB
AUDIO Audio Audio Audio *2
Sound
(LD player)
e Pause Pause Pause *2 Pause Pause Pause
b
Skip
backward
Skip
backward
Skip
backward *2
Skip
backward
Skip
backward
Skip
backward
Skip
backward *6
a
Skip
forward
Skip
forward
Skip
forward *2
Skip
forward
Skip
forward
Skip
forward
Skip
forward *6
s Stop Stop Stop *2 Stop Stop Stop Stop
7 ENT.
Title/Index Enter Enter
Chapter/Time
(LD player)
Index
(CD player)
Index
8 MENU
Menu Menu Previous menu Previous menu
9 DISPLAY
Display Display Display Display Display Display Display
Notes
85 En
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES
ADVANCED
OPERATION
English
You can control your TV and other components by setting
the appropriate remote control code for each input source.
For a complete list of available remote control codes, refer
to “LIST OF REMOTE CONTROL CODES” at the end of
this manual.
The following table shows the default component in the
“Library (component category)” column and the remote
control code for each input source.
Remote Control Code Default Settings
You may not be able to operate your YAMAHA component even
if a YAMAHA remote control code is initially set as listed above.
In this case, try setting other YAMAHA remote control codes.
y
The blank button is the one on the right of MD/CD-R.
1 Press one of the input selector buttons,
or the blank button on the right of MD/CD-R
to select the component you want to set up.
2 Press CODE SET using a ballpoint pen or a
similar object.
The TRANSMIT indicator on the remote control
flashes twice.
3 Press the numeric buttons (0 to 9) to enter
the five-digit remote control code for the
component to be used.
The TRANSMIT indicator on the remote control
flashes twice, and the remote control code for the
selected component is set.
y
To clear the remote control code previously set for the selected
component, enter the code number “9980”.
If the manufacturer of your component has more than one code,
try each of them until you find the correct one.
If you do not press any buttons within 30 seconds in step 3, the
setup process is canceled. If this happens, repeat the setup
procedure.
Setting the remote control code
Input
source
Library
(component
category)
Manufacturer
Default
code
CD CD YAMAHA 61907
MD/CD-R
MD YAMAHA 70888
DVD DVD YAMAHA 40539
DTV/
CBL
––
TUNER TUNER YAMAHA 81916
V-AUX/
DOCK
OTHER AUDIO
ACCESSORIES
(iPod)
YAMAHA 81981
DVR DVR YAMAHA 51544
NET/
USB
OTHER AUDIO
ACCESSORIES
(NET/USB)
YAMAHA 81982
––
Blank
button
TAPE YAMAHA 70524
Note
Notes
CD
MULTI CH IN
SLEEP
CD-R
DVD DTV
MD
DOCK USB
CBL
NET
TUNER
V-AUX DVR
TRANSMIT
CODE SET
Flashes
STEREO
1
EFFECT
STANDARD
5
SPEAKERS
9
MUSIC
2
SELECT
6
ENHANCER
0
ENTERTAIN
3
EXTD SUR.
7
NIGHT
10
MOVIE
4
DIRECT ST.
8
STRAIGHT
ENT.
TRANSMIT
Flashes
86 En
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES
You can operate multiple YAMAHA receivers or
amplifiers in the same room with the supplied remote
control simultaneously. Set the appropriate library code to
select and operate the desired component with the
supplied remote control.
Setting remote control AMP ID library
codes
Select one of the following codes to set the remote control
AMP ID library code for the component you want to use.
1 Press CODE SET using a ballpoint pen or a
similar object.
The TRANSMIT indicator on the remote control
flashes twice.
2 Press the numeric buttons to enter the code
number “00001” or “00002”.
The TRANSMIT indicator on the remote control
flashes twice, and the AMP ID library code is
changed.
*1
The remote control setting
*2
The setting of this unit (see page 82)
You need to set the corresponding remote control AMP ID
of this unit in the advanced setup (see page 82).
When using multiple YAMAHA receivers/amplifiers, you
may be able to operate the other components
simultaneously with the default code setting. In this case,
set one of the alternative codes to operate this unit
separately.
Setting remote control TUNER ID library
codes
Select one of the following codes to set the remote control
TUNER ID library code for the component you want to
use.
1 Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input
source.
2 Press CODE SET using a ballpoint pen or a
similar object.
The TRANSMIT indicator on the remote control
flashes twice.
3 Press the numeric buttons to enter the code
number “81916” or “81917”.
The TRANSMIT indicator on the remote control
flashes twice, and the TUNER ID library code is
changed.
*1
The remote control setting
*2
The setting of this unit (see page 82)
You need to set the corresponding remote control TUNER
ID of this unit in the advanced setup (see page 82).
When using multiple YAMAHA receivers/amplifiers, you
may be able to operate the other components
simultaneously with the default code setting. In this case,
set one of the alternative codes to operate this unit
separately.
Setting library codes
AMP ID
library code
*1
Function
Remote
control AMP
ID *2
00001
(initial setting)
To operate this unit using
the default code.
ID1
(initial setting)
00002
To operate this unit using
an alternative code.
ID2
Notes
TRANSMIT
CODE SET
Flashes
STEREO
1
EFFECT
STANDARD
5
SPEAKERS
9
MUSIC
2
SELECT
6
ENHANCER
0
ENTERTAIN
3
EXTD SUR.
7
NIGHT
10
MOVIE
4
DIRECT ST.
8
STRAIGHT
ENT.
TRANSMIT
Flashes
TUNER ID
library code
*1
Function
Remote
control
TUNER ID *2
81916
(initial setting)
To operate this unit using
the default code.
ID1
(initial setting)
81917
To operate this unit using
an alternative code.
ID2
Notes
TUNER
TRANSMIT
CODE SET
Flashes
STEREO
1
EFFECT
STANDARD
5
SPEAKERS
9
MUSIC
2
SELECT
6
ENHANCER
0
ENTERTAIN
3
EXTD SUR.
7
NIGHT
10
MOVIE
4
DIRECT ST.
8
STRAIGHT
ENT.
TRANSMIT
Flashes
87 En
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES
ADVANCED
OPERATION
English
Use this feature to clear all the remote control codes
previously set and reset all of them to the initial factory
settings.
1 Press CODE SET using a ballpoint pen or a
similar object.
The TRANSMIT indicator on the remote control
flashes twice.
2 Press the numeric buttons to enter the code
number “9981”.
The TRANSMIT indicator on the remote control
flashes twice, and all the remote control codes
previously set are cleared and reset to the initial
factory settings.
y
If you do not press any buttons within 30 seconds after step
2, the clearing process is canceled. In this case, repeat the
clearing procedure.
Resetting all remote control codes
TRANSMIT
CODE SET
Flashes
STEREO
1
EFFECT
STANDARD
5
SPEAKERS
9
MUSIC
2
SELECT
6
ENHANCER
0
ENTERTAIN
3
EXTD SUR.
7
NIGHT
10
MOVIE
4
DIRECT ST.
8
STRAIGHT
ENT.
TRANSMIT
Flashes
USING IPOD®
88 En
Once you have stationed your iPod in a YAMAHA iPod universal dock (such as YDS-10 sold separately) connected to
the DOCK terminal of this unit (see page 22), you can enjoy playback of your iPod using the supplied remote control.
You can also use the Compressed Music Enhancer mode of this unit to improve the sound quality of the compression
artifacts (such as the MP3 format) stored on your iPod (see page 37).
Only iPod (Click and Wheel), iPod nano, and iPod mini are supported.
Some features may not be compatible depending on the model or the software version of your iPod.
y
For a complete list of the remote control functions used to control your iPod, see the “iPod” column in “Controlling other
components” on page 84.
For a complete list of status messages that appear in the front panel display and in the OSD, see the “iPod” section in
“TROUBLESHOOTING” on page 100.
You can control your iPod when “V-AUX” is selected as
the input source. The operations of your iPod can be done
with the aid of the OSD of this unit (menu browse mode)
or without it (simple remote mode).
Controlling iPod in the simple remote
mode
You can perform the basic operations of your iPod (play,
stop, skip, etc.) using the supplied remote control without
the aid of the OSD of this unit.
y
You can view the photos or video clips stored on your iPod.
Operations can be also done with the controls on your iPod.
Controlling iPod in the menu browse
mode
You can perform the advanced operations of your iPod
using the supplied remote control with the aid of the OSD
of this unit. The name of the song being played appears in
the front panel display according to the “FL SCROLL”
parameter in “OPTION MENU” (see page 79). You can
also browse the songs stored on your iPod in the OSD.
Further, you can change or adjust settings for your iPod to
suit your personal preferences.
Operations cannot be done with the controls on your iPod.
The YAMAHA logo appears in the display window of your
iPod.
There are some characters that cannot be displayed in the front
panel display or in the OSD of this unit. Those characters are
replaced with underscores “_”.
The “Setup” parameters can be changed or adjusted only in the
OSD. Press ENTER on the remote control to toggle between the
“Setup” parameter settings.
You cannot browse the photos or video clips stored on your
iPod in the OSD. Instead, you must use the controls on your
iPod to select the desired photos or video clips.
USING iPod
®
Notes
Controlling iPod
Notes
89 En
USING iPod®
ADVANCED
OPERATION
English
1 Press DISPLAY on the remote control.
The following display appears in the OSD.
2 Press u / d / j / i on the remote control to
navigate the iPod menu and then press
ENTER to begin playback of the selected
song.
Choices: Playlists (playlists), Artists (artists),
Albums (albums), Songs (songs),
Genres (genres), Composers (composers)
Playlists > Songs
Artists > Albums > Songs
Albums > Songs
Songs
Genres > Artists > Albums > Songs
Composers > Albums > Songs
Setup > Shuffle, Repeat
Shuffle Shuffle
Use this feature to set this unit to play songs or albums in a
random order.
Choices: Off, Songs, Albums
Select “Off ” to deactivate this feature.
Select “Songs” to set this unit to play songs in a
random order.
Select “Albums” to set this unit to play albums in a
random order.
When “Shuffle” is set to a setting other than “Off ”, the
highlighted letter “S” appears in the top right corner while songs
or albums are being shuffled.
Repeat Repeat
Use this feature to set this unit to repeat one song or a
sequence of songs.
Choices: Off, One, All
Select “Off ” to deactivate this feature.
Select “One” to set this unit to repeat one song.
Select “All” to set this unit to repeat a sequence of
songs.
When “Repeat” is set to a setting other than “Off ”, the
highlighted letter “R” appears in the top right corner while one
song or a sequence of songs are being repeated.
>
>
>
>
>
>
>
Playlists
Artists
Albums
Songs
Genres
Composers
Setup
iPod Top
DISPLAY
ON SCREEN
A/B/C/D/E
ENTER
PRESET/CH
A/B/C/D/E
ENTER
PRESET/CH
Note
Note
USING NETWORK/USB FEATURES
90 En
This unit is equipped with network and USB features that allow you to enjoy WAV (PCM format only), MP3 and WMA
files saved on your PC, YAMAHA MCX-2000, USB memory device and USB portable audio player or access the
Internet radio.
YAMAHA MCX-2000 may not be for sale in some locations.
For further details about networking, refer to the operation manuals supplied with your network devices. Also refer to technical
reference books, if needed.
Some WAV, MP3 and WMA files may not be playable or may be noisy when played.
y
For a complete list of the remote control functions used to control the network and USB features, see the “PC/MCX-2000/Internet
radio/USB” column in “Controlling other components” on page 84.
For a complete list of status messages that appear in the front panel display and in the OSD, see the “Network and USB” section in
“TROUBLESHOOTING” on page 101.
The following diagram shows the construction of the network and USB menu.
*
Only the available PC servers and MCX-2000 are displayed.
USING NETWORK/USB FEATURES
Notes
Navigating the network and USB menus
Note
NET/USB
PC/MusicCAST
(MCX-2000)
Artists
Albums
Songs
Genres
Popular Stations
New Stations
USB
Recall Play
(MCX-2000
only)
Server* Playlists
Internet Radio
Files/Directories
Help
Locations
Podcasts
Bookmarks
Genres
Selects a song by playlist stored on the server. Refer to the documents of
the server for details about the playlist file format, the process of creating
the playlist file, etc.
Makes this unit recall play from MCX-2000 or another client. For details,
refer to the instruction manual of MCX-2000.
Selects a song by genre. In addition, you can select an album within the
genre (MCX-2000 only).
Selects a song by album.
Selects a song by artist. In addition, you can select an album within the
artist (MCX-2000 only).
Selects an Internet radio station that has been added to the “Bookmarks” list (see page 93).
Selects an Internet radio station or a Podcast service by location.
Broadcasts voice-assisted guidelines on various topics of the related Internet service.
Selects a file by navigating directories.
Selects an Internet radio station or a Podcast service by genre.
Selects an Internet radio station from the ones that have recently started the service.
Selects an Internet radio station from the list of popular stations.
Selects a Podcast service by location or genre.
Selects a song directly.
91 En
USING NETWORK/USB FEATURES
ADVANCED
OPERATION
English
The following procedure shows the basic steps to navigate
the network and USB menus. See pages 92 and 93 for
details about each sub input source.
“Please wait” may appear whenever it takes time for
communication. This is not a system malfunction. Wait for a
while.
1 Set the component selector switch to
SOURCE and then press NET/USB on the
remote control to select “NET/USB” as the
input source.
The cursor on the left of the NET/USB indicator
lights up in the front panel display, and the contents
previously played for the corresponding sub input
source of NET/USB is automatically played.
2 Press MENU on the remote control to display
the top NET/USB menu.
The following display appears in the OSD.
If any other display appears in the OSD, press MENU
on the remote control repeatedly until the top
NET/USB menu appears.
3 Press u / d to select the desired sub input
source and then press i or ENTER.
y
You can also select the desired sub input source by pressing
the corresponding button on the remote control (see page 7).
4 Press u / d / j / i on the remote control to
select the desired song or Internet radio
station.
•Press u / d to select the desired menu.
•Press i to enter the selected menu.
•Press j to return to the previous menu level.
y
•“i” in the right corner of each menu line indicates that
there is a submenu available in the next menu level.
You can press ENTER or MENU to enter the selected
menu or to return to the previous menu level.
5 Press ENTER to play the selected song or to
listen to the selected station.
Note
USB
NET
DVR DVD CD
V-AUX DTV/CBL
MD/CD-R
TUNER
p
NET
USB
VOLUME
A
SP
dB
LR
PC/MCX
AMP
SOURCE
TV
Lights up
>
>
>
PC/MusicCAST
Internet Radio
USB
1/3
NET/USB Top
MENU
SET MENU
SRCH MODE
92 En
USING NETWORK/USB FEATURES
Use this feature to enjoy music files saved on your PC or
YAMAHA MCX-2000. MCX-2000 is a music server that
enhances the concept of YAMAHA exclusive
MusicCAST, a digital music delivery method over a
personal network.
1 Install Windows Media Connect 2.0 on your
PC, or register this unit on your YAMAHA
MCX-2000.
Refer to “Installing Windows Media Connect 2.0
on your PC” on page 92 and “Registering this unit
on the YAMAHA MCX-2000” on page 93.
This procedure is needed only the first time.
2 Turn on your PC or MCX-2000.
The PC server or MCX-2000 is added to the server
list on the submenu of PC/MusicCAST.
3 Select a desired PC server or MCX-2000 to
begin playback.
YAMAHA MCX-2000 may not be for sale in some locations.
You can connect this unit to up to 4 PC servers and 1
MCX-2000, and each server must be connected to the same
subnet as this unit.
Some WAV, MP3 and WMA files on your PC may not be
playable or may be noisy when played.
(MCX-2000 only) Files marked with an asterisk (*) have not
been converted to MP3 format. You cannot play back such files
immediately unless you set the “Receive PCM Stream” setting
of this unit to “ON” on MCX-2000. For details, refer to the
instruction manual of MCX-2000.
y
While a song is being played, the time elapsed is displayed at
the bottom of the OSD.
You can use b / a to skip backward/forward and h / s
to start/stop playback independently from the menu in the OSD.
You can set the settings for repeat and shuffle mode by using the
“PLAY STYLE” parameters in “NET/USB MENU” (see
page 77).
You can set whether to display the operation status in the front
panel display in a continuous manner or by the first 14
characters after scrolling all characters once by using “FL
SCROLL” in “OPTION MENU” (see page 79).
Installing Windows Media Connect 2.0
on your PC
With Windows Media Connect 2.0, you can play back the
audio files on your PC. For details refer to the documents
of Windows Media Connect 2.0.
1 Install Windows Media Connect 2.0 on your
PC.
You can download the installer of Windows Media
Connect 2.0 from the Microsoft website.
2 Turn on your PC and then share a folder on
the PC.
The Shared folder is added to the server list on the
submenu of PC/MusicCAST.
Some security software installed on your PC (anti-virus
software, firewall software, etc.) may block the access of this
unit to your PC. In such cases, configure the security software
appropriately.
If you are using a PC with Windows XP Professional, and the
PC is logging on to a domain, you may not be able to connect
the PC server. In such cases, log on to the local machine instead
of the domain.
Using a PC server or YAMAHA
MCX-2000
Notes
Notes
93 En
USING NETWORK/USB FEATURES
ADVANCED
OPERATION
English
Registering this unit on the YAMAHA
MCX-2000
You must register this unit on your YAMAHA MCX-2000
so that this unit can be recognized by your YAMAHA
MCX-2000. For details, refer to the operation manual
supplied with your YAMAHA MCX-2000.
1 Turn off this unit.
2 Set your YAMAHA MCX-2000 to the “Auto
Config” mode.
3 Turn on this unit.
MCX-2000 is added to the server list on the
submenu of PC/MCX.
The client ID of this unit appears in the OSD of
your YAMAHA MCX-2000 (shown as CL-
XXXXX), and this completes the automatic
configuration procedure.
The latter part of the client ID of this unit is same as the last 5
digits of the MAC address of this unit. For details about MAC
address, see page 78.
To clear the registered client ID of this unit, use the “Manual
Config” mode of your YAMAHA MCX-2000 (refer to the
instruction manual of MCX-2000) and then set “N-RESET” in
the advanced setup menu of this unit to “RESET” (see page 82).
The client control functions of MCX-2000 over this unit other
than “View Play Info”, “Receive PCM Stream” and “Edit Client
title” are not available. Avoid using these functions as it will
stop the playback on this unit.
Use this feature to listen to Internet radio stations. This
unit uses the vTuner Internet radio station database service
particularly customized for this unit, providing over 2000
radio station database. Further, you can store your favorite
stations with bookmarks.
This service may be discontinued without notice.
Some Internet radio stations may not be played even if they are
selected in the NET RADIO menu.
To listen to the Internet radio, connect this unit to your network
(see page 23).
A narrowband Internet connection (i.e. 56K modem, ISDN) will
not provide satisfactory results, and a broadband connection is
strongly recommended (i.e. a cable modem, an xDSL modem,
etc.). For detailed information, consult with your ISP.
y
You can use h / s to start/stop playback independently from
the menu in the OSD.
“Podcast” is a type of the Internet radio service, and there are a
number of Podcast services available on the Internet. The
Podcast is not a continuous service. That is, this unit stops
playback when an episode of the Podcast ends.
Some security devices (such as firewall) may block the access
of this unit to Internet radio stations. In such cases, configure
the security settings appropriately.
Storing your favorite Internet radio
stations with bookmarks
Use this feature to select your favorite Internet radio
stations quickly.
Press and hold TITLE on the remote control while
the selected Internet radio station service is
being broadcast.
The stored Internet radio station is added to the
“Bookmarks” list (see page 90).
y
To remove the stored station from the list, select the item in the
first level of the “Bookmarks” list and then press and hold TITLE
on the remote control.
Notes
Using the Internet radio
Notes
94 En
USING NETWORK/USB FEATURES
Use this feature to enjoy WAV (PCM format only), MP3
and WMA files saved on your USB memory device or
USB portable audio player connected to the USB port on
the front panel of this unit.
This unit supports USB mass storage class devices using FAT
16 or FAT 32.
Only the first partition is displayed in the OSD. You cannot
select files in other partitions.
Up to 8 levels of directory hierarchy and 500 music files per
directory are recognized.
Some devices may not work properly even if they meet the
requirements.
Some WAV, MP3 and WMA files may not be playable or may
be noisy when played.
When you connect your USB memory device or USB portable
audio player, there may be an about 10 seconds delay.
y
While a song is being played, the time elapsed is displayed at
the bottom of the OSD.
You can use b / a to skip backward/forward and h / s
to start/stop playback independently from the menu in the OSD.
You can set the settings for repeat and shuffle mode by using the
“PLAY STYLE” parameters in “NET/USB MENU” (see
page 77).
You can set whether to display the operation status in the front
panel display in a continuous manner or by the first 14
characters after scrolling all characters once by using “FL
SCROLL” in “OPTION MENU” (see page 79).
Using a USB memory device or a
USB portable audio player
Notes
RESETTING THE SYSTEM
95 En
ADVANCED
OPERATION
English
Use this feature to reset all the parameters of this unit to the initial factory settings.
This procedure completely resets all the parameters of this unit including the “SET MENU” parameters. However, the advanced setup
menu parameters will not be initialized.
The initial factory settings are activated next time you turn on this unit.
y
To cancel the initialization procedure at any time without making any changes, press STANDBY/ON on the front panel (or STANDBY
on the remote control) to set this unit to the standby mode.
1 Press STANDBY/ON on the front panel to set
this unit to the standby mode.
2 Press and hold STRAIGHT (EFFECT) on the
front panel and then press STANDBY/ON to
turn on this unit.
This unit turns on, and the advanced setup menu
appears in the front panel display.
3 Press PROGRAM l / h on the front panel
repeatedly to select “PRESET”.
4 Press STRAIGHT (EFFECT) on the front
panel repeatedly to select “RESET”.
y
Select “CANCEL” to cancel the initialization procedure
without making any changes.
5 Press STANDBY/ON on the front panel to
confirm your selection and set this unit to the
standby mode.
RESETTING THE SYSTEM
Notes
VOLUME
AUTO/MAN'LMAN'L/AUTO FMLEVELNEXTEDIT
EFFECT
MEMORY
FM/AMPRESET/TUNING
A/B/C/D/E
l PROGRAM h
BASS/TREBLE
TUNING MODE
INPUT MODE
TONE CONTROL
STRAIGHT
SPEAKERSPHONES
SILENT CINEMA
STANDBY
/ON
BA
MULTI CH
INPUT
INPUT
l PRESET/TUNING h
VIDEO L AUDIO R
USBVIDEO AUX
32,4
1-2,5
STANDBY
/ON
EFFECT
STRAIGHT
STANDBY
/ON
While holding
down
l PROGRAM h
PRESET-CANCEL
EFFECT
STRAIGHT
PRESET-RESET
STANDBY
/ON
TROUBLESHOOTING
96 En
Refer to the table below when this unit does not function properly. If the problem you are experiencing is not listed below
or if the instruction below does not help, set this unit to the standby mode, disconnect the power cable, and contact the
nearest authorized YAMAHA dealer or service center.
General
TROUBLESHOOTING
Problem Cause Remedy
See
page
This unit fails to turn
on or enters the
standby mode soon
after the power is
turned on.
The power cable is not connected or the
plug is not completely inserted.
Connect the power cable firmly.
The speaker impedance setting is
incorrect.
Set the speaker impedance to match your speakers.
27
The protection circuitry has been
activated.
Make sure that all speaker wire connections on this
unit and on all speakers are secure and that the wire
for each connection does not touch anything other
than its respective connection.
13
This unit has been exposed to a strong
external electric shock (such as lightning
or strong static electricity).
Set this unit to the standby mode, disconnect the
power cable, plug it back in after 30 seconds and then
use it normally.
No sound Incorrect input or output cable
connections.
Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists,
the cables may be defective.
18-24
“INPUT MODE” is set to “DTS” or
“ANALOG”.
Set “INPUT MODE” to “AUTO”.
35
No appropriate input source has been
selected.
Select an appropriate input source with the INPUT
selector on the front panel (or the input selector
buttons on the remote control) and MULTI CH
INPUT on the front panel (or MULTI CH IN on the
remote control).
32, 38
Speaker connections are not secure. Secure the connections.
13
The front speakers to be used have not
been selected properly.
Select the set of front speakers with SPEAKERS A or
B on the front panel or SPEAKERS on the remote
control.
32
The volume is turned down. Turn up the volume.
The sound is muted. Press MUTE or VOLUME +/– on the remote control
to resume audio output and then adjust the volume.
34
“INPUT MODE” is set to “ANALOG”
while playing a source encoded in DTS.
Set “INPUT MODE” to “AUTO” or “DTS”.
35
Signals this unit cannot reproduce are
being input from a source component,
such as a CD-ROM.
Play a source whose signals can be reproduced by this
unit.
No picture The output and input for the picture are
connected to different types of video
jacks.
Set “VIDEO CONV.” to “ON”.
78
97 En
TROUBLESHOOTING
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
English
Problem Cause Remedy
See
page
The sound suddenly
goes off.
The protection circuitry has been activated
because of a short circuit, etc.
Check that the speaker impedance setting is correct.
27, 82
Check that the speaker wires are not touching each
other and then turn this unit back on.
The sleep timer has set this unit to the
standby mode.
Turn on this unit, and play the source again.
The sound is muted. Press MUTE or VOLUME +/– on the remote control
to resume audio output.
34
Sound is heard from
the speaker on one
side only.
Incorrect cable connections. Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists,
the cables may be defective.
13
Incorrect settings in “SPEAKER
LEVEL”.
Adjust the “SPEAKER LEVEL” settings.
71
Only the center
speaker outputs
substantial sound.
When playing a monaural source with a
CINEMA DSP program, the source signal
is directed to the center channel, and the
front and surround speakers output effect
sounds.
No sound is heard
from the center
speaker.
“CENTER SP” in “SET MENU” is set to
“NONE”.
Set “CENTER SP” to “SML” or “LRG”.
70
One of the HiFi DSP programs (except for
“6ch Stereo”) has been selected.
Try another sound field program.
57
No sound is heard
from the surround
speakers.
“SUR. L/R SP” in “SET MENU” is set to
“NONE”.
Set “SUR. L/R SP” to “SML” or “LRG”.
70
This unit is in the “STRAIGHT” mode
and a monaural source is being played
back.
Press STRAIGHT (EFFECT) on the front panel so
that “STRAIGHT” disappears from the front panel
display.
39
No sound is heard
from the surround
back speaker.
“SUR. L/R SP” in “SET MENU” is set to
“NONE” and “SUR. B SP” is
automatically set to “NONE”.
Set “SUR. L/R SP” and “SUR. B SP” to “SML” or
“LRG”.
70
“SUR. B SP” in “SET MENU” is set to
“NONE”.
Set “SUR. B SP” to “SML” or “LRG”.
70
No sound is heard
from the subwoofer.
“LFE/BASS OUT” in “SET MENU” is
set to “FRNT” when a Dolby Digital or
DTS signal is being played.
Set “LFE/BASS OUT” to “SWFR” or “BOTH”.
70
“LFE/BASS OUT” in “SET MENU” is
set to “SWFR” or “FRNT” when a 2-
channel source is being played.
Set “LFE/BASS OUT” to “BOTH”.
70
The source does not contain low-
frequency signals.
98 En
TROUBLESHOOTING
Problem Cause Remedy
See
page
Dolby Digital or DTS
sources cannot be
played. (Dolby Digital
or DTS indicator in
the front panel
display does not light
up.)
The connected component is not set to
output Dolby Digital or DTS digital
signals.
Make an appropriate setting following the operating
instructions for your component.
“INPUT MODE” is set to “ANALOG”. Set “INPUT MODE” to “AUTO” or “DTS”.
35
A humming sound is
heard.
Incorrect cable connections. Connect the audio cables firmly. If the problem
persists, the cables may be defective.
The volume level
cannot be increased,
or the sound is
distorted.
The component connected to the AUDIO
OUT (REC) jacks of this unit is turned
off.
Turn on the power of the component.
The sound effect
cannot be recorded.
It is not possible to record the sound effect
with a recording component.
A source cannot be
recorded by a digital
recording component
connected to the
DIGITAL OUTPUT
jack.
The source component is not connected to
the DIGITAL INPUT jacks of this unit.
Connect the source component to the DIGITAL
INPUT jacks.
19, 21
Some components cannot record the
Dolby Digital or DTS sources.
A source cannot be
recorded by an
analog component
connected to the
AUDIO OUT (REC)
jacks.
The source component is not connected to
the analog AUDIO IN jacks of this unit.
Connect the source component to the analog AUDIO
IN jacks.
21
The sound field
parameters and some
other settings of this
unit cannot be
changed.
“MEMORY GUARD” in “SET MENU”
is set to “ON”.
Set “MEMORY GUARD” to “OFF”.
79
This unit does not
operate properly.
The internal microcomputer has been
frozen by an external electric shock (such
as lightning or excessive static electricity)
or by a power supply with low voltage.
Disconnect the power cable from the AC wall outlet
and then plug it in again after about 30 seconds.
“CHECK SP WIRES”
appears in the front
panel display.
Speaker cables are short-circuited. Make sure all speaker cables are connected correctly.
13
There is noise
interference from
digital or radio
frequency equipment.
This unit is too close to the digital or high-
frequency equipment.
Move this unit further away from such equipment.
The picture is
disturbed.
The video source uses scrambled or
encoded signals to prevent dubbing.
This unit suddenly
enters the standby
mode.
The internal temperature becomes too
high and the overheat protection circuitry
has been activated.
Wait about 1 hour for this unit to cool down and then
turn it back on.
99 En
TROUBLESHOOTING
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
English
Tuner
Remote control
Problem Cause Remedy
See
page
FM
FM stereo reception is
noisy.
The characteristics of FM stereo
broadcasts may cause this problem
when the transmitter is too far away or
the antenna input is poor.
Check the antenna connections.
25
Try using a high-quality directional FM
antenna.
Use the manual tuning method.
47
There is distortion, and
clear reception cannot
be obtained even with a
good FM antenna.
There is multi-path interference. Adjust the antenna position to eliminate
multi-path interference.
The desired station
cannot be tuned into
with the automatic
tuning method.
The signal is too weak. Use a high-quality directional FM antenna.
Use the manual tuning method.
47
Previously preset
stations can no longer
be tuned into.
This unit has been disconnected for a
long period.
Set preset stations.
48, 49
AM
The desired station
cannot be tuned into
with the automatic
tuning method.
The signal is weak or the antenna
connections are loose.
Tighten the AM loop antenna connections
and orient it for the best reception.
Use the manual tuning method.
47
There are continuous
crackling and hissing
noises.
Noises result from lightning,
fluorescent lamps, motors, thermostats
and other electrical equipment.
Use an outdoor antenna and a ground wire.
This will help somewhat, but it is difficult to
eliminate all noise.
There are buzzing and
whining noises.
A TV set is being used nearby. Move this unit away from the TV set.
Problem Cause Remedy
See
page
The remote control
does not work nor
function properly.
Wrong distance or angle. The remote control functions within a maximum
range of 6 m (20 ft) and no more than 30 degrees off-
axis from the front panel.
8
Direct sunlight or lighting (from an
inverter type of fluorescent lamp, etc.) is
striking the remote control sensor of this
unit.
Reposition this unit.
The batteries are weak. Replace all batteries.
3
The remote control code is not correctly
set.
Set the remote control code correctly using “LIST OF
REMOTE CONTROL CODES” at the end of this
manual.
85
Try setting another code for the same manufacturer
using “LIST OF REMOTE CONTROL CODES” at
the end of this manual.
85
The library code of the remote control and
the remote control ID of this unit do not
match.
Match the remote control ID of this unit with the
corresponding remote control library code.
82, 86
Even if the remote control code is
correctly set, there are some models that
do not respond to the remote control.
100 En
TROUBLESHOOTING
iPod
In case of a transmission error without a status message appearing in the front panel and in the OSD, check the connection to your iPod
(see page 22).
Note
Status message Cause Remedy
See
page
Loading...
This unit is in the middle of recognizing
the connection with your iPod.
This unit is in the middle of acquiring
song lists from your iPod.
Connect error
There is a problem with the signal path
from your iPod to this unit.
Set this unit to the standby mode and reconnect the
YAMAHA iPod universal dock to the DOCK
terminal of this unit.
22
Try resetting your iPod.
Unknown type
The iPod being used is not supported by
this unit.
Only iPod (Click and Wheel), iPod nano, and iPod
mini are supported.
iPod connected
Your iPod is properly stationed in a
YAMAHA iPod universal dock (such as
YDS-10 sold separately) connected to the
DOCK terminal of this unit, and the
connection between your iPod and this
unit is complete.
Disconnected
Your iPod was removed from a YAMAHA
iPod universal dock (such as YDS-10 sold
separately) connected to the DOCK
terminal of this unit.
Station your iPod back in a YAMAHA iPod universal
dock (such as YDS-10 sold separately) connected to
the DOCK terminal of this unit.
22
Unable to play
This unit cannot play back the songs
currently stored on your iPod.
Check that the songs currently stored on your iPod
are playable.
Store some other playable music files on your iPod.
101 En
TROUBLESHOOTING
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
English
Network and USB
Problem Cause Remedy
See
page
The PC server/MCX-2000/
Internet radio does not
function properly.
The IP address is not set properly. Set the DHCP server function of the router to ON.
Alternately, perform manual configuration
according to the current operating environment.
76
The network cable is not connected. Connect it properly.
23
The music in the PC
server cannot be played
back.
The PC does not have Windows Media
Connect 2.0 installed in it.
Install Windows Media Connect 2.0 in the PC.
The music is recorded in a format that
cannot be played on this unit. This unit
cannot play music formats other than
WMA, MP3 and WAV (PCM format).
Also note that it cannot play certain
music files even if these are recorded in
the WMA, MP3 or WAV format.
Play music recorded in a format that this unit is
compatible with.
The music is copyright-protected. This unit cannot play copyright-protected music.
Windows Media Connect
2.0 cannot be connected.
The Windows XP PC is logging on to a
domain.
Log on to the local machine instead of the
domain.
The MusicCAST server
cannot be connected.
You are attempting to connect to
MCX-1000. The MusicCAST server that
can be connected by this unit is
MCX-2000.
Use MCX-2000 or the PC server.
Auto Configuration is not executed. Execute “Auto Configure”.
92
The Internet radio cannot
be played.
The firewall of the network device is
activated. The Internet radio can be
played only when it passes through the
port designated by each radio station.
The port number is variable depending
on radio station.
Check the firewall setting of the network device.
Connection to the Internet is
disconnected.
Check the configuration of the network device,
and then contact the network connection provider.
The music files and
directories in the USB
device cannot be viewed.
The music files and directories are placed
in locations other than the FAT area.
Place music files and directories in the FAT area.
You are attempting to browse directory
hierarchies of over 8 levels or a directory
with more than 500 files.
Modify the data structure on your USB device.
The USB device cannot
be recognized.
The connected USB device is other than
a USB mass storage class USB memory
device or USB portable audio player.
This unit can recognize only a USB mass storage
class USB memory device or USB portable audio
player. Also note that it cannot recognize certain
USB devices even when they are devices as
described above.
94
Some devices may become easier to recognize
when they are inserted before turning this unit on.
28
“Disconnected” is
displayed even when a
USB device is present.
This unit recognized the USB device as
an illegal device.
Turn this unit off then on again.
28
102 En
TROUBLESHOOTING
Status message Cause Remedy
See
page
Please wait
This unit is in the middle of recognizing
the connection with your network.
This is not a system malfunction. Wait for a
while.
This unit is in the middle of recognizing
the connection with your USB memory
device or USB portable audio player.
This is not a system malfunction. Wait for a
while.
Please wait
(Starting Server)
This unit is in the middle of waking up
MCX-2000 that has been set to the
standby mode.
Wait for approximately 20 seconds.
Connect error
There is a problem with the signal path
from your network to this unit.
Check the connection between this unit and the
LAN port on your router or hub.
23
Make sure your router is properly connected and
turned on. Also, make sure your modem is
properly connected and turned on when you are
attempting to listen to Internet radio.
23
Disconnected
Your USB memory device or USB
portable audio player has been
disconnected from the USB port of this
unit.
Check the connection between this unit and your
USB memory device or USB portable audio
player.
The PC server or MCX-2000 server
previously connected to this unit no
longer exists.
Connect this unit to the available PC server or
MCX-2000.
92
There is a problem with the signal path
from your USB memory device or USB
portable audio player to this unit.
Turn off this unit and reconnect your USB
memory device or USB portable audio player to
the USB port of this unit.
28
Try resetting your USB memory device or USB
portable audio player.
Access error
This unit cannot access your USB
memory device or USB portable audio
player.
Try another USB memory device or USB portable
audio player.
There is a problem with the signal path
from your USB memory device or USB
portable audio player to this unit.
Turn off this unit and reconnect your USB
memory device or USB portable audio player to
the USB port of this unit.
28
Try resetting your USB memory device or USB
portable audio player.
Unable to play
This unit cannot play back the songs
currently stored on your PC.
Make sure Windows Media Connect 2.0 is
installed on your PC.
Check that the songs currently stored on your PC
are playable (MP3, WMA, and WAV).
Store some other playable music files (MP3,
WMA, and WAV) on your PC.
The network may be overloaded with
heavy traffic, and playback is interrupted.
Try preparing a network exclusively for use with
this unit to separate it from general network
traffic.
List updated
The list of the contents stored on your PC
server or MCX-2000 has been updated.
Bookmark ON
The desired Internet radio station has
been added to the “Bookmarks” list.
Bookmark OFF
The stored Internet radio station has been
removed from the “Bookmarks” list.
GLOSSARY
103 En
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
English
Dolby Digital
Dolby Digital is a digital surround sound system that gives
you completely independent multi-channel audio. With 3
front channels (front L/R and center), and 2 surround
stereo channels, Dolby Digital provides 5 full-range audio
channels. With an additional channel especially for bass
effects, called LFE (Low Frequency Effect), the system
has a total of 5.1-channels (LFE is counted as 0.1
channel). By using 2-channel stereo for the surround
speakers, more accurate moving sound effects and
surround sound environment are possible than with Dolby
Surround. The wide dynamic range from maximum to
minimum volume reproduced by the 5 full-range channels
and the precise sound orientation generated using digital
sound processing provide listeners with unprecedented
excitement and realism. With this unit, any sound
environment from monaural up to a 5.1-channel
configuration can be freely selected for your enjoyment.
Dolby Digital EX
Dolby Digital EX creates 6 full-bandwidth output
channels from 5.1-channel sources. This is done using a
matrix decoder that derives 3 surround channels from the
2 in the original recording. For the best results, Dolby
Digital EX should be used with movie sound tracks
recorded with Dolby Digital Surround EX. With this
additional channel, you can experience more dynamic and
realistic moving sound especially with scenes with “fly-
over” and “fly-around” effects.
Dolby Pro Logic II
Dolby Pro Logic II is an improved technique used to
decode vast numbers of existing Dolby Surround sources.
This new technology enables a discrete 5-channel
playback with 2 front left and right channels, 1 center
channel, and 2 surround left and right channels instead of
only 1 surround channel for conventional Pro Logic
technology. There are three modes available: “Music
mode” for music sources, “Movie mode” for movie
sources and “Game mode” for game sources.
Dolby Pro Logic IIx
Dolby Pro Logic IIx is a new technology enabling discrete
multi-channel playback from 2-channel or multi-channel
sources. There are three modes available: “Music mode”
for music sources, “Movie mode” for movie sources (for
2-channel sources only) and “Game mode” for game
sources.
Dolby Surround
Dolby Surround uses a 4-channel analog recording system
to reproduce realistic and dynamic sound effects: 2 front
left and right channels (stereo), a center channel for dialog
(monaural), and a surround channel for special sound
effects (monaural). The surround channel reproduces
sound within a narrow frequency range. Dolby Surround is
widely used with nearly all video tapes and laser discs,
and in many TV and cable broadcasts as well. The Dolby
Pro Logic decoder built into this unit employs a digital
signal processing system that automatically stabilizes the
volume on each channel to enhance moving sound effects
and directionality.
DTS 96/24
DTS 96/24 offers an unprecedented level of audio quality
for multi-channel sound on DVD video, and is fully
backward-compatible with all DTS decoders. “96” refers
to a 96 kHz sampling rate compared to the typical 48 kHz
sampling rate. “24” refers to 24-bit word length. DTS 96/
24 offers sound quality transparent to the original 96/24
master, and 96/24 5.1-channel sound with full-quality full-
motion video for music programs and motion picture
soundtracks on DVD video.
DTS (Digital Theater Systems)
Digital Surround
DTS digital surround was developed to replace the analog
soundtracks of movies with a 6.1-channel digital sound
track, and is now rapidly gaining popularity in movie
theaters around the world. Digital Theater Systems Inc.
has developed a home theater system so that you can enjoy
the depth of sound and natural spatial representation of
DTS digital surround in your home. This system produces
practically distortion-free 6.1-channel sound (technically,
front left and right, center, surround left and right, and
LFE 0.1 (subwoofer) channels for a total of 5.1 channels).
This unit incorporates a DTS-ES decoder that enables 6.1-
channel reproduction by adding the surround back channel
to the existing 5.1-channel format.
ITU-R
ITU-R is the radio communication sector of the ITU
(International Telecommunication Union). ITU-R
recommends a standard speaker placement which is used
in many critical listening rooms, especially for mastering
purposes.
GLOSSARY
Audio information
104 En
GLOSSARY
LFE 0.1 channel
This channel reproduces low-frequency signals. The
frequency range of this channel is from 20 Hz to 120 Hz.
This channel is counted as 0.1 because it only enforces a
low-frequency range compared to the full-range
reproduced by the other 5/6 channels in Dolby Digital or
DTS 5.1/6.1-channel systems.
MP3
One of the audio compression methods used by MPEG. It
employs the irreversible compression method, which
achieves a high compression rate by thinning out the data
of hardly audible part to the human ears. It is said to be
capable of compressing the data quantity by about 1/11
(128 kbps) while maintaining a similar audio quality to
music CD.
Neo:6
Neo:6 decodes the conventional 2-channel sources for 6-
channel playback by the specific decoder. It enables
playback with the full-range channels with higher
separation just like digital discrete signal playback. There
are two modes available: “Music mode” for music sources
and “Cinema mode” for movie sources.
PCM (Linear PCM)
Linear PCM is a signal format under which an analog
audio signal is digitized, recorded and transmitted without
using any compression. This is used as a method of
recording CDs and DVD audio. The PCM system uses a
technique for sampling the size of the analog signal per
very small unit of time. Standing for “Pulse Code
Modulation”, the analog signal is encoded as pulses and
then modulated for recording.
Sampling frequency and number of
quantized bits
When digitizing an analog audio signal, the number of
times the signal is sampled per second is called the
sampling frequency, while the degree of fineness when
converting the sound level into a numeric value is called
the number of quantized bits. The range of rates that can
be played back is determined based on the sampling rate,
while the dynamic range representing the sound level
difference is determined by the number of quantized bits.
In principle, the higher the sampling frequency, the wider
the range of frequencies that can be played back, and the
higher the number of quantized bits, the more finely the
sound level can be reproduced.
WAV
Windows standard audio file format, which defines the
method of recording the digital data obtained by
converting audio signals. It does not specify the
compression (coding) method so a desired compression
method can be used with it. By default, it is compatible
with the PCM method (no compression) and some
compression methods including the ADPCM method.
WMA
An audio compression method developed by Microsoft
Corporation. It employs the irreversible compression
method, which achieves a high compression rate by
thinning out the data of hardly audible part to the human
ears. It is said to be capable of compressing the data
quantity by about 1/22 (64 kbps) while maintaining a
similar audio quality to music CD.
105 En
GLOSSARY
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
English
Component video signal
With the component video signal system, the video signal
is separated into the Y signal for the luminance and the PB
and P
R signals for the chrominance. Color can be
reproduced more faithfully with this system because each
of these signals is independent. The component signal is
also called the “color difference signal” because the
luminance signal is subtracted from the color signal. A
monitor with component input jacks is required in order to
output component signals.
Composite video signal
With the composite video signal system, the video signal
is composed of three basic elements of a video picture:
color, brightness and synchronization data. A composite
video jack on a video component transmits these three
elements combined.
S-video signal
With the S-video signal system, the video signal normally
transmitted using a pin cable is separated and transmitted
as the Y signal for the luminance and the C signal for the
chrominance through the S-video cable. Using the
S VIDEO jack eliminates video signal transmission loss
and allows recording and playback of even more beautiful
images.
CINEMA DSP
Since the Dolby Surround and DTS systems were
originally designed for use in movie theaters, their effect
is best felt in a theater having many speakers designed for
acoustic effects. Since home conditions, such as room
size, wall material, number of speakers, and so on, can
differ so widely, it is inevitable that there are differences in
the sound heard. Based on a wealth of actually measured
data, YAMAHA CINEMA DSP uses YAMAHA original
sound field technology to combine Dolby Pro Logic,
Dolby Digital and DTS systems to provide the audiovisual
experience of movie theater in the listening room of your
own home.
SILENT CINEMA
YAMAHA has developed a natural, realistic sound effect
DSP algorithm for headphones. Parameters for
headphones have been set for each sound field so that
accurate representations of all the sound field programs
can be enjoyed on headphones.
Virtual CINEMA DSP
YAMAHA has developed a Virtual CINEMA DSP
algorithm that allows you to enjoy DSP sound field
surround effects even without any surround speakers by
using virtual surround speakers. It is even possible to
enjoy Virtual CINEMA DSP using a minimal two-speaker
system that does not include a center speaker.
Video information Sound field program information
SPECIFICATIONS
106 En
AUDIO SECTION
Minimum RMS Output Power for Front, Center, Surround,
Surround back
1 kHz, 0.7% THD, 8 ....................................................... 110 W
Dynamic Power (IHF)
8/6/4/2 ....................................................... 130/165/195/240 W
Maximum Output Power [Europe model]
1 kHz, 0.7% THD, 4 ........................................................ 145 W
IEC Output Power [Europe model]
1 kHz, 0.06% THD, 8 ...................................................... 105 W
Damping Factor
20 Hz to 20 kHz, 8 ...................................................120 or more
Maximum Input Voltage
CD, etc. (1 kHz, 0.5% THD) ................................... 2.2 V or more
Frequency Response
CD, etc. ................................................. 10 Hz to 100 kHz, –3 dB
V-AUX .................................................... 10 Hz to 20 kHz, –3 dB
Total Harmonic Distortion
CD, etc. to Front L/R (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 50 W, 8 Ω)
................................................................................ 0.06% or less
Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network)
CD, etc. (250 mV) to Front L/R ........................... 100 dB or more
Residual Noise (IHF-A Network)
Front L/R ................................................................ 150 µV or less
Channel Separation (1 kHz/10 kHz)
CD (5.1 k terminated) to Front L/R ......... 60 dB/45 dB or more
Tone Control (Front L/R)
BASS Boost/Cut ...................................................... ±10 dB/60 Hz
TREBLE Boost/Cut .............................................. ±10 dB/20 kHz
Phones Output .......................................................... 150 mV/100
Input Sensitivity/Input Impedance
CD, etc. ................................................................. 200 mV/47 k
MULTI CH INPUT ............................................... 200 mV/47 k
Rated Output Voltage/Output Impedance
OUT (REC)........................................................... 200 mV/1.2 k
SUBWOOFER ............................................................ 4 V/1.2 k
Volume Control ........................... Mute/–80 dB to +16 dB/1 dB step
VIDEO SECTION
Video Format (Gray Back)
[Canada model] ....................................................................NTSC
[Other models] ........................................................................PAL
Video Format (Video Conversion) ................................. NTSC/PAL
Rated Input Voltage
Composite ..................................................................1 Vp-p/75
S-video (Y) .................................................................1 Vp-p/75
S-video (C) ..........................................................0.286 Vp-p/75
Component (Y) ..........................................................1 Vp-p/75
Component (PB, PR) .................................................0.7 Vp-p/75
Signal to Noise Ratio ................................................ 50 dB or more
Frequency Response (MONITOR OUT)
Component ............................................... 5 Hz to 60 MHz, –3 dB
FM SECTION
Tuning Range
[Canada model] .............................................. 87.5 to 107.9 MHz
[Other models] ............................................ 87.50 to 108.00 MHz
Usable Sensitivity (IHF)....................................... 1.0 µV (11.2 dBf)
Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF)
Mono/Stereo ............................................................. 76 dB/70 dB
Harmonic Distortion (1 kHz)
Mono/Stereo ................................................................ 0.2%/0.3%
Stereo Separation (1 kHz) ....................................................... 42 dB
Frequency Response ......................... 20 Hz to 15 kHz, +0.5, –2 dB
AM SECTION
Tuning Range
[Canada model] .................................................. 530 to 1710 kHz
[Other models] .................................................... 531 to 1611 kHz
Usable Sensitivity ............................................................. 300 µV/m
GENERAL
Power Supply
[Canada model] ................................................. AC 120 V, 60 Hz
[Australia model] ............................................... AC 240 V, 50 Hz
[Europe model] .................................................. AC 230 V, 50 Hz
Power Consumption
[Canada model] ..................................................... 350 W/440 VA
[Other models] .................................................................... 360 W
Standby Power Consumption ...................................... 0.1 W or less
AC Outlets
[Australia model] ......................................... 1 (100 W maximum)
[Canada model] ...................................2 (Total 100 W maximum)
[Europe model] ..................................... 2 (Total 50 W maximum)
Dimensions (W x H x D).................................. 435 x 161 x 391 mm
(17.1 x 6.3 x 15.4 in)
Weight .................................................................. 11.2 kg (24.7 lbs)
GPL/LGPL
This product includes software code subject to the GNU General
Public License (GPL) or the GNU Lesser General Public License
(LGPL). The copy, distribution, or change of this software code is
licensed under the terms of the GPL or the LGPL. The source
code is available at the following website:
http://www.global.yamaha.com/download/
The source code is also available on a physical media (such as a
CD-ROM) at actual cost.
Contact: AV products division, YAMAHA CORPORATION,
10-1 Nakazawa-cho, Hamamatsu 430-8650, Japan
In principle, the source code is offered for 3 years from the day of
purchase.
SPECIFICATIONS
APPENDIX-i
GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
Version 2, June 1991
Copyright (C) 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc. 59 Temple Place, Suite 330,
Boston, MA 02111-1307 USA Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim
copies of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.
Preamble
The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to share and
change it. By contrast, the GNU General Public License is intended to guarantee your
freedom to share and change free software–to make sure the software is free for all its
users. This General Public License applies to most of the Free Software Foundation’s
software and to any other program whose authors commit to using it. (Some other Free
Software Foundation software is covered by the GNU Library General Public License
instead.) You can apply it to your programs, too.
When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not price. Our General
Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute
copies of free software (and charge for this service if you wish), that you receive source
code or can get it if you want it, that you can change the software or use pieces of it in
new free programs; and that you know you can do these things.
To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid anyone to deny you
these rights or to ask you to surrender the rights. These restrictions translate to certain
responsibilities for you if you distribute copies of the software, or if you modify it.
For example, if you distribute copies of such a program, whether gratis or for a fee, you
must give the recipients all the rights that you have. You must make sure that they, too,
receive or can get the source code. And you must show them these terms so they know
their rights.
We protect your rights with two steps: (1) copyright the software, and (2) offer you this
license which gives you legal permission to copy, distribute and/or modify the software.
Also, for each author’s protection and ours, we want to make certain that everyone
understands that there is no warranty for this free software. If the software is modified
by someone else and passed on, we want its recipients to know that what they have is
not the original, so that any problems introduced by others will not reflect on the
original authors’ reputations.
Finally, any free program is threatened constantly by software patents. We wish to avoid
the danger that redistributors of a free program will individually obtain patent licenses,
in effect making the program proprietary. To prevent this, we have made it clear that any
patent must be licensed for everyone’s free use or not licensed at all.
The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and modification follow.
TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND
MODIFICATION
0. This License applies to any program or other work which contains a notice placed
by the copyright holder saying it may be distributed under the terms of this
General Public License. The “Program”, below, refers to any such program or
work, and a “work based on the Program” means either the Program or any
derivative work under copyright law: that is to say, a work containing the Program
or a portion of it, either verbatim or with modifications and/or translated into
another language. (Hereinafter, translation is included without limitation in the
term “modification”.) Each licensee is addressed as “you”.
Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not covered by this
License; they are outside its scope. The act of running the Program is not restricted, and
the output from the Program is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on
the Program (independent of having been made by running the Program). Whether that
is true depends on what the Program does.
1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Program’s source code as you
receive it, in any medium, provided that you conspicuously and appropriately
publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty;
keep intact all the notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any
warranty; and give any other recipients of the Program a copy of this License
along with the Program.
You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and you may at your
option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee.
2. You may modify your copy or copies of the Program or any portion of it, thus
forming a work based on the Program, and copy and distribute such modifications
or work under the terms of Section 1 above, provided that you also meet all of
these conditions:
a) You must cause the modified files to carry prominent notices stating that you
changed the files and the date of any change.
b) You must cause any work that you distribute or publish, that in whole or in
part contains or is derived from the Program or any part thereof, to be
licensed as a whole at no charge to all third parties under the terms of this
License.
c) If the modified program normally reads commands interactively when run,
you must cause it, when started running for such interactive use in the most
ordinary way, to print or display an announcement including an appropriate
copyright notice and a notice that there is no warranty (or else, saying that
you provide a warranty) and that users may redistribute the program under
these conditions, and telling the user how to view a copy of this License.
(Exception: if the Program itself is interactive but does not normally print
such an announcement, your work based on the Program is not required to
print an announcement.)
These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If identifiable sections
of that work are not derived from the Program, and can be reasonably considered
independent and separate works in themselves, then this License, and its terms, do
not apply to those sections when you distribute them as separate works. But when
you distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based on the
Program, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of this License,
whose permissions for other licensees extend to the entire whole, and thus to each
and every part regardless of who wrote it.
Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your rights to work
written entirely by you; rather, the intent is to exercise the right to control the
distribution of derivative or collective works based on the Program.
In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Program with the
Program (or with a work based on the Program) on a volume of a storage or distribution
medium does not bring the other work under the scope of this License.
3. You may copy and distribute the Program (or a work based on it, under Section 2)
in object code or executable form under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above
provided that you also do one of the following:
a) Accompany it with the complete corresponding machine-readable source
code, which must be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on
a medium customarily used for software interchange; or,
b) Accompany it with a written offer, valid for at least three years, to give any
third party, for a charge no more than your cost of physically performing
source distribution, a complete machine-readable copy of the corresponding
source code, to be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a
medium customarily used for software interchange; or,
c) Accompany it with the information you received as to the offer to distribute
corresponding source code. (This alternative is allowed only for
noncommercial distribution and only if you received the program in object
code or executable form with such an offer, in accord with Subsection b
above.)
The source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for making
modifications to it. For an executable work, complete source code means all the source
code for all modules it contains, plus any associated interface definition files, plus the
scripts used to control compilation and installation of the executable. However, as a
special exception, the source code distributed need not include anything that is normally
distributed (in either source or binary form) with the major components (compiler,
kernel, and so on) of the operating system on which the executable runs, unless that
component itself accompanies the executable.
If distribution of executable or object code is made by offering access to copy from a
designated place, then offering equivalent access to copy the source code from the same
place counts as distribution of the source code, even though third parties are not
compelled to copy the source along with the object code.
4. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Program except as
expressly provided under this License. Any attempt otherwise to copy, modify,
sublicense or distribute the Program is void, and will automatically terminate
your rights under this License. However, parties who have received copies, or
rights, from you under this License will not have their licenses terminated so long
as such parties remain in full compliance.
5. You are not required to accept this License, since you have not signed it.
However, nothing else grants you permission to modify or distribute the Program
or its derivative works. These actions are prohibited by law if you do not accept
this License. Therefore, by modifying or distributing the Program (or any work
based on the Program), you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so, and
all its terms and conditions for copying, distributing or modifying the Program or
works based on it.
6. Each time you redistribute the Program (or any work based on the Program), the
recipient automatically receives a license from the original licensor to copy,
distribute or modify the Program subject to these terms and conditions. You may
not impose any further restrictions on the recipients’ exercise of the rights granted
herein. You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties to this
License.
7. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent infringement or
for any other reason (not limited to patent issues), conditions are imposed on you
(whether by court order, agreement or otherwise) that contradict the conditions of
this License, they do not excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you
cannot distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this
License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you may not
distribute the Program at all. For example, if a patent license would not permit
royalty-free redistribution of the Program by all those who receive copies directly
or indirectly through you, then the only way you could satisfy both it and this
License would be to refrain entirely from distribution of the Program.
If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any particular
circumstance, the balance of the section is intended to apply and the section as a whole
is intended to apply in other circumstances.
It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any patents or other
property right claims or to contest validity of any such claims; this section has the sole
purpose of protecting the integrity of the free software distribution system, which is
implemented by public license practices. Many people have made generous
contributions to the wide range of software distributed through that system in reliance
on consistent application of that system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he or
she is willing to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot
impose that choice.
APPENDIX-ii
This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to be a consequence
of the rest of this License.
8. If the distribution and/or use of the Program is restricted in certain countries
either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces, the original copyright holder who
places the Program under this License may add an explicit geographical
distribution limitation excluding those countries, so that distribution is permitted
only in or among countries not thus excluded. In such case, this License
incorporates the limitation as if written in the body of this License.
9. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions of the
General Public License from time to time. Such new versions will be similar in
spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to address new problems or
concerns.
Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Program specifies a
version number of this License which applies to it and “any later version”, you have the
option of following the terms and conditions either of that version or of any later
version published by the Free Software Foundation. If the Program does not specify a
version number of this License, you may choose any version ever published by the Free
Software Foundation.
10. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Program into other free programs whose
distribution conditions are different, write to the author to ask for permission. For
software which is copyrighted by the Free Software Foundation, write to the Free
Software Foundation; we sometimes make exceptions for this. Our decision will
be guided by the two goals of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our
free software and of promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally.
NO WARRANTY
11. BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS
NO WARRANTY FOR THE PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY
APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING
THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE
PROGRAM “AS IS” WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER
EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND
PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE
PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL
NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION.
12. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED
TO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER
PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE THE PROGRAM AS
PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING
ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE
PROGRAM (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR
DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY
YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO
OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER PROGRAMS), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR
OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGES.
END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS
How to Apply These Terms to Your New Programs
If you develop a new program, and you want it to be of the greatest possible use to the
public, the best way to achieve this is to make it free software which everyone can
redistribute and change under these terms.
To do so, attach the following notices to the program. It is safest to attach them to the
start of each source file to most effectively convey the exclusion of warranty; and each
file should have at least the “copyright” line and a pointer to where the full notice is
found.
<one line to give the program’s name and a brief idea of what it does.>
Copyright (C) <year> <name of author>
This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under the
terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free Software
Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY
WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public
License for more details.
You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along with
this program; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place,
Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307 USA.
Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail.
If the program is interactive, make it output a short notice like this when it starts in an
interactive mode:
Gnomovision version 69, Copyright (C) year name of author Gnomovision comes with
ABSOLUTELY NO WARRANTY; for details type ‘show w’. This is free software, and
you are welcome to redistribute it under certain conditions; type ‘show c’ for details.
The hypothetical commands ‘show w’ and ‘show c’ should show the appropriate parts
of the General Public License. Of course, the commands you use may be called
something other than ‘show w’ and ‘show c’; they could even be mouse-clicks or menu
items–whatever suits your program.
You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or your school, if
any, to sign a “copyright disclaimer” for the program, if necessary. Here is a sample;
alter the names:
Yoyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all copyright interest in the program
‘Gnomovision’ (which makes passes at compilers) written by James Hacker.
<signature of Ty Coon>, 1 April 1989
Ty Coon, President of Vice
This General Public License does not permit incorporating your program into
proprietary programs. If your program is a subroutine library, you may consider it more
useful to permit linking proprietary applications with the library. If this is what you
want to do, use the GNU Library General Public License instead of this License.
GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
Version 2.1, February 1999
Copyright (C) 1991, 1999 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307 USA
Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document,
but changing it is not allowed.
[This is the first released version of the Lesser GPL. It also counts as the successor of
the GNU Library Public License, version 2, hence the version number 2.1.]
Preamble
The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to share and change
it. By contrast, the GNU General Public Licenses are intended to guarantee your freedom to
share and change free software–to make sure the software is free for all its users.
This license, the Lesser General Public License, applies to some specially designated
software packages–typically libraries–of the Free Software Foundation and other
authors who decide to use it. You can use it too, but we suggest you first think carefully
about whether this license or the ordinary General Public License is the better strategy
to use in any particular case, based on the explanations below.
When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom of use, not price. Our
General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute
copies of free software (and charge for this service if you wish); that you receive source
code or can get it if you want it; that you can change the software and use pieces of it in
new free programs; and that you are informed that you can do these things.
To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid distributors to deny you
these rights or to ask you to surrender these rights. These restrictions translate to certain
responsibilities for you if you distribute copies of the library or if you modify it.
For example, if you distribute copies of the library, whether gratis or for a fee, you must
give the recipients all the rights that we gave you. You must make sure that they, too,
receive or can get the source code. If you link other code with the library, you must
provide complete object files to the recipients, so that they can relink them with the
library after making changes to the library and recompiling it. And you must show them
these terms so they know their rights.
We protect your rights with a two-step method: (1) we copyright the library, and (2) we
offer you this license, which gives you legal permission to copy, distribute and/or
modify the library.
To protect each distributor, we want to make it very clear that there is no warranty for
the free library. Also, if the library is modified by someone else and passed on, the
recipients should know that what they have is not the original version, so that the
original author’s reputation will not be affected by problems that might be introduced
by others.
Finally, software patents pose a constant threat to the existence of any free program. We
wish to make sure that a company cannot effectively restrict the users of a free program
by obtaining a restrictive license from a patent holder. Therefore, we insist that any
patent license obtained for a version of the library must be consistent with the full
freedom of use specified in this license.
Most GNU software, including some libraries, is covered by the ordinary GNU General
Public License. This license, the GNU Lesser General Public License, applies to certain
designated libraries, and is quite different from the ordinary General Public License. We
use this license for certain libraries in order to permit linking those libraries into non-
free programs.
When a program is linked with a library, whether statically or using a shared library, the
combination of the two is legally speaking a combined work, a derivative of the original
library. The ordinary General Public License therefore permits such linking only if the
entire combination fits its criteria of freedom. The Lesser General Public License
permits more lax criteria for linking other code with the library.
We call this license the “Lesser” General Public License because it does Less to protect the
user’s freedom than the ordinary General Public License. It also provides other free
software developers Less of an advantage over competing non-free programs. These
disadvantages are the reason we use the ordinary General Public License for many libraries.
However, the Lesser license provides advantages in certain special circumstances.
For example, on rare occasions, there may be a special need to encourage the widest
possible use of a certain library, so that it becomes a de-facto standard. To achieve this,
non-free programs must be allowed to use the library. A more frequent case is that a free
library does the same job as widely used non-free libraries. In this case, there is little to
gain by limiting the free library to free software only, so we use the Lesser General
Public License.
APPENDIX-iii
In other cases, permission to use a particular library in non-free programs enables a
greater number of people to use a large body of free software. For example, permission
to use the GNU C Library in non-free programs enables many more people to use the
whole GNU operating system, as well as its variant, the GNU/Linux operating system.
Although the Lesser General Public License is Less protective of the users’ freedom, it
does ensure that the user of a program that is linked with the Library has the freedom
and the wherewithal to run that program using a modified version of the Library.
The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and modification follow. Pay
close attention to the difference between a “work based on the library” and a “work that
uses the library”. The former contains code derived from the library, whereas the latter
must be combined with the library in order to run.
TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND
MODIFICATION
0. This License Agreement applies to any software library or other program which
contains a notice placed by the copyright holder or other authorized party saying
it may be distributed under the terms of this Lesser General Public License (also
called “this License”). Each licensee is addressed as “you”.
A “library” means a collection of software functions and/or data prepared so as to be
conveniently linked with application programs (which use some of those functions and
data) to form executables.
The “Library”, below, refers to any such software library or work which has been
distributed under these terms. A “work based on the Library” means either the Library
or any derivative work under copyright law: that is to say, a work containing the Library
or a portion of it, either verbatim or with modifications and/or translated
straightforwardly into another language. (Hereinafter, translation is included without
limitation in the term “modification”.)
“Source code” for a work means the preferred form of the work for making
modifications to it. For a library, complete source code means all the source code for all
modules it contains, plus any associated interface definition files, plus the scripts used
to control compilation and installation of the library.
Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not covered by this
License; they are outside its scope. The act of running a program using the Library is
not restricted, and output from such a program is covered only if its contents constitute
a work based on the Library (independent of the use of the Library in a tool for writing
it). Whether that is true depends on what the Library does and what the program that
uses the Library does.
1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Library’s complete source
code as you receive it, in any medium, provided that you conspicuously and
appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice and
disclaimer of warranty; keep intact all the notices that refer to this License and to
the absence of any warranty; and distribute a copy of this License along with the
Library.
You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and you may at your
option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee.
2. You may modify your copy or copies of the Library or any portion of it, thus
forming a work based on the Library, and copy and distribute such modifications
or work under the terms of Section 1 above, provided that you also meet all of
these conditions:
a) The modified work must itself be a software library.
b) You must cause the files modified to carry prominent notices stating that you
changed the files and the date of any change.
c) You must cause the whole of the work to be licensed at no charge to all third
parties under the terms of this License.
d) If a facility in the modified Library refers to a function or a table of data to be
supplied by an application program that uses the facility, other than as an
argument passed when the facility is invoked, then you must make a good
faith effort to ensure that, in the event an application does not supply such
function or table, the facility still operates, and performs whatever part of its
purpose remains meaningful.
(For example, a function in a library to compute square roots has a purpose that is
entirely well-defined independent of the application. Therefore, Subsection 2d requires
that any application-supplied function or table used by this function must be optional: if
the application does not supply it, the square root function must still compute square
roots.)
These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If identifiable sections of
that work are not derived from the Library, and can be reasonably considered
independent and separate works in themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not
apply to those sections when you distribute them as separate works. But when you
distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based on the Library, the
distribution of the whole must be on the terms of this License, whose permissions for
other licensees extend to the entire whole, and thus to each and every part regardless of
who wrote it.
Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your rights to work
written entirely by you; rather, the intent is to exercise the right to control the
distribution of derivative or collective works based on the Library.
In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Library with the Library
(or with a work based on the Library) on a volume of a storage or distribution medium
does not bring the other work under the scope of this License.
3. You may opt to apply the terms of the ordinary GNU General Public License
instead of this License to a given copy of the Library. To do this, you must alter all
the notices that refer to this License, so that they refer to the ordinary GNU
General Public License, version 2, instead of to this License. (If a newer version
than version 2 of the ordinary GNU General Public License has appeared, then
you can specify that version instead if you wish.) Do not make any other change
in these notices.
Once this change is made in a given copy, it is irreversible for that copy, so the ordinary
GNU General Public License applies to all subsequent copies and derivative works
made from that copy.
This option is useful when you wish to copy part of the code of the Library into a
program that is not a library.
4. You may copy and distribute the Library (or a portion or derivative of it, under
Section 2) in object code or executable form under the terms of Sections 1 and 2
above provided that you accompany it with the complete corresponding machine-
readable source code, which must be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and
2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange.
If distribution of object code is made by offering access to copy from a designated
place, then offering equivalent access to copy the source code from the same place
satisfies the requirement to distribute the source code, even though third parties are not
compelled to copy the source along with the object code.
5. A program that contains no derivative of any portion of the Library, but is
designed to work with the Library by being compiled or linked with it, is called a
“work that uses the Library”. Such a work, in isolation, is not a derivative work of
the Library, and therefore falls outside the scope of this License.
However, linking a “work that uses the Library” with the Library creates an executable
that is a derivative of the Library (because it contains portions of the Library), rather
than a “work that uses the library”. The executable is therefore covered by this License.
Section 6 states terms for distribution of such executables.
When a “work that uses the Library” uses material from a header file that is part of the
Library, the object code for the work may be a derivative work of the Library even
though the source code is not. Whether this is true is especially significant if the work
can be linked without the Library, or if the work is itself a library. The threshold for this
to be true is not precisely defined by law.
If such an object file uses only numerical parameters, data structure layouts and
accessors, and small macros and small inline functions (ten lines or less in length), then
the use of the object file is unrestricted, regardless of whether it is legally a derivative
work. (Executables containing this object code plus portions of the Library will still fall
under Section 6.)
Otherwise, if the work is a derivative of the Library, you may distribute the object code
for the work under the terms of Section 6. Any executables containing that work also
fall under Section 6, whether or not they are linked directly with the Library itself.
6. As an exception to the Sections above, you may also combine or link a “work that
uses the Library” with the Library to produce a work containing portions of the
Library, and distribute that work under terms of your choice, provided that the
terms permit modification of the work for the customer’s own use and reverse
engineering for debugging such modifications.
You must give prominent notice with each copy of the work that the Library is used in it
and that the Library and its use are covered by this License. You must supply a copy of
this License. If the work during execution displays copyright notices, you must include
the copyright notice for the Library among them, as well as a reference directing the
user to the copy of this License. Also, you must do one of these things:
a) Accompany the work with the complete corresponding machine-readable
source code for the Library including whatever changes were used in the
work (which must be distributed under Sections 1 and 2 above); and, if the
work is an executable linked with the Library, with the complete machine-
readable “work that uses the Library”, as object code and/or source code, so
that the user can modify the Library and then relink to produce a modified
executable containing the modified Library. (It is understood that the user
who changes the contents of definitions files in the Library will not
necessarily be able to recompile the application to use the modified
definitions.)
b) Use a suitable shared library mechanism for linking with the Library. A
suitable mechanism is one that (1) uses at run time a copy of the library
already present on the user’s computer system, rather than copying library
functions into the executable, and (2) will operate properly with a modified
version of the library, if the user installs one, as long as the modified version
is interface-compatible with the version that the work was made with.
c) Accompany the work with a written offer, valid for at least three years, to give
the same user the materials specified in Subsection 6a, above, for a charge no
more than the cost of performing this distribution.
d) If distribution of the work is made by offering access to copy from a
designated place, offer equivalent access to copy the above specified
materials from the same place.
e) Verify that the user has already received a copy of these materials or that you
have already sent this user a copy.
For an executable, the required form of the “work that uses the Library” must include
any data and utility programs needed for reproducing the executable from it. However,
as a special exception, the materials to be distributed need not include anything that is
normally distributed (in either source or binary form) with the major components
(compiler, kernel, and so on) of the operating system on which the executable runs,
unless that component itself accompanies the executable.
APPENDIX-iv
It may happen that this requirement contradicts the license restrictions of other
proprietary libraries that do not normally accompany the operating system. Such a
contradiction means you cannot use both them and the Library together in an executable
that you distribute.
7. You may place library facilities that are a work based on the Library side-by-side
in a single library together with other library facilities not covered by this License,
and distribute such a combined library, provided that the separate distribution of
the work based on the Library and of the other library facilities is otherwise
permitted, and provided that you do these two things:
a) Accompany the combined library with a copy of the same work based on the
Library, uncombined with any other library facilities. This must be distributed
under the terms of the Sections above.
b) Give prominent notice with the combined library of the fact that part of it is a
work based on the Library, and explaining where to find the accompanying
uncombined form of the same work.
8. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, link with, or distribute the Library except
as expressly provided under this License. Any attempt otherwise to copy, modify,
sublicense, link with, or distribute the Library is void, and will automatically
terminate your rights under this License. However, parties who have received
copies, or rights, from you under this License will not have their licenses
terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance.
9. You are not required to accept this License, since you have not signed it.
However, nothing else grants you permission to modify or distribute the Library
or its derivative works. These actions are prohibited by law if you do not accept
this License. Therefore, by modifying or distributing the Library (or any work
based on the Library), you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so, and
all its terms and conditions for copying, distributing or modifying the Library or
works based on it.
10. Each time you redistribute the Library (or any work based on the Library), the
recipient automatically receives a license from the original licensor to copy,
distribute, link with or modify the Library subject to these terms and conditions.
You may not impose any further restrictions on the recipients’ exercise of the
rights granted herein. You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third
parties with this License.
11. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent infringement or
for any other reason (not limited to patent issues), conditions are imposed on you
(whether by court order, agreement or otherwise) that contradict the conditions of
this License, they do not excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you
cannot distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this
License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you may not
distribute the Library at all. For example, if a patent license would not permit
royalty-free redistribution of the Library by all those who receive copies directly
or indirectly through you, then the only way you could satisfy both it and this
License would be to refrain entirely from distribution of the Library.
If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any particular
circumstance, the balance of the section is intended to apply, and the section as a whole
is intended to apply in other circumstances.
It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any patents or other
property right claims or to contest validity of any such claims; this section has the sole
purpose of protecting the integrity of the free software distribution system which is
implemented by public license practices. Many people have made generous
contributions to the wide range of software distributed through that system in reliance
on consistent application of that system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he or
she is willing to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot
impose that choice.
This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to be a consequence
of the rest of this License.
12. If the distribution and/or use of the Library is restricted in certain countries either
by patents or by copyrighted interfaces, the original copyright holder who places
the Library under this License may add an explicit geographical distribution
limitation excluding those countries, so that distribution is permitted only in or
among countries not thus excluded. In such case, this License incorporates the
limitation as if written in the body of this License.
13. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions of the
Lesser General Public License from time to time. Such new versions will be
similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to address new
problems or concerns.
Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Library specifies a version
number of this License which applies to it and “any later version”, you have the option
of following the terms and conditions either of that version or of any later version
published by the Free Software Foundation. If the Library does not specify a license
version number, you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software
Foundation.
14. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Library into other free programs whose
distribution conditions are incompatible with these, write to the author to ask for
permission. For software which is copyrighted by the Free Software Foundation,
write to the Free Software Foundation; we sometimes make exceptions for this.
Our decision will be guided by the two goals of preserving the free status of all
derivatives of our free software and of promoting the sharing and reuse of
software generally.
NO WARRANTY
15. BECAUSE THE LIBRARY IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO
WARRANTY FOR THE LIBRARY, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY
APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING
THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE
LIBRARY “AS IS” WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER
EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND
PERFORMANCE OF THE LIBRARY IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE
LIBRARY PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL
NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION.
16. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED
TO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER
PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE THE LIBRARY AS
PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING
ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE
LIBRARY (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA
BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR
THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE LIBRARY TO OPERATE WITH
ANY OTHER SOFTWARE), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY
HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS
How to Apply These Terms to Your New Libraries
If you develop a new library, and you want it to be of the greatest possible use to the
public, we recommend making it free software that everyone can redistribute and
change. You can do so by permitting redistribution under these terms (or, alternatively,
under the terms of the ordinary General Public License).
To apply these terms, attach the following notices to the library. It is safest to attach
them to the start of each source file to most effectively convey the exclusion of
warranty; and each file should have at least the “copyright” line and a pointer to where
the full notice is found.
<one line to give the library’s name and a brief idea of what it does.>
Copyright (C) <year> <name of author>
This library is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under the
terms of the GNU Lesser General Public License as published by the Free
Software Foundation; either version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any
later version.
This library is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY
WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU Lesser General
Public License for more details.
You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public License
along with this library; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 59
Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307 USA
Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail.
You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or your school, if
any, to sign a “copyright disclaimer” for the library, if necessary. Here is a sample; alter
the names:
Yoyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all copyright interest in the library ‘Frob’ (a
library for tweaking knobs) written by James Random Hacker.
<signature of Ty Coon>, 1 April 1990
Ty Coon, President of Vice
That’s all there is to it!
APPENDIX-v
LIST OF REMOTE CONTROL CODES
LISTE DES CODES DE COMMANDE
LISTE DER FERNBEDIENUNGSCODES
LISTA DEI CODICI DI TELECOMANDO
LISTA DE CÓDIGOS DE MANDO A DISTANCIA
LIJST MET AFSTANDSBEDIENINGSCODES
СПИСОК КОДОВ ДИСТАНЦИОННОГО УПРАВЛЕНИЯ
CABLE TV RECEIVER
ABC 10003
ADB 11230, 11269
AICHI DENSHI11512
AMSTRAD 11222
AUNA 11230, 11269
AUSTAR 10276
BIRMINGHAM
CABLE COMMUNICATIONS
10276
BRITISH TELECOM
10003
CABLE & WIRELESS
11068
DX ANTENNA
11500, 11502
FASTWEB 11630
FRANCE TELECOM
10817, 11734
FREEBOX 11482
FUJITSU 11497
GENERAL INSTRUMENT
10003, 10276
GOLDEN CHANNEL
11110
HOMECHOICE11590
JERROLD 10003, 10276
MACAB 10817
MADRITEL 11230
MASPRO 11510
MOTOROLA 10276, 11106,
11483
MR ZAP 11112
MR. ZAP 11112
NEC 11496
NOKIA 11569
NOOS 10817, 11624
NTL 10003, 11060,
11068
ONO 11068
OPTUS 10276
PACE 11060, 11068,
11577
PANASONIC 10375, 11488
PHILIPS 10817
PIONEER 11021, 11500
PVP STEREO
VISUAL MATRIX
10003
SAGEM 10817, 11112,
11624
SAMSUNG 11060, 11666
SATBOX 10375
SCIENTIFIC ATLANTA
11510
SONY 11460
STARCOM 10003
SUMITOMO 11500, 11503,
11504
SUPERCABLE
10276
TELE DANMARK
11016
TELEWEST 11068
THOMSON 11110, 11734
TORX 10003
TOSHIBA 11509
TRI-VISION 11257
UNITED CABLE
10003
UPC 11582
US ELECTRONICS
10276
CABLE/PVR
COMBINATION
FRANCE TELECOM11734
FREEBOX 11482
MOTOROLA 11106
NOKIA 11569
NOOS 11624
SUPERCABLE 10276
THOMSON 11734
UPC 11582
DBS/PVR
COMBINATION
@SAT 11300
ATSAT 11300
BRITISH SKY BROADCASTING
11175
CANALSATELLITE
11339
COMAG 11412
DIGIFUSION 11645
DIRECTV 10099, 10639
DREAM MULTIMEDIA
11237
ECHOSTAR 10610
FORCE 11194
FOXTEL 11356
GBSAT 11214
HUMAX 11176, 11427,
11670, 11675
KATHREIN 11221, 11561
MAXIMUM 11334
NOKIA 11310, 11311
OPENTEL 11412
PACE 11423, 11623
PANASONIC 11320
PHILIPS 10099
REBOX 11214
SAGEM 11253, 11307,
11692
SHARP 11489
SIEMENS 11657
SKY 11175, 11848,
11850
SKYPLUS 11412
SONY 10639
STRONG 11300
THOMSON 11534, 11900
TOPFIELD 11206, 11545
TPS 11253, 11307
ZEHNDER 11075, 11412
SATELLITE RECEIVER
@SAT 11300
@SKY 11334
ABSAT 10713
ADB 10642, 11259,
11367, 11473,
11491
AIWA 11514, 11515
AKAI 10200
ALBA 10713, 11284
ALLSAT 10200, 11017,
11043
ALLSONIC 10369
ALLTECH 10713
ALLVISION 11232, 11334,
11412
AMITRONICA 10713
AMPERE 10132
AMSTRAD 10132, 10713,
10847, 10885,
11113, 11175
ANGLO 10713
ANKARO 10369, 10713,
11279
ANTSAT 11017, 11083
ARCON 11043, 11075,
11279
ARNION 11300
ASAT 10200
ASCI 10114, 11334,
11461
ASLF 10713
ASSCOM 10853
ASTON 11129
ASTRA 10713
ASTRO 10133, 10173,
10369, 10658,
11099, 11100,
11113
ATSAT 11300
ATSKY 11334
AUDIOLINE 11429
AURORA 10879
AUSTAR 10642, 10879,
11259
AXIS 10369, 11111
B@YTRONIC 11412
BENTLEY WALKER
11017
BEST 10369
BIG SAT 11457
BLACK DIAMOND
11284
BLAUPUNKT 10173
BLUE SKY 10713
BOCA 10132, 10713,
11232, 11366,
11474
BOSTON 11251
BRAINWAVE 10658
BRITISH SKY BROADCASTING
10847, 11175
BROCO 10713
BSKYB 10847, 11175
BT 11296
BUBU SAT 10713
BUSH 11284, 11471,
11672
CANAL DIGITAL
10853, 11622
CANAL+ 10853
CANALSATELLITE
10853, 11339,
11853
CENTREX 11457
CGV 11413
CHESS 10114, 10713,
11334
CITYCOM 10299, 10818,
11075, 11176,
11232
COLOMBIA 10132
COLUMBIA 10132
COMAG 10132, 11232,
11366, 11412,
11413, 11579
CONDOR 10369
CONRAD 10132, 10369
COSHIP 11457
CYRUS 10200
D-BOX 10873
DAEWOO 10713, 11111,
11296, 11743
DELTASAT 11075
DGTEC 11242
DIGENIUS 10299, 11161
DIGIALITY 11685
DIGIFUSION 11645
DIGIQUEST 11457, 11473
DIGISAT 11232
DIGISKY 11457
DIGITALL WORLD
11227
DIJAM 11296
DIRECTV 10099, 10639
DISTRATEL 10885, 11283,
11704
DMT 11075
DNT 10200
DREAM MULTIMEDIA
11237
DUNE 10369
DX ANTENNA 11530
ECHOSTAR 10167, 10610,
10713, 10853,
11200, 11323,
11409, 11467,
11473, 11477
EINHELL 10132, 10713
ELAP 10587, 10713,
11129, 11567
ELSAT 10713
ELTA 10200, 10369
EMME ESSE 10369
EMTECH 11214
ENGEL 10713, 11017,
11251
APPENDIX-vi
EURIEULT 10885
EUROLINE 11251
EUROPHON 10132, 10299
EUROSKY 10114, 10132,
10262, 10299,
10369
EUROSTAR 10818, 10898
EUTELSAT 10713
FENNER 10369, 10713
FERGUSON 10711, 11291
FINLUX 10573
FLAIR MATE 10713
FMD 11457
FORCE 11194
FORTEC STAR 11017, 11083
FOXTEL 10879, 11356
FRACARRO 10125
FTEMAXIMAL10369, 10713,
11556
FUBA 10173, 10262,
10299, 10369,
10573, 11161,
11214
FUGIONKYO 10125
GALAXIS 10369, 10853,
11111, 11557
GARDINER 10818
GARNET 11075
GBSAT 11214
GECCO 11157, 11273,
11412
GENERAL SATELLITE
11176
GF 11043
GF STAR 11043
GLOBO 11251, 11626
GOD DIGITAL 10200
GOLD BOX 10292, 10853
GOLDEN INTERSTAR
11283
GOLDVISION 11017
GOODMANS 11246, 11284
GRUNDIG 10173, 10847,
10853, 10879,
11291
HAENSEL & GRETEL
10132
HANDAN 11622
HANSEATIC 11099, 11100
HAUPPAUGE 11672
HB 11214
HDT 11011
HE@D 11279
HIRSCHMANN10125, 10173,
10299, 10369,
10573, 11111,
11232, 11412
HITACHI 11250, 11284,
11518, 11523,
11525
HUMAX 11176, 11225,
11427, 11648,
11670, 11675,
11743
HUTH 10132, 11017,
11075
HYUNDAI 11011, 11075
ICAN 11367
ID DIGITAL 11176
ILLUSION SAT11557
IMPERIAL 11429
INGELEN 10114
INTERNATIONAL
10132
INTERSTAR 11017, 11214
JAEGER 11334
JVC 11507, 11531,
11532
K-SAT 10713
KAMM 10713
KAON 11300
KATELCO 11111
KATHREIN 10114, 10173,
10200, 10249,
10442, 10480,
10504, 10553,
10622, 10658,
10713, 10818,
10898, 11221,
11416, 11561,
11567
KENNEX 10125
KENWOOD 10853
KEY WEST 10132
KITON 10114
KOSCOM 11043
KOSMOS 10442
KREILING 10114, 10249,
10658, 11461
KREISELMEYER
10173
L&S ELECTRONIC
10132, 10369,
11043, 11334
LABGEAR 11296
LASAT 10132, 10173,
10299, 10369
LEMON 11461
LENCO 10369, 10713
LENOXX 11611
LG 11075, 11226
LIFESAT 10132, 10299,
10369, 10713,
11043
LIFETEC 10587
LODOS 11284
LOGIX 11017, 11075
LORENZEN 10132, 10299,
10867, 11161,
11579
LUPUS 10369
LUXOR 10573
LUXORIT 11681
M VISION 11557
MANATA 10132, 10713
MANHATTAN 11017, 11083
MARANTZ 10200
MASPRO 10173, 10713,
11520, 11530
MATSUI 10173, 11284
MAXIMUM 11075, 11334,
11685
MDS 11225
MEDIACOM 11206
MEDIASAT 10292, 10853
MEDION 10132, 10299,
10369, 10713,
11043, 11075,
11232, 11334,
11412, 11626
MEDISON 10713
MEGA 10200
MELECTRONIC
10818
METRONIC 10132, 10713,
10818, 10885,
11279, 11283,
11334, 11691,
11704
METZ 10173
MICRO 10713
MICRO ELEKTRONIC
10713
MICROMAXX 10299, 10369
MICROSTAR 11075
MICROTEC 10713
MORGAN'S 10132, 10200,
10713, 11232,
11412
MULTICHOICE10642, 10879
MYRYAD 10200
MYSAT 10713
NEC 11270, 11519
NEOTION 11334
NETGEM 11322
NETSAT 10099
NEUF TELECOM
11322
NEUF TV 11322
NEUHAUS 10713
NEULING 10132, 11232
NEUSAT 10587, 10713,
11279
NEVELING 11161
NEXTWAVE 11017
NIKKO 10200, 10713
NOKIA 10573, 10751,
10853, 10873,
11023, 11223,
11310, 11311,
11723
NORDMENDE 11611
OKANO 10442
OPENTEL 11232, 11412
OPTEX 10114, 10713,
11043, 11283
OPTUS 10879
ORBIS 11232, 11334,
11412
ORBITECH 10114, 10541,
11099, 11100
P/SAT 11232
PACE 10200, 10329,
10720, 10847,
10853, 10867,
11175, 11323,
11423, 11623,
11850
PACIFIC 11284
PACKARD BELL
11111
PALCOM 10299, 10587,
11161, 11409
PANASAT 10879
PANASONIC 10847, 11104,
11304, 11320,
11404, 11508,
11526, 11527,
11528
PANDA 10173
PANSAT 11011
PATRIOT 10132
PHILIPS 10099, 10133,
10173, 10200,
10292, 10818,
10853, 10898,
11114, 11118,
11672
PHONOTREND11017, 11200
PILOTIME 11339
PINO 11334
PIONEER 10292, 10329,
10352, 10853,
11308
PLASMATIC 10442
PMB 10713
PREISNER 10132, 10262,
11113, 11366
PREMIER 10292
PREMIERE 10292, 10873,
11429
PRIMACOM 11111
QUADRAL 10369
QUELLE 10299
RADIOLA 10200
RADIX 11113
RCA 11291
REBOX 11214
RED STAR 10369
REGAL 11251
RFT 10200, 10541
ROADSTAR 10713, 10853
ROVER 10369, 10713
S-ZWO 11207
SAB 11251
SABA 10885
SAGEM 10820, 11114,
11253, 11307,
11690, 11691,
11692, 11694
SAMSUNG 10853, 11017,
11206, 11243,
11293, 11458,
11570
SANYO 11219
SAT CONTROL11300
SAT TEAM 10713
SATEC 10713
SATELCO 10369, 11232
SATPLUS 11100
SATSTATION 11083
SCHAUB LORENZ
11214
SCHNEIDER 11206, 11251
SCHWAIGER 10132, 10504,
10587, 10885,
11075, 11083,
11111, 11334,
11412, 11457,
11474
SCS 10299
SEDEA ELECTRONIQUE
10125, 10132,
11206, 11283
SEG 10114, 10369,
11075, 11251,
11626
SEPTIMO 10885
SERINO 10610
SERVISAT 10713, 11251
SHARP 10541, 11489,
11513, 11517
SIEMENS 10173, 11657
SILVA 10299
SKANTIN 10713
SKARDIN 10587
SKR 10713
SKT 11449
SKY 10099, 10847,
11175, 11848,
11849, 11850
SKY ITALIA 11848, 11849
SKY XL 11251, 11412
SKY+ 11175
SKYMASTER 10587, 10713,
11075, 11200,
11409, 11611
SKYMAX 10200
SKYPLUS 11232, 11334,
11412
APPENDIX-vii
SKYSAT 10114, 10713
SKYVISION 11334
SL 10132, 10299
SM ELECTRONIC
10587, 10713,
11200, 11409
SMART 10132, 10299,
10713, 11113,
11157, 11232,
11273, 11413
SONY 10282, 10292,
10639, 10847,
10853, 11524,
11558
SR 10132
STARLITE 10200
STREAM 11848
STRONG 10125, 10132,
10369, 10713,
10820, 10853,
10879, 11146,
11157, 11258,
11300, 11409,
11430, 11626
SUNNY 11300
SUNNY SOUND
10369
SUNSAT 10713
SUNSTAR 10132, 10369,
10642
SYSTEC 11334
TARBS 11225
TBOSTON 11457
TEAC 11225, 11227,
11251, 11322
TECHNISAT 10114, 10200,
10262, 10541,
11099, 11100,
11322
TECHNOMATE
11283, 11610
TECHNOSONIC
11672
TECHNOTREND
11429
TECHNOWELT10132
TECHSAN 11017
TECHWOOD 10114, 11284
TEKCOMM 11017
TELE SYSTEM ELECTRONIC
11611
TELECIEL 11043
TELEKA 10262
TELESTAR 10114, 11099,
11100, 11251,
11334
TELESYSTEM 11251, 11409
TELETECH 10114
TELEVES 10132, 11214,
11300
TELEWIRE 11232
TEVEBOX 11681
TEVION 10713, 11409,
11622
THOMSON 10292, 10711,
10713, 10820,
10847, 10853,
11046, 11175,
11291, 11498,
11534, 11900
TINY 11672
TIOKO 10132
TOKAI 10200
TONNA 10587, 10713,
11611
TOPFIELD 11206, 11207,
11208, 11545,
11722
TOSHIBA 11501, 11516,
11530
TPS 10820, 11253,
11307
TRIAD 10372
TRIAX 10114, 10132,
10200, 10713,
10853, 11099,
11113, 11157,
11227, 11251,
11291, 11296
TT-MICRO 11429
TURNSAT 10713
TWINNER 10713
UEC 10879
UNIDEN 11521
UNISAT 10132, 10200
UNITED 11251
UNIVERSUM 10114, 10173,
10299, 11099,
11251
VAN HUNEN 11161
VARIOSAT 10173
VEGA 10369
VENTANA 10200
VESTEL 10114, 11251
VISIONIC 10125, 11279,
11283
VISIOSAT 10114, 10713,
11129, 11457
VTECH 10818
WISI 10173, 10299,
10372, 10406,
10638
WISPLUS 11258
WORLDSAT 10114, 11214,
11251, 11323
XRYPTON 10369
XSAT 10713, 10847,
11214, 11323
XTREME 11300
YAKUMO 11413
ZEHNDER 10114, 10369,
10504, 10818,
11075, 11232,
11251, 11334,
11412, 11413
HDTV DECORDER
PIONEER 11010
SHARP 11010
OTHER VIDEO
ACCESSORIES
ABS 11272
ALIENWARE 11272
CYBERPOWER11272
GATEWAY 11272
HAUPPAUGE 11408
HEWLETT PACKARD
11272
HOWARD COMPUTERS
11272
HP 11272
HUSH 11272
IBUYPOWER 11272
LINKSYS 11272
MEDIA CENTER PC
11272
MICROSOFT 11272
MIND 11272
NIVEUS MEDIA
11272
NORTHGATE 11272
PACKARD BELL
11272
PINNACLE SYSTEMS
11447
PIONEER 11010
RICAVISION 11272
SHARP 11010
SONY 11272, 11733
STACK 9 11272
SYSTEMAX 11272
TOSHIBA 11272
TOUCH 11272
VIEWSONIC 11272
VOODOO 11272
ZT GROUP 11272
TV
A.R. SYSTEMS20374, 20455
ACER 21339
ACURA 20009
ADL 21217
ADMIRAL 20093, 20163,
20264
ADVENT 20817
AGB 20516
AIKO 20009, 20264
AIM 20805
AIWA 21180
AKAI 20009, 20035,
20037, 20163,
20178, 20208,
20218, 20264,
20361, 20371,
20433, 20473,
20480, 20516,
20548, 20556,
20602, 20606,
20631, 20696,
20714, 20715,
20729, 20745,
20753, 21207
AKIBA 20037, 20218,
20455
AKITO 20037
AKURA 20009, 20037,
20218, 20264,
20412, 20668,
20714, 21037,
21982
ALBA 20009, 20037,
20163, 20218,
20355, 20371,
20418, 20443,
20487, 20668,
20714, 21037
ALL-TEL 20865
ALLSTAR 20037
AMPLIVISION 20370
AMSTRAD 20009, 20037,
20218, 20264,
20371, 20412,
20433, 20516,
21037
ANAM 20009, 20250
ANAM NATIONAL2
0250
ANDERSSON 21149, 21163
ANGLO 20009, 20264
ANITECH 20009, 20037
ANSONIC 20009, 20292,
20370, 20668
APEX DIGITAL20890, 21217
ARDEM 20037, 20714
ARISTONA 20037, 20556
ART 21037
ASORA 20009
ASUKA 20218, 20264
AUDIOSONIC 20009, 20037,
20109, 20218,
20264, 20370,
20374, 20486,
20714, 20715
AUDIOTON 20264, 20486
AUDIOWORLD20698
AWA 20009, 20108,
20606
AXXENT 20009
BAIRD 20208
BANG & OLUFSEN
20565
BASIC LINE 20009, 20037,
20218, 20374,
20455, 20556,
20668, 21037,
21163
BAUER 20805
BAUR 20037, 20361,
20512
BEAUMARK 20178
BEKO 20037, 20370,
20418, 20486,
20606, 20714,
20715, 20808,
21037
BELSON 20698
BEON 20037, 20418
BERTHEN 20668
BESTAR 20037, 20370,
20374
BESTAR-DAEWOO
20374
BLACK DIAMOND
20614, 20821,
21037, 21909
BLAUPUNKT 20170, 20195,
20200, 20327,
20455
BLUE SKY 20037, 20218,
20455, 20487,
20556, 20668,
20714, 20715,
20808, 21037,
21191
BLUESKY 21388
BOOTS 20009
BOXLIGHT 20736
BPL 20037, 20896
BRANDT 20109, 20335,
20560, 20625,
20714
BRINKMANN 20037, 20418,
20486, 20668
BTC 20218
BUSH 20009, 20037,
20208, 20218,
20264, 20355,
20361, 20371,
20374, 20487,
20556, 20614,
20617, 20660,
20668, 20698,
20714, 20778,
21037, 21243
BYDESIGN 21309, 21311
APPENDIX-viii
CANTON 20218
CARAD 20610, 20668,
21037
CARENA 20037, 20455
CARVER 20054, 20170
CASCADE 20009, 20037
CASIO 20037
CATHAY 20037
CCE 20037
CELEBRITY 20000
CELESTIAL 20820, 20821
CENTREX 20780
CENTRUM 21037
CENTURION 20037
CGE 20074, 20370,
20418
CHANGHONG 20821
CIMLINE 20009, 20218
CITIZEN 20060
CITY 20009
CLARIVOX 20037
CLATRONIC 20009, 20037,
20218, 20264,
20370, 20371,
20606, 20714
CLAYTON 21037
CONDOR 20009, 20037,
20264, 20370,
20411, 20418
CONIA 20754
CONRAC 20808
CONTEC 20009, 20037
CONTINENTAL EDISON
20109, 20487
COSMEL 20037
CROSLEY 20054, 20074
CROWN 20009, 20037,
20053, 20208,
20370, 20412,
20418, 20486,
20487, 20606,
20712, 20714,
20715, 21037
CS ELECTRONICS
20218
CURTIS MATHES
20054, 20060,
20093, 20145
CYBERTRON 20218
CYTRONIX 21298
D-VISION 20556
DAEWOO 20009, 20037,
20218, 20374,
20556, 20634,
20865, 20880,
21307, 21909
DAINICHI 20218
DANSAI 20009, 20035,
20037, 20208
DANSETTE 20412
DANTAX 20714, 20715
DAVIS 20736
DAYTEK 21207
DAYTON 20009, 21207
DAYTRON 20374
DE GRAAF 20208, 20548
DECCA 20037, 20516
DENKO 20264
DENON 20145, 20511
DENVER 20037, 20587,
21189
DESMET 20009, 20037
DIAMANT 20037
DIAMOND 20825
DICK SMITH ELECTRONICS
20698
DIGATRON 20037
DIGILINE 20105, 20668
DIGITAL LIFE 20780, 20872,
20891
DIGITOR 20037, 20698
DIGIX 20880
DIXI 20009, 20037
DL 20891
DMTECH 21338
DOMEOS 20668
DOMLAND 20394
DREAM VISION
21704
DSE 20698
DUAL 20037, 20352,
20394
DVX 20891
DYNATRON 20037
E-ELITE 20218
ECCO 20773
EDISON-MINERVA
20487
EIKI 20735
ELBE 20292, 20411,
20435, 20516,
20610
ELBE-SHARP 20516
ELECTROBAND
20000
ELECTROGRAPH
21755
ELEKTA 20264
ELIN 20009, 20037,
20361, 20548
ELITE 20218
ELTA 20009, 20264
EMERSON 20037, 20178,
20361, 20370,
20371, 20486,
20714, 21909
ENVISION 21365
ERRES 20037
ESC 20037
ETRON 20001, 20009
EUROFEEL 20264
EUROMAN 20037, 20264
EUROPA 20037
EUROPHON 20516
EVOLUTION 21756
EXQUISIT 20037
FENNER 20009, 20374
FERGUSON 20037, 20053,
20109, 20195,
20335, 20443,
20548, 20560,
20625, 21037
FIDELITY 20037, 20163,
20264, 20361,
20371, 20412,
20512
FINLANDIA 20163, 20208,
20346, 20548
FINLUX 20037, 20105,
20346, 20411,
20473, 20480,
20492, 20516,
20631, 20714,
20715, 20808
FIRSTLINE 20009, 20037,
20208, 20361,
20374, 20411,
20556, 20668,
20714, 20808,
21037, 21191,
21307, 21363,
21388
FISHER 20208, 20370,
20555
FLINT 20037, 20218,
20264, 20455,
20610
FORCE 21149
FORMENTI 20037
FORTRESS 20093
FRABA 20037, 20370
FRIAC 20009, 20037,
20370, 20610
FRONTECH 20009, 20163,
20264
FUJIMARO 20865
FUJITSU 20009, 20683,
20853
FUJITSU GENERAL
20009, 20683
FUJITSU SIEMENS
21298
FUNAI 20264, 20668
GALAXI 20037
GALAXIS 20037, 20370
GATEWAY 21755, 21756
GBC 20009, 20218,
20374
GE 20093, 20178,
20560, 20625,
20735
GEC 20037, 20163,
20361, 20516
GELOSO 20009, 20374
GENERAL TECHNIC
20009
GENESIS 20009
GENEXXA 20009, 20163,
20218
GERICOM 20808, 20865,
20880, 21206,
21217, 21298
GOLDFUNK 20668
GOLDSTAR 20001, 20037,
20109, 20163,
20178, 20361,
20377, 20606,
20714, 20715
GOODING 20487
GOODMANS 20009, 20035,
20037, 20218,
20264, 20335,
20360, 20371,
20374, 20480,
20487, 20516,
20556, 20560,
20634, 20668,
20714, 20808,
20880, 21037,
21163, 21909
GORENJE 20370
GPM 20218
GRADIENTE 20053, 20170
GRAETZ 20163, 20361,
20371, 20487,
20714
GRANADA 20037, 20108,
20163, 20208,
20226, 20473,
20516, 20548,
20560
GRANDIN 20009, 20037,
20163, 20374,
20455, 20610,
20668, 20714,
20715, 20865,
20880, 21037,
21191, 21374,
21388
GRUNDIG 20037, 20195,
20443, 20487,
20556, 20587,
20740, 21223
H&B 20808
HAIER 20698, 20891
HALLMARK 20178
HANIMEX 20218
HANSEATIC 20009, 20037,
20361, 20377,
20394, 20556,
20634, 20714,
20808
HANTAREX 20009, 20037,
20516, 20829,
20865, 21338
HANTOR 20037
HARMAN/KARDON
20054
HARSPER 20865
HARWA 20773, 21196,
21269
HARWOOD 20009, 20037,
20412, 20487
HAVERMY 20093
HCM 20009, 20037,
20218, 20264,
20412, 20418
HELIOS 20865
HEMA 20009
HIKONA 20218
HINARI 20009, 20037,
20218, 20264,
20355
HISAWA 20218, 20455,
20610, 20714
HISENSE 20508, 20556,
20780, 21363
HITACHI 20037, 20105,
20108, 20109,
20145, 20163,
20178, 20225,
20473, 20480,
20481, 20492,
20516, 20548,
20578, 20634,
20744, 20797,
21037, 21149,
21194, 21576
HITACHI FUJIAN
20108
HITSU 20009, 20218,
20455, 20610
HOEHER 20714, 20865
HOME ELECTRONICS
20606
HORNYPHON 20037
HUANYU 20374
HUGOSON 20890, 21217
HUMAX 21295
HYPER 20009
APPENDIX-ix
HYPSON 20037, 20264,
20455, 20668,
20714, 20715,
21037
HYUNDAI 20860, 20865,
20876, 21152,
21244, 21294
IBERIA 20037
ICE 20218, 20264,
20371
ICES 20218
IIYAMA 20877, 21217
IMPERIAL 20037, 20074,
20370, 20418
INDIANA 20037
INFINITY 20054
INFOCUS 20736, 20752,
21164, 21206
INGELEN 20163, 20487,
20610, 20714
INGERSOLL 20009
INNO HIT 20009, 20516,
21163
INNOWERT 20865, 21298
INTERBUY 20037, 20264
INTERFUNK 20037, 20163,
20200, 20327,
20361, 20512
INTERNAL 20037, 21909
INTERVISION 20009, 20037,
20218, 20264,
20377, 20394,
20455, 20486,
20487
IRRADIO 20218, 20371
ISUKAI 20037, 20218,
20455
ITS 20264, 20371
ITT 20163, 20208,
20346, 20361,
20473, 20480,
20548, 20610
ITT NOKIA 20163, 20208,
20346, 20361,
20473, 20480,
20548, 20606,
20610
ITV 20037, 20264,
20374
IX 20877
JBL 20054
JCB 20000
JDV 21982
JENSEN 20817
JMB 20443, 20556,
20634
JOCEL 20712
JUBILEE 20556
JVC 20053, 20093,
20218, 20371,
20418, 20606,
20650, 20653,
20683, 20731
KAISUI 20009, 20037,
20218, 20455
KAPSCH 20163, 20361
KARCHER 20264, 20606,
20610, 20714,
20778
KATHREIN 20556
KAWA 20371
KB ARISTOCRAT
20163
KENDO 20037, 20411,
20610
KENNEDY 20435
KENNEX 21037
KIOTA 20001
KITON 20037, 20668
KNEISSEL 20037, 20292,
20374, 20411,
20435, 20556,
20610
KONKA 20037, 20218,
20371, 20418,
20587, 20641,
20714, 20754
KONTAKT 20487
KORPEL 20037
KOYODA 20009
KREISEN 20876
KYOSHU 20412, 20418
KYOTO 20163
L&S ELECTRONIC
20714, 20808
LASAT 20486
LEADER 20009
LECSON 20037
LEMAIR 20411
LENCO 20037, 20374
LEYCO 20037, 20264
LG 20037, 20178,
20442, 20556,
20698, 20714,
20715, 20829,
21146, 21148,
21191
LIESENK & TTER
20037
LIESENKOTTER
20037, 20327
LIFETEC 20037, 20218,
20374, 20668,
20714, 21037
LOCAL INDIA TV
20264, 20371,
20602
LODOS 21037
LOEWE 20037, 20136,
20292, 20512,
20516, 20633,
20790
LOGIK 20001, 20773,
20880, 21217
LOGIX 20668
LUKER 21982
LUMA 21037
LUX MAY 20009, 20037
LUXOR 20163, 20208,
20361, 20473,
20480, 20548,
20631, 21037,
21163
LXI 20054, 20156,
20178
M ELECTRONIC
20009, 20037,
20105, 20109,
20163, 20346,
20374, 20480
MADISON 20037
MAGNADYNE 20516
MAGNAFON 20516
MAGNAVOX 20054, 20780
MAGNUM 20037, 20714,
20715
MANESTH 20035, 20037,
20264
MANHATTAN 20037, 20668,
20778, 21037
MARANTZ 20037, 20054,
20412, 20556,
20704
MARK 20037, 20714,
20715
MASUDA 20009, 20218
MATSUI 20009, 20035,
20037, 20195,
20208, 20335,
20355, 20371,
20433, 20443,
20455, 20487,
20516, 20556,
20714, 21037
MATSUSHITA 20250, 20650
MAXENT 21755
MEDIATOR 20037
MEDION 20037, 20512,
20556, 20668,
20698, 20714,
20808, 20880,
21037, 21248
MEGAS 20610
MEGATRON 20145, 20178
MEI 21037
MELECTRONIC
20009, 20037,
20105, 20163,
20195, 20346,
20374, 20411,
20480, 20492,
20512, 20634,
20714
MEMOREX 20009, 20060,
20178, 20250,
21037
MERCURY 20009
METRONIC 20625
METZ 20037, 20367,
20388, 20447,
20587, 20668,
20746, 21163
MGA 20178
MICROMAXX 20037, 20668,
20808, 21037
MICROSTAR 20808
MIKOMI 21149
MINATO 20037
MINERVA 20108, 20487,
20516
MINOKA 20412
MITSUBISHI 20037, 20093,
20108, 20178,
20250, 20512,
20556, 21037
MIVAR 20292, 20516,
20609
MONACO 20009
MORGAN'S 20037
MOTOROLA 20093
MTC 20060, 20370,
20512
MTLOGIC 20714
MULTITEC 20037, 20486,
20668, 21037
MULTITECH 20009, 20037,
20264, 20486
MURPHY 20163
MUSIKLAND 20218
MYRYAD 20556
NAD 20156, 20178,
20361
NAIKO 20037, 20606,
21982
NAT 20226
NATIONAL 20226
NEC 20009, 20053,
20156, 20170,
20374, 20455,
20587, 20704,
21704
NECKERMANN
20037, 20200,
20327, 20370,
20411, 20418,
20556
NEI 20037, 20371
NEOVIA 20865, 20876,
21206, 21318,
21338, 21371,
21373, 21376,
21390
NETSAT 20037
NETTV 21755
NEUFUNK 20037, 20218,
20556, 20610,
20714
NIKKAI 20009, 20035,
20037, 20218,
20264
NIKKO 20178
NOKIA 20163, 20208,
20346, 20361,
20374, 20473,
20480, 20548,
20606, 20610,
20631
NORCENT 21365
NORDMENDE 20037, 20109,
20195, 20560,
20714
NORMEREL 20037
NOVATRONIC 20037, 20105,
20374
OCEANIC 20163, 20208,
20361, 20473,
20548
OKANO 20009, 20037,
20370
OMEGA 20264
OMNI 20891
ONIMAX 20714
ONWA 20218, 20371,
20433
OPTIMUS 20250, 20650
OPTONICA 20093
ORION 20037, 20355,
20412, 20443,
20516, 20556,
20714, 20880
ORLINE 20037, 20218
ORMOND 20668, 21037
ORSOWE 20516
OSAKI 20037, 20218,
20264, 20355,
20374, 20412,
20556
OSO 20218
OSUME 20037, 20218
OTTO VERSAND
20037, 20093,
20109, 20226,
20361, 20512,
20556
PACIFIC 20443, 20556,
20714, 21037
PALLADIUM 20037, 20370,
20411, 20418,
20714
APPENDIX-x
PALSONIC 20001, 20037,
20264, 20418,
20698, 20773
PANAMA 20037, 20264
PANASHIBA 20001
PANASONIC 20037, 20163,
20226, 20250,
20361, 20367,
20516, 20548,
20650, 20853,
21210, 21310
PANAVISION 20037, 20411
PATHE CINEMA
20163
PAUSA 20009
PENNEY 20060, 20156,
20178
PERDIO 20037, 20163
PHILCO 20037, 20054,
20074, 20145,
20370, 20418
PHILIPS 20009, 20037,
20054, 20200,
20361, 20374,
20556, 20772,
21756
PHOENIX 20037, 20486
PHONOLA 20037
PIONEER 20037, 20109,
20163, 20361,
20486, 20512,
20679, 20760
PIONIER 20486
PLANTRON 20009
PLAYSONIC 20037, 20714,
20715
POLAROID 20865
PORTLAND 20374
POWERPOINT
20037, 20487,
20698
PRANDONI-PRINCE
20361, 20516
PRIMA 20264, 20412
PRINSTON 21037
PRINZ 20361
PROFEX 20009, 20163,
20361
PROFI 20009
PROFITRONIC
20037
PROLINE 20037, 20411,
20625, 20634,
21037
PROSONIC 20037, 20668,
20714
PROTECH 20009, 20037,
20264, 20418,
20486, 20668,
21037
PROTON 20178
PROVISION 20037, 20556,
20714
PROXIMA 20735
PYE 20037, 20374,
20556
QUADRAL 20218
QUASAR 20009, 20250,
20650, 20865
QUELLE 20037, 20074,
20200, 20327,
20361, 20512,
20668, 21037
R-LINE 20037
RADIALVA 20218
RADIOLA 20037, 20556
RADIOMARELLI
20037, 20516
RADIOSHACK 20037, 20178
RADIOTONE 20009, 20037,
20264, 20412,
20668, 21037
RCA 20093, 20625,
20679
REALISTIC 20178
REDIFFUSION 20346, 20361,
20548
REFLEX 20037, 20668,
21037
RELISYS 20865, 20876,
20877, 20878,
21206, 21207,
21268, 21298
REOC 20714
REVOX 20037
REX 20163, 20264,
20411
RFT 20037, 20264
RINEX 20773
ROADSTAR 20009, 20037,
20218, 20264,
20418, 20668,
20714, 21037,
21189
ROVER 20877
ROWA 20698, 20712
ROYAL LUX 20335, 20412
SABA 20109, 20163,
20250, 20335,
20361, 20498,
20516, 20548,
20560, 20625,
20714
SAGEM 20455, 20610,
20830, 21313
SAISHO 20009, 20264,
20516
SAIVOD 20037, 20668,
20712, 21037,
21163, 21982
SAKAI 20163
SALORA 20163, 20208,
20361, 20480,
20516, 20548,
20631
SALSA 20335
SAMBERS 20516
SAMPO 21755
SAMSUNG 20009, 20037,
20060, 20163,
20178, 20208,
20264, 20370,
20482, 20556,
20587, 20618,
20644
SANSUI 20037, 20727,
20729, 20861
SANTON 20009
SANYO 20088, 20108,
20170, 20208,
20370, 20555,
20704, 20735
SBR 20037, 20556
SCEPTRE 21217
SCHAUB LORENZ
20361, 20374,
20486, 20548,
20606, 20714,
21191
SCHNEIDER 20037, 20163,
20218, 20352,
20361, 20371,
20394, 20556,
20668, 20714,
21037
SCOTCH 20178
SCOTLAND 20163
SCOTT 20178
SEARS 20054, 20156,
20178
SEAWAY 20634
SEELVER 21037
SEG 20009, 20037,
20218, 20264,
20487, 20634,
20668, 21037,
21163
SEI 20516
SEI-SINUDYNE
20037, 20516
SELECO 20163, 20264,
20346, 20371,
20411, 20435
SEMP 20156
SENCORA 20009
SENTRA 20035
SERINO 20093, 20455,
20610
SHARP 20053, 20093,
20200, 20491,
20516, 21163,
21193
SHENG CHIA 20093
SHINTOSHI 20037
SHIVAKI 20037, 20443
SIAREM 20516
SIEMENS 20037, 20195,
20200, 20327
SIERA 20556
SIESTA 20370
SILVA 20037, 20361
SILVA SCHNEIDER
20037
SILVER 20361, 20715
SILVERCREST 21037
SINGER 20009, 20335,
20433, 20435
SINOTEC 20773
SINUDYNE 20516
SKY 20037, 20880
SKYSONIC 20696
SLIDING 20865, 20880,
21318, 21374,
21388
SLX 20668
SMARAGD 20487
SOEMTRON 20865, 21298
SOLAVOX 20037, 20163,
20361, 20548
SONAWA 20218
SONIKO 20037
SONITRON 20208, 20370
SONOKO 20009, 20037
SONOLOR 20163, 20208,
20361, 20548
SONTEC 20009, 20037,
20370
SONY 20000, 20037,
20053, 20093,
20145, 20156,
20170, 20250,
20353, 21100,
21505, 21751
SOUND & VISION
20374
SOUNDESIGN 20178
SOUNDWAVE 20037, 20418,
20715
SPECTRA 20009
SSANGYONG 20009
STANDARD 20009, 20037,
20218, 20374,
21037
STARLITE 20009, 20037,
20264
STENWAY 20218
STERN 20163, 20411
STEVISON 21982
STRATO 20009, 20037,
20264
STRONG 21149, 21163
SUNKAI 20355, 20455,
20487, 20610,
20865
SUNSTAR 20009, 20037,
20264, 20371
SUNWOOD 20037
SUPERLA 20516
SUPERSCAN 20093
SUPERSONIC 21189
SUPERTECH 20009, 20037,
20218
SUPRA 20009
SUPREME 20000
SUSUMU 20218, 20335
SVA 20587, 20865,
20872
SYLVANIA 20054
SYSLINE 20037
T+A 20447
TANDBERG 20367
TANDY 20093, 20163,
20218
TARGA 21307
TASHIKO 20163
TATUNG 20037, 20516,
21756
TCM 20714, 20808
TEAC 20009, 20037,
20170, 20178,
20264, 20412,
20418, 20455,
20512, 20668,
20698, 20712,
21037, 21149,
21755, 21909
TEC 20009, 20037
TECH LINE 20037, 20668
TECHNICS 20250, 20556,
20650
TECHNISAT 20556
TECHNISSON 20714
TECHNOSONIC
20556
TECHWOOD 21163
TECNIMAGEN20556
TEDELEX 20009, 20891
TEKNIKA 20054, 20060
TELECOR 20394
TELEFUNKEN 20037, 20074,
20109, 20335,
20346, 20486,
20498, 20560,
20625, 20714,
20896
TELEFUSION 20037
TELEGAZI 20037
TELEMAGIC 20735
APPENDIX-xi
TELESONIC 20037
TELESTAR 20037, 20556
TELESYSTEM 20876
TELETECH 20009, 20037,
20668, 21037
TELEVIEW 20037
TEMPEST 20009
TENNESSEE 20037
TENSAI 20009, 20037,
20105, 20218,
20371, 20374,
20377, 20715,
21037
TENSON 20009
TEVION 20556, 20668,
20714, 20808,
21037, 21248,
21298
TEXET 20009, 20218,
20374
THOMSON 20037, 20109,
20335, 20560,
20625
THORN 20035, 20037,
20074, 20109,
20335, 20361,
20512
TINY 21269
TINY DIGITAL20660
TMK 20178
TOKAI 20009, 20037,
20163, 20374,
20668, 21037
TOKAIDO 21037
TOKYO 20035
TOMASHI 20218
TONGTEL 20780
TOSHIBA 20035, 20060,
20109, 20156,
20195, 20241,
20508, 20618,
20650, 20714,
20736, 21163,
21164, 21704
TRANS CONTINENS
20037, 20668,
21037
TRANS-CONTINENTS
20865, 21374
TRANSONIC 20009, 20037,
20587, 20698,
20712
TRIDENT 20516
TRISTAR 20218
TRIUMPH 20346, 20516,
20556
TVTEXT 95 20556
UHER 20037, 20374,
20418, 20480,
20486
ULTRAVOX 20037
UNIC LINE 20037, 20455
UNITED 20037, 20714,
20715, 21037
UNIVERSAL 20037
UNIVERSUM 20009, 20037,
20074, 20105,
20170, 20200,
20264, 20327,
20346, 20361,
20370, 20411,
20418, 20473,
20480, 20492,
20512, 20618,
20631, 20668,
21037, 21163
UNIVOX 20037, 20163
V2MAX 20865
V7 VIDEOSEVEN
21376, 21755
V7VIDEOSEVEN
20880
VESTEL 20037, 20556,
20668, 21037,
21163
VICTOR 20053, 20653
VIDEOCON 20508
VIDEOLOGIC 20218
VIDEOLOGIQUE
20218
VIDIKRON 20054, 20735
VIDTECH 20178
VIEWPIA 20876
VIEWSONIC 20797, 21755
VIORE 21207
VISION 20037
VIZIO 21756
VOXSON 20163, 20178,
20418
WALTHAM 20037, 20109,
20163, 20418,
20443, 20668,
21037
WARDS 20000, 20054,
20060, 20156,
20178
WATSON 20009, 20037,
20218, 20394,
20668, 21037
WAYCON 20156
WEGA 20037
WELLTECH 20714
WESTINGHOUSE
20890
WHARFEDALE
20037, 20556
WHITE WESTINGHOUSE
20037, 21909
WINDSOR 21037
WINDY SAM 20556
WORLD-OF-VISION
20865, 20877,
20880, 20890,
21298
X-VIEW 21191
XENIUS 20634
XLOGIC 20860
XORO 21196, 21217,
21243
XRYPTON 20037
YAMADA 21340
YAMAHA 20650, 20769,
20797, 21405,
21406, 21407,
21576
YAMISHI 20455
YAPSHE 20250
YOKAN 20037
YOKO 20009, 20037,
20218, 20264
ZANUSSI 20264
ZENITH 20178, 21909
PVR
ABS 31972
ALIENWARE 31972
CYBERPOWER
31972
DELL 31972
GATEWAY 31972
HEWLETT PACKARD
31972
HOWARD COMPUTERS
31972
HP 31972
HUSH 31972
IBUYPOWER 31972
JVC 31279
LINKSYS 31972
MEDIA CENTER PC
31972
MICROSOFT 31972
MIND 31972
NIVEUS MEDIA31972
NORTHGATE 31972
PANASONIC 31244, 31807,
31808, 31809
PHILIPS 31340
SONY 31636, 31972
STACK 9 31972
SYSTEMAX 31972
TAGAR SYSTEMS
31972
TOSHIBA 30828, 31008,
31972
TOUCH 31972
VIEWSONIC 31972
VOODOO 31972
ZT GROUP 31972
VCR
ABS 31972
ACCENT 30072
ADMIRAL 30048
ADVENTURA 30000
ADYSON 30072
AIKO 30278
AIWA 30000, 30032,
30037, 30307,
30348, 30352
AKAI 30041, 30106,
30240, 30315,
30348, 30352,
30642
AKIBA 30072
AKURA 30072
ALBA 30000, 30072,
30081, 30278,
30315, 30348,
30352
ALIENWARE 31972
ALLSTAR 30081
AMERICA ACTION
30278
AMSTRAD 30000, 30072,
30278
ANAM 30037, 30162,
30226, 30240
ANAM NATIONAL
30162, 30226
ANITECH 30072
ANSONIC 30000
ARISTONA 30081
ASA 30037, 30081
ASHA 30240
ASUKA 30037, 30038
AUDIOSONIC 30278
AUDIOVOX 30037, 30278
AVP 30000, 30352
AWA 30043
BAIRD 30000, 30041,
30104, 30106
BASIC LINE 30072, 30104,
30278
BEAUMARK 30240
BEKO 30104
BELL & HOWELL
30104
BESTAR 30278
BLACK DIAMOND
30642
BLACK PANTHER
30278
BLAUPUNKT 30034, 30081,
30162, 30226
BLUE SKY 30037, 30072,
30278, 30348,
30352, 30480,
30642
BONDSTEC 30072
BRANDT 30041, 30206,
30320, 30321
BRANDT ELECTRONIQUE
30041
BRINKMANN 30348
BROKSONIC 30348
BUSH 30000, 30072,
30081, 30278,
30315, 30348,
30352, 30642
CALIX 30037
CARREFOUR 30045
CARVER 30081
CASIO 30000
CATHAY 30278
CCE 30072, 30278
CGE 30000
CIMLINE 30072
CITIZEN 30037, 30278
CLATRONIC 30000, 30072
COLT 30072
COMBITECH 30352
CONDOR 30278
CRAIG 30037, 30072,
30240
CROWN 30037, 30072,
30278, 30480
CURTIS MATHES
30041, 30162
CYBERNEX 30240
CYBERPOWER31972
CYRUS 30081
DAEWOO 30045, 30278,
30352, 30637,
30642
DANSAI 30072, 30278
DANTAX 30352
DE GRAAF 30042, 30048,
30081, 30104,
30166
DECCA 30000, 30067,
30081, 30352
DEITRON 30278
DELL 31972
DENKO 30072
DENON 30042
DIAMANT 30037
APPENDIX-xii
DICK SMITH ELECTRONICS
30642
DIGITOR 30642
DSE 30642
DUAL 30000, 30041,
30081, 30278,
30348
DUMONT 30000, 30081,
30104
DYNATECH 30000
ELBE 30038, 30278
ELCATECH 30072
ELECTROHOME
30037
ELECTROPHONIC
30037
ELIN 30240
ELSAY 30072
ELTA 30072, 30278
EMEREX 30032
EMERSON 30000, 30037,
30043, 30045,
30072, 30278,
30637
ESC 30240, 30278
FERGUSON 30000, 30041,
30278, 30320,
30321
FIDELITY 30000, 30072,
30240, 30352
FINLANDIA 30000, 30037,
30042, 30043,
30048, 30081,
30104, 30106,
30166, 30226
FINLUX 30000, 30042,
30081, 30104
FIRSTLINE 30037, 30043,
30045, 30072,
30278, 30348,
30480
FISHER 30104
FLINT 30348
FRONTECH 30072
FUJI 30033
FUJITSU 30000, 30045
FUNAI 30000
GALAXIS 30278
GARRARD 30000
GATEWAY 31972
GE 30048, 30240,
30320
GEC 30081
GENERAL 30045
GENERAL TECHNIC
30348
GENEXXA 30104
GOLDHAND 30072
GOLDSTAR 30037, 30038,
30480
GOODMANS 30000, 30037,
30072, 30081,
30278, 30348,
30352, 30637,
30642
GPX 30037
GRADIENTE 30000
GRAETZ 30041, 30104,
30240
GRANADA 30000, 30037,
30042, 30048,
30081, 30104,
30226, 30240
GRANDIN 30000, 30037,
30072, 30278
GRUNDIG 30034, 30072,
30081, 30226,
30320, 30347,
30348, 30352
HANIMEX 30352
HANSEATIC 30037, 30038,
30081
HARLEY DAVIDSON
30000
HARMAN/KARDON
30038, 30081
HARWOOD 30072
HCM 30072
HEWLETT PACKARD
31972
HINARI 30041, 30072,
30240, 30278,
30352
HISAWA 30352
HISCHITO 30045
HITACHI 30000, 30037,
30041, 30042,
30081, 30166,
30240
HOEHER 30278, 30642
HORNYPHON 30081
HOWARD COMPUTERS
31972
HP 31972
HUGHES NETWORK SYSTEMS
30042
HUSH 31972
HYPSON 30000, 30037,
30072, 30278,
30480
IBUYPOWER 31972
IMPERIAL 30000
INGERSOLL 30240
INNO HIT 30072
INTERBUY 30072
INTERFUNK 30081, 30104
INTERNAL 30278, 30637
INTERNATIONAL
30037, 30278,
30642
INTERVISION 30000, 30278
IRRADIO 30072, 30081
ITT 30041, 30104,
30106, 30240
ITV 30037, 30278
JBL 30278
JENSEN 30041
JMB 30348, 30352
JOYCE 30000
JVC 30041, 30067,
30206, 31008,
31279
KAISUI 30072
KAMBROOK 30037
KARCHER 30081, 30278,
30642
KEC 30037, 30278
KENDO 30072, 30106,
30278, 30315,
30348, 30642
KENWOOD 30038, 30041,
30067
KLH 30072
KNEISSEL 30037, 30278,
30348, 30352
KODAK 30037
KORPEL 30072
KYOTO 30072
LENCO 30278
LEYCO 30072
LG 30037, 30480
LIFETEC 30348
LINKSYS 31972
LLOYD'S 30000
LOEWE 30037, 30081,
30162, 31562
LOGIK 30072, 30106,
30240
LUX MAY 30072
LUXOR 30043, 30048,
30104, 30106,
30315
LXI 30037
M ELECTRONIC
30000, 30038
MAGNASONIC30278
MAGNAVOX 30000, 30081,
30642
MAGNIN 30240
MAGNUM 30642
MANESTH 30045, 30072,
30081
MARANTZ 30038, 30081
MARK 30000, 30278
MARTA 30037
MASTEC 30642
MASTER'S 30278
MATSUI 30240, 30348,
30352
MATSUSHITA 30162, 30226
MEDIA CENTER PC
31972
MEDION 30348, 30352,
30642
MELECTRONIC
30000, 30037,
30038
MEMOREX 30000, 30037,
30048, 30104,
30162, 30240,
30307, 30348
MEMPHIS 30072
METRONIC 30081
METZ 30037, 30081,
30162, 30226,
30347, 30836,
31562
MGA 30043, 30240
MGN TECHNOLOGY
30240
MICORMAY 30348
MICROSOFT 31972
MIND 31972
MINOLTA 30042
MITSUBISHI 30043, 30048,
30067, 30081,
30480, 30642
MOTOROLA 30048
MTC 30000, 30240
MULTITEC 30037
MULTITECH 30000, 30072
MURPHY 30000
MYRYAD 30081
NAD 30104
NAIKO 30348, 30642
NATIONAL 30226
NEBULA ELECTRONICS
30033
NEC 30037, 30038,
30041, 30067,
30104, 30278
NECKERMANN
30081
NESCO 30072
NIKKAI 30072, 30278
NIKKO 30037
NIKON 30034
NIVEUS MEDIA
31972
NOBLEX 30240
NOKIA 30041, 30042,
30048, 30081,
30104, 30106,
30240, 30278,
30315
NORDMENDE 30041, 30067,
30320, 30321
NORTHGATE 31972
OCEANIC 30000, 30041,
30048, 30081,
30104, 30106
OKANO 30072, 30278,
30315, 30348
OLYMPUS 30226
ONIMAX 30642
OPTIMUS 30037, 30048,
30104, 30162
ORBIT 30072
ORION 30348, 30352
OSAKI 30000, 30037,
30072
OSUME 30072
OTTO VERSAND
30081
PACE 30352
PACIFIC 30000, 30348,
30642
PACKARD BELL
31972
PALLADIUM 30037, 30041,
30072, 30348
PALSONIC 30000, 30072,
30642
PANASONIC 30162, 30226,
30836, 31244,
31562, 31807,
31808, 31809
PATHE CINEMA
30043
PATHE MARCONI
30041
PENNEY 30037, 30038,
30042, 30240
PENTAX 30042
PERDIO 30000
PHILCO 30038, 30072
PHILIPS 30081
PHOENIX 30278
PHONOLA 30081
PILOT 30037
PIONEER 30042, 30067,
30081, 30162
POLK AUDIO 30081
PORTLAND 30278, 30637
PRINZ 30000
PROFITRONIC
30081, 30240
PROLINE 30000, 30278,
30320, 30642
PROSONIC 30278
PROTEC 30072
PROTECH 30081
PROVISION 30278
PYE 30081
QUASAR 30162, 30278
QUELLE 30081
RADIALVA 30037, 30048
RADIOLA 30081
RADIONETTE 30037
RADIOSHACK 30000, 30037
APPENDIX-xiii
RADIX 30037
RANDEX 30037
RANK ARENA 30041
RCA 30042, 30048,
30106, 30240,
30320
REALISTIC 30000, 30037,
30048, 30104
REOC 30348
REX 30041
RFT 30072
RICAVISION 31972
RICOH 30034
ROADSTAR 30037, 30072,
30081, 30240,
30278
ROYAL 30072
SABA 30041, 30206,
30278, 30320,
30321
SAISHO 30348
SALORA 30043, 30104,
30106
SAMSUNG 30045, 30240
SANKY 30048
SANSUI 30000, 30041,
30067, 30072,
30106
SANYO 30048, 30067,
30104, 30240
SAVILLE 30240, 30278,
30352
SBR 30081
SCHAUB LORENZ
30000, 30041,
30104, 30106,
30315, 30348
SCHNEIDER 30000, 30037,
30042, 30072,
30081, 30240,
30278, 30348,
30352, 30642
SCOTT 30043, 30045
SEARS 30000, 30037,
30042, 30104
SEAWAY 30278
SEG 30072, 30081,
30240, 30278,
30637, 30642
SEI 30081
SELECO 30037, 30041
SEMP 30045
SENTRA 30072
SHARP 30037, 30048
SHINTOM 30072, 30104
SHIVAKI 30037
SHOGUN 30240
SIEMENS 30037, 30081,
30104, 30320,
30347
SIERA 30081
SILVA 30037
SILVER 30278
SINGER 30045, 30072
SINUDYNE 30081, 30352
SMARAGD 30348
SONNECLAIR 30072
SONTEC 30037
SONWA 30642
SONY 30000, 30032,
30033, 30034,
30106, 31032,
31636, 31972
SOUNDWAVE 30037, 30348
SSANGYONG 30072
STACK 9 31972
STERN 30278
STS 30042
SUNKAI 30278, 30348
SUNSTAR 30000
SUNTRONIC 30000
SUNWOOD 30072
SUPRA 30037
SYLVANIA 30000, 30043,
30081
SYMPHONIC 30000
SYSTEMAX 31972
T+A 30162
TAGAR SYSTEMS
31972
TANDBERG 30278
TANDY 30000, 30104
TASHIKO 30000, 30037,
30048, 30081,
30240
TATUNG 30000, 30041,
30043, 30048,
30081, 30348,
30352
TCHIBO 30348
TCM 30348
TEAC 30000, 30037,
30041, 30278,
30307, 30637,
30642
TEC 30072
TECH LINE 30072
TECHNICS 30081, 30162,
30226
TEDELEX 30642
TEKNIKA 30000, 30037
TELEAVIA 30041
TELEFUNKEN 30041, 30206,
30278, 30320,
30321, 30642
TELERENT 30226
TELETECH 30000, 30072,
30278
TENOSAL 30072
TENSAI 30000, 30072,
30278
TEVION 30348, 30642
TEXET 30278
THOMAS 30000
THOMSON 30041, 30067,
30278, 30320,
30321
THORN 30037, 30041,
30104
TMK 30240
TOKAI 30037, 30072
TOPLINE 30348
TOSHIBA 30041, 30042,
30043, 30045,
30081, 30352,
30828, 31008,
31972
TOTEVISION 30037, 30240
TOUCH 31972
TOWADA 30072
TRADEX 30081
UHER 30240
ULTRAVOX 30278
UNITECH 30240
UNITED 30348
UNIVERSUM 30000, 30037,
30081, 30104,
30106, 30240,
30348
VECTOR 30045
VECTOR RESEARCH
30038
VICTOR 30041, 30067
VIDEO CONCEPTS
30045
VIDEO TECHNIC
30000
VIDEOMAGIC 30037
VIDEOSONIC 30240
VIEWSONIC 31972
VILLAIN 30000
VOODOO 31972
WARDS 30000, 30033,
30038, 30042,
30045, 30048,
30072, 30081,
30240
WATSON 30081, 30352,
30642
WHITE WESTINGHOUSE
30072, 30278,
30637
WORLD 30348
XR-1000 30000, 30072
YAMAHA 30038
YAMISHI 30072, 30278
YOKAN 30072
YOKO 30037, 30240
ZENITH 30000, 30033,
30034, 30637
ZT GROUP 31972
ZX 30348, 30352
DVD PLAYER
3D LAB 40539
A-TREND 40714
ACOUSTIC SOLUTIONS
40713, 40730,
41450
AEG 40770, 40788,
40790
AIRIS 40672, 41005,
41107
AIWA 40533, 40641
AKAI 40766, 40770,
40788, 40790,
40898, 41115,
41233
AKI 41005
AKURA 40898, 41140,
41170, 41233,
41367
ALBA 40539, 40672,
40695, 40713,
40730, 41140
ALCO 40790
ALIZE 41151
ALL-TEL 41451
ALLEGRO 40869
AMITECH 40770, 40850
AMOI 40852
AMPHION MEDIA WORKS
40872
AMSTRAD 40713
AMW 40872
ANSONIC 40759, 40831
APEX DIGITAL40672, 41004,
41020, 41833
ARIANET 40818
AUDIOSONIC 41265
AUDIOVOX 40790
AUVIO 40843, 41090
AVIOUS 41165
AXION 40730
BASE 41451
BASIC LINE 40713
BAZE 40898, 41165
BBK 40862
BEL CANTO DESIGN
41571
BELLAGIO 41004
BLACK DIAMOND
40713, 40766,
40833
BLUE PARADE40571
BLUE SKY 40651, 40672,
40695, 40713,
40804, 40843
BOGHE 41004
BOMAN 40898
BRAINWAVE 40770, 41115
BRANDT 40503, 40651
BROKSONIC 40695
BUSH 40516, 40672,
40695, 40713,
40730, 40831,
40833, 40879,
41128, 41165
CAMBRIDGE AUDIO
41109
CCE 40730
CELESTIAL 41020
CENTREX 40672, 41004
CENTRUM 40713, 40779,
41005
CGV 40751, 41115
CINEA 40831, 40841
CINETEC 40713
CINEVISION 40833, 40869,
41483
CLASSIC 40730
CLATRONIC 40672, 40788,
40818, 41165
CLAYTON 40713
COBY 40730, 40852,
41107, 41165
CODEX 41233
COMPACKS 41107, 41265
CONIA 40852
CONTINENTAL EDISON
40831
CRAIG 40831
CROWN 40770, 41115
CRYPTO 41228
CYBERCOM 40831
CYBERHOME 40714, 40816,
41023
CYTRON 40651
D-VISION 41115
DAENYX 40872
DAEWOO 40705, 40714,
40770, 40833,
40869, 40872
DAEWOO INTERNATIONAL
40872
DALTON 41036, 41107
DANSAI 40770, 41115
DANTAX 40539, 40713,
40723, 40790
DAYTEK 40872, 41005
DAYTON 40872
DCE 40831
DECCA 40770, 41115
DENON 40490, 40634,
41282, 41634
DENVER 40788, 40898,
41107, 41165,
41450
DESAY 40843, 41090
APPENDIX-xiv
DIAMOND 40651, 40768
DICK SMITH ELECTRONICS
40833, 41483
DIGATRON 41009
DIGIHOME 40713
DIGITOR 41005
DIGITREX 40672
DIK 40831
DINAMIC 40788
DISNEY 40675
DIVIDO 40705
DK DIGITAL 40831
DMTECH 41271
DRAGON 40831
DREAMX 41151
DSE 40833, 41483
DUAL 40651, 40665,
40713, 40730,
40779, 40790,
40831
DURABRAND 40713, 40831
EASY HOME 40857
ECC 40730
ECLIPSE 40723, 40751
ELFUNK 40850
ELIN 40770
ELLION 40850
ELTA 40672, 40770,
40788, 40850,
41115, 41151
ELTAX 40766
EMERSON 40591, 40675,
40705
ENTERPRISE 40591
ENZER 41228
EUROLINE 40788, 41115,
41233
FENNER 40651
FERGUSON 40651, 40898
FINLUX 40591, 40672,
40741, 40751,
40770, 41165
FIRSTLINE 40713, 40843,
40869
FISHER 40670
FUNAI 40675, 40695
FUSION 40862
GE 40522
GLOBAL SOLUTIONS
40768
GO VIDEO 40741, 40744,
40833, 40869,
41075, 41483
GOLDSTAR 40591, 40741
GOODMANS 40651, 40713,
40723, 40730,
40790, 40833,
40879, 41004,
41140
GRAETZ 40665
GRAN PRIX 40831, 40898
GRANDIN 40713, 41233
GRUNDIG 40539, 40651,
40670, 40695,
40705, 40713,
40775, 40790,
41004, 41036,
41128
GRUNKEL 40770
H & B 40818, 40841,
40850, 41233
H&B 40713, 40818,
40841, 40850,
41233
HANSEATIC 40741, 40790
HARMAN/KARDON
40702
HCM 40788
HDT 40705
HENSS 40713
HIMAX 40843
HITACHI 40573, 40664,
40713
HITEKER 40672
HOEHER 40651, 40713,
40831
HOME ELECTRONICS
40730
HOME TECH INDUSTRIES
41107, 41451
HOYO 40665
HYUNDAI 40766, 40850,
41228
INGELEN 40788
INTEGRA 40627
ISP 40695
JATON 40665
JBL 40702
JDB 40730
JDV 41367
JMB 40695
JVC 40503, 40539,
40558, 40623,
40867
KANSAI 41107
KANSAS TECHNOLOGIES
41233
KAWASAKI 40790
KENDO 40713, 40831
KENNEX 40713, 40770,
40898
KENWOOD 40490, 40534
KIIRO 40770
KINGAVON 40818
KISS 40665, 40841,
41523
KLH 40790, 41020
KOSS 40651
KXD 40857
LAWSON 40768
LENCO 40651, 40713,
40770, 41165
LEXIA 40768
LG 40591, 40741,
40790, 40801,
40869
LIFETEC 40651, 40831
LIMIT 40768
LITEON 41058
LODOS 40713
LOEWE 40511, 40539,
40741
LOGIX 40705
LUKER 41367
LUMATRON 40695, 40705,
40741, 40833,
41115
LUNATRON 40741
LUXMAN 40573
LUXOR 40713, 41004
MAGNAVOX 40503, 40539,
40675, 40713,
41140
MAGNEX 40723, 41165
MAJESTIC 41107
MANHATTAN 40705, 40713
MARANTZ 40539
MARK 40713
MARQUANT 40770
MATSUI 40651, 40672,
40695, 40713,
41004
MAXIM 40713, 40872
MBO 40730
MDS 40713
MECOTEK 40770
MEDION 40630, 40651,
40831, 40879,
41107, 41345
MEI 40790
MEMOREX 40695, 40831
METZ 40525, 40571,
40713
MICO 40723, 40751,
41223
MICROBOSS 40718
MICROMEDIA 40503, 40539
MICROMEGA 40539
MICROSOFT 40522
MICROSTAR 40831
MINAX 40713
MINERVA 40705
MINOKA 40770
MINOWA 41165
MIRROR 40879
MITSUBISHI 40713, 41521
MIZUDA 40770, 40818
MONYKA 40665
MPX 40843
MTLOGIC 41265
MUSTEK 40730
MX ONDA 40651, 40751,
41223
NAD 40741
NAIKO 40770, 41004,
41367
NEC 40785, 40869
NEOVIA 41271
NEUFUNK 40665
NEVIR 40770, 40831,
41197
NORCENT 40872, 41107,
41265
NORDMENDE 40831
NU-TEC 41228
OLIDATA 40672
ONKYO 40503, 40627,
40792
OPTIM 40843
OPTIMUS 40525
ORAVA 40818
ORBIT 40872
ORION 40695, 41006,
41128, 41233
ORITRON 40651
ORMOND 40713
P&B 40818, 41451
PACIFIC 40695, 40713,
40759, 40768,
40790, 40804,
40831
PACKARD BELL
40831
PALLADIUM 40695, 40779
PALSONIC 40672, 40852
PANASONIC 40490, 41282
PARAMOUNT PICTURES
40779
PEEKTON 40898
PHILCO 40788
PHILIPS 40503, 40539,
40675
PHILO 41345
PHONOTREND41165
PIONEER 40525, 40571,
41571
PLAYGO 41265
PLU2 40850, 41090
POLAROID 41020
POLK AUDIO 40539
PORTLAND 40770
POWERPOINT 40872
PRIMA 40766
PRIMA ELECTRONIC
40766
PRINZ 40831
PRISM 40705, 41006
PRO2 41107, 41345
PROLINE 40651, 40672,
40833, 41004
PROSCAN 40522
PROSON 40713
QWESTAR 40651
RADIONETTE 40741, 40869
RAITE 40665
RCA 40522, 40571,
40790
REC 40490, 40766
RED STAR 40759, 40763,
40770, 40788,
40898, 41107,
41345
REDSTAR 40763, 40898
REOC 40768
REVOY 40841
RIO 40869
ROADSTAR 40713, 40730,
40818, 40833,
40879, 40898,
41006
RONIN 40872
ROTEL 40558, 40623
ROWA 40516, 40872,
41004
SABA 40651
SAIVOD 40759, 40831,
41367
SALORA 40741
SAMSUNG 40490, 40573,
40744, 41075
SANSUI 40695, 40751,
40768
SANTOSH 41115
SANYO 40670, 40695,
40713, 40873
SCAN 40705, 40850
SCANMAGIC 40730
SCHAUB LORENZ
40770, 40788,
41115, 41151
SCHNEIDER 40539, 40651,
40705, 40713,
40779, 40788,
40790, 40804,
40831
SCIENTIFIC LABS
40768
SCOTT 40651, 40672,
40718, 41005,
41036, 41233
SEG 40665, 40713,
40763, 40768,
40872
SHANGHAI 40672
SHARP 40630, 40675,
40713, 41256
SHERWOOD 40741, 40770
SHINSONIC 40533
SILVA 40788, 40898
APPENDIX-xv
SILVA SCHNEIDER
40831, 40898
SINGER 40751
SKANTIC 40539, 40713
SKYMASTER 40730, 40768
SKYWORTH 40766, 40898
SLIDING 41115
SM ELECTRONIC
40730, 40768
SMART 40705, 40713,
40718
SONIC BLUE 40869
SONY 40533, 40573,
40772, 40864,
41033, 41633
SOUND COLOR
41233
SOUNDMASTER
40768
STANDARD 40651, 40768,
40788, 40831,
40898
STARLOGIC 41005
STARMEDIA 40818, 41005
STEVISON 41367
STRONG 40713
SUNKAI 40770, 40850
SUNSTECH 40831
SUNWOOD 40788, 40898
SUPERVISION 40768
SVA 40672
SYLVANIA 40675
SYMPHONIC 40675
SYNN 40768
TANDBERG 40713
TATUNG 40770
TEAC 40516, 40571,
40695, 40741,
40759, 40768,
40790, 40809,
40833, 41006,
41197, 41483
TEC 40898
TECHNICS 40490
TECHNIKA 40770, 40831,
41115, 41165
TECHNISSON 41115
TECHNOSONIC
40730, 41115
TECHWOOD 40713
TEDELEX 41228
TELETECH 40713, 40768
TENSAI 40651, 40770
TEVION 40651, 40833,
40898, 41036,
41170, 41382
THETA DIGITAL
40571
THOMSON 40522
TOKAI 40665, 40788,
40790, 40898
TOM-TEC 41450
TOSHIBA 40503, 40695
TRANS-CONTINENTS
40831, 40872,
41165, 41327
TREDEX 40804, 40843
TRUVISION 40857
UMAX 41151
UNITED 40672, 40695,
40788, 41115,
41165, 41228
UNIVERSUM 40591, 40713,
40741, 40779,
40790, 40869
UPTEK 40763
UPXUS 41345
URBAN CONCEPTS
40503
VENTURER 40790
VESTEL 40713
VIETA 40705, 41265
VIEWMASTER40862
VOXSON 40730, 40831
VTREK 41228
WAITEC 41151
WELKIN 40831
WELLINGTON40713
WELTSTAR 40713
WHARFEDALE
40751, 40790
WILSON 40831, 41233
WINDSOR 40713
WINDY SAM 40573
WOXTER 41005, 41151
XBOX 40522
XENIUS 40790
XLOGIC 40768
XMS 40770
XORO 41183
YAKUMO 41004
YAMADA 40872, 41004,
41151
YAMAHA 40490, 40539,
41282, 41543
YAMAKAWA 40665, 40872
YUKAI 40730
ZENITH 40503, 40591,
40741, 40869
ZENNOX 41265
ZOECE 41265
LD PLAYER
AIWA 40203
CARVER 40064, 40194
DENON 40059
FUNAI 40203
HARMAN/KARDON
40194
HITACHI 40395
KENWOOD 40258
MAGNAVOX 40194, 40217
MARANTZ 40064, 40194
MITSUBISHI 40059
NAD 40059
NAGSMI 40059
OPTIMUS 40059
PANASONIC 40204
PHILIPS 40064, 40194
PIONEER 40059
POLK AUDIO 40194
QUASAR 40204
REALISTIC 40203
SALORA 40064
SHARP 40001
SONY 40193, 40201
TECHNICS 40204
TELEFUNKEN 40059
THETA DIGITAL
40194
VICTOR 40245
WARDS 40059
YAMAHA 40217
DVD RECORDER
APEX DIGITAL51056
BOGHE 51221
DENON 50490
DICK SMITH ELECTRONICS
51730
DIGITREX 51056
DSE 51730
ELTAX 51321
FUNAI 50675
GATEWAY 51158
GO VIDEO 50741, 51158,
51730
H & B 51235, 51421
HITACHI 51664
JVC 51164, 51275
KREISEN 51421
LG 50741
LITEON 51158, 51416,
51440, 51456
LOEWE 50741
MAGNAVOX 50646
MEDION 51347
MICO 51221
MITSUBISHI 51403
MUSTEK 51730
NEC 51404
PANASONIC 50490, 51010,
51011
PHILIPS 50646, 51158,
51818
PIONEER 50631, 51475,
51476
RCA 50522
RELISYS 51347
SAMSUNG 50490
SENSORY SCIENCE51158
SHARP 50630, 50675,
51419, 51550,
51556
SINUDYNE 51221
SONY 51033, 51069,
51070, 51433
SYLVANIA 50675
TANGENT 51321
TEVION 51227
THOMSON 50551
TOSHIBA 51510
VICTOR 51275
XORO 51221
YAMADA 51056, 51158,
51416
YAMAHA 51544
ZENITH 50741
CD PLAYER
ADC 60018
ADCOM 60234
ADVANTAGE 60032
AIWA 60157
AKAI 60156, 60362,
60643
ALTO 60625
ANAM 60362
ARCAM 60157
ARISTON 60625
AUDIO DYNAMICS
60018
AUDIO RESEARCH
60157
AUDIOLAB 60157
AUDIOMECA 60157
AUDIOTON 60157
BUSH 60643
CAIRN 60157
CALIFORNIA AUDIO LABS
60029, 60303
CAMBRIDGE 60157, 60625
CAMBRIDGE AUDIO
60625
CARVER 60157, 60179,
60299
CCE 60643
COPLAND 60393
CYRUS 60157
DENON 60003, 60034,
60626
DKK 60000
DMX ELECTRONICS
60157
DUAL 60003
ECLIPSE 60625
EROICA 60481
FIDELITY 60625
FISHER 60179
GARRARD 60393, 60643
GEMINI 60625
GENEXXA 60032, 60426
GOLDMUND 60157
GOLDSTAR 60643
GOODMANS 60362, 60625
GRUNDIG 60157
GTX 60362
HARMAN/KARDON
60157, 60173,
60426
HCM 60625
HIRO 60625
HITACHI 60032
INTEGRA 60101
KENWOOD 60028, 60157,
60190, 60626
KRELL 60157
KYOCERA 60018
LINN 60157
LG 71208
LOEWE 60157
LUXMAN 60093
MAGNAVOX 60157
MARANTZ 60029, 60157,
60626
MATSUI 60157, 60643
MCS 60029
MEMOREX 60032
MERIDIAN 60157
MICROMEGA 60157
MIRO 60000
MISSION 60157
MITSUBISHI 60156
MTC 60625
MUSICAL FIDELITY
60393
MYRYAD 60157
NAD 60000, 60299,
60721
NAGAOKA 60018
NAIM 60157
NAKAMICHI 60147
NEC 60234
NIKKO 60362, 60625
NSM 60157
ONKYO 60101, 61327
OPTIMUS 60000, 60032,
60179, 60426
ORION 60393
PANASONIC 60029, 60303
PHILIPS 60157, 60626
PINK TRIANGLE
60625
PIONEER 60032, 60101
POLK AUDIO 60157
PROTON 60157
QED 60157
YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA
6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A.
YAMAHA CANADA MUSIC LTD.
135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA
YAMAHA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H.
SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, GERMANY
YAMAHA ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A.
RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE
YAMAHA ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD.
YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD18 7GQ, ENGLAND
YAMAHA SCANDINAVIA A.B.
J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN
YAMAHA MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD.
17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA
©
2006 All rights reserved.
HTR-N5060
Printed in Malaysia WG73970
HTR-N5060
AV Receiver
Ampli-tuner audio-vidéo
OWNER’S MANUAL
MODE D’EMPLOI
BEDIENUNGSANLEITUNG
MANUALE DI ISTRUZIONI
MANUAL DE INSTRUCCIONES
GEBRUIKSAANWIJZING
ИНСТРУКЦИЯ ПО ЭКСПЛУАТАЦИИ
G
QUAD 60157
QUASAR 60029
RADIOLA 60157
RADIOTONE 60625
RCA 60032, 60179
REALISTIC 60179
RESTEK 60157
REVOX 60157
ROTEL 60157, 60897
SAE 60157
SAMSUNG 60524
SANSUI 60157, 60625
SANYO 60179
SEG 60625
SHARP 60034
SHERWOOD 60426
SIEMENS 60157, 60362
SIMAUDIO 60157
SONIC FRONTIERS
60157
SONY 60000
STS 60018
SUPERTECH 60625
SYNERGY 60625
TAG MCLAREN
60157
TANDY 60032
TEAC 60362, 60393,
60625, 60643
TECHNICS 60029, 60207,
60303
TECHWOOD 60362
THORENS 60157
THULE AUDIO60157
TOSHIBA 60299, 60481
TRAXDATA 60626
UNIVERSUM 60157, 60362,
60524
WARDS 60000, 60032,
60157, 60179
YAMAHA 60036, 61907
YBA 60625
CD RECORDER
DENON 70626, 70766
HHB 70192
JVC 71294
KENWOOD 70626
LG 71208
MARANTZ 70626
NAD 71208
PHILIPS 70626
PIONEER 70192, 71087
RCA 70420
SONY 70000
TDK 71208
TEAC 70420
VICTOR 70072, 71294
YAMAHA 70888, 71292
MD RECORDER
DENON 70873
KENWOOD 70681
OPTIMUS 71063
PIONEER 71063
SHARP 70861, 71684
SONY 70490
TECHNICS 71078
YAMAHA 70490, 70888,
71909
TAPE DECK
AIWA 70029, 70197
AKAI 70189, 70283
ARCAM 70076
CARVER 70029
DENON 70076
EROICA 70189
GARRARD 70308, 70309
GRUNDIG 70029
HARMAN/KARDON
70029
INKEL 70070
JVC 70244, 70273
KENWOOD 70070, 70205
MAGNAVOX 70029
MARANTZ 70029
MITSUBISHI 70189, 70283
MYRYAD 70029
ONKYO 70135, 70282
OPTIMUS 70027, 70220
ORION 70308, 70309
PANASONIC 70229
PHILIPS 70029, 70229
PIONEER 70027, 70220
POLK AUDIO 70029
RADIOLA 70029
RCA 70027, 70220
REVOX 70029
SANSUI 70029
SHARP 70205, 70231
SONY 70170, 70243
TEAC 70283, 70289,
70308, 70309
TECHNICS 70229
THORENS 70029
VICTOR 70244, 70273
WARDS 70027, 70029
YAMAHA 70097, 70205,
70524
TUNER
ACOUSTIC SOLUTIONS
81467
AIWA 80158, 80189
AKAI 80115, 80609
ANAM 80281, 80609
ARCAM 80189
CAIRN 80189
CAMBRIDGE 80189
CAMBRIDGE AUDIO
81455, 81647
CARVER 80189
DENON 80004, 80273
DUAL 80004
GARRARD 80281
GOLDMUND 80189
GOLDSTAR 80281
GOODMANS 80609
GRADIENTE 80281
GRUNDIG 80189, 80281
HARMAN/KARDON
80110, 80189
INKEL 80027, 80066
JBL 80110
JVC 80074
KENWOOD 80027, 80645
LG 80281
LINN 80189
LOEWE 80189
MAGNAVOX 80189
MARANTZ 80189
MEMOREX 80014
MICROMEGA 80189
MUSICAL FIDELITY
80445
MYRYAD 80189
NAD 80320, 80609
NIKKO 80609
ONKYO 80103, 80119
PANASONIC 80309, 80518
PHILIPS 80189
PIONEER 80014
POLK AUDIO 80189
RADIOLA 80189
RESTEK 80189
REVOX 80140, 80189
SANSUI 80189, 80609
SHERWOOD 80066
SIEMENS 80609
SONIC 80281
SONY 80158
SOUNDWAVE 80609
TEAC 80110, 80609
TECHNICS 80309, 80518,
81135
TECHWOOD 80281, 80609
THORENS 80189
UNIVERSUM 80189, 80281,
80609
VICTOR 80074
WARDS 80014, 80158,
80189
YAMAHA 80293, 81908
(TUNER ID1) 81916
(TUNER ID2) 81917
ZENITH 80281
OTHER AUDIO
ACCESSORIES
YAMAHA (iPod) 81981
YAMAHA (NET/USB) 81982

Documenttranscriptie

G CD RECORDER DENON HHB JVC 70626, 70766 70192 71294 KENWOOD LG MARANTZ NAD PHILIPS PIONEER RCA SONY TDK TEAC VICTOR YAMAHA 70626 71208 70626 71208 70626 70192, 71087 70420 70000 71208 70420 70072, 71294 70888, 71292 MD RECORDER DENON KENWOOD OPTIMUS PIONEER SHARP SONY TECHNICS YAMAHA 70873 70681 71063 71063 70861, 71684 70490 71078 70490, 70888, 71909 TAPE DECK AIWA 70029, 70197 AKAI 70189, 70283 ARCAM 70076 CARVER 70029 DENON 70076 EROICA 70189 GARRARD 70308, 70309 GRUNDIG 70029 HARMAN/KARDON 70029 INKEL 70070 JVC 70244, 70273 KENWOOD 70070, 70205 MAGNAVOX 70029 MARANTZ 70029 MITSUBISHI 70189, 70283 MYRYAD 70029 ONKYO 70135, 70282 OPTIMUS 70027, 70220 ORION 70308, 70309 PANASONIC PHILIPS PIONEER POLK AUDIO RADIOLA RCA REVOX SANSUI SHARP SONY TEAC TECHNICS THORENS VICTOR WARDS YAMAHA 70229 70029, 70229 70027, 70220 70029 70029 70027, 70220 70029 70029 70205, 70231 70170, 70243 70283, 70289, 70308, 70309 70229 70029 70244, 70273 70027, 70029 70097, 70205, 70524 TUNER ACOUSTIC SOLUTIONS 81467 AIWA 80158, 80189 AKAI 80115, 80609 ANAM 80281, 80609 ARCAM 80189 CAIRN 80189 CAMBRIDGE 80189 CAMBRIDGE AUDIO 81455, 81647 CARVER 80189 DENON 80004, 80273 DUAL 80004 GARRARD 80281 GOLDMUND 80189 GOLDSTAR 80281 GOODMANS 80609 GRADIENTE 80281 GRUNDIG 80189, 80281 HARMAN/KARDON 80110, 80189 INKEL 80027, 80066 JBL 80110 JVC 80074 KENWOOD 80027, 80645 LG 80281 LINN 80189 © 2006 YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA 6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A. YAMAHA CANADA MUSIC LTD. 135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA YAMAHA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H. SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, GERMANY YAMAHA ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A. RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE YAMAHA ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD. YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD18 7GQ, ENGLAND YAMAHA SCANDINAVIA A.B. J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN YAMAHA MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD. 17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA LOEWE 80189 MAGNAVOX 80189 MARANTZ 80189 MEMOREX 80014 MICROMEGA 80189 MUSICAL FIDELITY 80445 MYRYAD 80189 NAD 80320, 80609 NIKKO 80609 ONKYO 80103, 80119 PANASONIC 80309, 80518 PHILIPS 80189 PIONEER 80014 POLK AUDIO 80189 RADIOLA 80189 RESTEK 80189 REVOX 80140, 80189 SANSUI 80189, 80609 SHERWOOD 80066 SIEMENS 80609 SONIC 80281 SONY 80158 SOUNDWAVE 80609 TEAC 80110, 80609 TECHNICS 80309, 80518, 81135 TECHWOOD 80281, 80609 THORENS 80189 UNIVERSUM 80189, 80281, 80609 VICTOR 80074 WARDS 80014, 80158, 80189 YAMAHA 80293, 81908 (TUNER ID1) 81916 (TUNER ID2) 81917 ZENITH 80281 HTR-N5060 QUAD 60157 QUASAR 60029 RADIOLA 60157 RADIOTONE 60625 RCA 60032, 60179 REALISTIC 60179 RESTEK 60157 REVOX 60157 ROTEL 60157, 60897 SAE 60157 SAMSUNG 60524 SANSUI 60157, 60625 SANYO 60179 SEG 60625 SHARP 60034 SHERWOOD 60426 SIEMENS 60157, 60362 SIMAUDIO 60157 SONIC FRONTIERS 60157 SONY 60000 STS 60018 SUPERTECH 60625 SYNERGY 60625 TAG MCLAREN 60157 TANDY 60032 TEAC 60362, 60393, 60625, 60643 TECHNICS 60029, 60207, 60303 TECHWOOD 60362 THORENS 60157 THULE AUDIO60157 TOSHIBA 60299, 60481 TRAXDATA 60626 UNIVERSUM 60157, 60362, 60524 WARDS 60000, 60032, 60157, 60179 YAMAHA 60036, 61907 YBA 60625 HTR-N5060 AV Receiver Ampli-tuner audio-vidéo OTHER AUDIO ACCESSORIES YAMAHA (iPod) 81981 YAMAHA (NET/USB) 81982 All rights reserved. Printed in Malaysia WG73970 OWNER’S MANUAL MODE D’EMPLOI BEDIENUNGSANLEITUNG MANUALE DI ISTRUZIONI MANUAL DE INSTRUCCIONES GEBRUIKSAANWIJZING ИНСТРУКЦИЯ ПО ЭКСПЛУАТАЦИИ CAUTION: READ THIS BEFORE OPERATING YOUR UNIT. CAUTION: READ THIS BEFORE OPERATING YOUR UNIT. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 To assure the finest performance, please read this manual carefully. Keep it in a safe place for future reference. Install this sound system in a well ventilated, cool, dry, clean place – away from direct sunlight, heat sources, vibration, dust, moisture, and/or cold. Allow ventilation space of at least 30 cm on the top, 20 cm on the left and right, and 20 cm on the back of this unit. Locate this unit away from other electrical appliances, motors, or transformers to avoid humming sounds. Do not expose this unit to sudden temperature changes from cold to hot, and do not locate this unit in an environment with high humidity (i.e. a room with a humidifier) to prevent condensation inside this unit, which may cause an electrical shock, fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. Avoid installing this unit where a foreign object may fall onto this unit and/or this unit may be exposed to liquid dripping or splashing. On the top of this unit, do not place: – other components, as they may cause damage and/or discoloration on the surface of this unit. – burning objects (i.e. candles), as they may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. – containers with liquid in them, as they may fall and liquid may cause electrical shock to the user and/or damage to this unit. Do not cover this unit with a newspaper, tablecloth, curtain, etc. in order not to obstruct heat radiation. If the temperature inside this unit rises, it may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. Do not plug in this unit to a wall outlet until all connections are complete. Do not operate this unit upside-down. It may overheat, possibly causing damage. Do not use force on switches, knobs and/or cords. When disconnecting the power cable from the wall outlet, grasp the plug; do not pull the cord. Do not clean this unit with chemical solvents; this might damage the finish. Use a clean, dry cloth. 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 Only voltage specified on this unit must be used. Using this unit with a higher voltage than specified is dangerous and may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. YAMAHA will not be held responsible for any damage resulting from use of this unit with a voltage other than specified. To prevent damage by lightning, keep the power cable and outdoor antennas disconnected from a wall outlet or this unit during a lightning storm. Do not attempt to modify or fix this unit. Contact qualified YAMAHA service personnel when any service is needed. The cabinet should never be opened for any reasons. When not planning to use this unit for long periods of time (i.e. vacation), disconnect the AC power plug from the wall outlet. Install this unit near the AC wall outlet where the power cable plug can be reached easily. Be sure to read the “TROUBLESHOOTING” section on common operating errors before concluding that this unit is faulty. Before moving this unit, press STANDBY/ON to set this unit to the standby mode, and then disconnect the power cable from the AC wall outlet. WARNING TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS UNIT TO RAIN OR MOISTURE. This unit is not disconnected from the AC power source as long as it is connected to the wall outlet, even if this unit itself is set to the standby mode. In this state, this unit is designed to consume a very small quantity of power. CONTENTS FEATURES............................................................. 2 GETTING STARTED............................................ 3 Supplied accessories .................................................. 3 Installing batteries in the remote control ................... 3 CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS ......................... 4 PREPARATION Automatic tuning ..................................................... 46 Manual tuning.......................................................... 47 Automatic preset tuning........................................... 48 Manual preset tuning ............................................... 49 Selecting preset stations........................................... 50 Exchanging preset stations ...................................... 51 RADIO DATA SYSTEM TUNING (EUROPE MODEL ONLY).............................53 Selecting the Radio Data System program .............. 53 Using the Radio Data System station network ........ 54 Displaying the Radio Data System information ...... 55 SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS CONNECTIONS .................................................. 12 Selecting sound field programs ............................... 57 Sound field program descriptions............................ 58 Changing sound field parameter settings................. 60 ADVANCED OPERATION SET MENU ............................................................66 Using SET MENU................................................... 68 1 SOUND MENU.................................................... 69 2 INPUT MENU...................................................... 74 3 NET/USB MENU................................................. 76 4 OPTION MENU................................................... 78 ADVANCED SETUP ............................................81 REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES ...................83 Controlling this unit, a TV, or other components.... 83 Setting the remote control code ............................... 85 Setting library codes ................................................ 86 Resetting all remote control codes........................... 87 USING iPod® .........................................................88 SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS BASIC SETUP ...................................................... 29 SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS .............................57 BASIC OPERATION Placing speakers....................................................... 12 Connecting speakers ................................................ 13 Information on jacks and cable plugs ...................... 16 Audio and video signal flow.................................... 17 Connecting a TV...................................................... 18 Connecting a DVD player, a DVD recorder, a VCR or an STB................................................. 19 Connecting a CD player, an MD player or a tape deck....................................................... 21 Connecting a YAMAHA iPod universal dock ........ 22 Connecting the network........................................... 23 Connecting a multi-format player, an external decoder or a sound processor .............................. 24 Connecting a game console, a video camera or a portable audio player .................................... 24 Connecting the FM and AM antennas ..................... 25 Connecting the power cable..................................... 26 Setting the speaker impedance................................. 27 Turning on and off the power .................................. 28 PREPARATION Front panel ................................................................. 4 Remote control........................................................... 6 Front panel display .................................................... 9 Rear panel ................................................................ 11 FM/AM TUNING..................................................46 INTRODUCTION INTRODUCTION Controlling iPod ...................................................... 88 BASIC OPERATION USING VIDEO FEATURES ............................... 40 Displaying the input source information ................. 40 Selecting the OSD mode.......................................... 41 Playing video sources in the background ................ 41 RESETTING THE SYSTEM...............................95 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION TROUBLESHOOTING .......................................96 GLOSSARY.........................................................103 Audio information ................................................. 103 Video information.................................................. 105 Sound field program information .......................... 105 SPECIFICATIONS.............................................106 English ENJOYING SURROUND SOUND .................... 42 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Using SILENT CINEMA ........................................ 34 Muting the audio output........................................... 34 Selecting the night listening mode........................... 34 Selecting the input mode ......................................... 35 Using the sleep timer ............................................... 35 Adjusting the speaker level...................................... 36 Selecting the Compressed Music Enhancer mode... 37 Selecting the MULTI CH INPUT component......... 38 Enjoying multi-channel sources in 2-channel stereo............................................... 39 Enjoying unprocessed input sources........................ 39 Enjoying pure hi-fi stereo sound.............................. 39 Navigating the network and USB menus ................ 90 Using a PC server or YAMAHA MCX-2000........................................................... 92 Using the Internet radio ........................................... 93 Using a USB memory device or a USB portable audio player ........................................... 94 ADVANCED OPERATION PLAYBACK.......................................................... 32 USING AUDIO FEATURES............................... 34 USING NETWORK/USB FEATURES...............90 Enjoying multi-channel sources in 6.1-channel surround ....................................... 42 Enjoying 2-channel sources in surround.................. 43 Using Virtual CINEMA DSP .................................. 44 RECORDING ....................................................... 45 1 En FEATURES FEATURES Built-in 6-channel power amplifier Network features ◆ Minimum RMS output power (1 kHz, 0.7% THD, 8 Ω) Front: 110 W + 110 W Center: 110 W Surround: 110 W + 110 W Surround back: 110 W ◆ LAN port to connect a PC and YAMAHA MCX-2000 or access the Internet radio via a LAN ◆ DHCP automatic or manual network configuration Sound field programs ◆ Proprietary YAMAHA technology for the creation of sound fields ◆ Dolby Digital/Dolby Digital EX decoder ◆ DTS/DTS-ES Matrix 6.1, Discrete 6.1, DTS Neo:6, DTS 96/24 decoder ◆ Dolby Pro Logic/Dolby Pro Logic II/ Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoder ◆ Virtual CINEMA DSP ◆ SILENT CINEMA™ Sophisticated AM/FM tuner ◆ 40-station random and direct preset tuning ◆ Automatic preset tuning ◆ Preset station shifting capability (preset editing) Radio Data System (Europe model only) ◆ Radio Data System tuning capability iPod controlling capability ◆ DOCK terminal to connect a YAMAHA iPod universal dock (such as YDS-10 sold separately), which supports iPod (Click and Wheel), iPod nano, and iPod mini Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. “Dolby”, “Pro Logic”, and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. Manufactured under license from Digital Theater Systems, Inc. “DTS”, “DTS-ES”, “NEO:6”, and “DTS 96/24” are trademarks of Digital Theater Systems, Inc. Copyright 1996, 2003 Digital Theater Systems, Inc. All right reserved. iPod® “iPod” is a trademark of Apple Computer, Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. MPEG Layer-3 audio coding technology licensed from Fraunhofer IIS and Thomson. 2 En USB features ◆ USB port to connect a USB memory device or a USB portable audio player Other features ◆ 192-kHz/24-bit D/A converter ◆ OSD (on-screen display) menus that allow you to optimize this unit to suit your individual audiovisual system ◆ 6 additional input jacks for discrete multi-channel input ◆ S-video signal input/output capability ◆ Component video input/output capability (3 COMPONENT VIDEO INs and 1 MONITOR OUT) ◆ Digital video signal conversion (composite video ↔ S-video → component video) capability for monitor out ◆ Optical and coaxial digital audio signal jacks ◆ Sleep timer ◆ Cinema and music night listening modes ◆ Remote control with preset remote control codes, backlighting input selector buttons, and an iPod (stationed in a YAMAHA iPod universal dock connected to the DOCK terminal) controlling capability ◆ Compressed Music Enhancer mode to improve the sound quality of compression artifacts (such as the MP3 format) to that of a high-quality stereo This receiver supports network connections. “SILENT CINEMA” is a trademark of YAMAHA CORPORATION. This unit contains programs licensed under the GNU General Public License and GNU Lesser General Public License. Windows XP, Windows Media Audio, Windows Media Connect are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft corporation in the United States and/or countries. GETTING STARTED GETTING STARTED Check that you received all of the following parts. Remote control CODE SET POWER AM loop antenna 1 3 TRANSMIT POWER TV AV CD CD-R STANDBY POWER MD SLEEP MULTI CH IN CBL DVD Installing batteries in the remote control INTRODUCTION Supplied accessories DTV TUNER V-AUX DVR NET TV VOL TV CH VOLUME DOCK USB 2 AMP SOURCE TV TV MUTE TV INPUT MUTE STEREO MUSIC ENTERTAIN 1 2 3 4 STANDARD SELECT EXTD SUR. DIRECT ST. 5 6 7 8 SPEAKERS ENHANCER NIGHT STRAIGHT 9 0 MOVIE ENT. 10 EFFECT PRESET/CH SET MENU LEVEL TITLE MENU BAND SRCH MODE Indoor FM antenna (Canada model) ENTER 1 Take off the battery compartment cover. 2 Insert the two supplied batteries (AA, R6, UM-3) according to the polarity markings (+ and –) on the inside of the battery compartment. 3 Snap the battery compartment cover back into place. A/B/C/D/E RETURN DISPLAY DAB MEMORY ON SCREEN REC AUDIO PC/MCX NET RADIO FREQ/TEXT MODE USB PTY SEEK START EON Batteries (2) (AA, R6, UM-3) Indoor FM antenna (Europe and Australia models) About this manual • Change all of the batteries if you notice the following conditions: – the operation range of the remote control decreases. – the TRANSMIT indicator does not flash or its light becomes dim. • Do not use an old battery together with a new one. • Do not use different types of batteries (such as alkaline and manganese batteries) together. Read the packaging carefully as these different types of batteries may have the same shape and color. • If the batteries have leaked, dispose of them immediately. Avoid touching the leaked material or letting it come into contact with clothing, etc. Clean the battery compartment thoroughly before installing new batteries. • Do not throw away batteries with general house waste; dispose of them correctly in accordance with your local regulations. • If the remote control is without batteries for more than 2 minutes, or if exhausted batteries remain in the remote control, the contents of the memory may be cleared. When the memory is cleared, insert new batteries and set up the remote control code that may have been cleared. English • y indicates a tip for your operation. • Some operations can be performed by using either the buttons on the front panel or the ones on the remote control. In case the button names differ between the front panel and the remote control, the button name on the remote control is given in parentheses. • This manual is printed prior to production. Design and specifications are subject to change in part as a result of improvements, etc. In case of differences between the manual and product, the product has priority. Notes 3 En CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS Front panel 1 2 34 5 6 7 8 9 0 VOLUME STANDBY /ON PRESET/TUNING FM/AM A/B/C/D/E l PRESET/TUNING h MEMORY TUNING MODE LEVEL MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L NEXT EDIT INPUT PHONES SPEAKERS A B STRAIGHT l PROGRAM h VIDEO AUX INPUT MODE USB MULTI CH INPUT EFFECT TONE CONTROL BASS/TREBLE VIDEO SILENT CINEMA A B CD E F 1 STANDBY/ON Turns on this unit or sets it to the standby mode (see page 28). Notes • In the standby mode, this unit consumes a small amount of power in order to receive infrared signals from the remote control. • When you turn on this unit, there will be a 4 to 5-second delay before this unit can reproduce sound. 2 Remote control sensor Receives signals from the remote control (see page 8). 3 Front panel display Shows information about the operational status of this unit (see page 9). 4 PRESET/TUNING, EDIT • Switches the function of PRESET/TUNING l / h between selecting preset station numbers and selecting the tuning frequency. • Edits the assignments of preset stations (see page 51). 4 En G H I J L AUDIO R K 5 FM/AM Switches the reception band between FM and AM when “TUNER” is selected as the input source (see page 46). 6 A/B/C/D/E, NEXT • Selects one of the 5 preset station groups (A to E) when “TUNER” is selected as the input source (see page 49). • Selects the speaker channel whose output level you want to adjust when “TUNER” is not selected as the input source (see page 36). 7 PRESET/TUNING l / h, LEVEL +/– • Selects one of the 8 preset station numbers (1 to 8) when “TUNER” is selected as the input source. The colon (:) is displayed in the front panel display (see page 50). • Selects the tuning frequency when “TUNER” is selected as the input source. The colon (:) is not displayed in the front panel display (see page 46). • Adjusts the level of the speaker channel selected using NEXT when “TUNER” is not selected as the input source (see page 36). CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS E BASS/TREBLE +/– Adjusts the bass/treble balance of the front left and right speakers in conjunction with TONE CONTROL (see page 33). 9 TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L) Switches between automatic tuning (the AUTO indicator is turned on) and manual tuning (the AUTO indicator is turned off) (see page 46). F PROGRAM l / h Selects sound field programs (see page 33). 0 VOLUME Controls the output level of all audio channels. y This does not affect the AUDIO OUT (REC) level. A PHONES (SILENT CINEMA) jack Outputs audio signals for private listening with headphones (see page 34). Notes • When you connect headphones, no signals are output at the SUBWOOFER OUTPUT jack or the speaker terminals. • All Dolby Digital and DTS audio signals are mixed down to the left and right headphone channels. B SPEAKERS A/B Turns on or off the set of front speakers connected to the FRONT A and/or B terminals on the rear panel each time the corresponding button is pressed. C STRAIGHT (EFFECT) Turns the sound field programs off or on. When the “STRAIGHT” mode is selected, 2-channel or multichannel input signals are output directly from their respective speakers without effect processing (see page 39). D TONE CONTROL Selects “BASS” or “TREBLE” to adjust the tonal balance of the front left and right speakers in conjunction with BASS/TREBLE +/– (see page 33). G INPUT MODE Selects either digital or analog input signals exclusively or sets this unit to automatically detect the type of input signals and select the corresponding input signals when one component is connected via both digital and analog connections (see page 35). INTRODUCTION 8 MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM) Stores a preset station in the memory. Hold down this button for more than 3 seconds to start automatic preset tuning (see page 48). H INPUT selector Selects the desired input source. I MULTI CH INPUT Selects the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks as the input source (see page 38). Note The input source connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks takes priority over the source selected with the INPUT selector on the front panel (or the input selector buttons on the remote control). J VIDEO AUX jacks Input audio and video signals from a portable external source such as a game console, a video camera or a portable audio player (see page 24). y To reproduce the source signals input at these jacks, select “V-AUX” as the input source. Note The audio signals input at the DOCK terminal on the rear panel take priority over the ones input at the VIDEO AUX jacks. K USB port Use to connect a USB memory device or a USB portable audio player (see page 94). English 5 En CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS Remote control This section describes the function of each control on the remote control used to control this unit. To operate other components, see “REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES” on page 83. Note The operation mode of the remote control buttons in the shaded area below depends on the component selector switch position. Set the component selector switch to AMP to control this unit. To control the TUNER functions, set the component selector switch to SOURCE and then press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source. 1 2 0 CODE SET POWER TV A TRANSMIT POWER STANDBY POWER B AV MD CD SLEEP CD-R 3 DVD DTV D TUNER DOCK V-AUX USB DVR NET AMP SOURCE TV VOL C MULTI CH IN CBL TV CH VOLUME E F TV 4 G TV MUTE TV INPUT MUTE STEREO MUSIC ENTERTAIN 1 2 3 4 STANDARD SELECT EXTD SUR. DIRECT ST. MOVIE 5 6 7 8 SPEAKERS ENHANCER NIGHT STRAIGHT 9 0 ■ Controlling this unit Set the component selector switch to AMP to control this unit. 1 Infrared window Outputs infrared control signals. Aim this window at the component you want to operate (see page 8). 2 CODE SET Use to set up remote control codes (see page 85). 3 Input selector buttons Select the input source you want to control. Note The corresponding input selector button for the currently selected input source lights up for approximately 5 seconds after you press any buttons on the remote control, showing which source component is currently being operated. 4 Sound field program selector buttons Select sound field programs (see page 57). – Use SELECT to play back 2-channel sources in surround (see page 43). – Use EXTD SUR. to switch between 5.1 and 6.1-channel playback of multi-channel sources (see page 42). – Use DIRECT ST. to play back 2-channel sources in hi-fi stereo sound (see page 39). 5 SPEAKERS Turns on or off the set of front speakers connected to the FRONT A and/or B terminals on the rear panel. Press this button repeatedly to toggle as follows: A on 5 6 7 ENT. 10 EFFECT PRESET/CH SET MENU LEVEL TITLE MENU BAND SRCH MODE 8 H I J ENTER B on A and B off 6 ENHANCER Turns on or off the Compressed Music Enhancer mode (see page 37). A/B/C/D/E 9 RETURN DISPLAY DAB MEMORY ON SCREEN K REC AUDIO PC/MCX NET RADIO FREQ/TEXT MODE USB PTY SEEK START EON L M 7 LEVEL Selects the speaker channel to be adjusted and sets the output level (see page 36). 8 Cursor buttons u / d / j / i, ENTER Select and adjust the sound field program parameters or the “SET MENU” parameters. 9 RETURN Returns to the previous menu level when adjusting the “SET MENU” parameters. 6 En CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS 0 TRANSMIT indicator Flashes while the remote control is sending infrared signals. J SET MENU Enters “SET MENU” (see page 68). B POWER Turns on this unit (see page 28). K DISPLAY Selects the on-screen display (OSD) mode for your video monitor (see page 41). C SLEEP Sets the sleep timer (see page 35). L Network and USB input selector buttons Select the sub input source of NET/USB (see page 90). D MULTI CH IN Selects the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks as the input source when using an external decoder, etc. (see page 38). PC/MCX Selects a PC server or YAMAHA MCX-2000 as the sub input source of NET/USB. E VOLUME +/– Increases or decreases the volume level. NET RADIO Selects the Internet radio as the sub input source of NET/USB. F Component selector switch Selects the operation mode of the remote control buttons in the shaded area. USB Selects a USB memory device or a USB portable audio player as the sub input source of NET/USB. AMP Operates this unit. SOURCE Operates the component selected with an input selector button (see page 84). TV Operates the TV assigned to either DTV/CBL or (see page 83). Notes Notes • Press NET/USB to select “NET/USB” as the input source before you press any of the network and USB input selector buttons stated above to select the corresponding sub input source of NET/USB. • When you press any of the network and USB input selector buttons, the contents previously played for the corresponding sub input source of NET/USB is automatically played. M Radio Data System tuning buttons (Europe model only) • To set the remote control codes for other components, see page 85. • When you set the remote control codes for both DTV/CBL and (see page 85), priority is given to the one set for DTV/ CBL. FREQ/TEXT Switches the Radio Data System display between the PS mode, PTY mode, RT mode, CT mode (if the station offers the corresponding data services) and the frequency display (see page 55). G MUTE Mutes the audio output. Press again to restore the audio output to the previous volume level (see page 34). PTY SEEK MODE Sets this unit to the PTY SEEK mode (see page 53). H STRAIGHT (EFFECT) Turns the sound field programs off or on. When the “STRAIGHT” mode is selected, 2-channel or multichannel input signals are output directly from their respective speakers without effect processing (see page 39). INTRODUCTION A STANDBY Sets this unit to the standby mode (see page 28). I NIGHT Turns on or off the night listening modes (see page 34). PTY SEEK START Starts searching for a station once the desired program type is selected in the PTY SEEK mode (see page 53). EON Selects a program type (NEWS, AFFAIRS, INFO, or SPORT) for automatic tuning (see page 54). English 7 En CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS ■ Controlling the TUNER functions ■ Using the remote control Set the component selector switch to SOURCE and then press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source. The remote control transmits a directional infrared ray. Be sure to aim the remote control directly at the remote control sensor on this unit during operation. 4 Numeric buttons Use numbers 1 through 8 to select preset stations. 7 BAND Switches the reception band between FM and AM. VOLUME 8 Cursor buttons u / d / j / i Press j / i to select a preset station group (A to E) and u / d to select a preset station number (1 to 8) (see page 50). STANDBY /ON PRESET/TUNING FM/AM A/B/C/D/E NEXT EDIT l PRESET/TUNING h MEMORY LEVEL MAN'L/AUTO FM TUNING MODE AUTO/MAN'L INPUT PHONES STRAIGHT SPEAKERS A B l PROGRAM h VIDEO AUX INPUT MODE USB MULTI CH INPUT EFFECT TONE CONTROL BASS/TREBLE VIDEO SILENT CINEMA 30 30 L AUDIO R Approximately 6 m Note CODE SET POWER TRANSMIT POWER TV AV CD CD-R STANDBY POWER MD The printed letters “DAB MEMORY” and “SRCH MODE” are not applicable to this unit. SLEEP MULTI CH IN CBL DVD TUNER DTV DOCK USB V-AUX DVR NET TV VOL TV CH VOLUME AMP SOURCE TV TV MUTE STEREO TV INPUT MUTE MUSIC ENTERTAIN MOVIE 1 2 3 4 STANDARD SELECT EXTD SUR. DIRECT ST. 5 6 7 8 SPEAKERS ENHANCER NIGHT STRAIGHT 9 0 ENT. 10 EFFECT PRESET/CH SET MENU LEVEL TITLE MENU SRCH MODE BAND ENTER A/B/C/D/E RETURN DISPLAY DAB MEMORY ON SCREEN REC AUDIO PC/MCX NET RADIO FREQ/TEXT MODE USB PTY SEEK START EON Notes • Do not spill water or other liquids on the remote control. • Do not drop the remote control. • Do not leave or store the remote control in the following types of conditions: – places of high humidity, such as near a bath – places of high temperatures, such as near a heater or stove – places of extremely low temperatures – dusty places 8 En CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS Front panel display t 2 3 5 6 7 8 9 0 DOCK VIRTUAL STANDARD SP SILENT CINEMA NIGHT AB C B VOLUME AUTO TUNED STEREO MEMORY HiFi DSP PTY HOLD PS PTY RT CT EON SLEEP dB MUTE 96/24 LFE ft q DIGITAL q PL x q PL A pDVR pV-AUX pDTV/CBL pDVD pMD/CD-R pTUNER pCD pNET USB 96 24 MATRIX DISCRETE ENHANCER q EX 4 q PL mS dB PCM D E F G H I J 1 Decoder indicators The respective indicator lights up when any of the decoders of this unit functions. 2 ENHANCER indicator Lights up when the Compressed Music Enhancer mode is turned on (see page 37). 3 Sound field indicators Light up to indicate the active DSP sound fields. Presence DSP sound field Listening position Surround left DSP sound field Surround right DSP sound field Surround back DSP sound field L C R SL SB SR K L M P INTRODUCTION 1 N O (Europe model only) 6 DOCK indicator Lights up when you station your iPod in a YAMAHA iPod universal dock (such as YDS-10 sold separately) connected to the DOCK terminal of this unit (see page 22). 7 SILENT CINEMA indicator Lights up when headphones are connected and a sound field program is selected (see page 34). 8 CINEMA DSP indicator Lights up when you select a CINEMA DSP sound field program (see page 58). 9 AUTO indicator Lights up when this unit is in the automatic tuning mode (see page 46). 4 VIRTUAL indicator Lights up when Virtual CINEMA DSP is active (see page 44). 0 TUNED indicator Lights up when this unit is tuned into a station (see page 46). 5 Input source indicators The corresponding cursor lights up to show the currently selected input source. A STEREO indicator Lights up when this unit is receiving a strong signal for an FM stereo broadcast while the AUTO indicator is lit. B MEMORY indicator Flashes to show that a station can be stored (see page 48). English 9 En CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS C VOLUME level indicator Indicates the current volume level. D PCM indicator Lights up when this unit is reproducing PCM (Pulse Code Modulation) digital audio signals. E STANDARD indicator Lights up when the “SUR. STANDARD” or “SUR. ENHANCED” program is selected. F SP A B indicators Light up according to the set of front speakers selected. G Headphones indicator Lights up when headphones are connected. H NIGHT indicator Lights up when you select a night listening mode (see page 34). I HiFi DSP indicator Lights up when you select a HiFi DSP sound field program (see page 59). J Multi-information display Shows the name of the current sound field program and other information when adjusting or changing settings. K SLEEP indicator Lights up while the sleep timer is on (see page 35). L MUTE indicator Flashes while the MUTE function is on (see page 34). M 96/24 indicator Lights up when a DTS 96/24 signal is input to this unit. N Input channel indicators Indicate the channel components of the current digital input signal. O LFE indicator Lights up when the input signal contains the LFE signal. P Radio Data System indicators (Europe model only) The corresponding indicator lights up to show the type of the Radio Data System information. EON Lights up when the EON data service is being received. PTY HOLD Lights up while searching for the Radio Data System stations in the PTY SEEK mode. 10 En CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS Rear panel 2 AUDIO 3 AUDIO 4 5 MULTI CH INPUT OUTPUT CENTER 6 DIGITAL OUTPUT MD/CD-R DIGITAL INPUT MD/CD-R DVD DTV/CBL 7 8 DOCK LAN DVD Y IN MD/ OUT (PLAY) CD-R (REC) CD FRONT SURROUND SUB WOOFER SUB WOOFER OPTICAL OPTICAL 9 INTRODUCTION 1 COAXIAL PB PR Y PB PR DVR DVD DTV/ CBL DVD DTV/CBL IN DVR OUT VIDEO TUNER AM ANT GND MONITOR OUT DVD DTV/CBL IN DVR OUT S VIDEO MONITOR OUT MONITOR OUT COMPONENT VIDEO SPEAKERS FM ANT 75Ω UNBAL. SURROUND FRONT A B CENTER 0 A 1 Video component jacks See pages 18 and 19 for connection information. 2 Audio component jacks See page 21 for connection information. 3 MULTI CH INPUT jacks See page 24 for connection information. 4 SUBWOOFER OUTPUT jack See page 13 for connection information. 5 DIGITAL OUTPUT jack See page 21 for connection information. 6 DIGITAL INPUT jacks See pages 19 and 21 for connection information. SURROUND BACK B 8 LAN port Use to connect a network cable for network connections. See page 23 for connection information. 9 COMPONENT VIDEO jacks See pages 18 and 19 for connection information. 0 Antenna terminals See page 25 for connection information. A Speaker terminals See page 13 for connection information. B AC OUTLET(S) Use to supply power to your other audiovisual components. See page 26 for details. 7 DOCK terminal Use to connect a YAMAHA iPod universal dock (such as YDS-10 sold separately) where your iPod can be stationed. See page 22 for connection information. English 11 En CONNECTIONS CONNECTIONS Placing speakers The speaker layout below shows the standard ITU-R* speaker setting. You can use it to enjoy CINEMA DSP and multi-channel audio sources. * ITU-R is the radio communication sector of the ITU (International Telecommunication Union). FL Center speaker (C) The center speaker is for the center channel sounds (dialog, vocals, etc.). If for some reason it is not practical to use a center speaker, you can do without it. Best results, however, are obtained with the full system. Place the center speaker centrally between the front speakers and as close to the monitor as possible, such as directly over or under it. FR C 30˚ SL SR Surround left and right speakers (SL and SR) The surround speakers are used for effect and surround sounds. Place these speakers behind your listening position, facing slightly inwards, about 1.8 m (6 ft) above the floor. 60˚ SL 80˚ SR SB FR SW FL SR C SL SB 1.8 m (6 ft) 12 En Front left and right speakers (FL and FR) The front speakers are used for the main source sound plus effect sounds. Place these speakers at an equal distance from the ideal listening position. The distance of each speaker from each side of the video monitor should be the same. Surround back speaker (SB) The surround back speaker supplements the surround speakers and provides more realistic front-to-back transitions. Place this speaker directly behind the listening position and at the same height as the surround speakers. Subwoofer (SW) The use of a subwoofer with a built-in amplifier, such as the YAMAHA Active Servo Processing Subwoofer System, is effective not only for reinforcing bass frequencies from any or all channels, but also for high fidelity reproduction of the LFE (low-frequency effect) channel included in Dolby Digital and DTS sources. The position of the subwoofer is not so critical, because low bass sounds are not highly directional. But it is better to place the subwoofer near the front speakers. Turn it slightly toward the center of the room to reduce wall reflections. CONNECTIONS Connecting speakers Be sure to connect the left channel (L), right channel (R), “+” (red) and “–” (black) properly. If the connections are faulty, no sound will be heard from the speakers, and if the polarity of the speaker connections is incorrect, the sound will be unnatural and lack bass. CAUTION Note A speaker cord is actually a pair of insulated cables running side by side. Cables are colored or shaped differently, perhaps with a stripe, groove or ridge. Connect the striped (grooved, etc.) cable to the “+” (red) terminals of this unit and your speaker. Connect the plain cable to the “–” (black) terminals. PREPARATION • Before connecting the speakers, make sure that this unit is turned off (see page 28). • Do not let the bare speaker wires touch each other or do not let them touch any metal part of this unit. This could damage this unit and/or speakers. • Use magnetically shielded speakers. If this type of speakers still creates the interference with the monitor, place the speakers away from the monitor. • If you are to use 6 ohm speakers, be sure to set “SP IMP.” to “6ΩMIN” before using this unit (see page 27). 4 ohm speakers can be also used as the front speakers (see page 82). Front speakers (A) Right Left Surround speakers Right Left 1 2 4 5 Subwoofer 7 OUTPUT SUB WOOFER SPEAKERS FRONT SURROUND A B CENTER Front speakers (B) SURROUND BACK 3 6 Center speaker English Surround back speaker 13 En CONNECTIONS FRONT terminals Connect one or two sets of front speakers (1, 2) to these terminals. If you use only one front speaker system, connect it to the FRONT A or B terminal. CENTER terminals Connect a center speaker (3) to these terminals. SURROUND terminals Connect surround speakers (4, 5) to these terminals. SURROUND BACK terminals Connect a surround back speaker (6) to these terminals. SUBWOOFER OUTPUT jack Connect a subwoofer with a built-in amplifier (7) (such as the YAMAHA Active Servo Processing Subwoofer System) to this jack. 14 En 1 7 2 4 3 5 Speaker layout 6 CONNECTIONS ■ Connecting the speaker cable ■ Connecting the banana plug (except Europe model) 1 The banana plug is a single-pole electrical connector widely used to terminate speaker cables. Remove approximately 10 mm of insulation from the end of each speaker cable and then twist the exposed wires of the cable together to prevent short circuits. Banana plug 10 mm 2 PREPARATION 1 Tighten the knob. Loosen the knob. Red: positive (+) Black: negative (–) Red: positive (+) Black: negative (–) 2 3 Insert one bare wire into the hole on the side of each terminal. 4 Tighten the knob to secure the wire. Insert the banana plug connector into the end of the corresponding terminal. English 15 En CONNECTIONS Information on jacks and cable plugs Audio jacks and cable plugs DIGITAL AUDIO DIGITAL AUDIO L R COAXIAL OPTICAL (White) (Red) (Orange) L R C AUDIO Left and right Coaxial analog audio digital audio cable plugs cable plug Video jacks and cable plugs VIDEO S VIDEO (Yellow) O V S Optical digital audio cable plug Composite video cable plug S-video cable plug COMPONENT VIDEO Y PB PR (Green) (Blue) (Red) Y PB PR Component video cable plugs ■ Audio jacks ■ Video jacks This unit has three types of audio jacks. Connection depends on the availability of audio jacks on your other components. This unit has three types of video jacks. Connection depends on the availability of input jacks on your video monitor. AUDIO jacks For conventional analog audio signals transmitted via left and right analog audio cables. Connect red plugs to the right jacks and white plugs to the left jacks. VIDEO jacks For conventional composite video signals transmitted via composite video cables. DIGITAL AUDIO COAXIAL jacks For digital audio signals transmitted via coaxial digital audio cables. DIGITAL AUDIO OPTICAL jacks For digital audio signals transmitted via optical digital audio cables. Notes • You can use the digital jacks to input PCM, Dolby Digital and DTS bitstreams. When you connect components to both the COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks, priority is given to the signals input at the COAXIAL jack. All digital input jacks are compatible with 96-kHz sampling digital signals. • Pull out the cap from the optical jack before you connect the fiber optic cable. Do not discard the cap. When you are not using the optical jack, be sure to put the cap back in place. This cap protects the jack from dust. 16 En S VIDEO jacks For S-video signals, separated into the luminance (Y) and chrominance (C) video signals transmitted on separate wires of S-video cables. COMPONENT VIDEO jacks For component video signals, separated into the luminance (Y) and chrominance (PB, PR) video signals transmitted on separate wires of component video cables. y When “VIDEO CONV.” is set to “ON” (see page 78), the video signals input at the VIDEO and S VIDEO jacks are converted and output at the VIDEO, S VIDEO and COMPONENT VIDEO jacks interchangeably. CONNECTIONS Audio and video signal flow ■ Audio signal flow for AUDIO OUT (REC) Input Output AUDIO OUT (REC) DIGITAL AUDIO COAXIAL Digital audio L R L R Analog audio AUDIO PREPARATION DIGITAL AUDIO OPTICAL Digital output Analog output Note This unit handles digital and analog signals independently. Thus, audio signals input at the analog jacks are output only at the analog AUDIO OUT (REC) jacks. Likewise, audio signals input at the DIGITAL INPUT (OPTICAL or COAXIAL) jacks are output only at the DIGITAL OUTPUT jack. ■ Video signal flow for MONITOR OUT Input Y PB Output (MONITOR OUT) PR Y PB PR COMPONENT VIDEO Analog video S VIDEO VIDEO Through Video conversion when “VIDEO CONV.” is set to “ON” (see page 78) Note 17 En English If video signals are input at the COMPONENT VIDEO, S VIDEO and VIDEO jacks simultaneously when “VIDEO CONV.” is set to “ON”, the priority order of the input signals is as follows: COMPONENT VIDEO > S VIDEO > VIDEO CONNECTIONS Connecting a TV Connect your TV to the VIDEO MONITOR OUT jack, the S VIDEO MONITOR OUT jack or the COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT jacks of this unit. CAUTION Do not connect this unit or other components to the AC power supply until all connections between components are complete. Y VIDEO MONITOR OUT MONITOR OUT MONITOR OUT S VIDEO V COMPONENT VIDEO S Y PB PR S-video in Component video in Video in TV 18 En PB PR CONNECTIONS Connecting a DVD player, a DVD recorder, a VCR or an STB Connect your DVD player, DVD recorder, VCR or STB (set-top box) using the same type of video connections as those made for your TV (see page 18). The cable TV receiver and the satellite receiver are examples of the STB. CAUTION Do not connect this unit or other components to the AC power supply until all connections between components are complete. Notes PREPARATION • When “VIDEO CONV.” is set to “OFF” (see page 78), be sure to make the same type of video connections as those made for your TV (see page 18). For example, if you connected your TV to the VIDEO MONITOR OUT jack of this unit, connect your other components to the VIDEO jacks. • When “VIDEO CONV.” is set to “ON” (see page 78), the converted video signals are output only at the MONITOR OUT jacks. When recording a source, you must make the same type of video connections between each component. • To make a digital connection to a component other than the default component assigned to each DIGITAL INPUT or DIGITAL OUTPUT jack, select the corresponding setting for “OPTICAL OUT”, “OPTICAL IN”, or “COAXIAL IN” in “I/O ASSIGNMENT” (see page 74). • If you connect your DVD player to both the DIGITAL INPUT (OPTICAL) and the DIGITAL INPUT (COAXIAL) jacks, priority is given to the signals input at the DIGITAL INPUT (COAXIAL) jack. ■ Connecting a DVD player DVD player S O AUDIO C Coaxial audio out V Optical audio out L S-video out R Component video out Video out Audio out Y PR PB DIGITAL INPUT DVD DVD OPTICAL COAXIAL Y PB PR DVD DVD DVD VIDEO S VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO English 19 En CONNECTIONS ■ Connecting a DVD recorder or a VCR AUDIO Y PB PR DVR DVR OUT IN COMPONENT VIDEO L V V S S-video in R S-video out L Video out Audio in Audio out R DVR OUT S VIDEO Video in IN VIDEO S Y PB PR Component video out DVD recorder or VCR ■ Connecting an STB Cable TV receiver or satellite receiver S O AUDIO Optical audio out V S-video out L Video out R Audio out Component video out Y PB PR DIGITAL INPUT DTV/CBL Y PB PR OPTICAL DTV/ CBL DTV/CBL VIDEO 20 En DTV/CBL S VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO CONNECTIONS Connecting a CD player, an MD player or a tape deck Connect your CD player, MD player or tape deck via analog and/or digital connections. CAUTION Do not connect this unit or other components to the AC power supply until all connections between components are complete. Note CD player Audio out L AUDIO DIGITAL OUTPUT MD/CD-R MD/ OUT OPTICAL (PLAY) CD-R (REC) O Audio out R L R L Audio in Optical audio in IN CD DIGITAL INPUT MD/CD-R OPTICAL O Optical audio out R PREPARATION To make a digital connection to a component other than the default component assigned to each DIGITAL INPUT or DIGITAL OUTPUT jack, select the corresponding setting for “OPTICAL OUT”, “OPTICAL IN”, or “COAXIAL IN” in “I/O ASSIGNMENT” (see page 74). MD recorder or tape deck English 21 En CONNECTIONS Connecting a YAMAHA iPod universal dock This unit is equipped with the DOCK terminal on the rear panel that allows you to connect a YAMAHA iPod universal dock (such as YDS-10 sold separately) where you can station your iPod and control playback of your iPod using the supplied remote control. Connect a YAMAHA iPod universal dock (such as YDS-10 sold separately) to the DOCK terminal on the rear panel of this unit using its dedicated cable. Once the connection is complete, station your iPod in the YAMAHA iPod universal dock. CAUTION Do not connect this unit or other components to the AC power supply until all connections between components are complete. Notes • Only iPod (Click and Wheel), iPod nano, and iPod mini are supported. • You need a YAMAHA iPod universal dock (such as YDS-10 sold separately) and its dedicated cable compatible with the DOCK terminal of this unit. • Do not connect any iPod accessories (such as headphones, a wired remote control, or an FM transmitter) to your iPod when it is stationed in a YAMAHA iPod universal dock (such as YDS-10 sold separately). • Once your iPod is stationed in a YAMAHA iPod universal dock (such as YDS-10 sold separately) connected to the DOCK terminal of this unit, this unit begins the signal transmission with your iPod. • Unless your iPod is firmly stationed in a YAMAHA iPod universal dock (such as YDS-10 sold separately) connected to the DOCK terminal of this unit, audio and/or video signals may not be output properly. • Once the connection between your iPod and this unit is complete, “iPod connected” appears in the front panel display and the DOCK indicator lights up in the front panel display. If the connection between your iPod and this unit fails, a status message appears in the front panel display. For a complete list of connection status messages, see the iPod section in “TROUBLESHOOTING” on page 100. • Only analog audio and video signals of your iPod are input at the DOCK terminal, and the analog audio signals can be output at the analog AUDIO OUT (REC) jacks for recording. • Your iPod battery is automatically charged when your iPod is stationed in a YAMAHA iPod universal dock (such as YDS-10 sold separately) connected to the DOCK terminal of this unit as long as this unit is turned on. • Depending on the type of iPod, you may need to insert one of the iPod adapters supplied with a YAMAHA iPod universal dock (such as YDS-10 sold separately) into the dock slot before you station your iPod. iPod YAMAHA iPod universal dock (such as YDS-10 sold separately) DOCK 22 En CONNECTIONS Connecting the network To connect this unit to your network, plug one end of a network cable (CAT-5 or higher straight cable) into the LAN port of this unit, and plug the other end into one of the LAN ports on your router that supports the DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) server function. The following diagram shows a connection example where this unit is connected to one of the LAN ports on a 4-port router. To enjoy music files saved on your PC and YAMAHA MCX-2000 or access the Internet radio, each device must be connected properly in the network. Note If the DHCP server function on your router is disabled, you need to configure the network settings manually (see page 76). YAMAHA MCX-C15 Internet WAN YAMAHA MCX-A10 (with optional speakers) PC PREPARATION YAMAHA MCX-2000 LAN Modem Router Network cable LAN English 23 En CONNECTIONS Connecting a multi-format player, an external decoder or a sound processor This unit is equipped with 6 additional input jacks (FRONT L/R, CENTER, SURROUND L/R and SUBWOOFER) for discrete multi-channel input from a multi-format player, external decoder or sound processor. Connect the output jacks on your multi-format player, external decoder or sound processor to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks. Be sure to match the left and right output jacks to the left and right input jacks for the front and surround channels. CAUTION Do not connect this unit or other components to the AC power supply until all connections between components are complete. Connecting a game console, a video camera or a portable audio player Use the VIDEO AUX jacks on the front panel to connect a game console, a video camera or a portable audio player to this unit. CAUTION Be sure to turn off the volume of this unit and other components before making connections. Note The audio signals input at the DOCK terminal takes priority over the ones input at the VIDEO AUX jacks. VOLUME Notes STANDBY /ON PRESET/TUNING FM/AM STRAIGHT l L R SUB WOOFER Multi-format player, external decoder or sound processor 24 En MAN'L/AUTO FM TUNING MODE AUTO/MAN'L VIDEO AUX USB MULTI CH INPUT EFFECT BASS/TREBLE TONE CONTROL VIDEO SILENT CINEMA VIDEO AUX VIDEO L L AUDIO R R Game console, video camera or portable audio player Center out R SURROUND Subwoofer out Front out L Surround out FRONT MEMORY LEVEL h PROGRAM INPUT MODE Video out CENTER l PRESET/TUNING h NEXT INPUT SPEAKERS A B V MULTI CH INPUT A/B/C/D/E EDIT PHONES Audio out • When you select the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks as the input source (see page 38), this unit automatically turns off the digital sound field processor, and you cannot select sound field programs. • This unit does not redirect signals input at the MULTI CH INPUT jacks to accommodate for missing speakers. We recommend that you connect at least a 5.1-channel speaker system before using this feature. • When headphones are used, only the signals input at the FRONT L/R jacks are output at the PHONES jack. L AUDIO R CONNECTIONS Connecting the FM and AM antennas Both FM and AM indoor antennas are supplied with this unit. In general, these antennas should provide sufficient signal strength. Connect each antenna correctly to the designated terminals. 2 Press and hold the tab of the AM ANT terminal. 3 Insert one of the AM loop antenna lead wires into the AM ANT terminal. 4 Release the tab of the AM ANT terminal back into place. 5 Repeat steps 2 through 4 to connect the other lead wire to the GND terminal. Notes AM loop antenna (supplied) PREPARATION • The AM loop antenna should be placed away from this unit. • The AM loop antenna should always be connected, even if an outdoor AM antenna is connected to this unit. • A properly installed outdoor antenna provides clearer reception than an indoor one. If you experience poor reception quality, install an outdoor antenna. Consult the nearest authorized YAMAHA dealer or service center about outdoor antennas. Indoor FM antenna (supplied) TUNER AM ANT GND FM ANT 75Ω UNBAL. Ground (GND terminal) For maximum safety and minimum interference, connect the antenna GND terminal to a good earth ground. A good earth ground is a metal stake driven into moist earth. Outdoor AM antenna Use a 5 to 10 m of vinyl-covered wire extended from a window. ■ Connecting the AM loop antenna y 1 Set up the AM loop antenna. Once you have properly connected the AM loop antenna to this unit, orient the AM loop antenna for the best reception when you tune into AM stations. English 25 En CONNECTIONS Connecting the power cable Once all connections are complete, plug the power cable into the AC wall outlet. (Canada model) AC OUTLETS To the AC wall outlet ■ AC OUTLET(S) (SWITCHED) Australia model ..................................................... 1 outlet Other models .........................................................2 outlets Use these outlet(s) to supply power to any connected components. Connect the power cable of your other components to these outlet(s). Power to these outlet(s) is supplied when this unit is turned on. However, power to these outlet(s) is cut off when this unit is set to the standby mode. For information on the maximum power or the total power consumption of the components that can be connected to these outlet(s), see “SPECIFICATIONS” on page 106. Memory back-up The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data from being lost even if this unit is in the standby mode. However, the stored data will be lost in case the power cable is disconnected from the AC wall outlet or if the power supply is cut off for more than one week. 26 En CONNECTIONS Setting the speaker impedance CAUTION 3 If you are to use 6 ohm speakers, set “SP IMP.” to “6ΩMIN” as follows BEFORE using this unit. 4 ohm speakers can be also used as the front speakers. Press PROGRAM l / h on the front panel to select “SP IMP.”. The following display appears in the front panel display. l PROGRAM h 2,5 PREPARATION VOLUME STANDBY /ON PRESET/TUNING FM/AM A/B/C/D/E l PRESET/TUNING h MEMORY LEVEL MAN'L/AUTO FM NEXT EDIT TUNING MODE AUTO/MAN'L SP IMP.-8 MIN INPUT PHONES STRAIGHT SPEAKERS A B l PROGRAM h VIDEO AUX INPUT MODE USB MULTI CH INPUT EFFECT TONE CONTROL BASS/TREBLE VIDEO SILENT CINEMA 2,4 1 2 L AUDIO R 4 3 Make sure this unit is set to the standby mode. See page 28 for details about turning on this unit or setting it to the standby mode. Press STRAIGHT (EFFECT) on the front panel repeatedly to select “6ΩMIN”. The following display appears in the front panel display. STRAIGHT EFFECT Press and hold STRAIGHT (EFFECT) on the front panel and then press STANDBY/ON to turn on this unit. This unit turns on, and the advanced setup menu appears in the front panel display. While holding down 5 STRAIGHT STANDBY /ON EFFECT SP IMP.-6 MIN Press STANDBY/ON on the front panel to save the new setting and set this unit to the standby mode. STANDBY /ON Note The setting you made is reflected next time you turn on this unit. English 27 En CONNECTIONS Turning on and off the power When all connections are complete, turn on this unit. STANDBY/ON CODE SET STANDBY TRANSMIT VOLUME POWER POWER TV AV CD CD-R STANDBY /ON POWER POWER MD PRESET/TUNING FM/AM A/B/C/D/E NEXT EDIT l PRESET/TUNING h MEMORY SPEAKERS A B STRAIGHT l PROGRAM LEVEL MAN'L/AUTO FM DVD AUTO/MAN'L DTV TUNER V-AUX DVR NET TV VOL TV CH VOLUME DOCK h VIDEO AUX INPUT MODE SLEEP MULTI CH IN CBL TUNING MODE INPUT PHONES STANDBY USB USB MULTI CH INPUT EFFECT TONE CONTROL BASS/TREBLE VIDEO SILENT CINEMA L AUDIO AMP R SOURCE TV ■ Turning on this unit ■ Setting this unit to the standby mode Press STANDBY/ON on the front panel (or POWER on the remote control) to turn on this unit. Press STANDBY/ON on the front panel (or STANDBY on the remote control) to set this unit to the standby mode. STANDBY POWER STANDBY /ON Front panel 28 En or STANDBY /ON Remote control Front panel or Remote control BASIC SETUP BASIC SETUP The “BASIC SETUP” feature is a useful way to set up your system quickly and with minimal effort. Notes • Make sure you disconnect your headphones from this unit. • If you wish to configure this unit manually using more precise adjustments, use the detailed parameters in “SOUND MENU” (see page 69). • Altering any parameters in “BASIC SETUP” resets all parameters manually adjusted in “SOUND MENU” (see page 69). • Initial settings are indicated in bold under each parameter. • Press RETURN on the remote control to return to the previous menu level. TRANSMIT POWER TV AV CD CD-R STANDBY POWER MD SLEEP DTV 1 4 DIRECT ST. 5 6 7 8 SPEAKERS ENHANCER NIGHT STRAIGHT 9 0 10 EFFECT LEVEL NET SET MENU TITLE MENU BAND SRCH MODE AMP A/B/C/D/E SOURCE TV CH Press ENTER to enter “BASIC SETUP”. The following display appears in the OSD. ENT. ENTER TV VOL 4 MOVIE 3 EXTD SUR. PRESET/CH TUNER USB DVR ENTERTAIN 2 SELECT MULTI CH IN CBL DVD DOCK V-AUX MUSIC 1 STANDARD PREPARATION STEREO CODE SET POWER VOLUME RETURN DISPLAY DAB MEMORY ON SCREEN 2,13 3-12 REC TV ;BASIC SETUP PRESET/CH .ROOM: S >M L SUBWOOFER;;;;YES SPEAKERS;;;;6spk SETUP:>OK CANCEL ENTER AUDIO A/B/C/D/E p 1 Set the component selector switch to AMP. 5 p []/[]:Up/Down [<]/[>]:Select Press u / d to select “ROOM” and then j / i to select the desired setting. AMP SOURCE PRESET/CH ;BASIC SETUP TV ENTER A/B/C/D/E Press SET MENU to enter “SET MENU”. The top “SET MENU” display appears in the OSD. MENU SRCH MODE 3 p p [ ]/[]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter Press u / d to select “BASIC SETUP”. PRESET/CH []/[]:Up/Down [<]/[>]:Select p SET MENU  .;BASICSETUP ;MANUALSETUP .;SIGNAL INFO SET MENU p 2 .ROOM: S >M L SUBWOOFER;;;;YES SPEAKERS;;;;6spk SETUP:>OK CANCEL Select the size of the room where you have installed your speakers. In general, the room sizes are defined as follows: Choices: S, M, L [Canada model] S (small) 16 x 13ft, 200ft2 (4.8 x 4.0m, 20m2) M (medium) 20 x 16ft, 300ft2 (6.3 x 5.0m, 30m2) L (large) 26 x 19ft, 450ft2 (7.9 x 5.8m, 45m2) [Other models] S (small) 3.6 x 2.8m, 10m2 M (medium) 4.8 x 4.0m, 20m2 L (large) 6.3 x 5.0m, 30m2 ENTER A/B/C/D/E English 29 En BASIC SETUP 6 Press d to select “SUBWOOFER” and then j / i to select the desired setting. PRESET/CH 8 Press d to select “SETUP” and then j / i to select the desired setting. PRESET/CH ;BASIC SETUP ENTER A/B/C/D/E ROOM: S >M L .SUBWOOFER;;;;YES SPEAKERS;;;;6spk SETUP:>OK CANCEL ;BASIC SETUP ROOM: S >M L SUBWOOFER;;;;YES SPEAKERS;;;;6spk . SETUP:>OK CANCEL ENTER A/B/C/D/E p p []/[]:Up/Down [<]/[>]:Select Choices: YES, NONE • Select “YES” if you have a subwoofer in your system. • Select “NONE” if you do not have a subwoofer in your system. 7 Press d to select “SPEAKERS” and then j / i to select the number of speakers connected to this unit. PRESET/CH Choices: OK, CANCEL • Select “OK” to apply the settings you made. • Select “CANCEL” to cancel the setup procedure without making any changes. y You can also press SET MENU to cancel the setup procedure. 9 Press ENTER to confirm your selection. PRESET/CH ;BASIC SETUP ENTER A/B/C/D/E p p []/[]:Up/Down [<]/[>]:Select ROOM: S >M L SUBWOOFER;;;;YES .SPEAKERS;;;;6spk SETUP:>OK CANCEL ENTER A/B/C/D/E p Choice Display 2spk L C R SL SB SR 30 En 3spk L C R SL SB SR 4spk L C R SL SB SR p []/[]:Up/Down [<]/[>]:Select Speakers If you selected “OK” in step 8, each speaker outputs a test tone twice in turn. “CHECK:Test Tone” appears in the OSD for a few seconds and then “CHECK OK?” appears in the OSD. Front L/R Front L/R, Center ;BASIC SETUP ;BASIC SETUP ROOM: S >M L SUBWOOFER;;;;YES SPEAKERS;;;;6spk SETUP:>OK CANCEL .CHECK:Test Tone ROOM: S >M L SUBWOOFER;;;;YES SPEAKERS;;;;6spk SETUP:>OK CANCEL .CHECK OK?;;;;YES [<]/[>]:Select [<]/[>]:Select Front L/R, Surround L/R y 5spk L C R SL SB SR Front L/R, Center, Surround L/R 6spk L C R SL SB SR Front L/R, Center, Surround L/R, Surround back Check the speaker connections (see page 13) and adjust the “SPEAKERS” settings back in step 7, if necessary. BASIC SETUP 10 Press j / i to select the desired setting. 12 ;BASIC SETUP PRESET/CH ROOM: S >M L SUBWOOFER;;;;YES SPEAKERS;;;;6spk SETUP:>OK CANCEL .CHECK OK?;;;;YES ENTER A/B/C/D/E [<]/[>]:Select PRESET/CH ENTER A/B/C/D/E • Select “FR” to adjust the balance between the front left and right speakers. • Select “C” to adjust the balance between the front left and center speakers. • Select “SL” to adjust the balance between the front left and surround left speakers. • Select “SB” to adjust the balance between the surround left and surround back speakers. • Select “SR” to adjust the balance between the surround left and surround right speakers. • Select “SWFR” to adjust the balance between the front left speaker and the subwoofer. Press ENTER to confirm your selection. PRESET/CH ENTER A/B/C/D/E • If you selected “YES” in step 10, the setup procedure is completed and the display returns to the top “SET MENU” display. • If you selected “NO” in step 10, the speaker level adjustment display appears in the front panel display. ;BASIC SETUP -__________+ .FR;;;;;;;;;;  C;;;;;;;;;; SL;;;;;;;;;; 13 PREPARATION Choices: YES, NO • Select “YES” to complete the setup procedure if the test tone levels from each speaker were satisfactory. • Select “NO” to proceed to the speaker level adjustment menu in step 12 to balance the output level of each speaker. 11 Press u / d to select a speaker and then j / i to adjust the balance. The selected speaker and the front left speaker (or the surround left speaker) output a test tone in turn. • Press i to increase the value. • Press j to decrease the value. Press SET MENU to exit from “BASIC SETUP”. SET MENU MENU SRCH MODE English 31 En PLAYBACK PLAYBACK CAUTION Extreme caution should be exercised when you play back CDs encoded in DTS. If you play back a CD encoded in DTS on a DTS-incompatible CD player, you will only hear some unwanted noise that may damage your speakers. Check whether your CD player supports CDs encoded in DTS. Also, check the sound output level of your CD player before you play back a CD encoded in DTS. 3 VOLUME STANDBY /ON PRESET/TUNING A/B/C/D/E FM/AM l PRESET/TUNING h MEMORY LEVEL MAN'L/AUTO FM NEXT EDIT TUNING MODE Rotate the INPUT selector on the front panel (or press one of the input selector buttons on the remote control) to select the desired input source. AUTO/MAN'L INPUT PHONES l STRAIGHT SPEAKERS A B PROGRAM h VIDEO AUX INPUT MODE USB MULTI CH INPUT EFFECT TONE CONTROL BASS/TREBLE MD INPUT SILENT CINEMA VIDEO L AUDIO CD CD-R 6 6 7 DVD 5 3 DTV DOCK CODE SET STEREO TRANSMIT POWER POWER TV AV STANDBY CD 3 2 MUSIC ENTERTAIN MULTI CH IN CBL 2 3 4 SELECT EXTD SUR. DIRECT ST. 5 6 7 8 TUNER 2 SPEAKERS ENHANCER NIGHT STRAIGHT 9 0 V-AUX USB DVR 7 Front panel EFFECT SET MENU TITLE NET MENU SRCH MODE BAND VOLUME TV Remote control Available input sources A/B/C/D/E SOURCE TV CH NET ENTER AMP TV VOL DVR The name of the currently selected input source appears in the front panel display and in the OSD for a few seconds. ENT. 10 PRESET/CH LEVEL DOCK MOVIE 1 STANDARD SLEEP CD-R DTV MUTE POWER MD DVD TV INPUT TUNER USB V-AUX TV MUTE MULTI CH IN CBL or 2 SLEEP R 5 RETURN DISPLAY DAB MEMORY ON SCREEN REC AUDIO DISC SKIP TV MUTE TV INPUT MUTE NET USB DVR V-AUX DTV/CBL pDVD MD/CD-R TUNER CD VOLUME SP A DVD 1 2 Turn on the video monitor connected to this unit. Press SPEAKERS A or B on the front panel (or set the component selector switch to AMP and then press SPEAKERS on the remote control repeatedly) to turn on the set of front speakers you want to use. Each time you press SPEAKERS A or B, the respective set of front speakers are turned on or off. SPEAKERS A B Front panel or AMP SPEAKERS SOURCE 9 TV Remote control 32 En Currently selected input source dB AUTO L R Currently selected input mode Notes • To enjoy multi-channel sources in surround, connect the source component via digital connection and set the input mode to “AUTO” or “DTS” (see page 35). • See pages 42 for details about surround sound. 4 Start playback on the selected source component or select a broadcast station. • Refer to the operating instructions for the source component. • See page 46 for details about tuning instructions. PLAYBACK 5 Rotate VOLUME on the front panel (or press VOLUME +/– on the remote control) to adjust the volume to the desired output level. VOLUME or VOLUME 7 Press PROGRAM l / h on the front panel (or press one of the sound field program selector buttons on the remote control) repeatedly to select the desired sound field program. The name of the selected sound field program appears in the front panel display and in the OSD. See page 58 for details about sound field programs. l 6 PROGRAM h Remote control Front panel Front panel Press TONE CONTROL on the front panel repeatedly to select “TREBLE” or “BASS” and then press BASS/TREBLE +/– repeatedly to adjust the corresponding frequency response level. l STEREO MUSIC ENTERTAIN 1 2 3 MOVIE 4 STANDARD SELECT EXTD SUR. DIRECT ST. 5 6 7 8 SPEAKERS ENHANCER NIGHT STRAIGHT 9 0 BASIC OPERATION TONE CONTROL or h PROGRAM ENT. 10 EFFECT Remote control NET USB DVR V-AUX DTV/CBL pDVD MD/CD-R TUNER CD VOLUME SP A TREBLE dB 0dB L NET USB R • Speaker and headphone adjustments are stored independently. • When “TONE BYPASS” is set to “AUTO” (see page 73), and “BASS” and “TREBLE” are set to 0 dB, audio output automatically bypasses the tone control circuitry of this unit. • If you increase or decrease the high-frequency or lowfrequency sound to an extreme level, the tonal quality of the front speakers may not match that of the other speakers. • TONE CONTROL is not effective when the “DIRECT STEREO” mode (see page 39) is selected or when the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks is selected as the input source (see page 38). V-AUX DTV/CBL pDVD MD/CD-R TUNER CD VOLUME SP A TV Sports • Select “TREBLE” to adjust the high-frequency response. • Select “BASS” to adjust the low-frequency response. Notes DVR dB L R Currently selected sound field program Notes • Choose a sound field program based on your listening preference, not merely on the name of the program. • When you select an input source, this unit automatically selects the last sound field program used with the corresponding input source. • Sound field programs cannot be selected when the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks is selected as the input source (see page 38). • Sampling frequencies higher than 48 kHz (except for DTS 96/24 signals) are sampled down to 48 kHz and then sound field programs are applied. • To display information about the currently selected input source in the OSD, see page 40 for details. English 33 En USING AUDIO FEATURES USING AUDIO FEATURES Using SILENT CINEMA SILENT CINEMA allows you to enjoy multi-channel music or movie sound, including Dolby Digital and DTS sources, through ordinary headphones. SILENT CINEMA activates automatically whenever you connect headphones to the PHONES jack while listening to a source with a CINEMA DSP or HiFi DSP sound field program (see page 58). When activated, the SILENT CINEMA indicator lights up in the front panel display. Selecting the night listening mode The night listening modes are designed to improve listenability at lower volumes or at night. Choose either “NIGHT:CINEMA” or “NIGHT:MUSIC” depending on the type of material you are playing. 1 Notes • SILENT CINEMA does not activate when the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks is selected as the input source (see page 38). • SILENT CINEMA is not effective when the “DIRECT STEREO” (see page 39), “2ch Stereo” (see page 39) or “STRAIGHT” mode (see page 39) is selected. AMP NIGHT SOURCE Choices: NIGHT:CINEMA, NIGHT:MUSIC, OFF • Select “NIGHT:CINEMA” when watching films to reduce the dynamic range of film soundtracks and make dialog easier to hear at lower volumes. • Select “NIGHT:MUSIC” when listening to music sources to preserve ease-of-listening for all sounds. • Select “OFF” if you do not want to use this feature. Press MUTE on the remote control to mute the audio output. Press MUTE again to resume the audio output. y MUTE • You can also rotate VOLUME on the front panel or VOLUME +/– on the remote control to resume the audio output. • You can adjust the muting level by using the “MUTING TYPE” parameter in “SOUND MENU” (see page 73). • The MUTE indicator flashes in the front panel display when the audio output is muted and disappears from the front panel display when the audio output is resumed. Note If you change the input source or the sound field program with the remote control while the audio output is being muted, this unit resumes the audio output. 10 TV Muting the audio output y Set the component selector switch to AMP and then press NIGHT on the remote control repeatedly to select “NIGHT:CINEMA” or “NIGHT:MUSIC”. When a night listening mode is selected, the NIGHT indicator lights up in the front panel display. 2 Press j / i on the remote control to adjust the effect level while “NIGHT:CINEMA” or “NIGHT:MUSIC” is displayed in the front panel display. PRESET/CH ENTER A/B/C/D/E Remote control Effect.Lvl:MID Choices: MIN, MID, MAX • Select “MIN” for minimum compression. • Select “MID” for standard compression. • Select “MAX” for maximum compression. 34 En USING AUDIO FEATURES y AUTO “NIGHT:CINEMA” and “NIGHT:MUSIC” adjustments are stored independently. Notes DTS • You cannot use the night listening modes in the following cases: – when the “DIRECT STEREO” mode (see page 39) is selected. – when the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks is selected as the input source (see page 38). – when headphones are connected to the PHONES jack. • The effectiveness of the night listening modes may vary depending on the input source and surround sound settings you use. ANALOG Automatically selects input signals in the following order: (1) Digital signals (2) Analog signals Selects only digital signals encoded in DTS. If no DTS signals are input, no sound is output. Selects only analog signals. If no analog signals are input, no sound is output. Note When “INPUT MODE” is set to “AUTO”, this unit automatically switches to the appropriate decoder if a Dolby Digital or DTS signal is detected. Using the sleep timer Selecting the input mode This unit comes with a variety of input jacks. Do the following to select the type of input signals you want to use. • We recommend setting “INPUT MODE” to “AUTO” in most cases. • You can adjust the default input mode of this unit by using the “INPUT MODE” parameter in “INPUT MENU” (see page 75). 1 Notes • To play DTS-encoded CDs when using a digital audio connection, be sure to set “INPUT MODE” to “DTS”. • DTS decoding may not be performed correctly depending on the player even if you make a digital connection between this unit and the player. Press one of the input selector buttons on the remote control to select the desired input source. MD CD DTV DOCK 1 Rotate the INPUT selector on the front panel to select the desired input source. 2 V-AUX 2 INPUT SLEEP CD-R MULTI CH IN CBL DVD BASIC OPERATION y Use this feature to automatically set this unit to the standby mode after a certain amount of time. The sleep timer is useful when you are going to sleep while this unit is playing or recording a source. The sleep timer also automatically turns off any external components connected to AC OUTLET(S) (see page 26). TUNER USB DVR NET Start playback on the selected source component or select a broadcast station. • Refer to the operating instructions for the source component. • See page 46 for details about tuning instructions. Press INPUT MODE on the front panel repeatedly to select the desired input mode. INPUT MODE Available input sources NET USB DVR V-AUX DTV/CBL pDVD MD/CD-R TUNER CD VOLUME SP A Currently selected input source dB AUTO L R English DVD Currently selected input mode 35 En USING AUDIO FEATURES 3 Press SLEEP on the remote control repeatedly to set the amount of time. Each time you press SLEEP, the front panel display changes as shown below. SLEEP Adjusting the speaker level You can adjust the output level of each speaker while listening to a music source. This is also possible when playing sources input at the MULTI CH INPUT jacks. Note This operation will override the level adjustments made in “BASIC SETUP” (see page 29) and “SPEAKER LEVEL” (see page 71). SLEEP 120min SLEEP 90min AMP SOURCE TV VOL SLEEP OFF SLEEP 30min SLEEP TV CH VOLUME 1 TV 60min The SLEEP indicator flashes while you are switching the amount of time for the sleep timer. Once the sleep timer is set, the SLEEP indicator lights up in the front panel display, and the display returns to the selected sound field program. TV MUTE TV INPUT MUTE STEREO MUSIC ENTERTAIN 1 2 3 4 STANDARD SELECT EXTD SUR. DIRECT ST. 5 6 7 8 SPEAKERS ENHANCER NIGHT STRAIGHT 9 0 10 MOVIE ENT. EFFECT 1 PRESET/CH LEVEL TITLE SET MENU MENU SRCH MODE BAND ENTER 3 A/B/C/D/E NET USB DVR V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R SP A TUNER pCD VOLUME DAB MEMORY ON SCREEN REC dB L V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD TUNER pCD MD/CD-R SP A 1 VOLUME SLEEP STRAIGHT 2 DISC SKIP R Flashes DVR DISPLAY AUDIO SLEEP SLEEP 120min NET USB RETURN Set the component selector switch to AMP and then press LEVEL on the remote control repeatedly to select the speaker you want to adjust. dB L R AMP Lights up SOURCE LEVEL TV BAND TITLE 4 To cancel the sleep timer, press SLEEP on the remote control repeatedly until “SLEEP OFF” appears in the front panel display. SLEEP NET USB DVR V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R TUNER pCD VOLUME SP A SLEEP OFF dB L R The SLEEP indicator turns off, and “SLEEP OFF” disappears from the front panel display after a few seconds. y The sleep timer setting can also be canceled by pressing STANDBY/ON on the front panel (or STANDBY on the remote control) to set this unit to the standby mode. 36 En • Select “FRONT L” to adjust the front left speaker output level. • Select “CENTER” to adjust the center speaker output level. • Select “FRONT R” to adjust the front right speaker output level. • Select “SUR. R” to adjust the surround right speaker output level. • Select “SUR. B” to adjust the surround back speaker output level. • Select “SUR. L” to adjust the surround left speaker output level. • Select “SWFR” to adjust the subwoofer output level. y Once you press LEVEL on the remote control, you can also select the speaker by pressing u / d. USING AUDIO FEATURES 2 Press j / i on the remote control to adjust the speaker output level. • Press i to increase the value. • Press j to decrease the value. Control range: –10 dB to +10 dB PRESET/CH ENTER A/B/C/D/E y This operation can also be performed using the control buttons on the front panel. Press NEXT on the front panel repeatedly to select the speaker channel whose output level you want to adjust and then press LEVEL +/– on the front panel to adjust the output level. Selecting the Compressed Music Enhancer mode Compression artifacts (such as the MP3 format) are created by a lossy compression scheme where the audio is resampled to lower the bitrate and to remove sounds that are indistinguishable to typical human hearing. The Compressed Music Enhancer feature of this unit enhances your listening experience by regenerating the missing harmonics in a compression artifact. As a result, flattened complexity due to the loss of high-frequency fidelity as well as lack of bass due to the loss of low-frequency bass is compensated, providing the improved performance of the overall sound system. Notes BASIC OPERATION • The Compressed Music Enhancer mode is compatible with the PCM signals (48 kHz), the analog 2-channel input sources and the music data input at the USB port or the LAN port. • The Compressed Music Enhancer mode is not effective with any of the sound field programs. • When the Compressed Music Enhancer mode is turned on while an incompatible input source is being played back, “Not Available” appears in the front panel display and in the OSD. • When the input source is changed to an incompatible input source while the Compressed Music Enhancer mode is turned on, the Compressed Music Enhancer mode is automatically turned off and the incompatible input source is played back in 2-channel or 6-channel stereo. y The ENHANCER indicator lights up in the front panel display when one of the Compressed Music Enhancer modes is selected. English 37 En USING AUDIO FEATURES 1 Set the component selector switch to AMP and then press ENHANCER on the remote control repeatedly to select the desired Compressed Music Enhancer mode. The following display appears in the OSD and the ENHANCER indicator lights up in the front panel display. AMP ENHANCER SOURCE 0 Selecting the MULTI CH INPUT component Use this feature to select the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks (see page 24) as the input source. Press MULTI CH INPUT on the front panel (or MULTI CH IN on the remote control) so that “MULTI CH INPUT” appears in the front panel display. TV MULTI CH INPUT MULTI CH IN or MUSIC ENHANCER . Front panel 2ch Enhancer LOW >HIGH ENHANCER Lights up Choices: 2ch Enhancer, 6ch Enhancer, Off (previously selected sound field program) • Select “2ch Enhancer” to play back compression artifacts in 2-channel stereo. • Select “6ch Enhancer” to play back compression artifacts in 6-channel stereo. • Select Off (previously selected sound field program) to turn off the Compressed Music Enhancer mode. y You can also switch between “2ch Enhancer” and “6ch Enhancer” by pressing j / i on the remote control when the arrow is located on the left of “2ch Enhancer” or “6ch Enhancer” in the OSD. 2 Press d once and then j / i on the remote control to select the desired effect level. PRESET/CH MUSIC ENHANCER . ENTER 2ch Enhancer LOW >HIGH A/B/C/D/E Choices: HIGH, LOW • Select “HIGH” for a high effect level. • Select “LOW” for a low effect level. Note Set the effect level to “HIGH” or “LOW” according to the characteristics of a source. The high-frequency signals of some sources may be emphasized too much. In this case, set the effect level to “LOW”. 38 En Remote control MULTI CH INPUT Note When “MULTI CH INPUT” is shown in the front panel display, no other source can be played. To select another input source with the INPUT selector on the front panel (or one of the input selector buttons), press MULTI CH INPUT (or MULTI CH IN on the remote control) so that “MULTI CH INPUT” disappears from the front panel display. USING AUDIO FEATURES Enjoying multi-channel sources in 2-channel stereo You can mix down multi-channel sources to 2 channels and enjoy playback in 2-channel stereo. Set the component selector switch to AMP and then press STEREO on the remote control repeatedly to select “2ch Stereo”. Enjoying pure hi-fi stereo sound The “DIRECT STEREO” mode allows sources to bypass the decoders and DSP processors of this unit so that you can enjoy pure hi-fi sound from 2-channel PCM and analog sources. Set the component selector switch to AMP and then press DIRECT ST. on the remote control to select “DIRECT STEREO”. AMP STEREO AMP SOURCE 1 DIRECT ST. SOURCE TV 8 TV 2ch Stereo DIRECT STEREO • You can use a subwoofer with this program when “LFE/BASS OUT” is set to “SWFR” or “BOTH” (see page 70). • You can also select the “2ch Stereo” mode by pressing PROGRAM l / h on the front panel repeatedly. Enjoying unprocessed input sources When this unit is in the “STRAIGHT” mode, 2-channel stereo sources are output from only the front left and right speakers. Multi-channel sources are decoded straight into the appropriate channels without any additional effect processing. 1 Set the component selector switch to AMP and then press STRAIGHT on the remote control to select “STRAIGHT”. Notes • To avoid unexpected noise, do not play CDs encoded in DTS when the “DIRECT STEREO” mode is selected. • When multi-channel signals (Dolby Digital and DTS) are input, this unit automatically switches to the corresponding analog input. When “DTS” is selected as the input mode (see page 35), no sound will be output. • No sound will be output from the subwoofer. • “TONE CONTROL” (see page 33) and “SOUND MENU” (see page 69) settings (except for speaker level settings) are not effective. • The front panel display automatically dims. BASIC OPERATION y y You can also select the “DIRECT STEREO” mode by pressing PROGRAM l / h on the front panel repeatedly. AMP STRAIGHT SOURCE ENT. TV EFFECT STRAIGHT 2 English To deactivate the “STRAIGHT” mode, press STRAIGHT on the remote control again so that “STRAIGHT” disappears from the front panel display. The sound effect is turned back on. y You can also select the “STRAIGHT” mode by pressing STRAIGHT (EFFECT) on the front panel. 39 En USING VIDEO FEATURES USING VIDEO FEATURES Signal format FORMAT Signal format display. When this unit cannot detect a digital signal, it automatically switches to analog input. Display status: Analog, Digital, DolbyD, DTS, MP3, PCM, WMA, --- Displaying the input source information You can display the format, sampling frequency, channel, bit rate and flag data of the current input signal. 1 Note Set the component selector switch to AMP and then press SET MENU on the remote control. The top “SET MENU” display appears in the OSD. “---” appears when this unit cannot detect any signals. Sampling frequency SAMPLING The number of samples per second taken from a continuous signal to make a discrete signal. Display status: 8kHz, 11kHz, 12kHz, 16kHz, 22.05kHz, 24kHz, 32kHz, 44.1kHz, 48kHz, 64kHz, 88.2kHz, 96kHz, --- AMP SET MENU SOURCE MENU SRCH MODE TV Note “---” appears when this unit cannot detect the sampling frequency. SET MENU  .;BASICSETUP ;MANUALSETUP .;SIGNAL INFO Channel CHANNEL The number of source channels in the input signal (front/surround/LFE). For example, a multi-channel soundtrack with 3 front channels, 2 surround channels and LFE, is displayed as “3/2/0.1”. 2 p p [ ]/[]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter Note Press d repeatedly to select “SIGNAL INFO” and then press ENTER. The following information about the input source appears in the OSD. PRESET/CH “---” appears when there is no source channel available. Bit rate BITRATE The number of bits passing a given point per second. PRESET/CH Note “---” appears when this unit cannot detect the bit rate. ENTER ENTER A/B/C/D/E ;SIGNAL INFO FORMAT PCM SAMPLING 48kHz CHANNEL 2/0/--BITRATE --FLAG NONE  [RETURN]:Exit  Flag FLAG Flag data encoded in DTS, Dolby Digital, or PCM signals that cue this unit to automatically switch decoders. A/B/C/D/E 3 Press SET MENU on the remote control again to exit from “SET MENU”. SET MENU MENU SRCH MODE 40 En USING VIDEO FEATURES Selecting the OSD mode You can display the operating information of this unit on a video monitor. If you display the “SET MENU” and sound field program parameter settings on a video monitor, it is much easier to see the available options and parameters than it is to read the information in the front panel display. 1 Turn on the video monitor connected to this unit. 2 Set the component selector switch to AMP and then press DISPLAY on the remote control repeatedly to toggle between the OSD modes. The OSD mode changes in the following order. AMP SOURCE ON SCREEN TV Full display You can display a gray background in the OSD when there is not video signal being input by setting “GRAY BACK” in “OPTION MENU” to “AUTO” (see page 79). Notes • The OSD signal is not output at the DVR OUT jacks and will not be recorded. • You must set “VIDEO CONV.” in “OPTION MENU” to “ON” (see page 78) to display the OSD. • To display the OSD with the component video signals output at the COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT jacks, set the OSD mode to the full display mode. • When “GRAY BACK” in “OPTION MENU” is set to “OFF” (see page 79), the OSD may not be displayed correctly depending on the conditions of the picture. Playing video sources in the background You can combine a video image from a video source with sound from an audio source. For example, you can enjoy listening to classical music while viewing beautiful scenery from the video source on the video monitor. Press the input selector buttons on the remote control to select a video source and then an audio source. SLEEP MD Short display CD CD-R MULTI CH IN CBL DVD Display off Full display Fully shows the sound field program parameter settings as well as the contents of the front panel display. Short display Briefly shows the contents of the front panel display at the bottom of the screen each time you operate this unit. DTV DOCK V-AUX BASIC OPERATION DISPLAY y TUNER USB DVR Audio sources NET Video sources y If you want to enjoy an audio source input at the MULTI CH INPUT jacks together with a video source, first select the video source and then press MULTI CH INPUT on the front panel (or MULTI CH IN on the remote control) to select the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks as the input source (see page 38). Display off No information is displayed except for the “SET MENU” screen. P02 MUSIC . Pop/Rock DSP LEVEL;;;;0dB P.INIT.DLY;;21ms P.ROOM SIZE;;1.0 S.INIT.DLY;;25ms S.ROOM SIZE;;1.0 Full display P02 MUSIC Pop/Rock Short display English 41 En ENJOYING SURROUND SOUND ENJOYING SURROUND SOUND Enjoying multi-channel sources in 6.1-channel surround If you connected a surround back speaker, use this feature to enjoy 6.1-channel playback for multi-channel sources using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx, Dolby Digital EX or DTS-ES decoders. 1 Set the component selector switch to AMP and then press EXTD SUR. on the remote control repeatedly to switch between 5.1 and 6.1-channel playback. Decoders You can select from the following decoders depending on the format of the source you are playing. Decoder Functions Plays back Dolby Digital or DTS signals PLIIxMusic in 6.1 channels using the Pro Logic IIx music decoder. EX/ES Plays back Dolby Digital or DTS signals in 6.1 channels using the Dolby Digital EX or DTS-ES decoder. EX Plays back Dolby Digital or DTS signals in 6.1 channels using the Dolby Digital EX decoder. AMP EXTD SUR. SOURCE 7 TV Off OFF Decoders are not used to create 6.1 channels. Notes 2 Press j / i repeatedly to select a decoder while “PLIIxMusic” (etc.) is displayed. PRESET/CH ENTER A/B/C/D/E Auto AUTO When a signal flag that can be recognized by this unit is input, this unit selects the optimum decoder to play back the signal in 6.1 channels. If this unit cannot recognize the flag or no flag is present in the input signal, it cannot automatically be played in 6.1 channels. 42 En • Some 6.1-channel compatible discs do not have a signal flag that can be automatically detected by this unit. When playing these kinds of discs in 6.1 channels, select a decoder manually from “PLIIxMusic”, “EX/ES” or “EX”. • 6.1-channel playback is not possible even if you press EXTD SUR. in the following cases: – when “CENTER SP” (see page 70), “SUR. L/R SP” (see page 70) or “SUR. B SP” (see page 70) is set to “NONE”. – when the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks is being played. – when the source being played does not contain surround left and right channel signals. – when a Dolby Digital KARAOKE source is being played. – when the “2ch Stereo” (see page 39) or “DIRECT STEREO” (see page 39) mode is selected. • When this unit is set to the standby mode, this setting will be reset to “AUTO”. • The Pro Logic IIx decoder is not available when “SUR. B SP” is set to “NONE” (see page 70). ENJOYING SURROUND SOUND Enjoying 2-channel sources in surround Signals input from 2-channel sources can also be played back on multi-channels. 1 Set the component selector switch to AMP and then press STANDARD on the remote control repeatedly to switch between the “SUR. STANDARD” and “SUR. ENHANCED” programs or press MOVIE to select the “MOVIE THEATER” program. SUR. STANDARD Functions PRO LOGIC Dolby Pro Logic processing for any sources PLII Movie Dolby Pro Logic II processing for movie sources PLII Music Dolby Pro Logic II processing for music sources PLII Game Dolby Pro Logic II processing for game sources PLIIx Movie Dolby Pro Logic IIx processing for movie sources PLIIx Music Dolby Pro Logic IIx processing for music sources PLIIx Game Dolby Pro Logic IIx processing for game sources Neo:6 Cinema DTS processing for movie sources Neo:6 Music DTS processing for music sources STANDARD 5 AMP SOURCE or TV MOVIE 2 Press SELECT on the remote control repeatedly to select the desired decoder. SUR. ENHANCED or MOVIE THEATER Functions BASIC OPERATION 4 SELECT PRO LOGIC Dolby Pro Logic processing for any sources PLII Movie Dolby Pro Logic II processing for movie sources y PLIIx Movie Dolby Pro Logic IIx processing for movie sources You can also select a decoder by pressing j / i on the remote control while the decoder type is displayed in the front panel display. Neo:6 Cinema DTS processing for movie sources 6 You can select from the following modes depending on the type of source you are playing and your personal preference. Note The Pro Logic IIx decoder is not available when “SUR. B SP” is set to “NONE” (see page 70). English 43 En ENJOYING SURROUND SOUND Using Virtual CINEMA DSP Virtual CINEMA DSP allows you to enjoy the CINEMA DSP programs without surround speakers. It creates virtual speakers to reproduce the natural sound field. If you set “SUR. L/R SP” to “NONE” (see page 70), Virtual CINEMA DSP activates automatically whenever you select a CINEMA DSP sound field program (see page 58). Note Virtual CINEMA DSP will not activate even when “SUR. L/R SP” is set to “NONE” (see page 70) in the following cases: – when the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks is selected as the input source (see page 38). – when headphones are connected to the PHONES jack. – when the “DIRECT STEREO” (see page 39), “2ch Stereo” (see page 39) or “STRAIGHT” mode (see page 39) is selected. 44 En RECORDING RECORDING Recording adjustments and other operations are performed from the recording components. Refer to the operating instructions for those components. CAUTION The DTS signal is a digital bitstream. Attempting to digitally record the DTS bitstream will result in noise being recorded. Therefore, if you want to use this unit to record sources encoded in DTS, the following considerations and adjustments need to be made. To play DTS-encoded DVDs and CDs (when using a digital audio connection) on your DTS-compatible player, follow its operating instructions to make a setting so that the analog signal will be output from the player. Notes BASIC OPERATION • When this unit is set to the standby mode, you cannot record between other components connected to this unit. • The settings of TONE CONTROL (see page 33), VOLUME, the speaker level (see page 71) and the sound field programs (see page 58) do not affect the recorded material. • The source connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks of this unit cannot be recorded. • S-video and composite video signals pass independently through the video circuits of this unit. Therefore, when recording or dubbing video signals input from a video source component that provides only an S-video or a composite video signal, you can record only an S-video or a composite video signal on your VCR. • Digital signals input at the DIGITAL INPUT jacks are not output at the analog AUDIO OUT (REC) jacks for recording. Likewise, analog signals input at the AUDIO IN jacks are not output at the DIGITAL OUTPUT jack. Therefore, if your source component is connected to provide only digital or analog signals, you can only record digital or analog signals. • A given input source is not output on the same OUT (REC) channel. • Check the copyright laws in your country to record from CDs, radio, etc. Recording of copyrighted material may infringe copyright laws. • The analog audio signals input at the DOCK terminal can be output at the analog AUDIO OUT (REC) jacks for recording. y Do a test recording before you start an actual recording. If you play back a video source that uses scrambled or encoded signals to prevent it from being dubbed, the picture itself may be disturbed due to those signals. 1 Turn on all the connected components. 2 Rotate the INPUT selector on the front panel (or press one of the input selector buttons on the remote control) to select the source component you want to record from. VOLUME STANDBY /ON PRESET/TUNING A/B/C/D/E FM/AM l PRESET/TUNING h MEMORY LEVEL MAN'L/AUTO FM NEXT EDIT TUNING MODE AUTO/MAN'L INPUT PHONES SPEAKERS A B STRAIGHT l PROGRAM h VIDEO AUX INPUT MODE USB MULTI CH INPUT EFFECT TONE CONTROL BASS/TREBLE SILENT CINEMA VIDEO L AUDIO R MD 2 SLEEP INPUT CD CD-R MULTI CH IN CBL or CODE SET POWER TV AV STANDBY POWER MD CD 2 V-AUX CD-R DTV TUNER USB DVR NET SLEEP Front panel MULTI CH IN CBL DVD DOCK DTV DOCK TRANSMIT POWER DVD Remote control TUNER USB V-AUX DVR NET TV VOL TV CH VOLUME AMP SOURCE Start playback on the selected source component or select a broadcast station. 4 Start recording on the recording component. 45 En English 3 TV FM/AM TUNING FM/AM TUNING There are 2 tuning methods: automatic and manual. Automatic tuning is effective when station signals are strong and there is no interference. If the signal from the station you want to select is weak, tune into it manually. You can also use the automatic and manual preset tuning features to store up to 40 stations (A1 to E8: 8 preset station numbers in each of the 5 preset station groups). Furthermore, you can recall any preset stations and exchange the assignment of two preset stations with each other. Note Orient the connected FM and AM antennas for the best reception. Automatic tuning 3 Automatic tuning is effective when station signals are strong and there is no interference. Press TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L) so that the AUTO indicator lights up in the front panel display. TUNING MODE 2 AUTO/MAN'L VOLUME STANDBY /ON PRESET/TUNING FM/AM A/B/C/D/E NEXT EDIT l PRESET/TUNING h MEMORY LEVEL MAN'L/AUTO FM TUNING MODE AUTO/MAN'L INPUT PHONES SPEAKERS A B STRAIGHT l PROGRAM h VIDEO AUX INPUT MODE NET USB USB MULTI CH INPUT EFFECT TONE CONTROL VIDEO L AUDIO DVR R 1 4 DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R pTUNER CD VOLUME AUTO TUNED A 3 V-AUX SP A BASS/TREBLE SILENT CINEMA 1 3 dB AM 1440 kHz No colon (:) L R Lights up If a colon (:) appears in the front panel display, tuning is not possible. Press PRESET/TUNING to turn the colon (:) off. Rotate the INPUT selector to select “TUNER” as the input source. INPUT PRESET/TUNING EDIT Front panel 2 4 Press FM/AM to select the reception band. “FM” or “AM” appears in the front panel display. FM/AM FM or AM Press PRESET/TUNING l / h once to begin automatic tuning. When this unit is tuned into a station, the TUNED indicator lights up and the frequency of the received station is shown in the front panel display. • Press h to tune into a higher frequency. • Press l to tune into a lower frequency. l PRESET/TUNING h LEVEL NET USB DVR V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R pTUNER CD AUTO TUNED VOLUME SP A A dB AM 1530 kHz Lights up 46 En L R FM/AM TUNING Manual tuning 3 If the signal received from the station you want to select is weak, tune into it manually. Press TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L) so that the AUTO indicator disappears from the front panel display. TUNING MODE Note DISPLAY AUTO/MAN'L Manually tuning into an FM station automatically switches the tuner to monaural reception to increase the signal quality. NET USB 2 DVR V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R pTUNER CD TUNED VOLUME SP A A dB AM 1440 kHz L R VOLUME No colon (:) STANDBY /ON PRESET/TUNING FM/AM A/B/C/D/E NEXT EDIT l PRESET/TUNING h MEMORY TUNING MODE LEVEL MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L If a colon (:) appears in the front panel display, tuning is not possible. Press PRESET/TUNING to turn the colon (:) off. INPUT PHONES SPEAKERS A B STRAIGHT l PROGRAM h VIDEO AUX INPUT MODE USB MULTI CH INPUT EFFECT TONE CONTROL BASS/TREBLE VIDEO SILENT CINEMA 4 AUDIO R 1 3 PRESET/TUNING EDIT 1 Rotate the INPUT selector to select “TUNER” as the input source. INPUT 4 Press PRESET/TUNING l / h to tune into the desired station manually. Hold down the button to continue searching. BASIC OPERATION 3 L l PRESET/TUNING h LEVEL Front panel 2 Press FM/AM to select the reception band. “FM” or “AM” appears in the front panel display. FM/AM FM or AM English 47 En FM/AM TUNING Automatic preset tuning 3 You can use the automatic preset tuning feature to store FM stations with strong signals up to 40 (A1 to E8: 8 preset station numbers in each of the 5 preset station groups) of those stations in order. You can then recall any preset station easily by selecting the preset station number. 2 Press and hold MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM) for more than 3 seconds. The preset station number as well as the MEMORY and AUTO indicators flashes. After approximately 5 seconds, automatic presetting starts from the current frequency and proceeds toward the higher frequencies. 3 MEMORY MAN'L/AUTO FM VOLUME Flash STANDBY /ON PRESET/TUNING FM/AM A/B/C/D/E NEXT EDIT l PRESET/TUNING h MEMORY LEVEL MAN'L/AUTO FM TUNING MODE AUTO/MAN'L NET USB INPUT PHONES SPEAKERS A B STRAIGHT l PROGRAM h VIDEO AUX INPUT MODE USB TONE CONTROL V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R pTUNER AUTO TUNED CD MEMORY VOLUME dB BASS/TREBLE VIDEO SILENT CINEMA L AUDIO A1:FM 87.50MHz R 1 1 DVR SP A MULTI CH INPUT EFFECT L R Flashes Rotate the INPUT selector to select “TUNER” as the input source. When automatic preset tuning is completed, the front panel display shows the frequency of the last preset station. y INPUT You can specify the preset number from which this unit stores FM stations and/or begins tuning toward lower frequencies. For details, see “Automatic preset tuning options” on page 49. Front panel 2 Notes Press FM/AM to select “FM” as the reception band. “FM” appears in the front panel display. FM/AM FM 48 En • Any stored station data existing under a preset station number is cleared when you store a new station under the same preset station number. • If the number of received stations does not reach 40 (E8), automatic preset tuning automatically stops after searching for all the available stations. • Only FM stations with sufficient signal strength are stored automatically by automatic preset tuning. If the station you want to store is weak in signal strength, tune into it manually and store it as described in “Manual preset tuning” on page 49. FM/AM TUNING ■ Automatic preset tuning options You can specify the preset number from which this unit stores FM stations and/or begins tuning toward lower frequencies. Note Manual preset tuning You can also store up to 40 stations (A1 to E8: 8 preset station numbers in each of the 5 preset station groups) manually. First carry out steps 1 through 3 in “Automatic preset tuning” on page 48. 3 4 2,5 • Press A/B/C/D/E and then PRESET/TUNING l / h to select the preset station number under which the first station will be stored. Automatic preset tuning stops when stations have all been stored up to E8. VOLUME STANDBY /ON PRESET/TUNING FM/AM A/B/C/D/E NEXT EDIT l PRESET/TUNING h MEMORY LEVEL MAN'L/AUTO FM TUNING MODE AUTO/MAN'L INPUT PHONES STRAIGHT SPEAKERS A B l h PROGRAM VIDEO AUX INPUT MODE USB MULTI CH INPUT EFFECT BASS/TREBLE TONE CONTROL SILENT CINEMA A/B/C/D/E NEXT VIDEO L AUDIO R l PRESET/TUNING h LEVEL 1 Tune into a station automatically or manually. See pages 46 and 47 for tuning instructions. NET USB DVR l PRESET/TUNING h EDIT LEVEL DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R pTUNER CD VOLUME TUNED A PRESET/TUNING V-AUX SP A dB AM 630 kHz L R When this unit is tuned into a station, the front panel display shows the frequency of the station received. 2 BASIC OPERATION • Press PRESET/TUNING so that the colon (:) disappears from the front panel display and then press PRESET/TUNING l to begin tuning toward lower frequencies. Press MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM). The MEMORY indicator flashes in the front panel display for approximately 5 seconds. MEMORY MEMORY MAN'L/AUTO FM Flashes 3 Press A/B/C/D/E repeatedly to select a preset station group (A to E) while the MEMORY indicator is flashing. The selected preset station group letter appears. Check that the colon (:) appears in the front panel display. A/B/C/D/E NEXT Flashes NET USB DVR V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R pTUNER TUNED CD MEMORY VOLUME SP A C :AM dB 630 kHz L R English Preset station Colon (:) group 49 En FM/AM TUNING 4 Press PRESET/TUNING l / h to select a preset station number (1 to 8) while the MEMORY indicator is flashing. • Press h to select a higher preset station number. • Press l to select a lower preset station number. Selecting preset stations You can tune into any desired station simply by selecting the preset station group and number under which it was stored. 1 2 l PRESET/TUNING h LEVEL VOLUME Flashes STANDBY /ON PRESET/TUNING FM/AM A/B/C/D/E DVR V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R pTUNER TUNED MEMORY LEVEL MAN'L/AUTO FM TUNING MODE AUTO/MAN'L INPUT CD MEMORY l PRESET/TUNING h NEXT EDIT NET USB VOLUME PHONES STRAIGHT SPEAKERS A B l h PROGRAM VIDEO AUX INPUT MODE USB MULTI CH INPUT EFFECT SP A TONE CONTROL dB BASS/TREBLE SILENT CINEMA C3:AM 630 kHz L VIDEO L AUDIO R R Preset station number STEREO 5 Press MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM) while the MEMORY indicator is flashing. The station band and frequency appear in the front panel display with the preset station group and number you have selected. The MEMORY indicator disappears from the front panel display. DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R pTUNER CD TUNED VOLUME SP A C3:AM dB 630 kHz L R The displayed station has been stored as C3. 6 4 DIRECT ST. 5 6 7 8 SPEAKERS ENHANCER NIGHT STRAIGHT 9 0 10 ENT. EFFECT PRESET/CH LEVEL SET MENU TITLE MENU BAND SRCH MODE 1 ENTER A/B/C/D/E RETURN DISPLAY DAB MEMORY ON SCREEN 2 REC 1 V-AUX MOVIE 3 EXTD SUR. When performing this operation with the remote control, set the component selector switch to SOURCE and then press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source. MAN'L/AUTO FM DVR ENTERTAIN 2 SELECT y MEMORY NET USB MUSIC 1 STANDARD Press A/B/C/D/E on the front panel (or A/B/C/D/E on the remote control) to select the desired preset station group (A to E). The preset station group letter appears in the front panel display and changes each time you press the button. Repeat steps 1 through 5 to store other stations. PRESET/CH A/B/C/D/E Notes • Any stored station data existing under a preset station number is cleared when you store a new station under the same preset station number. • The reception mode (stereo or monaural) is stored along with the station frequency. 50 En or NEXT Front panel ENTER A/B/C/D/E Remote control FM/AM TUNING 2 Press PRESET/TUNING l / h on the front panel (or PRESET/CH u / d on the remote control) to select the desired preset station number (1 to 8). The preset station group and number appear in the front panel display along with the station band and frequency. Exchanging preset stations You can exchange the assignments of two preset stations with each other. The example below describes the procedure to exchange preset station “E1” with “A5”. 2,4 1,3 PRESET/CH VOLUME STANDBY /ON l PRESET/TUNING h or PRESET/TUNING ENTER FM/AM A/B/C/D/E l PRESET/TUNING h MEMORY LEVEL MAN'L/AUTO FM NEXT EDIT TUNING MODE AUTO/MAN'L INPUT LEVEL PHONES A/B/C/D/E STRAIGHT SPEAKERS A B l PROGRAM h VIDEO AUX INPUT MODE TONE CONTROL BASS/TREBLE SILENT CINEMA DVR VIDEO L AUDIO R Remote control Front panel NET USB USB MULTI CH INPUT EFFECT V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R pTUNER Select preset station “E1” using A/B/C/D/E and PRESET/TUNING l / h. See “Selecting preset stations” on page 50. 2 Press and hold EDIT for more than 3 seconds. “E1” and the MEMORY indicator flash in the front panel display. CD TUNED VOLUME SP A E1:FM 87.50MHz dB L R BASIC OPERATION 1 PRESET/TUNING EDIT Flashes NET USB DVR V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R pTUNER TUNED CD MEMORY VOLUME SP A E1:FM 87.50MHz dB L R Flashes English 51 En FM/AM TUNING 3 Select preset station “A5” using A/B/C/D/E and PRESET/TUNING l / h. “A5” and the MEMORY indicator flash in the front panel display. See “Selecting preset stations” on page 50. A/B/C/D/E l PRESET/TUNING h NEXT LEVEL Flashes NET USB DVR V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R pTUNER TUNED CD MEMORY VOLUME SP A dB A5:FM 90.60MHz L R Flashes 4 Press EDIT again. “EDIT E1–A5” appears in the front panel display and the assignments of the two preset stations are exchanged. PRESET/TUNING EDIT NET USB DVR V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R pTUNER TUNED CD VOLUME SP A EDIT 52 En dB E1-A5 L R RADIO DATA SYSTEM TUNING (EUROPE MODEL ONLY) RADIO DATA SYSTEM TUNING (EUROPE MODEL ONLY) Radio Data System (Europe model only) is a data transmission system used by FM stations in many countries. The Radio Data System function is carried out among the network stations. This unit can receive various Radio Data System data such as PS (program service), PTY (program type), RT (radio text), CT (clock time), and EON (enhanced other networks) when receiving Radio Data System broadcasting stations. Selecting the Radio Data System program Use this feature to select one of the 15 Radio Data System program types and search for all the available preset stations of the selected program type. 9 0 3 Press PRESET/CH u / d on the remote control to select the desired program type. The name of the selected program type appears in the front panel display. PRESET/CH ENT. 10 EFFECT CODE SET TRANSMIT PRESET/CH POWER POWER STANDBY TITLE POWER MENU SRCH MODE BAND TV AV ENTER MD SLEEP MULTI CH IN CBL DVD DTV V-AUX TUNER A/B/C/D/E RETURN DISPLAY DAB MEMORY ON SCREEN REC USB DVR ENTER A/B/C/D/E CD-R DOCK 3 NET AMP 2 AUDIO PC/MCX FREQ/TEXT NET RADIO MODE USB PTY SEEK START BASIC OPERATION 1 CD POP M SET MENU LEVEL Lights up 4 EON SOURCE TV VOL TV CH VOLUME Program type TV 1 Press TUNER on the remote control to select “TUNER” as the input source. TUNER 2 Press PTY SEEK MODE on the remote control to set this unit to the PTY SEEK mode. The name of the program type or “NEWS” flashes in the front panel display. NEWS MODE PTY SEEK START Flashes y To cancel the PTY SEEK mode, press PTY SEEK MODE on the remote control again. Descriptions NEWS News AFFAIRS Current affairs INFO General information SPORT Sports EDUCATE Education DRAMA Drama CULTURE Culture SCIENCE Science VARIED Light entertainment POP M Popular music ROCK M Rock music M.O.R. M Middle-of-the-road music (easylistening) LIGHT M Light classics CLASSICS Serious classics OTHER M Other music English 53 En RADIO DATA SYSTEM TUNING (EUROPE MODEL ONLY) 4 Press PTY SEEK START on the remote control to start searching for all the available Radio Data System preset stations. The name of the selected program type flashes and the PTY HOLD indicator lights up in the front panel display while this unit is searching for stations. MODE POP M PTY SEEK START Using the Radio Data System station network Use this feature to receive the EON (enhanced other networks) data service of the Radio Data System station network. Once you select one of the 4 Radio Data System program types (NEWS, AFFAIRS, INFO, or SPORT), this unit automatically searches for all the available preset stations that are scheduled to broadcast the EON data service of the selected program type for a certain duration of time. When the scheduled EON data service starts, this unit automatically switches to the local station broadcasting the EON data service and then switches back to the nationwide station once the EON data service ends. PTY HOLD Notes Flashes Lights up y To stop searching for stations, press PTY SEEK START on the remote control again. • You can use this feature only when the EON data service is available. • The EON indicator lights up in the front panel display only when the EON data service is being received from a Radio Data System station. 9 0 ENT. 10 EFFECT Notes CODE SET POWER TRANSMIT POWER PRESET/CH STANDBY POWER LEVEL SET MENU TITLE MENU SRCH MODE BAND TV AV ENTER • This unit stops searching for stations when a station broadcasting the selected program type is found. • If the station found is not the one you desire, press PTY SEEK START again to resume searching for another station broadcasting the same program type. MD 1 CD SLEEP A/B/C/D/E CD-R RETURN MULTI CH IN CBL DISPLAY DAB MEMORY DVD DTV DOCK TUNER ON SCREEN REC USB V-AUX DVR NET TV VOL TV CH VOLUME AUDIO PC/MCX AMP FREQ/TEXT NET RADIO MODE USB PTY SEEK START EON 3 SOURCE TV 1 Press TUNER on the remote control to select “TUNER” as the input source. TUNER 2 54 En Make sure the EON indicator is lit in the front panel display. If the EON indicator is not lit in the front panel display, select another Radio Data System program so that the EON indicator lights up. RADIO DATA SYSTEM TUNING (EUROPE MODEL ONLY) 3 Press EON on the remote control repeatedly to select one of the 4 Radio Data System program types (NEWS, AFFAIRS, INFO or SPORT). The name of the selected program type appears in the front panel display. NEWS Displaying the Radio Data System information Use this feature to display the 4 types of the Radio Data System information: PS (program service), PTY (program type), RT (radio text) and CT (clock time). The corresponding indicators light up in the front panel display. Notes EON Lights up y To cancel the EON feature, press EON on the remote control repeatedly until the name of the program type disappears and “EON OFF” appears in the front panel display. 9 0 BASIC OPERATION • You can select one of the Radio Data System modes only when the corresponding Radio Data System indicator lights up in the front panel display. It may take a while for this unit to receive all of the Radio Data System data from the station. • You can select only the available Radio Data System modes being offered by the station. • If the signals being received are not strong enough, this unit may not be able to utilize the Radio Data System data. In particular, the “RT” mode requires a large amount of data and may not be available even when the other Radio Data System modes are available. • In case of poor reception conditions, press TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L) on the front panel so that the AUTO indicator disappears from the front panel display. • If the signal strength is weakened by external interference while this unit is receiving the Radio Data System data, the reception may be cut off unexpectedly and “...WAIT” appears in the front panel display. • When the “RT” mode is selected, this unit can display the program information by a maximum of 64 alphanumeric characters, including the umlaut symbol. Unavailable characters are displayed with the “_” (underscore). • If the reception is cut off when the “CT” mode is selected, “CT WAIT” appears in the front panel display. ENT. 10 EFFECT CODE SET POWER TRANSMIT POWER PRESET/CH STANDBY POWER LEVEL SET MENU TITLE MENU SRCH MODE BAND TV AV ENTER MD 1 CD SLEEP A/B/C/D/E CD-R RETURN MULTI CH IN CBL DISPLAY DAB MEMORY DVD DTV DOCK TUNER ON SCREEN REC USB V-AUX DVR NET TV VOL TV CH VOLUME AUDIO AMP 2 PC/MCX FREQ/TEXT NET RADIO MODE USB PTY SEEK START EON SOURCE TV 1 Press TUNER on the remote control to select “TUNER” as the input source. TUNER English 55 En RADIO DATA SYSTEM TUNING (EUROPE MODEL ONLY) 2 Press FREQ/TEXT on the remote control repeatedly to select the desired Radio Data System display mode. FREQ/TEXT PS PTY RT CT Frequency display • Select “PS” to display the name of the Radio Data System program currently being received. • Select “PTY” to display the type of the Radio Data System program currently being received. • Select “RT” to display the information on the Radio Data System program currently being received. • Select “CT” to display the current time. 56 En SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS What really creates the rich, full tones of a live instrument are the multiple reflections from the walls of the room. In addition to making the sound live, these reflections enable us to tell where the player is situated as well as the size and shape of the room in which we are sitting. ■ Elements of a sound field There are two distinct types of sound reflections that combine to make up the sound field in addition to the direct sound coming straight to our ears from the player’s instrument. Early reflections Reflected sounds reach our ears extremely rapidly (50 ms to 100 ms after the direct sound), after reflecting from one surface only (for example, from a wall or the ceiling). Early reflections actually add clarity to the direct sound. Reverberations These are caused by reflections from more than one surface (for example, from the walls, and the ceiling) so numerous that they merge together to form a continuous sonic afterglow. They are non-directional and lessen the clarity of the direct sound. Direct sound, early reflections and subsequent reverberations taken together help us to determine the subjective size and shape of the room, and it is this information that the digital sound field processor reproduces in order to create sound fields. If you could create the appropriate early reflections and subsequent reverberations in your listening room, you would be able to create your own listening environment. The acoustics in your room could be changed to those of a concert hall, a dance floor, or a room with virtually any size at all. This ability to create sound fields at will is exactly what YAMAHA has done with the digital sound field processor. Selecting sound field programs • Choose a sound field program based on your listening preference, not merely on the name of the program. • When you select an input source, this unit automatically selects the last sound field program used with the corresponding input source. • Sound field programs cannot be selected when the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks is selected as the input source (see page 38). • Sampling frequencies higher than 48 kHz (except for DTS 96/24 signals) are sampled down to 48 kHz and then sound field programs are applied. ■ Front panel operations SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS Notes ■ Remote control operations AMP AMP SOURCE TV VOL VOLUME TV CH VOLUME TV STANDBY /ON PRESET/TUNING FM/AM A/B/C/D/E NEXT EDIT l PRESET/TUNING h MEMORY TUNING MODE LEVEL MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L TV MUTE TV INPUT MUTE STEREO MUSIC ENTERTAIN 1 2 3 4 STANDARD SELECT EXTD SUR. DIRECT ST. MOVIE INPUT PHONES SPEAKERS A B l STRAIGHT PROGRAM h VIDEO AUX INPUT MODE USB MULTI CH INPUT Sound field program selector buttons EFFECT TONE CONTROL BASS/TREBLE SILENT CINEMA VIDEO L AUDIO 5 6 7 8 SPEAKERS ENHANCER NIGHT STRAIGHT 9 0 R 10 ENT. EFFECT PROGRAM l / h Set the component selector switch to AMP and then press one of the sound field program selector buttons on the remote control repeatedly. The name of the selected sound field program appears in the front panel display and in the OSD. 57 En English Press PROGRAM l / h on the front panel repeatedly. The name of the selected sound field program appears in the front panel display and in the OSD. PRESET/CH SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS Sound field program descriptions This unit is equipped with a variety of precise digital decoders that allow you to enjoy multi-channel playback from almost any stereo or multi-channel sound source. This unit is also equipped with a YAMAHA digital sound field processing (DSP) chip containing several sound field programs which you can use to enhance your playback experience. y The YAMAHA CINEMA DSP modes are compatible with all Dolby Digital, DTS, and Dolby Surround sources. Set “INPUT MODE” to “AUTO” (see page 35) to enable this unit to automatically switch to the appropriate digital decoder according to the input signal. Notes • The DSP sound field programs of this unit are recreations of real-world acoustic environments made from precise measurements taken in the actual concert hall, music venue, movie theater, etc. Thus, you may notice variations in the strength of the reflections coming from the front, back, left and right. • Choose a sound field program based on your listening preference, not merely on the name of the program itself. ■ For movie/video sources You can select from the following sound fields when playing movie or video sources. The sound fields marked “MULTI” can be used with multi-channel sources, like DVD, digital TV, etc. Those marked “2-CH” can be used with 2-channel stereo sources like TV programs, video tapes, etc. y Press PROGRAM l / h on the front panel repeatedly (or set the component selector switch to AMP and then press one of the sound field program selector buttons on the remote control) to select the desired sound field program (see page 57). Remote control button Sound field program Features 1 STEREO 2ch Stereo Downmixes multi-channel sources to 2 channels or plays back 2-channel sources as they are. 2 MUSIC Pop/Rock CINEMA DSP processing. This program creates an enthusiastic atmosphere where you can feel as if you are in an actual jazz or rock concert. ENTERTAINMENT TV Sports CINEMA DSP processing. This program reproduces the sound environment of a large concert hall using the surround sound field to enhance your experience of watching various TV programs such as news, variety shows, music programs or sports programs. ENTERTAINMENT Mono Movie CINEMA DSP processing. This program reproduces monaural video sources (such as old movies) at the optimum reverberation level to create sound depth using only the presence sound field. ENTERTAINMENT Game CINEMA DSP processing. This program adds a deep and spatial feeling to video game sounds. 3 58 En Sources MULTI 2-CH SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS Remote control button Sound field program Features MOVIE THEATER Spectacle CINEMA DSP processing. This program reproduces the extremely wide sound field of a 70-mm movie theater in detail, making both the video and the sound field incredibly real. This is ideal for any kind of video source encoded in Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital or DTS, especially large-scale movie productions. MOVIE THEATER Sci-Fi CINEMA DSP processing. This program reproduces dialog and sound effects in the latest sound form for science fiction films, thus creating a broad and expansive cinematic space amid silence. You can enjoy science fiction films encoded in Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital or DTS in a virtual-space sound field employing the most advanced techniques. MOVIE THEATER Adventure CINEMA DSP processing. This program reproduces the sound design of the newest 70-mm and multi-channel soundtrack films similar to the sound field of the newest movie theaters, so the reverberations of the sound field itself are restrained as much as possible. MOVIE THEATER General CINEMA DSP processing. This program reproduces sounds from 70-mm and multi-channel soundtrack films characterized by soft and extensive sound field. SUR. STANDARD Standard processing for the selected decoder. SUR. ENHANCED Enhanced processing for the selected decoder. 4 Sources MULTI 2-CH 5 ■ For music sources You can select from the following sound fields when playing music sources, like CD, FM/AM broadcasting, tapes, etc. y Press PROGRAM l / h on the front panel repeatedly (or set the component selector switch to AMP and then press one of the sound field program selector buttons on the remote control) to select the desired sound field program (see page 57). Sound field program Features STEREO 2ch Stereo Plays back 2-channel sources. STEREO 6ch Stereo Plays back 2-channel sources from all speakers in 6.1 channels, providing a larger sound field ideal for background music at parties, etc. MUSIC Hall in Vienna HiFi DSP processing. This program reproduces a classic shoe-box type concert hall with approximately 1700 seats. Pillars and ornate carvings create extremely complex reflections which produce a very full, rich sound. MUSIC The Bttm Line HiFi DSP processing. This program reproduces the stage front in “The Bottom Line”, a famous New York jazz club where 300 people can be seated. MUSIC The Roxy Thtr HiFi DSP processing. This program reproduces the dynamic rock music environment of “The Roxy Theatre”, one of the hottest rock clubs in L.A. The listener’s imaginary seat is at the center-left of the hall. ENTERTAINMENT Disco HiFi DSP processing. This program reproduces the acoustic environment of a lively disco in the heart of a big city to create a highly concentrated and energetic sound. SUR. STANDARD Standard processing for the selected decoder. SUR. ENHANCED Enhanced processing for the selected decoder. 2-CH 1 2 3 Sources SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS Remote control button MULTI 2-CH 5 English 59 En SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS Changing sound field parameter settings 2 Turn on the video monitor and then press DISPLAY on the remote control. The following display is shown in the OSD. You can enjoy good quality sound with the initial factory settings. Although you do not have to change the initial factory settings, you can change some of the parameters to better suit the input source or your listening room. DISPLAY ON SCREEN Notes • Use the “PARAM. INI” feature in “OPTION MENU” to initialize the parameters of each sound field program within a sound field program group (see page 80). • When you set a sound field parameter to a value other than the initial factory settings, an asterisk mark (*) appears by the sound field parameter name in the OSD. • You cannot change the sound field parameter values when “MEMORY GUARD” in “OPTION MENU” is set to “ON” (see page 79). If you want to change the sound field parameter values, set “MEMORY GUARD” to “OFF”. Sound field program category P02 Cursor MUSIC . Pop/Rock DSP LEVEL;;;;0dB P.INIT.DLY;;21ms P.ROOM SIZE;;1.0 S.INIT.DLY;;25ms S.ROOM SIZE;;1.0 Sound field parameters Sound field parameter values y • For details about the function and control range of each sound field parameter, see page 61. • Repeat steps 3 and 4 as necessary to change other sound field program parameter settings. • The available sound field parameters for some of the sound field programs may be displayed on more than one page in the OSD. In this case, press u / d to scroll through pages. • If you press and hold j / i to change the sound field parameter value, the initial factory settings are shown momentarily in the front panel display. CODE SET POWER TV MUTE TV INPUT MUTE STEREO MUSIC ENTERTAIN MOVIE 1 2 3 4 SELECT EXTD SUR. Press one of the sound field program selector buttons repeatedly to select the desired sound field program you want to adjust. STEREO MUSIC ENTERTAIN MOVIE 1 2 3 4 STANDARD SELECT EXTD SUR. DIRECT ST. 5 6 7 8 SPEAKERS ENHANCER NIGHT STRAIGHT 9 0 TRANSMIT POWER TV AV CD CD-R STANDBY POWER STANDARD MD SLEEP MULTI CH IN CBL DVD 3 DTV TUNER DVR NET 6 7 8 ENHANCER NIGHT STRAIGHT 9 0 10 3 DIRECT ST. 5 SPEAKERS 10 ENT. EFFECT ENT. EFFECT DOCK USB PRESET/CH LEVEL V-AUX 1 TITLE SET MENU MENU SRCH MODE BAND AMP ENTER SOURCE TV VOL TV CH A/B/C/D/E VOLUME TV RETURN DISPLAY DAB MEMORY ON SCREEN REC 4 2 AUDIO 1 Set the component selector switch to AMP. 4 Press u / d to select the desired sound field parameter and then j / i to change the selected sound field parameter value. • Press i to increase the value. • Press j to decrease the value. PRESET/CH AMP SOURCE TV ENTER A/B/C/D/E 60 En SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS ■ Sound field parameter descriptions You can adjust the values of certain digital sound field parameters so that the sound fields are recreated accurately in your listening room. Not all of the following parameters are found in every program. y To change sound field parameter settings to suit your listening environment, see page 60 for details. Sound field parameter DSP LEVEL Features DSP level. Adjusts the level of all the DSP effect sounds within a narrow range. Depending on the acoustics of your listening room, you may want to increase or decrease the DSP effect level relative to the level of the direct sound. Control range: –6 dB to +3 dB Initial delay. Presence, surround, and surround back initial delays. Changes the apparent distance from the source sound by adjusting the delay between the direct sound and the first reflection heard by the listener. The smaller the value, the closer the sound source seems to the listener. The larger the value, the farther it seems. For a small room, set to a small value. For a large room, set to a large value. Control range: 1 to 99 ms (INIT.DLY and P.INIT.DLY) 1 to 49 ms (S.INIT.DLY and SB INI.DLY) Source sound Level Level Early reflections Level INIT.DLY P.INIT.DLY S.INIT.DLY SB INI.DLY Time Time Time Delay Delay Delay SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS Sound source Reflection face Small value = 1 ms Large value = 99 ms English 61 En SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS Sound field parameter ROOM SIZE P.ROOM SIZE S.ROOM SIZE SB ROOM SIZE Features Room size. Presence, surround, and surround back room sizes. Adjusts the apparent size of the surround sound field. The larger the value, the larger the surround sound field becomes. As the sound is repeatedly reflected around a room, the larger the hall is, the longer the time between the original reflected sound and the subsequent reflections. By controlling the time between the reflected sounds, you can change the apparent size of the virtual venue. Changing this parameter from one to two doubles the apparent length of the room. Control range: 0.1 to 2.0 Time Early reflections Level Level Level Source sound Time Time Sound source Small value = 0.1 LIVENESS S.LIVENESS SB LIVENESS Large value = 2.0 Liveness. Surround and surround back liveness. Adjusts the reflectivity of the virtual walls in the hall by changing the rate at which the early reflections decay. The early reflections of a sound source decay much faster in a room with acoustically absorbent wall surfaces than in one which has highly reflective surfaces. A room with acoustically absorbent surfaces is referred to as “dead”, while a room with highly reflective surfaces is referred to as “live”. This parameter lets you adjust the early reflection decay rate and thus the “liveness” of the room. Control range: 0 to 10 Source sound Time Small reflected sound Small value = 0 62 En Level Dead Level Level Live Time Time Large reflected sound Large value = 10 SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS Sound field parameter REV.TIME Features Reverberation time. Adjusts the amount of time taken for the dense, subsequent reverberation sound to decay by 60 dB at 1 kHz. This changes the apparent size of the acoustic environment over an extremely wide range. Set a longer reverberation time for “dead” sources and listening room environments, and a shorter time for “live” sources and listening room environments. Control range: 1.0 to 5.0 s Source sound Reverberation Reverberation Early reflections 60 dB REV.TIME Sound source 60 dB REV.TIME Short reverberation REV.TIME Long reverberation Small value = 1.0 s Large value = 5.0 s Reverberation delay. Adjusts the time difference between the beginning of the direct sound and the beginning of the reverberation sound. The larger the value, the later the reverberation sound begins. A later reverberation sound makes you feel as if you are in a larger acoustic environment. Control range: 0 to 250 ms SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS Level REV.DELAY 60 dB Source sound (dB) 60 dB Reverberation Time REV.DELAY REV.TIME English 63 En SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS Sound field parameter REV.LEVEL Features Reverberation level. Adjusts the volume of the reverberation sound. The larger the value, the stronger the reverberation becomes. Level Control range: 0 to 100% Source sound REV. LEVEL Time 2ch Stereo DIRECT 2-channel stereo direct. Bypasses the decoders and DSP processors of this unit for pure hi-fi stereo sound when playing 2-channel analog sources. Choices: AUTO, OFF y • The “AUTO” setting bypasses the decoders and DSP processors only when “BASS” and “TREBLE” are set to 0 dB (see page 33). • When multi-channel signals (Dolby Digital and DTS) are input, they are downmixed to 2 channels and output from the front left and right speakers. • The low-frequency signals input from the front left and right speakers are redirected to the subwoofer in the following cases: – “LFE/BASS OUT” is set to “BOTH” (see page 70). – “FRONT SP” is set to “SMALL” (see page 69) and “LFE/BASS OUT” is set to “SWFR” (see page 70). 6ch Stereo CT LEVEL SL LEVEL SR LEVEL SB LEVEL 64 En 6-channel stereo center, surround left, surround right and surround back levels. Adjusts the volume level of each channel in the 6-channel stereo mode. Control range: 0 to 100% SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS Sound field parameter Features PRO LOGIC IIx Music PRO LOGIC II Music PANORAMA Pro Logic IIx Music and Pro Logic II Music panorama. Sends stereo signals to the surround speakers as well as the front speakers for a wraparound effect. PRO LOGIC IIx Music PRO LOGIC II Music DIMENSION Pro Logic IIx Music and Pro Logic II Music dimension. Adjusts the sound field either towards the front or towards the rear. Choices: OFF, ON Control range: –3 (towards the rear) to +3 (towards the front) Initial setting: STD (standard) PRO LOGIC IIx Music PRO LOGIC II Music CENTER WIDTH Pro Logic IIx Music and Pro Logic II Music center width. Moves the center channel output completely towards the center speaker or towards the front left and right speakers. A larger value moves the center channel output towards the front left and right speakers. Control range: 0 (center channel sound is output only from the center speaker) to 7 (center channel sound is output only from the front left and right speakers) Initial setting: 3 DTS Neo:6 Music C.IMAGE DTS Neo:6 Music center image. Adjusts the front left and right channel output relative to the center channel to make the center channel more or less dominant as necessary. Control range: 0.0 to 1.0 Initial setting: 0.3 y SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS The “PRO LOGIC IIx Music”, “PRO LOGIC II Music”, and “DTS Neo:6 Music” parameters can be set only when “SUR. STANDARD” is selected. Set the component selector switch to AMP and then press STANDARD on the remote control repeatedly to select “SUR. STANDARD” (see page 43). English 65 En SET MENU SET MENU You can use the following parameters in “SET MENU” to adjust a variety of system settings and customize the way this unit operates. Change the initial settings (indicated in bold under each parameter) to reflect the needs of your listening environment. ■ Basic setup BASIC SETUP Use this feature to set up your system quickly and with minimal effort (see page 29). ■ Manual setup MANUAL SETUP Use this feature to manually adjust speaker and system parameters. Sound menu 1 SOUND MENU Use this menu to manually adjust any speaker settings, alter the quality and tone of the sound output by the system or compensate for video signal processing delays when using LCD monitors or projectors. Parameter Features Page A)SPEAKER SET Selects the size of each speaker, the speakers for low-frequency signal output, and the crossover frequency. 69 B)SPEAKER LEVEL Adjusts the output level of each speaker. 71 C)SP DISTANCE Adjusts the delay time of each speaker. 72 D)CENTER GEQ Adjusts the tonal quality of the center speaker. 72 E)LFE LEVEL Adjusts the output level of the LFE channel for Dolby Digital or DTS signals. 72 F)DYNAMIC RANGE Adjusts the dynamic range of Dolby Digital or DTS signals. 73 G)AUDIO SET Adjusts the muting level, audio delay and tone bypass settings. 73 Input menu 2 INPUT MENU Use this menu to manually reassign the input/output jacks, select the input mode or rename the input source. Parameter Features Page A)I/O ASSIGNMENT Assigns the input/output jacks of this unit according to the component to be used. 74 B)INPUT MODE Selects the initial input mode of the source. 75 C)INPUT RENAME Changes the name of the input source. 75 D)VOLUME TRIM Adjusts the output volume of each jack. 76 66 En SET MENU Network and USB menu 3 NET/USB MENU Use this menu to manually adjust the network and USB system parameters. Parameter Features Page A)NETWORK Configures the network settings automatically or manually. 76 B)PLAY STYLE Adjusts the playback style. 77 C)INFORMATION Displays the network system information. 78 Option menu 4 OPTION MENU Use this menu to manually adjust the optional system parameters. Parameter Features Page A)DISPLAY SET Adjusts the brightness of the display and converts video signals. Sets the OSD display time as well as the front panel display scrolling mode. 78 B)MEMORY GUARD Locks sound field program parameters and other “SET MENU” settings. 79 C)PARAM. INI Initializes the parameters of a group of sound field programs. 80 D)MULTI ZONE SET Specifies the location of the speakers connected to the SPEAKERS B terminals. 80 ■ Signal information SIGNAL INFO Use this feature to check audio signal information (see page 40). ADVANCED OPERATION English 67 En SET MENU Using SET MENU 2 Press u / d to select “MANUAL SETUP”. Use the remote control to access and adjust each parameter. TV AV CD CD-R STEREO MD SLEEP V-AUX MOVIE 2 3 4 SELECT EXTD SUR. DIRECT ST. 5 6 7 8 USB SPEAKERS ENHANCER NIGHT STRAIGHT NET 9 0 TUNER DVR ENTER A/B/C/D/E [ ]/[]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter p DTV ENTERTAIN SET MENU  ;BASICSETUP .;MANUALSETUP .;SIGNAL INFO p DVD DOCK MUSIC 1 STANDARD MULTI CH IN CBL PRESET/CH ENT. 10 EFFECT 1 AMP SOURCE TV VOL TV CH PRESET/CH SET MENU LEVEL TITLE MENU SRCH MODE BAND VOLUME TV ENTER A/B/C/D/E TV MUTE TV INPUT MUTE STEREO MUSIC ENTERTAIN RETURN DISPLAY DAB MEMORY ON SCREEN 1,7 2-6 3 REC MOVIE Press ENTER to enter “MANUAL SETUP”. The “MANUAL SETUP” display appears in the OSD. y ;MANUAL SETUP PRESET/CH ENTER 4 Note You cannot change some “SET MENU” parameters when “NIGHT:CINEMA” or “NIGHT:MUSIC” is selected as the night listening mode (see page 34). Press u / d repeatedly and then press ENTER to select and enter the desired menu. The following displays are examples where “SOUND MENU” is selected. PRESET/CH 1 p A/B/C/D/E .1SOUNDMENU 2INPUTMENU 3NET/USBMENU 4OPTIONMENU []/[]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter p • You can change the “SET MENU” parameters while this unit is reproducing sound. • If you press one of the sound field program selector buttons during the “SET MENU” operation, the “SET MENU” operation is canceled. • Repeat the following procedure to select and adjust each parameter setting. • Press RETURN to return to the previous menu level. Set the component selector switch to AMP and then press SET MENU to enter “SET MENU”. The top “SET MENU” display appears in the OSD. PRESET/CH ENTER ENTER A/B/C/D/E A/B/C/D/E AMP SET MENU SOURCE MENU 1 SOUND MENU 1/2 1 SOUND MENU 2/2 SRCH MODE TV p 68 En p p [ ]/[]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter .E)LFE LEVEL F)DYNAMIC RANGE G)AUDIO SET  []/[]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter p SET MENU  .;BASICSETUP ;MANUALSETUP .;SIGNAL INFO p p .A)SPEAKERSET B)SPEAKERLEVEL C)SPDISTANCE D)CENTER GEQ []/[]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter SET MENU 5 Press u / d repeatedly and then press ENTER to select and enter the desired submenu. The following display is an example where “SPEAKER LEVEL” is selected. PRESET/CH 1 SOUND MENU Use this menu to manually adjust any speaker settings or compensate for video signal processing delays when using LCD monitors or projectors. 1 SOUND MENU 1/2 PRESET/CH ENTER 1 SOUND MENU 2/2 p .E)LFE LEVEL F)DYNAMIC RANGE G)AUDIO SET  []/[]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter p A/B/C/D/E p p ENTER A/B/C/D/E .A)SPEAKERSET B)SPEAKERLEVEL C)SPDISTANCE D)CENTER GEQ []/[]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter ■ Speaker settings A)SPEAKER SET B)SPEAKER LEVEL Use this feature to manually adjust any speaker settings. -__________+ .FL;;;;;;;;;; FR;;;;;;;;;;  C;;;;;;;;;; y If you are not satisfied with the bass sounds from your speakers, you can change these settings according to your preference. Front speakers FRONT SP Choices: SMALL, LARGE 6 Press u / d to select the desired parameter and then j / i to change the parameter settings. • Press i to increase the value. • Press j to decrease the value. PRESET/CH   SMALL>LARGE PRESET/CH ENTER ENTER A/B/C/D/E A/B/C/D/E Press SET MENU to exit from “SET MENU”. SET MENU • Select “SMALL” (small) if you have small front speakers that do not reproduce low-frequency signals effectively. The low-frequency signals of the front left and right channels are directed to the speakers selected in “LFE/BASS OUT” (see page 70). • Select “LARGE” (large) if you have large front speakers that reproduce low-frequency signals effectively. All the front left and right channel signals are directed to the front left and right speakers. MENU SRCH MODE Note Memory back-up The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data from being lost even if this unit is in the standby mode. However, the stored data will be lost in case the power cable is disconnected from the AC wall outlet or if the power supply is cut off for more than one week. ADVANCED OPERATION 7 FRONT SP If “LFE/BASS OUT” is set to “FRNT” (see page 70), the LFE signals found in Dolby Digital or DTS sources, the low-frequency signals of the front left and right channels, and the low-frequency signals of other speakers set to “SML” (or “SMALL”) are all directed to the front left and right speakers regardless of the “FRONT SP” setting. English 69 En SET MENU Center speaker CENTER SP Choices: NONE, SML, LRG Surround back speakers SUR. B SP Choices: NONE, SML, LRG SUR. B SP CENTER SP  NONE>SML LRG NONE>SMLLRG • Select “NONE” (none) if you did not connect a center speaker. The center channel signals are directed to the front left and right speakers. • Select “SML” (small) if you have a small center speaker that does not reproduce low-frequency signals effectively. The low-frequency signals of the center channel are directed to the speakers selected in “LFE/ BASS OUT”. • Select “LRG” (large) if you have a large center speaker that reproduces low-frequency signals effectively. All the center channel signals are directed to the center speaker. Surround left/right speakers Choices: NONE, SML, LRG SUR. L/R SP • Select “NONE” (none) if you did not connect a surround back speaker. The surround back channel signals are directed to the surround left and right speakers. • Select “SML” (small) if you have a small surround back speaker that does not reproduce low-frequency signals effectively. The low-frequency signals of the surround back channel are directed to the speakers selected in “LFE/BASS OUT”. • Select “LRG” (large) if you have a large surround back speaker that reproduces low-frequency signals effectively. All the surround back channel signals are directed to the surround back speaker. Bass out LFE/BASS OUT Use this feature to select the speakers that output the LFE (low-frequency effect) and the low-frequency signals. Choices: SWFR, FRNT, BOTH SUR. L/R SP LFE/BASS OUT NONE>SMLLRG SWFRFRNT>BOTH • Select “NONE” (none) if you did not connect surround speakers. This unit is set to the Virtual CINEMA DSP mode (see page 44) and “SUR. B SP” is automatically set to “NONE”. • Select “SML” (small) if you have small surround left and right speakers that do not reproduce low-frequency signals effectively. The low-frequency signals of the surround left and right channels are directed to the speakers selected in “LFE/BASS OUT”. • Select “LRG” (large) if you have large surround left and right speakers that reproduce low-frequency signals effectively. All the surround channel signals are directed to the surround left and right speakers. 70 En • Select “SWFR” (subwoofer) if you connected a subwoofer. The LFE signals as well as the lowfrequency signals of other speakers set to “SML” (or “SMALL”) are directed to the subwoofer. • Select “FRNT” (front) if you did not connect a subwoofer. The LFE signals, the low-frequency signals of the front left and right channels, and the lowfrequency signals of other speakers set to “SML” (or “SMALL”) are all directed to the front left and right speakers regardless of the “FRONT SP” setting (see page 69). • Select “BOTH” (both) if you connected a subwoofer. The low-frequency signals of any source are output from the subwoofer. The LFE signals as well as the low-frequency signals of other speakers set to “SML” (or “SMALL”) are directed to the subwoofer. The lowfrequency signals of the front left and right channels are directed to the front left and right speakers and the subwoofer regardless of the “FRONT SP” setting (see page 69). SET MENU Crossover CROSSOVER Use this feature to select a crossover frequency of all the speakers set to “SML” (or “SMALL”) or to “NONE” in “SPEAKER SET” (see pages 69 and 70). All frequencies below the selected frequency will be sent to the subwoofer or to the speakers set to “LRG” (or “LARGE”) in “SPEAKER SET” (see pages 69 and 70). Choices: 40Hz, 60Hz, 80Hz, 90Hz, 100Hz, 110Hz, 120Hz, 160Hz, 200Hz ■ Speaker level B)SPEAKER LEVEL Use this feature to manually balance the speaker levels between the front left or surround left speakers and each speaker selected in “SPEAKER SET” (see page 69). Control range: –10.0 to +10.0 dB Control step: 1.0 dB Initial setting: 0 dB B)SPEAKER LEVEL -__________+ .FL;;;;;;;;;; FR;;;;;;;;;;  C;;;;;;;;;; CROSSOVER FREQ;;;80Hz Subwoofer phase SUBWOOFER PHASE Use this feature to switch the phase of your subwoofer if bass sounds are lacking or unclear. Choices: NORMAL, REVERSE 02ASUBWOOFER PHASE >NORMALREVERSE • Select “NORMAL” if you do not want to reverse the phase of your subwoofer. • Select “REVERSE” to reverse the phase of your subwoofer. • Select “FL” to adjust the balance of the front left speaker. • Select “FR” to adjust the balance of the front right speaker. • Select “C” to adjust the balance of the center speaker. • Select “SL” to adjust the balance of the surround left speaker. • Select “SR” to adjust the balance of the surround right speaker. • Select “SB” to adjust the balance of the surround back speaker. • Select “SWFR” to adjust the balance of the subwoofer. Note “C”, “SL”, “SR”, “SB” and “SWFR” cannot be adjusted if “CENTER SP” (see page 70), “SUR. L/R SP” (see page 70), “SUR. B SP” (see page 70) and “LFE/BASS OUT” (see page 70) are set to “NONE” respectively. ADVANCED OPERATION English 71 En SET MENU ■ Speaker distance C)SP DISTANCE Use this feature to manually adjust the distance of each speaker and the delay applied to the respective channel. Ideally, each speaker should be the same distance from the main listening position. However, this is not possible in most home situations. Thus, a certain amount of delay must be applied to the sound from each speaker so that all sounds will arrive at the listening position at the same time. ■ Center graphic equalizer D)CENTER GEQ Use this feature to adjust the built-in 5-frequency band (100Hz, 300Hz, 1kHz, 3kHz and 10kHz) graphic equalizer for the center channel so that the tonal quality of the center speaker matches that of the front speakers. You can make adjustments while listening to the currently selected source component or a test tone. Control range: –6 to +6 dB Control step: 0.5 dB Initial setting: 0 dB C)SP DISTANCE D)CENTER GEQ p Unit UNIT Choices: meters (m), feet (ft) Initial setting: [Canada model]: feet (ft) [Other models]: meters (m) • Select “meters” to adjust speaker distances in meters. • Select “feet” to adjust speaker distances in feet. y Press u / d to select a frequency band and j / i to adjust the selected frequency band. ■ Low-frequency effect level E)LFE LEVEL Use this feature to adjust the output level of the LFE (lowfrequency effect) channel according to the capacity of your subwoofer or headphones. The LFE channel carries low-frequency special effects which are only added to certain scenes. This setting is effective only when this unit decodes Dolby Digital or DTS signals. Control range: –20 to 0 dB Control step: 1 dB E)LFE LEVEL .SPEAKER;;;;;;0dB HEADPHONE;;;;0dB []/[]:Up/Down [<]/[>]:Adjust p Note “CENTER”, “SUR.L”, “SUR.R”, “SUR.B” and “SWFR” cannot be adjusted if “CENTER SP” (see page 70), “SUR. L/R SP” (see page 70), “SUR. B SP” (see page 70) and “LFE/BASS OUT” (see page 70) are set to “NONE” respectively. Test tone TEST Choices: OFF, ON • Select “OFF” to stop test tones and output the currently selected source component. • Select “ON” to output test tones from the front left and center speakers, and adjust the tonal quality of the center speaker. p Speaker distances Control range: 0.30 to 24.00 m (1.0 to 80.0 ft) Control step: 0.10 m (0.5 ft) • Select “FRONT L” to adjust the distance of the front left speaker. Initial setting: 3.00 m (10.0 ft) • Select “FRONT R” to adjust the distance of the front right speaker. Initial setting: 3.00 m (10.0 ft) • Select “CENTER” to adjust the distance of the center speaker. Initial setting: 3.00 m (10.0 ft) • Select “SUR. L” to adjust the distance of the surround left speaker. Initial setting: 3.00 m (10.0 ft) • Select “SUR. R” to adjust the distance of the surround right speaker. Initial setting: 3.00 m (10.0 ft) • Select “SUR. B” to adjust the distance of the surround back speaker. Initial setting: 2.10 m (7.0 ft) • Select “SWFR” to adjust the distance of the subwoofer. Initial setting: 3.00 m (10.0 ft) 0dB 0dB 0dB 0dB 0dB p .TEST>OFFON -______+ 100Hz ;;;;;; 300Hz ;;;;;; 1kHz ;;;;;; 3kHz ;;;;;; 10kHz ;;;;;; []/[]:Up/Down [<]/[>]:Adjust p p . UNIT;;;;;;meters FRONTL;;;;3.00m FRONTR;;;;3.00m CENTER;;;;;3.00m []/[]:Up/Down [<]/[>]:Adjust Speaker SPEAKER Adjusts the speaker LFE level. Headphone HEADPHONE Adjusts the headphone LFE level. Note Depending on the settings of “LFE/BASS OUT” (see page 70), some signals may not be output at the SUBWOOFER OUTPUT jack. 72 En SET MENU ■ Dynamic range F)DYNAMIC RANGE Use this feature to select the amount of dynamic range compression to be applied to your speakers or headphones. This setting is effective only when this unit is decoding Dolby Digital and DTS signals. ■ Audio settings G)AUDIO SET Use this feature to adjust the overall audio settings of this unit. G)AUDIO SET F)DYNAMIC RANGE p []/[]:Up/Down [<]/[>]:Select p .SP:MINSTD>MAX HP:MINSTD>MAX .MUTING TYPE;FULL AUDIO DELAY;;0ms TONE BYPASS;AUTO p p []/[]:Up/Down [<]/[>]:Select Speaker SP Adjusts the speaker compression. Headphone HP Adjusts the headphone compression. Choices: MIN, STD, MAX • Select “MIN” (minimum) if you regularly listen at low volume levels. • Select “STD” (standard) for general use. • Select “MAX” (maximum) to preserve the greatest amount of dynamic range. Muting type MUTING TYPE Use this feature to adjust how much the mute function reduces the output volume (see page 34). Choices: FULL, –20dB • Select “FULL” to completely mute all the audio output. • Select “–20dB” to reduce the current volume by 20 dB. Audio delay AUDIO DELAY Use this feature to delay the sound output and synchronize it with the video image. This may be necessary when using certain LCD monitors or projectors. Control range: 0 to 160 ms Control step: 1 ms Tone bypass TONE BYPASS Use this feature to select whether audio output bypasses tone control circuitry when “TREBLE” and “BASS” are set to 0 dB (see page 33). Choices: AUTO, OFF • Select “AUTO” if you want signals to bypass tone control circuitry to provide the purest signal possible. • Select “OFF” if you do not want signals to bypass tone control circuitry. ADVANCED OPERATION English 73 En SET MENU 2 INPUT MENU Use this menu to reassign the input/output jacks, select the input mode or rename the input source. 2 INPUTMENU   p p .A)I/OASSIGNMENT B)INPUTMODE C)INPUTRENAME D)VOLUME TRIM []/[]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter For OPTICAL INPUT jacks 2, 3 and 4 OPTICAL IN (2) OPTICAL IN (3) OPTICAL IN (4) Choices: (2) CD, MD/CD-R, DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX, DVR (3) CD, MD/CD-R, DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX, DVR (4) CD, MD/CD-R, DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX, DVR OPTICALIN  ■ Input/output assignment A)I/O ASSIGNMENT Use this feature to assign the input/output jacks according to the component to be used if the initial settings of this unit do not correspond to your needs. Change the following parameters to reassign the respective jacks and effectively connect more components. Once the input/output jacks are reassigned, you can select the corresponding component by using the INPUT selector on the front panel (or the input selector buttons on the remote control). For COMPONENT VIDEO jacks A, B and C CMPNT-V INPUT [A] CMPNT-V INPUT [B] CMPNT-V INPUT [C] Choices: [A] DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX, DVR [B] DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX, DVR [C] DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX, DVR CMPNT-VINPUT  .[A];;;;;DVD (DVD) [B];;;;;DTV/CBL (DTV/CBL) [C];;;;; DVR ( DVR ) For OPTICAL OUTPUT jack 1 OPTICAL OUT (1) Choices: CD, MD/CD-R, DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX, DVR OPTICALOUT  .(1);;;;;MD/CD-R (MD/CD-R ) 74 En .(2);;;;;MD/CD-R (MD/CD-R) (3);;;;; DVD (DVD ) (4);;;;;DTV/CBL (DTV/CBL ) For COAXIAL INPUT jack 5 COAXIAL IN (5) Choices: (5) CD, MD/CD-R, DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX, DVR COAXIALIN  .(5);;;;; ( DVD DVD ) Notes • You cannot select a specific item more than once for the same type of jack. • When you connect a component to both the DIGITAL INPUT (COAXIAL) and DIGITAL INPUT (OPTICAL) jacks, priority is given to the signals input at the DIGITAL INPUT (COAXIAL) jack. SET MENU ■ Input mode B)INPUT MODE Use this feature to set this unit to reset “INPUT MODE” back to “AUTO” (see page 35) regardless of the previous setting or to recall the last input mode (“AUTO”, “DTS”, or “ANALOG”) used for that source whenever you turn on this unit. Choices: AUTO, LAST 2 Press j / i on the remote control to place the “_” (underscore) under the space or the character you want to edit. PRESET/CH ENTER B)INPUTMODE A/B/C/D/E  >AUTOLAST [<]/[>]:Select [ENTER]:Return 3 • Select “AUTO” to reset “INPUT MODE” back to “AUTO” (see page 35) regardless of the previous setting whenever you turn on this unit. This unit automatically selects input signals in the following order: (1) Digital signals (2) Analog signals • Select “LAST” to set this unit to automatically recall the last input mode (“AUTO”, “DTS”, or “ANALOG”) used for that source whenever you turn on this unit. C)INPUTRENAME  Press one of the input selector buttons on the remote control to select the input source you want to change the name of. ENTER ENTER A/B/C/D/E A/B/C/D/E Notes • You can use up to 8 characters for each input. • Press d to change the character in the following order, or press u to go in the reverse order: A to Z, a space, 0 to 9, a space, a to z, a space, symbols (#, *, +, –, etc.) 4 Repeat steps 1 through 3 to rename each input source. 5 Press ENTER on the remote control to exit from “INPUT RENAME”. PRESET/CH ENTER ADVANCED OPERATION 1 p p [<]/[>]:Position []/[]:Chara. PRESET/CH PRESET/CH ■ Input rename C)INPUT RENAME Use this feature to change the name of the input source that appears in the OSD and in the front panel display. DVD-> DVD Press u / d to select the character you want to use and then press j / i to move to the next space. A/B/C/D/E MD CD SLEEP CD-R MULTI CH IN CBL DVD DTV DOCK V-AUX TUNER USB DVR NET English 75 En SET MENU 3 NET/USB MENU Use this menu to adjust the network and USB system parameters. 3 NET/USBMENU   .A)NETWORK B)PLAY STYLE C)INFORMATION p []/[]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter p ■ Volume trim D)VOLUME TRIM Use this feature to adjust the level of the signal input at each jack. This is useful if you want to balance the level of each input source to avoid sudden changes in volume when switching between input sources. Choices: CD, MD/CD-R, TUNER, DVD, DTV/CBL, V-AUX, DOCK, DVR, PC/MCX, USB, NET RADIO, MULTI CH IN Control range: –6.0 to +6.0 dB Control step: 1.0 dB Initial setting: 0.0 dB D)VOLUME TRIM   DVD DVD-> 0.0dB [<]/[>]:Adjust [RETURN]:Exit ■ Network settings A)NETWORK Use this feature to view the network parameters (IP address, etc.) or to change them manually. A)NETWORK p p  . DHCP ON IP 192.168.000.002 SUBNET 255.255.255.000 GATEWAY 192.168.000.001 DNS (P) 192.168.000.001 DNS (S) 000.000.000.000 SET >CANCEL []/[]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter Note The above display is an example. DHCP DHCP When this parameter is set to “ON”, network parameters for “IP”, “SUBNET”, “GATEWAY”, “DNS (P)” and “DNS (S)” obtained from a DHCP enabled router are displayed. If DHCP server function is not available, set this parameter to “OFF” to configure the network parameters manually. Choices: ON, OFF IP address IP Use this parameter to specify an IP address assigned to this unit. This value must not duplicate the one used for other devices in the target network. Subnet mask SUBNET Use this parameter to specify the subnet mask value assigned to this unit. y For most of the cases, the subnet mask value can be set as “255.255.255.0”. Default gateway GATEWAY Use this parameter to specify the IP address of the default gateway. 76 En SET MENU Primary DNS server DNS (P) Secondary DNS server DNS (S) Use this parameter to specify the IP address of the primary and secondary DNS (Domain Name System) servers. ■ Playback styles B)PLAY STYLE Use this feature to adjust the playback style according to your preference. You can shuffle songs in a random order or repeat one specific song or a sequence of songs. Note B)PLAY STYLE  If you have only one DNS address, enter the DNS address in “DNS (P)”. If you have two or more DNS addresses, enter one of them in “DNS (P)” and another in “DNS (S)”. Note When “DHCP” is set to “ON”, you cannot select and adjust any other network settings. To specify the other parameters, you need to first set “DHCP” to “OFF”. 2 To specify the parameter, press u / d repeatedly to change the number and press j / i to select the digit to change. 3 Press ENTER to confirm the parameter. 4 Repeat steps 1 through 3 to configure each network parameter. 5 Select “SET” and then press ENTER to finish configuration. Note In case you have changed your network configuration, you may need to reconfigure the network settings again. You can reset the network settings of this unit to the initial factory settings by using “N-RESET” in the advanced setup menu (see page 82). Repeat REPEAT Use this feature to set this unit to repeat one song or a sequence of songs. Choices: OFF, SINGLE, ALL • Select “OFF” to deactivate this feature. • Select “SINGLE” to set this unit to repeat one song. • Select “ALL” to set this unit to repeat a sequence of songs. Notes • When “REPEAT” is set to a setting other than “OFF”, the highlighted letter “R” appears in the top right corner of the playback status screen while one song or a sequence of songs are being repeated. • If “REPEAT” is set to “SINGLE”, the setting will be reset to “OFF” when this unit is set to the standby mode. Shuffle SHUFFLE Use this feature to set this unit to play songs or albums in a random order. Choices: OFF, ON • Select “OFF” to deactivate this feature. • Select “ON” to set this unit to play songs or albums in a random order. Note When “SHUFFLE” is set to “ON”, the highlighted letter “S” appears in the top right corner of the playback status screen while songs or albums are being shuffled. ADVANCED OPERATION y []/[]:Up/Down [<]/[>]:Select p Press u / d on the remote control repeatedly and then press ENTER to select and enter the desired network parameter. p 1 .REPEAT;;;;;;;OFF SHUFFLE;;;;;;OFF English 77 En SET MENU ■ Network information C)INFORMATION Use this feature to display the network system information. 4 OPTION MENU Use this menu to adjust the optional system parameters. C)INFORMATION  4 OPTIONMENU    MAC ADDRESS XX:XX:XX:XX:XX:XX STATUS 10BASE-T FULL-DUPLEX [ENTER]:Return p p Note .A)DISPLAYSET B)MEMORYGUARD C)PARAM.INI D)MULTI ZONESET []/[]:Up/Down [ENTER]:Enter ■ Display settings A)DISPLAY SET The above display is an example. []/[]:Up/Down [<]/[>]:Select p “NO LINK” appears when network connection is not made. p Note A)DISPLAYSET  .ON SCREEN;;;;10s FL SCROLL;;;CONT  p Status STATUS This information displays the current link status of the network. Display status: 10BASE-T, 100BASE-TX, FULL-DUPLEX, HALF-DUPLEX, NO LINK A)DISPLAYSET  .DIMMER;;;;;;;;;0 VIDEOCONV.;;;ON OSD SHIFT;;;;;;0 GRAY BACK;;;AUTO []/[]:Up/Down [<]/[>]:Select p MAC (Media Access Control) address MAC ADDRESS This information displays the MAC address that is assigned to this unit. Dimmer DIMMER Use this feature to adjust the brightness of the front panel display. Control range: – 4 to 0 Control step: 1 • Press j to make the front panel display dimmer. • Press i to make the front panel display brighter. Video conversion VIDEO CONV. Use this feature to set whether to convert the video signals input at the VIDEO and S VIDEO jacks. Choices: ON, OFF • Select “ON” to convert composite and S-video signals interchangeably and up-convert composite and S-video signals to component video signals. • Select “OFF” not to convert any signals. Notes • The converted video signals are only output at the MONITOR OUT jacks. When recording a video source, you must make the same type of video connections between each component. • When composite video or S-video signals from a VCR are converted to component video signals, the picture quality may suffer depending on your VCR. • You must set “VIDEO CONV.” to “ON” to display the OSD. • Unconventional signals input at the composite video or S-video jacks cannot be converted or may be output abnormally. In such cases, set “VIDEO CONV.” to “OFF”. 78 En SET MENU OSD shift OSD SHIFT Use this feature to adjust the vertical position of the OSD. Control range: –5 (upward) to +5 (downward) Control step: 1 Initial setting: 0 • Press j to raise the position of the OSD. • Press i to lower the position of the OSD. Gray back GRAY BACK Use this feature to display a gray background in the OSD when there is no video signal being input. Choices: AUTO, OFF • Select “AUTO” to display a gray background in the OSD when there is no video signal being input. • Select “OFF” not to display any background in the OSD. Notes Front panel display scroll FL SCROLL Use this feature to set whether to display the information (such as song title or channel name) in the front panel display in a continuous manner or by the first 14 alphanumeric characters after scrolling all characters once when “DOCK” or “NET/USB” is selected as the input source. Choices: CONT, ONCE • Select “CONT” to display the operation status in the front panel display in a continuous manner. • Select “ONCE” to display the operation status in the front panel display by the first 14 alphanumeric characters after scrolling all characters once. ■ Memory guard B)MEMORY GUARD Use this feature to prevent accidental changes to DSP program parameter values and other system settings. Choices: OFF, ON • Depending on the video signals being input or the system setting of your video monitor (NTSC or PAL), the OSD may be displayed abnormally. In such cases, set “GRAY BACK” to “OFF”. • Even when “GRAY BACK” is set to “OFF”, the OSD may not be displayed correctly depending on the conditions of the picture. On-screen display time ON SCREEN Use this feature to set the amount of time to display the iPod menu or NET/USB menu in the OSD after you perform a certain operation. Choices: ON, 10s, 30s • Select “ON” to display the OSD unceasingly during an operation. • Select “10s” to turn off the OSD 10 seconds after you perform a certain operation. • Select “30s” to turn off the OSD 30 seconds after you perform a certain operation. B)MEMORYGUARD  >OFFON [<]/[>]:Select [ENTER]:Return • Select “OFF” to turn off the “MEMORY GUARD” feature. • Select “ON” to protect: – DSP program parameters – all “SET MENU” items – all speaker levels Note When “MEMORY GUARD” is set to “ON”, you cannot select and adjust any other “SET MENU” items. ADVANCED OPERATION English 79 En SET MENU ■ Parameter initialization C)PARAM. INI ■ Zone set D)MULTI ZONE SET Use this feature to initialize the parameters of each sound field program within a sound field program group. When you initialize a sound field program group, all of the parameter values within that group revert to their initial factory settings. Press the corresponding sound field program selector buttons on the remote control to select the sound field program that you want to initialize. An asterisk (*) appears to the left of the sound field program names that have been changed from their initial factory settings. Choices: STEREO, MUSIC, ENTERTAINMENT, MOVIE THEATER, STANDARD Use this feature to specify the location of speakers connected to the SPEAKERS B terminals of this unit. C)PARAM.INI  STEREO *MUSIC ENTERTAINMENT MOVIE THEATER *STANDARD Press DSP key Notes • You cannot automatically revert to the previous parameter settings once you initialize a sound field program group. • You cannot separately initialize individual sound field programs. • You cannot initialize any sound field program groups when “MEMORY GUARD” is set to “ON” (see page 79). 80 En D)MULTI ZONESET  .SPB;;;;;;;FRONT  [<]/[>]:Select [ENTER]:Return Speaker B setting SP B Use this feature to select the location of the front speakers connected to the SPEAKERS B terminals. Choices: FRONT, ZONE B • Select “FRONT” to turn on or off SPEAKERS A and B when the speakers connected to the SPEAKERS B terminals are set in the main zone. • Select “ZONE B” if the speakers connected to the SPEAKERS B terminals are set in another zone. If SPEAKERS A is turned off and SPEAKERS B is turned on, all the speakers including the subwoofer in the main zone are muted and this unit outputs sound at the SPEAKERS B terminals only. Notes • If you connect headphones to the PHONES jack of this unit, the sound is output from both headphones and the SPEAKERS B terminals when “SP B” is set to “ZONE B”. • If a DSP program is selected when “SP B” is set to “ZONE B”, this unit automatically enters the Virtual CINEMA DSP mode (see page 44). ADVANCED SETUP ADVANCED SETUP This unit has additional menus that are displayed in the front panel display. The advanced setup menu offers additional operations to adjust and customize the way this unit operates. Change the initial settings (indicated in bold under each parameter) to reflect the needs of your listening environment. Notes • The settings you make are reflected next time you turn on this unit by pressing STANDBY/ON on the front panel (or POWER on the remote control) (see page 28). • Only STANDBY/ON, STRAIGHT (EFFECT) and PROGRAM l / h are effective while you are using the advanced setup menu. • All the other operations cannot be made while you are using the advanced setup menu. • The advanced setup menu is only available in the front panel display. 3 1-2,5 VOLUME STANDBY /ON PRESET/TUNING FM/AM A/B/C/D/E l PRESET/TUNING h MEMORY LEVEL MAN'L/AUTO FM NEXT EDIT TUNING MODE AUTO/MAN'L INPUT PHONES SPEAKERS A B STRAIGHT l PROGRAM h VIDEO AUX INPUT MODE USB Press PROGRAM l / h on the front panel repeatedly to select the parameter you want to adjust. The name of the selected parameter appears in the front panel display. See page 82 for a complete list of available parameters. MULTI CH INPUT EFFECT TONE CONTROL BASS/TREBLE SILENT CINEMA VIDEO L AUDIO R l 2,4 1 PROGRAM h 3 Currently selected parameter Currently selected parameter setting Press STANDBY/ON on the front panel to set this unit to the standby mode. SP IMP.-8 MIN STANDBY /ON 4 2 While holding down ADVANCED OPERATION Press and hold STRAIGHT (EFFECT) on the front panel, and then press STANDBY/ON to turn on this unit. This unit turns on, and the advanced setup menu appears in the front panel display. Press STRAIGHT (EFFECT) on the front panel repeatedly to change the selected parameter setting. STRAIGHT EFFECT 5 STRAIGHT STANDBY /ON Press STANDBY/ON on the front panel to save the new setting and set this unit to the standby mode. EFFECT STANDBY /ON y The settings you made are reflected next time you turn on this unit. English 81 En ADVANCED SETUP ■ Speaker impedance SP IMP. ■ Network reset N-RESET Use this feature to set the speaker impedance of this unit so that it matches that of your speakers. Choices: 8ΩMIN, 6ΩMIN • Select “8ΩMIN” to set the speaker impedance to 8 Ω . • Select “6ΩMIN” to set the speaker impedance to 6 Ω . Use this feature to reset the network settings of this unit (see page 76) to the initial factory settings. Choices: CANCEL, RESET • Select “CANCEL” not to reset any network settings of this unit. • Select “RESET” to reset the network settings of this unit. SP IMP. Speaker Impedance level If you use one set (A or B), the impedance of each speaker must be 8 Ω or higher. Front If you use two sets (A and B), the impedance of each speaker must be 16 Ω or higher.* 8ΩMIN Center Surround The impedance of each speaker must be 8 Ω or higher. Surround back If you use one set (A or B), the impedance of each speaker must be 4 Ω or higher. Notes • The initial factory settings are activated next time you turn on this unit. • When the network settings are reset, “DHCP” in “NET/USB MENU” is automatically set to “ON” (see page 76) and the registered client ID of this unit on your YAMAHA MCX-2000 is cleared (see page 92). ■ Remote control AMP ID REMOTE AMP Use this feature to set the AMP ID of this unit for remote control recognition (see page 86). Choices: ID1, ID2 • Select “ID1” when the remote control AMP ID library code is set to “00001”. • Select “ID2” when the remote control AMP ID library code is set to “00002”. Note Front If you use two sets (A and B), the impedance of each speaker must be 8 Ω or higher. 6ΩMIN Center Surround The impedance of each speaker must be 6 Ω or higher. Surround back * The Canada model cannot use two separate speaker systems (A and B) simultaneously when “SP IMP.” is set to “8ΩMIN”. ■ Factory presets PRESET Use this feature to reset all the parameters of this unit to the initial factory settings (see page 95). Choices: CANCEL, RESET • Select “CANCEL” not to reset any parameters of this unit. • Select “RESET” to reset the parameters of this unit. Notes • This setting completely resets all the parameters of this unit including the “SET MENU” parameters. However, the advanced setup menu parameters will not be initialized. • The initial factory settings are activated next time you turn on this unit. 82 En You need to set the corresponding remote control AMP library code for the remote control (see page 86). ■ Remote control TUNER ID REMOTE TUN Use this feature to set the TUNER ID of this unit for remote control recognition (see page 86). Choices: ID1, ID2 • Select “ID1” when the remote control TUNER ID library code is set to “81916”. • Select “ID2” when the remote control TUNER ID library code is set to “81917”. Note You need to set the corresponding remote control TUNER library code for the remote control (see page 86). REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES In addition to controlling this unit, the remote control can also operate other audiovisual components made by YAMAHA and other manufacturers. To control your TV or other components, you must set the appropriate remote control code for each input source (see page 85). Controlling this unit, a TV, or other components ■ Controlling this unit ■ Controlling a TV Set the component selector switch to AMP to control this unit. Set the component selector switch to TV to control your TV. To control your TV, you must set the appropriate remote control code for DTV/CBL or (see page 85). When you set the remote control codes for both DTV/CBL and , priority is given to the one set for DTV/CBL. CODE SET TRANSMIT POWER POWER TV AV STANDBY POWER MD CD SLEEP CD-R MULTI CH IN CBL DVD TUNER DTV DOCK V-AUX USB CODE SET NET DVR AMP *1 POWER TV AV CD CD-R SOURCE TV VOL TV CH TRANSMIT POWER STANDBY MD VOLUME TV SLEEP MULTI CH IN CBL DVD TV MUTE TV INPUT MUTE STEREO MUSIC ENTERTAIN MOVIE 1 2 3 4 STANDARD SELECT EXTD SUR. DIRECT ST. 5 6 7 8 POWER *1 TUNER DTV DOCK USB V-AUX DVR NET TV VOL TV CH VOLUME AMP SPEAKERS ENHANCER 9 0 NIGHT SOURCE STRAIGHT TV ENT. 10 EFFECT PRESET/CH SET MENU LEVEL TITLE MENU BAND SRCH MODE *2 TV MUTE TV INPUT MUTE STEREO MUSIC ENTERTAIN 1 2 3 4 STANDARD SELECT EXTD SUR. DIRECT ST. 5 6 7 8 SPEAKERS ENHANCER NIGHT STRAIGHT 9 0 MOVIE ENTER A/B/C/D/E RETURN DISPLAY DAB MEMORY ON SCREEN REC ENT. 10 AUDIO PC/MCX FREQ/TEXT NET RADIO MODE EFFECT PRESET/CH USB PTY SEEK START SET MENU LEVEL EON TITLE MENU BAND SRCH MODE *2 ENTER A/B/C/D/E RETURN DISPLAY DAB MEMORY ON SCREEN REC AUDIO PC/MCX NET RADIO FREQ/TEXT MODE USB PTY SEEK START EON ADVANCED OPERATION Notes *1 These buttons always control this unit regardless of the component selector switch position. *2 These buttons control this unit only when the component selector switch is set to AMP. Notes *1 These buttons always control your TV regardless of the component selector switch position. Remote control TV POWER Turns on or off the power. TV VOL +/– Increases or decreases the volume level. TV CH +/– Changes the channel number. TV MUTE Mutes the audio output. TV INPUT Changes the input source. These buttons control your TV only when the component selector switch is set to TV. For details, see the “Digital TV/ Cable TV” column on page 84. 83 En English *2 Digital TV/Cable TV REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES ■ Controlling other components U Set the component selector switch to SOURCE to control other components selected with the input selector buttons, or the blank button on the right of MD/CD-R. You must set the appropriate remote control code for each input source (see page 85). The following table shows the function of each control button used to control other components assigned to each input selector button, and the blank button on the right of MD/CD-R. Be advised that some buttons may not correctly operate the selected component. Remote control DVD player/ recorder 1 CODE SET POWER TRANSMIT POWER TV AV CD CD-R STANDBY POWER MD DTV TUNER DVR NET DOCK USB V-AUX AMP SOURCE TV VOL TV CH VOLUME 3 4 5 TV INPUT MUTE MUSIC ENTERTAIN MOVIE 1 2 3 4 LD/CD player MD/CD recorder 3 4 STANDARD SELECT EXTD SUR. DIRECT ST. MOVIE 5 6 7 8 SPEAKERS ENHANCER NIGHT STRAIGHT 9 0 ENT. 10 PRESET/CH SET MENU LEVEL TITLE MENU SRCH MODE BAND 7 8 ENTER A/B/C/D/E RETURN DISPLAY DAB MEMORY ON SCREEN 9 REC 6 TV MUTE STEREO Digital TV/ Cable TV ENTERTAIN 2 EFFECT TV VCR U MUSIC 1 MULTI CH IN CBL DVD 2 SLEEP U STEREO Tuner AUDIO PC/MCX NET RADIO FREQ/TEXT MODE USB PTY SEEK START iPod® EON PC/MCX-2000/ Internet radio/ USB 1 2 AV POWER Power *1 Power *1 Power *2 Power *1 Power *1 1-9, 0, +10 Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons 3 4 TITLE Title PRESET/CH u Up VCR channel up Up Preset up (1-8) Up Up PRESET/CH d Down VCR channel down Down Preset down (1-8) Down Down A/B/C/D/E j Left Left Preset down (A-E) Previous menu Previous menu Preset up (A-E) Subsequent menu Subsequent menu Subsequent menu Subsequent menu 5 6 7 Band A/B/C/D/E i Right Right ENTER Enter Enter RETURN Return Return REC Disc skip (player) Rec (recorder) *3 Rec *3 Rec *2*3 Disc skip (CD player) Bookmark *5 Rec *3 Select PC/MCX p Play Play Play *2 Play Play Play Play w Search backward Search backward Search backward *2 Search backward Search backward Search backward *4 Select NET RADIO f Search forward Search forward Search forward *2 Search forward Search forward Search forward *4 Select USB AUDIO Audio Audio Audio *2 Sound (LD player) e Pause Pause Pause *2 Pause Pause Pause b Skip backward Skip backward Skip backward *2 Skip backward Skip backward Skip backward Skip backward *6 a Skip forward Skip forward Skip forward *2 Skip forward Skip forward Skip forward Skip forward *6 s Stop Stop Stop *2 Stop Stop Stop Stop Enter Chapter/Time (LD player) Index (CD player) Index Previous menu Previous menu Display Display Display Display ENT. Title/Index 8 9 Preset stations (1-8) MENU Menu DISPLAY Display Enter Menu Display Display Notes *1 This button is operational only when the original remote control supplied with the component has a POWER button. These buttons control your VCR or DVD recorder only when you set the appropriate remote control code for DVR (see page 85). *3 When you use this button to record a source, press it twice repeatedly to prevent a malfunction. *4 Press and hold to search backward or forward. *5 Press and hold to store your favorite Internet radio stations with bookmarks (see page 93). *6 These buttons are not operational when the Internet radio is selected as the sub input source of NET/USB. *2 84 En REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES Setting the remote control code 1 You can control your TV and other components by setting the appropriate remote control code for each input source. For a complete list of available remote control codes, refer to “LIST OF REMOTE CONTROL CODES” at the end of this manual. Press one of the input selector buttons, or the blank button on the right of MD/CD-R to select the component you want to set up. MD CD SLEEP CD-R MULTI CH IN CBL DVD The following table shows the default component in the “Library (component category)” column and the remote control code for each input source. DTV DOCK V-AUX TUNER USB DVR NET Remote Control Code Default Settings 2 Input source Library (component category) Manufacturer Default code CD CD YAMAHA 61907 MD/CD-R MD YAMAHA 70888 DVD DVD YAMAHA 40539 DTV/ CBL – – – TUNER TUNER YAMAHA 81916 V-AUX/ DOCK OTHER AUDIO ACCESSORIES (iPod) YAMAHA 81981 DVR DVR YAMAHA 51544 NET/ USB OTHER AUDIO ACCESSORIES (NET/USB) YAMAHA – – – TAPE YAMAHA 70524 Press CODE SET using a ballpoint pen or a similar object. The TRANSMIT indicator on the remote control flashes twice. TRANSMIT CODE SET Flashes 3 Press the numeric buttons (0 to 9) to enter the five-digit remote control code for the component to be used. The TRANSMIT indicator on the remote control flashes twice, and the remote control code for the selected component is set. STEREO MUSIC ENTERTAIN 1 2 3 MOVIE 4 STANDARD SELECT EXTD SUR. DIRECT ST. 5 6 7 8 SPEAKERS ENHANCER NIGHT STRAIGHT 9 0 TRANSMIT 81982 10 Flashes ENT. EFFECT y Note To clear the remote control code previously set for the selected component, enter the code number “9980”. You may not be able to operate your YAMAHA component even if a YAMAHA remote control code is initially set as listed above. In this case, try setting other YAMAHA remote control codes. Notes y The blank button is the one on the right of MD/CD-R. ADVANCED OPERATION Blank button • If the manufacturer of your component has more than one code, try each of them until you find the correct one. • If you do not press any buttons within 30 seconds in step 3, the setup process is canceled. If this happens, repeat the setup procedure. English 85 En REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES ■ Setting remote control TUNER ID library codes Setting library codes You can operate multiple YAMAHA receivers or amplifiers in the same room with the supplied remote control simultaneously. Set the appropriate library code to select and operate the desired component with the supplied remote control. Select one of the following codes to set the remote control TUNER ID library code for the component you want to use. 1 ■ Setting remote control AMP ID library codes Press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source. TUNER Select one of the following codes to set the remote control AMP ID library code for the component you want to use. 1 Press CODE SET using a ballpoint pen or a similar object. The TRANSMIT indicator on the remote control flashes twice. 2 Press CODE SET using a ballpoint pen or a similar object. The TRANSMIT indicator on the remote control flashes twice. TRANSMIT CODE SET TRANSMIT CODE SET Flashes Flashes 2 Press the numeric buttons to enter the code number “00001” or “00002”. The TRANSMIT indicator on the remote control flashes twice, and the AMP ID library code is changed. 3 Press the numeric buttons to enter the code number “81916” or “81917”. The TRANSMIT indicator on the remote control flashes twice, and the TUNER ID library code is changed. STEREO MUSIC ENTERTAIN MOVIE STEREO MUSIC ENTERTAIN MOVIE 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 STANDARD SELECT EXTD SUR. DIRECT ST. STANDARD SELECT EXTD SUR. DIRECT ST. 5 6 7 8 5 6 7 8 SPEAKERS ENHANCER NIGHT STRAIGHT SPEAKERS ENHANCER NIGHT STRAIGHT 9 0 9 0 10 ENT. TRANSMIT Flashes Function 00001 To operate this unit using (initial setting) the default code. 00002 *1 *2 To operate this unit using an alternative code. ENT. Flashes EFFECT EFFECT AMP ID library code *1 10 TRANSMIT Remote control AMP ID *2 TUNER ID library code *1 ID1 (initial setting) 81916 To operate this unit using (initial setting) the default code. 81917 ID2 The remote control setting The setting of this unit (see page 82) *1 *2 Function To operate this unit using an alternative code. Remote control TUNER ID *2 ID1 (initial setting) ID2 The remote control setting The setting of this unit (see page 82) Notes Notes • You need to set the corresponding remote control AMP ID of this unit in the advanced setup (see page 82). • When using multiple YAMAHA receivers/amplifiers, you may be able to operate the other components simultaneously with the default code setting. In this case, set one of the alternative codes to operate this unit separately. • You need to set the corresponding remote control TUNER ID of this unit in the advanced setup (see page 82). • When using multiple YAMAHA receivers/amplifiers, you may be able to operate the other components simultaneously with the default code setting. In this case, set one of the alternative codes to operate this unit separately. 86 En REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES Resetting all remote control codes Use this feature to clear all the remote control codes previously set and reset all of them to the initial factory settings. 1 Press CODE SET using a ballpoint pen or a similar object. The TRANSMIT indicator on the remote control flashes twice. TRANSMIT CODE SET Flashes 2 Press the numeric buttons to enter the code number “9981”. The TRANSMIT indicator on the remote control flashes twice, and all the remote control codes previously set are cleared and reset to the initial factory settings. STEREO MUSIC ENTERTAIN 1 2 3 4 STANDARD SELECT EXTD SUR. DIRECT ST. 5 6 7 8 SPEAKERS ENHANCER NIGHT STRAIGHT 9 0 10 MOVIE ENT. TRANSMIT Flashes EFFECT y If you do not press any buttons within 30 seconds after step 2, the clearing process is canceled. In this case, repeat the clearing procedure. ADVANCED OPERATION English 87 En USING IPOD® USING iPod® Once you have stationed your iPod in a YAMAHA iPod universal dock (such as YDS-10 sold separately) connected to the DOCK terminal of this unit (see page 22), you can enjoy playback of your iPod using the supplied remote control. You can also use the Compressed Music Enhancer mode of this unit to improve the sound quality of the compression artifacts (such as the MP3 format) stored on your iPod (see page 37). Notes • Only iPod (Click and Wheel), iPod nano, and iPod mini are supported. • Some features may not be compatible depending on the model or the software version of your iPod. y • For a complete list of the remote control functions used to control your iPod, see the “iPod” column in “Controlling other components” on page 84. • For a complete list of status messages that appear in the front panel display and in the OSD, see the “iPod” section in “TROUBLESHOOTING” on page 100. Controlling iPod You can control your iPod when “V-AUX” is selected as the input source. The operations of your iPod can be done with the aid of the OSD of this unit (menu browse mode) or without it (simple remote mode). ■ Controlling iPod in the simple remote mode You can perform the basic operations of your iPod (play, stop, skip, etc.) using the supplied remote control without the aid of the OSD of this unit. y • You can view the photos or video clips stored on your iPod. • Operations can be also done with the controls on your iPod. 88 En ■ Controlling iPod in the menu browse mode You can perform the advanced operations of your iPod using the supplied remote control with the aid of the OSD of this unit. The name of the song being played appears in the front panel display according to the “FL SCROLL” parameter in “OPTION MENU” (see page 79). You can also browse the songs stored on your iPod in the OSD. Further, you can change or adjust settings for your iPod to suit your personal preferences. Notes • Operations cannot be done with the controls on your iPod. • The YAMAHA logo appears in the display window of your iPod. • There are some characters that cannot be displayed in the front panel display or in the OSD of this unit. Those characters are replaced with underscores “_”. • The “Setup” parameters can be changed or adjusted only in the OSD. Press ENTER on the remote control to toggle between the “Setup” parameter settings. • You cannot browse the photos or video clips stored on your iPod in the OSD. Instead, you must use the controls on your iPod to select the desired photos or video clips. USING iPod® 1 Press DISPLAY on the remote control. The following display appears in the OSD. iPod Top Playlists Artists Albums Songs Genres Composers Setup DISPLAY ON SCREEN > > > > > > > Shuffle Shuffle Use this feature to set this unit to play songs or albums in a random order. Choices: Off, Songs, Albums • Select “Off ” to deactivate this feature. • Select “Songs” to set this unit to play songs in a random order. • Select “Albums” to set this unit to play albums in a random order. Note 2 Press u / d / j / i on the remote control to navigate the iPod menu and then press ENTER to begin playback of the selected song. PRESET/CH PRESET/CH ENTER ENTER A/B/C/D/E A/B/C/D/E When “Shuffle” is set to a setting other than “Off ”, the highlighted letter “S” appears in the top right corner while songs or albums are being shuffled. Repeat Repeat Use this feature to set this unit to repeat one song or a sequence of songs. Choices: Off, One, All • Select “Off ” to deactivate this feature. • Select “One” to set this unit to repeat one song. • Select “All” to set this unit to repeat a sequence of songs. Note Choices: Playlists (playlists), Artists (artists), Albums (albums), Songs (songs), Genres (genres), Composers (composers) • Playlists > Songs • Artists > Albums > Songs • Albums > Songs • Songs • Genres > Artists > Albums > Songs • Composers > Albums > Songs • Setup > Shuffle, Repeat When “Repeat” is set to a setting other than “Off ”, the highlighted letter “R” appears in the top right corner while one song or a sequence of songs are being repeated. ADVANCED OPERATION English 89 En USING NETWORK/USB FEATURES USING NETWORK/USB FEATURES This unit is equipped with network and USB features that allow you to enjoy WAV (PCM format only), MP3 and WMA files saved on your PC, YAMAHA MCX-2000, USB memory device and USB portable audio player or access the Internet radio. Notes • YAMAHA MCX-2000 may not be for sale in some locations. • For further details about networking, refer to the operation manuals supplied with your network devices. Also refer to technical reference books, if needed. • Some WAV, MP3 and WMA files may not be playable or may be noisy when played. y • For a complete list of the remote control functions used to control the network and USB features, see the “PC/MCX-2000/Internet radio/USB” column in “Controlling other components” on page 84. • For a complete list of status messages that appear in the front panel display and in the OSD, see the “Network and USB” section in “TROUBLESHOOTING” on page 101. Navigating the network and USB menus The following diagram shows the construction of the network and USB menu. NET/USB PC/MusicCAST (MCX-2000) Server* Playlists Selects a song by playlist stored on the server. Refer to the documents of the server for details about the playlist file format, the process of creating the playlist file, etc. Artists Selects a song by artist. In addition, you can select an album within the artist (MCX-2000 only). Albums Selects a song by album. Songs Selects a song directly. Genres Selects a song by genre. In addition, you can select an album within the genre (MCX-2000 only). Recall Play Makes this unit recall play from MCX-2000 or another client. For details, refer to the instruction manual of MCX-2000. (MCX-2000 only) Internet Radio USB Bookmarks Selects an Internet radio station that has been added to the “Bookmarks” list (see page 93). Locations Selects an Internet radio station or a Podcast service by location. Genres Selects an Internet radio station or a Podcast service by genre. New Stations Selects an Internet radio station from the ones that have recently started the service. Popular Stations Selects an Internet radio station from the list of popular stations. Podcasts Selects a Podcast service by location or genre. Help Broadcasts voice-assisted guidelines on various topics of the related Internet service. Files/Directories Selects a file by navigating directories. Note * Only the available PC servers and MCX-2000 are displayed. 90 En USING NETWORK/USB FEATURES The following procedure shows the basic steps to navigate the network and USB menus. See pages 92 and 93 for details about each sub input source. 2 Note “Please wait” may appear whenever it takes time for communication. This is not a system malfunction. Wait for a while. 1 Press MENU on the remote control to display the top NET/USB menu. The following display appears in the OSD. If any other display appears in the OSD, press MENU on the remote control repeatedly until the top NET/USB menu appears. NET/USB Set the component selector switch to SOURCE and then press NET/USB on the remote control to select “NET/USB” as the input source. The cursor on the left of the NET/USB indicator lights up in the front panel display, and the contents previously played for the corresponding sub input source of NET/USB is automatically played. SET MENU MENU 1/3 3 You can also select the desired sub input source by pressing the corresponding button on the remote control (see page 7). NET TV 4 Lights up DVR V-AUX DTV/CBL DVD MD/CD-R TUNER CD VOLUME SP A PC/MCX Press u / d to select the desired sub input source and then press i or ENTER. y USB pNET USB > > > SRCH MODE AMP SOURCE Top PC/MusicCAST Internet Radio USB dB L R Press u / d / j / i on the remote control to select the desired song or Internet radio station. • Press u / d to select the desired menu. • Press i to enter the selected menu. • Press j to return to the previous menu level. y • “i” in the right corner of each menu line indicates that there is a submenu available in the next menu level. • You can press ENTER or MENU to enter the selected menu or to return to the previous menu level. 5 ADVANCED OPERATION Press ENTER to play the selected song or to listen to the selected station. English 91 En USING NETWORK/USB FEATURES Using a PC server or YAMAHA MCX-2000 Use this feature to enjoy music files saved on your PC or YAMAHA MCX-2000. MCX-2000 is a music server that enhances the concept of YAMAHA exclusive MusicCAST, a digital music delivery method over a personal network. 1 Install Windows Media Connect 2.0 on your PC, or register this unit on your YAMAHA MCX-2000. • Refer to “Installing Windows Media Connect 2.0 on your PC” on page 92 and “Registering this unit on the YAMAHA MCX-2000” on page 93. • This procedure is needed only the first time. 2 Turn on your PC or MCX-2000. The PC server or MCX-2000 is added to the server list on the submenu of PC/MusicCAST. 3 Select a desired PC server or MCX-2000 to begin playback. Notes • YAMAHA MCX-2000 may not be for sale in some locations. • You can connect this unit to up to 4 PC servers and 1 MCX-2000, and each server must be connected to the same subnet as this unit. • Some WAV, MP3 and WMA files on your PC may not be playable or may be noisy when played. • (MCX-2000 only) Files marked with an asterisk (*) have not been converted to MP3 format. You cannot play back such files immediately unless you set the “Receive PCM Stream” setting of this unit to “ON” on MCX-2000. For details, refer to the instruction manual of MCX-2000. y • While a song is being played, the time elapsed is displayed at the bottom of the OSD. • You can use b / a to skip backward/forward and h / s to start/stop playback independently from the menu in the OSD. • You can set the settings for repeat and shuffle mode by using the “PLAY STYLE” parameters in “NET/USB MENU” (see page 77). • You can set whether to display the operation status in the front panel display in a continuous manner or by the first 14 characters after scrolling all characters once by using “FL SCROLL” in “OPTION MENU” (see page 79). 92 En ■ Installing Windows Media Connect 2.0 on your PC With Windows Media Connect 2.0, you can play back the audio files on your PC. For details refer to the documents of Windows Media Connect 2.0. 1 Install Windows Media Connect 2.0 on your PC. You can download the installer of Windows Media Connect 2.0 from the Microsoft website. 2 Turn on your PC and then share a folder on the PC. The Shared folder is added to the server list on the submenu of PC/MusicCAST. Notes • Some security software installed on your PC (anti-virus software, firewall software, etc.) may block the access of this unit to your PC. In such cases, configure the security software appropriately. • If you are using a PC with Windows XP Professional, and the PC is logging on to a domain, you may not be able to connect the PC server. In such cases, log on to the local machine instead of the domain. USING NETWORK/USB FEATURES ■ Registering this unit on the YAMAHA MCX-2000 You must register this unit on your YAMAHA MCX-2000 so that this unit can be recognized by your YAMAHA MCX-2000. For details, refer to the operation manual supplied with your YAMAHA MCX-2000. 1 Turn off this unit. Using the Internet radio Use this feature to listen to Internet radio stations. This unit uses the vTuner Internet radio station database service particularly customized for this unit, providing over 2000 radio station database. Further, you can store your favorite stations with bookmarks. Notes 2 Set your YAMAHA MCX-2000 to the “Auto Config” mode. 3 Turn on this unit. • MCX-2000 is added to the server list on the submenu of PC/MCX. • The client ID of this unit appears in the OSD of your YAMAHA MCX-2000 (shown as CLXXXXX), and this completes the automatic configuration procedure. Notes • The latter part of the client ID of this unit is same as the last 5 digits of the MAC address of this unit. For details about MAC address, see page 78. • To clear the registered client ID of this unit, use the “Manual Config” mode of your YAMAHA MCX-2000 (refer to the instruction manual of MCX-2000) and then set “N-RESET” in the advanced setup menu of this unit to “RESET” (see page 82). • The client control functions of MCX-2000 over this unit other than “View Play Info”, “Receive PCM Stream” and “Edit Client title” are not available. Avoid using these functions as it will stop the playback on this unit. • This service may be discontinued without notice. • Some Internet radio stations may not be played even if they are selected in the NET RADIO menu. • To listen to the Internet radio, connect this unit to your network (see page 23). • A narrowband Internet connection (i.e. 56K modem, ISDN) will not provide satisfactory results, and a broadband connection is strongly recommended (i.e. a cable modem, an xDSL modem, etc.). For detailed information, consult with your ISP. y • You can use h / s to start/stop playback independently from the menu in the OSD. • “Podcast” is a type of the Internet radio service, and there are a number of Podcast services available on the Internet. The Podcast is not a continuous service. That is, this unit stops playback when an episode of the Podcast ends. • Some security devices (such as firewall) may block the access of this unit to Internet radio stations. In such cases, configure the security settings appropriately. ■ Storing your favorite Internet radio stations with bookmarks Use this feature to select your favorite Internet radio stations quickly. y To remove the stored station from the list, select the item in the first level of the “Bookmarks” list and then press and hold TITLE on the remote control. ADVANCED OPERATION Press and hold TITLE on the remote control while the selected Internet radio station service is being broadcast. The stored Internet radio station is added to the “Bookmarks” list (see page 90). English 93 En USING NETWORK/USB FEATURES Using a USB memory device or a USB portable audio player Use this feature to enjoy WAV (PCM format only), MP3 and WMA files saved on your USB memory device or USB portable audio player connected to the USB port on the front panel of this unit. Notes • This unit supports USB mass storage class devices using FAT 16 or FAT 32. • Only the first partition is displayed in the OSD. You cannot select files in other partitions. • Up to 8 levels of directory hierarchy and 500 music files per directory are recognized. • Some devices may not work properly even if they meet the requirements. • Some WAV, MP3 and WMA files may not be playable or may be noisy when played. • When you connect your USB memory device or USB portable audio player, there may be an about 10 seconds delay. y • While a song is being played, the time elapsed is displayed at the bottom of the OSD. • You can use b / a to skip backward/forward and h / s to start/stop playback independently from the menu in the OSD. • You can set the settings for repeat and shuffle mode by using the “PLAY STYLE” parameters in “NET/USB MENU” (see page 77). • You can set whether to display the operation status in the front panel display in a continuous manner or by the first 14 characters after scrolling all characters once by using “FL SCROLL” in “OPTION MENU” (see page 79). 94 En RESETTING THE SYSTEM RESETTING THE SYSTEM Use this feature to reset all the parameters of this unit to the initial factory settings. Notes • This procedure completely resets all the parameters of this unit including the “SET MENU” parameters. However, the advanced setup menu parameters will not be initialized. • The initial factory settings are activated next time you turn on this unit. y To cancel the initialization procedure at any time without making any changes, press STANDBY/ON on the front panel (or STANDBY on the remote control) to set this unit to the standby mode. 3 1-2,5 Press PROGRAM l / h on the front panel repeatedly to select “PRESET”. l PROGRAM h VOLUME STANDBY /ON PRESET/TUNING FM/AM A/B/C/D/E l PRESET/TUNING h MEMORY LEVEL MAN'L/AUTO FM NEXT EDIT TUNING MODE AUTO/MAN'L INPUT PHONES SPEAKERS A B STRAIGHT l PROGRAM h VIDEO AUX INPUT MODE USB MULTI CH INPUT EFFECT TONE CONTROL BASS/TREBLE SILENT CINEMA VIDEO 2,4 1 L AUDIO R 3 PRESET-CANCEL Press STANDBY/ON on the front panel to set this unit to the standby mode. 4 Press STRAIGHT (EFFECT) on the front panel repeatedly to select “RESET”. STRAIGHT STANDBY /ON EFFECT 2 PRESET-RESET y While holding down Select “CANCEL” to cancel the initialization procedure without making any changes. ADVANCED OPERATION Press and hold STRAIGHT (EFFECT) on the front panel and then press STANDBY/ON to turn on this unit. This unit turns on, and the advanced setup menu appears in the front panel display. STRAIGHT STANDBY /ON EFFECT 5 Press STANDBY/ON on the front panel to confirm your selection and set this unit to the standby mode. STANDBY /ON English 95 En TROUBLESHOOTING TROUBLESHOOTING Refer to the table below when this unit does not function properly. If the problem you are experiencing is not listed below or if the instruction below does not help, set this unit to the standby mode, disconnect the power cable, and contact the nearest authorized YAMAHA dealer or service center. ■ General Problem This unit fails to turn on or enters the standby mode soon after the power is turned on. No sound No picture 96 En Cause Remedy See page The power cable is not connected or the plug is not completely inserted. Connect the power cable firmly. — The speaker impedance setting is incorrect. Set the speaker impedance to match your speakers. 27 The protection circuitry has been activated. Make sure that all speaker wire connections on this unit and on all speakers are secure and that the wire for each connection does not touch anything other than its respective connection. 13 This unit has been exposed to a strong external electric shock (such as lightning or strong static electricity). Set this unit to the standby mode, disconnect the power cable, plug it back in after 30 seconds and then use it normally. — Incorrect input or output cable connections. Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists, the cables may be defective. 18-24 “INPUT MODE” is set to “DTS” or “ANALOG”. Set “INPUT MODE” to “AUTO”. No appropriate input source has been selected. Select an appropriate input source with the INPUT selector on the front panel (or the input selector buttons on the remote control) and MULTI CH INPUT on the front panel (or MULTI CH IN on the remote control). Speaker connections are not secure. Secure the connections. 13 The front speakers to be used have not been selected properly. Select the set of front speakers with SPEAKERS A or B on the front panel or SPEAKERS on the remote control. 32 The volume is turned down. Turn up the volume. — The sound is muted. Press MUTE or VOLUME +/– on the remote control to resume audio output and then adjust the volume. 34 “INPUT MODE” is set to “ANALOG” while playing a source encoded in DTS. Set “INPUT MODE” to “AUTO” or “DTS”. 35 Signals this unit cannot reproduce are being input from a source component, such as a CD-ROM. Play a source whose signals can be reproduced by this unit. — The output and input for the picture are connected to different types of video jacks. Set “VIDEO CONV.” to “ON”. 78 35 32, 38 TROUBLESHOOTING Problem The sound suddenly goes off. Sound is heard from the speaker on one side only. Cause The protection circuitry has been activated because of a short circuit, etc. Remedy See page Check that the speaker impedance setting is correct. 27, 82 Check that the speaker wires are not touching each other and then turn this unit back on. — The sleep timer has set this unit to the standby mode. Turn on this unit, and play the source again. — The sound is muted. Press MUTE or VOLUME +/– on the remote control to resume audio output. 34 Incorrect cable connections. Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists, the cables may be defective. 13 Incorrect settings in “SPEAKER LEVEL”. Adjust the “SPEAKER LEVEL” settings. 71 Only the center speaker outputs substantial sound. When playing a monaural source with a CINEMA DSP program, the source signal is directed to the center channel, and the front and surround speakers output effect sounds. No sound is heard from the center speaker. “CENTER SP” in “SET MENU” is set to “NONE”. Set “CENTER SP” to “SML” or “LRG”. 70 One of the HiFi DSP programs (except for “6ch Stereo”) has been selected. Try another sound field program. 57 “SUR. L/R SP” in “SET MENU” is set to “NONE”. Set “SUR. L/R SP” to “SML” or “LRG”. 70 This unit is in the “STRAIGHT” mode and a monaural source is being played back. Press STRAIGHT (EFFECT) on the front panel so that “STRAIGHT” disappears from the front panel display. 39 “SUR. L/R SP” in “SET MENU” is set to “NONE” and “SUR. B SP” is automatically set to “NONE”. Set “SUR. L/R SP” and “SUR. B SP” to “SML” or “LRG”. 70 “SUR. B SP” in “SET MENU” is set to “NONE”. Set “SUR. B SP” to “SML” or “LRG”. 70 “LFE/BASS OUT” in “SET MENU” is set to “FRNT” when a Dolby Digital or DTS signal is being played. Set “LFE/BASS OUT” to “SWFR” or “BOTH”. 70 “LFE/BASS OUT” in “SET MENU” is set to “SWFR” or “FRNT” when a 2channel source is being played. Set “LFE/BASS OUT” to “BOTH”. 70 No sound is heard from the surround speakers. No sound is heard from the surround back speaker. No sound is heard from the subwoofer. The source does not contain lowfrequency signals. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION English 97 En TROUBLESHOOTING Problem Cause Remedy See page Dolby Digital or DTS sources cannot be played. (Dolby Digital or DTS indicator in the front panel display does not light up.) The connected component is not set to output Dolby Digital or DTS digital signals. Make an appropriate setting following the operating instructions for your component. — “INPUT MODE” is set to “ANALOG”. Set “INPUT MODE” to “AUTO” or “DTS”. 35 A humming sound is heard. Incorrect cable connections. Connect the audio cables firmly. If the problem persists, the cables may be defective. — The volume level cannot be increased, or the sound is distorted. The component connected to the AUDIO OUT (REC) jacks of this unit is turned off. Turn on the power of the component. — The sound effect cannot be recorded. It is not possible to record the sound effect with a recording component. A source cannot be recorded by a digital recording component connected to the DIGITAL OUTPUT jack. The source component is not connected to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks of this unit. A source cannot be recorded by an analog component connected to the AUDIO OUT (REC) jacks. The source component is not connected to the analog AUDIO IN jacks of this unit. Connect the source component to the analog AUDIO IN jacks. 21 The sound field parameters and some other settings of this unit cannot be changed. “MEMORY GUARD” in “SET MENU” is set to “ON”. Set “MEMORY GUARD” to “OFF”. 79 This unit does not operate properly. The internal microcomputer has been frozen by an external electric shock (such as lightning or excessive static electricity) or by a power supply with low voltage. Disconnect the power cable from the AC wall outlet and then plug it in again after about 30 seconds. — “CHECK SP WIRES” appears in the front panel display. Speaker cables are short-circuited. Make sure all speaker cables are connected correctly. 13 There is noise interference from digital or radio frequency equipment. This unit is too close to the digital or highfrequency equipment. Move this unit further away from such equipment. — The picture is disturbed. The video source uses scrambled or encoded signals to prevent dubbing. This unit suddenly enters the standby mode. The internal temperature becomes too high and the overheat protection circuitry has been activated. Wait about 1 hour for this unit to cool down and then turn it back on. — 98 En Connect the source component to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks. 19, 21 Some components cannot record the Dolby Digital or DTS sources. TROUBLESHOOTING ■ Tuner Problem Cause FM stereo reception is noisy. FM AM Remedy The characteristics of FM stereo broadcasts may cause this problem when the transmitter is too far away or the antenna input is poor. See page Check the antenna connections. 25 Try using a high-quality directional FM antenna. — Use the manual tuning method. 47 There is distortion, and clear reception cannot be obtained even with a good FM antenna. There is multi-path interference. Adjust the antenna position to eliminate multi-path interference. — The desired station cannot be tuned into with the automatic tuning method. The signal is too weak. Use a high-quality directional FM antenna. — Use the manual tuning method. 47 Previously preset stations can no longer be tuned into. This unit has been disconnected for a long period. Set preset stations. The desired station cannot be tuned into with the automatic tuning method. The signal is weak or the antenna connections are loose. Tighten the AM loop antenna connections and orient it for the best reception. — Use the manual tuning method. 47 There are continuous crackling and hissing noises. Noises result from lightning, fluorescent lamps, motors, thermostats and other electrical equipment. Use an outdoor antenna and a ground wire. This will help somewhat, but it is difficult to eliminate all noise. — There are buzzing and whining noises. A TV set is being used nearby. Move this unit away from the TV set. — Remedy See page 48, 49 ■ Remote control Problem The remote control does not work nor function properly. Cause The remote control functions within a maximum range of 6 m (20 ft) and no more than 30 degrees offaxis from the front panel. 8 Direct sunlight or lighting (from an inverter type of fluorescent lamp, etc.) is striking the remote control sensor of this unit. Reposition this unit. — The batteries are weak. Replace all batteries. 3 The remote control code is not correctly set. Set the remote control code correctly using “LIST OF REMOTE CONTROL CODES” at the end of this manual. 85 Try setting another code for the same manufacturer using “LIST OF REMOTE CONTROL CODES” at the end of this manual. 85 The library code of the remote control and the remote control ID of this unit do not match. Match the remote control ID of this unit with the corresponding remote control library code. 82, 86 English Even if the remote control code is correctly set, there are some models that do not respond to the remote control. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Wrong distance or angle. 99 En TROUBLESHOOTING ■ iPod Note In case of a transmission error without a status message appearing in the front panel and in the OSD, check the connection to your iPod (see page 22). Status message Loading... Cause Remedy See page This unit is in the middle of recognizing the connection with your iPod. This unit is in the middle of acquiring song lists from your iPod. Connect error There is a problem with the signal path from your iPod to this unit. Set this unit to the standby mode and reconnect the YAMAHA iPod universal dock to the DOCK terminal of this unit. 22 Try resetting your iPod. — Only iPod (Click and Wheel), iPod nano, and iPod mini are supported. — Unknown type The iPod being used is not supported by this unit. iPod connected Your iPod is properly stationed in a YAMAHA iPod universal dock (such as YDS-10 sold separately) connected to the DOCK terminal of this unit, and the connection between your iPod and this unit is complete. Disconnected Your iPod was removed from a YAMAHA iPod universal dock (such as YDS-10 sold separately) connected to the DOCK terminal of this unit. Station your iPod back in a YAMAHA iPod universal dock (such as YDS-10 sold separately) connected to the DOCK terminal of this unit. 22 Unable to play This unit cannot play back the songs currently stored on your iPod. Check that the songs currently stored on your iPod are playable. — Store some other playable music files on your iPod. — 100 En TROUBLESHOOTING ■ Network and USB Problem The PC server/MCX-2000/ Internet radio does not function properly. Cause Remedy See page Set the DHCP server function of the router to ON. Alternately, perform manual configuration according to the current operating environment. 76 The network cable is not connected. Connect it properly. 23 The PC does not have Windows Media Connect 2.0 installed in it. Install Windows Media Connect 2.0 in the PC. — The music is recorded in a format that cannot be played on this unit. This unit cannot play music formats other than WMA, MP3 and WAV (PCM format). Also note that it cannot play certain music files even if these are recorded in the WMA, MP3 or WAV format. Play music recorded in a format that this unit is compatible with. — The music is copyright-protected. This unit cannot play copyright-protected music. — Windows Media Connect 2.0 cannot be connected. The Windows XP PC is logging on to a domain. Log on to the local machine instead of the domain. — The MusicCAST server cannot be connected. You are attempting to connect to MCX-1000. The MusicCAST server that can be connected by this unit is MCX-2000. Use MCX-2000 or the PC server. — Auto Configuration is not executed. Execute “Auto Configure”. 92 The firewall of the network device is activated. The Internet radio can be played only when it passes through the port designated by each radio station. The port number is variable depending on radio station. Check the firewall setting of the network device. — Connection to the Internet is disconnected. Check the configuration of the network device, and then contact the network connection provider. — The music files and directories in the USB device cannot be viewed. The music files and directories are placed in locations other than the FAT area. Place music files and directories in the FAT area. — You are attempting to browse directory hierarchies of over 8 levels or a directory with more than 500 files. Modify the data structure on your USB device. — The USB device cannot be recognized. The connected USB device is other than a USB mass storage class USB memory device or USB portable audio player. This unit can recognize only a USB mass storage class USB memory device or USB portable audio player. Also note that it cannot recognize certain USB devices even when they are devices as described above. 94 Some devices may become easier to recognize when they are inserted before turning this unit on. 28 Turn this unit off then on again. 28 The music in the PC server cannot be played back. The Internet radio cannot be played. “Disconnected” is displayed even when a USB device is present. This unit recognized the USB device as an illegal device. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION The IP address is not set properly. English 101 En TROUBLESHOOTING Status message Please wait Cause Remedy See page This unit is in the middle of recognizing the connection with your network. This is not a system malfunction. Wait for a while. — This unit is in the middle of recognizing the connection with your USB memory device or USB portable audio player. This is not a system malfunction. Wait for a while. — Please wait (Starting Server) This unit is in the middle of waking up MCX-2000 that has been set to the standby mode. Wait for approximately 20 seconds. — Connect error There is a problem with the signal path from your network to this unit. Check the connection between this unit and the LAN port on your router or hub. 23 Make sure your router is properly connected and turned on. Also, make sure your modem is properly connected and turned on when you are attempting to listen to Internet radio. 23 Your USB memory device or USB portable audio player has been disconnected from the USB port of this unit. Check the connection between this unit and your USB memory device or USB portable audio player. — The PC server or MCX-2000 server previously connected to this unit no longer exists. Connect this unit to the available PC server or MCX-2000. 92 There is a problem with the signal path from your USB memory device or USB portable audio player to this unit. Turn off this unit and reconnect your USB memory device or USB portable audio player to the USB port of this unit. 28 Try resetting your USB memory device or USB portable audio player. — This unit cannot access your USB memory device or USB portable audio player. Try another USB memory device or USB portable audio player. — There is a problem with the signal path from your USB memory device or USB portable audio player to this unit. Turn off this unit and reconnect your USB memory device or USB portable audio player to the USB port of this unit. 28 Try resetting your USB memory device or USB portable audio player. — Make sure Windows Media Connect 2.0 is installed on your PC. — Check that the songs currently stored on your PC are playable (MP3, WMA, and WAV). — Store some other playable music files (MP3, WMA, and WAV) on your PC. — Try preparing a network exclusively for use with this unit to separate it from general network traffic. — Disconnected Access error Unable to play This unit cannot play back the songs currently stored on your PC. The network may be overloaded with heavy traffic, and playback is interrupted. List updated The list of the contents stored on your PC server or MCX-2000 has been updated. Bookmark ON The desired Internet radio station has been added to the “Bookmarks” list. Bookmark OFF The stored Internet radio station has been removed from the “Bookmarks” list. 102 En GLOSSARY GLOSSARY Audio information ■ Dolby Digital Dolby Digital is a digital surround sound system that gives you completely independent multi-channel audio. With 3 front channels (front L/R and center), and 2 surround stereo channels, Dolby Digital provides 5 full-range audio channels. With an additional channel especially for bass effects, called LFE (Low Frequency Effect), the system has a total of 5.1-channels (LFE is counted as 0.1 channel). By using 2-channel stereo for the surround speakers, more accurate moving sound effects and surround sound environment are possible than with Dolby Surround. The wide dynamic range from maximum to minimum volume reproduced by the 5 full-range channels and the precise sound orientation generated using digital sound processing provide listeners with unprecedented excitement and realism. With this unit, any sound environment from monaural up to a 5.1-channel configuration can be freely selected for your enjoyment. ■ Dolby Digital EX Dolby Digital EX creates 6 full-bandwidth output channels from 5.1-channel sources. This is done using a matrix decoder that derives 3 surround channels from the 2 in the original recording. For the best results, Dolby Digital EX should be used with movie sound tracks recorded with Dolby Digital Surround EX. With this additional channel, you can experience more dynamic and realistic moving sound especially with scenes with “flyover” and “fly-around” effects. ■ Dolby Pro Logic II ■ Dolby Pro Logic IIx Dolby Pro Logic IIx is a new technology enabling discrete multi-channel playback from 2-channel or multi-channel sources. There are three modes available: “Music mode” for music sources, “Movie mode” for movie sources (for 2-channel sources only) and “Game mode” for game sources. Dolby Surround uses a 4-channel analog recording system to reproduce realistic and dynamic sound effects: 2 front left and right channels (stereo), a center channel for dialog (monaural), and a surround channel for special sound effects (monaural). The surround channel reproduces sound within a narrow frequency range. Dolby Surround is widely used with nearly all video tapes and laser discs, and in many TV and cable broadcasts as well. The Dolby Pro Logic decoder built into this unit employs a digital signal processing system that automatically stabilizes the volume on each channel to enhance moving sound effects and directionality. ■ DTS 96/24 DTS 96/24 offers an unprecedented level of audio quality for multi-channel sound on DVD video, and is fully backward-compatible with all DTS decoders. “96” refers to a 96 kHz sampling rate compared to the typical 48 kHz sampling rate. “24” refers to 24-bit word length. DTS 96/ 24 offers sound quality transparent to the original 96/24 master, and 96/24 5.1-channel sound with full-quality fullmotion video for music programs and motion picture soundtracks on DVD video. ■ DTS (Digital Theater Systems) Digital Surround DTS digital surround was developed to replace the analog soundtracks of movies with a 6.1-channel digital sound track, and is now rapidly gaining popularity in movie theaters around the world. Digital Theater Systems Inc. has developed a home theater system so that you can enjoy the depth of sound and natural spatial representation of DTS digital surround in your home. This system produces practically distortion-free 6.1-channel sound (technically, front left and right, center, surround left and right, and LFE 0.1 (subwoofer) channels for a total of 5.1 channels). This unit incorporates a DTS-ES decoder that enables 6.1channel reproduction by adding the surround back channel to the existing 5.1-channel format. ■ ITU-R ITU-R is the radio communication sector of the ITU (International Telecommunication Union). ITU-R recommends a standard speaker placement which is used in many critical listening rooms, especially for mastering purposes. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Dolby Pro Logic II is an improved technique used to decode vast numbers of existing Dolby Surround sources. This new technology enables a discrete 5-channel playback with 2 front left and right channels, 1 center channel, and 2 surround left and right channels instead of only 1 surround channel for conventional Pro Logic technology. There are three modes available: “Music mode” for music sources, “Movie mode” for movie sources and “Game mode” for game sources. ■ Dolby Surround English 103 En GLOSSARY ■ LFE 0.1 channel This channel reproduces low-frequency signals. The frequency range of this channel is from 20 Hz to 120 Hz. This channel is counted as 0.1 because it only enforces a low-frequency range compared to the full-range reproduced by the other 5/6 channels in Dolby Digital or DTS 5.1/6.1-channel systems. ■ MP3 One of the audio compression methods used by MPEG. It employs the irreversible compression method, which achieves a high compression rate by thinning out the data of hardly audible part to the human ears. It is said to be capable of compressing the data quantity by about 1/11 (128 kbps) while maintaining a similar audio quality to music CD. ■ Neo:6 Neo:6 decodes the conventional 2-channel sources for 6channel playback by the specific decoder. It enables playback with the full-range channels with higher separation just like digital discrete signal playback. There are two modes available: “Music mode” for music sources and “Cinema mode” for movie sources. ■ PCM (Linear PCM) Linear PCM is a signal format under which an analog audio signal is digitized, recorded and transmitted without using any compression. This is used as a method of recording CDs and DVD audio. The PCM system uses a technique for sampling the size of the analog signal per very small unit of time. Standing for “Pulse Code Modulation”, the analog signal is encoded as pulses and then modulated for recording. 104 En ■ Sampling frequency and number of quantized bits When digitizing an analog audio signal, the number of times the signal is sampled per second is called the sampling frequency, while the degree of fineness when converting the sound level into a numeric value is called the number of quantized bits. The range of rates that can be played back is determined based on the sampling rate, while the dynamic range representing the sound level difference is determined by the number of quantized bits. In principle, the higher the sampling frequency, the wider the range of frequencies that can be played back, and the higher the number of quantized bits, the more finely the sound level can be reproduced. ■ WAV Windows standard audio file format, which defines the method of recording the digital data obtained by converting audio signals. It does not specify the compression (coding) method so a desired compression method can be used with it. By default, it is compatible with the PCM method (no compression) and some compression methods including the ADPCM method. ■ WMA An audio compression method developed by Microsoft Corporation. It employs the irreversible compression method, which achieves a high compression rate by thinning out the data of hardly audible part to the human ears. It is said to be capable of compressing the data quantity by about 1/22 (64 kbps) while maintaining a similar audio quality to music CD. GLOSSARY Video information Sound field program information ■ Component video signal ■ CINEMA DSP With the component video signal system, the video signal is separated into the Y signal for the luminance and the PB and PR signals for the chrominance. Color can be reproduced more faithfully with this system because each of these signals is independent. The component signal is also called the “color difference signal” because the luminance signal is subtracted from the color signal. A monitor with component input jacks is required in order to output component signals. Since the Dolby Surround and DTS systems were originally designed for use in movie theaters, their effect is best felt in a theater having many speakers designed for acoustic effects. Since home conditions, such as room size, wall material, number of speakers, and so on, can differ so widely, it is inevitable that there are differences in the sound heard. Based on a wealth of actually measured data, YAMAHA CINEMA DSP uses YAMAHA original sound field technology to combine Dolby Pro Logic, Dolby Digital and DTS systems to provide the audiovisual experience of movie theater in the listening room of your own home. ■ Composite video signal With the composite video signal system, the video signal is composed of three basic elements of a video picture: color, brightness and synchronization data. A composite video jack on a video component transmits these three elements combined. ■ S-video signal With the S-video signal system, the video signal normally transmitted using a pin cable is separated and transmitted as the Y signal for the luminance and the C signal for the chrominance through the S-video cable. Using the S VIDEO jack eliminates video signal transmission loss and allows recording and playback of even more beautiful images. ■ SILENT CINEMA YAMAHA has developed a natural, realistic sound effect DSP algorithm for headphones. Parameters for headphones have been set for each sound field so that accurate representations of all the sound field programs can be enjoyed on headphones. ■ Virtual CINEMA DSP YAMAHA has developed a Virtual CINEMA DSP algorithm that allows you to enjoy DSP sound field surround effects even without any surround speakers by using virtual surround speakers. It is even possible to enjoy Virtual CINEMA DSP using a minimal two-speaker system that does not include a center speaker. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION English 105 En SPECIFICATIONS SPECIFICATIONS AUDIO SECTION FM SECTION • Minimum RMS Output Power for Front, Center, Surround, Surround back 1 kHz, 0.7% THD, 8 Ω ....................................................... 110 W • Tuning Range [Canada model] .............................................. 87.5 to 107.9 MHz [Other models] ............................................ 87.50 to 108.00 MHz • Dynamic Power (IHF) 8/6/4/2 Ω ....................................................... 130/165/195/240 W • Usable Sensitivity (IHF) ....................................... 1.0 µV (11.2 dBf) • Maximum Output Power [Europe model] 1 kHz, 0.7% THD, 4 Ω ........................................................ 145 W • IEC Output Power [Europe model] 1 kHz, 0.06% THD, 8 Ω ...................................................... 105 W • Damping Factor 20 Hz to 20 kHz, 8 Ω ...................................................120 or more • Maximum Input Voltage CD, etc. (1 kHz, 0.5% THD) ................................... 2.2 V or more • Frequency Response CD, etc. ................................................. 10 Hz to 100 kHz, –3 dB V-AUX .................................................... 10 Hz to 20 kHz, –3 dB • Total Harmonic Distortion CD, etc. to Front L/R (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 50 W, 8 Ω) ................................................................................ 0.06% or less • Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network) CD, etc. (250 mV) to Front L/R ........................... 100 dB or more • Residual Noise (IHF-A Network) Front L/R ................................................................ 150 µV or less • Channel Separation (1 kHz/10 kHz) CD (5.1 kΩ terminated) to Front L/R ......... 60 dB/45 dB or more • Tone Control (Front L/R) BASS Boost/Cut ...................................................... ±10 dB/60 Hz TREBLE Boost/Cut .............................................. ±10 dB/20 kHz • Phones Output .......................................................... 150 mV/100 Ω • Input Sensitivity/Input Impedance CD, etc. ................................................................. 200 mV/47 kΩ MULTI CH INPUT ............................................... 200 mV/47 kΩ • Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF) Mono/Stereo ............................................................. 76 dB/70 dB • Harmonic Distortion (1 kHz) Mono/Stereo ................................................................ 0.2%/0.3% • Stereo Separation (1 kHz) ....................................................... 42 dB • Frequency Response ......................... 20 Hz to 15 kHz, +0.5, –2 dB AM SECTION • Tuning Range [Canada model] .................................................. 530 to 1710 kHz [Other models] .................................................... 531 to 1611 kHz • Usable Sensitivity ............................................................. 300 µV/m GENERAL • Power Supply [Canada model] ................................................. AC 120 V, 60 Hz [Australia model] ............................................... AC 240 V, 50 Hz [Europe model] .................................................. AC 230 V, 50 Hz • Power Consumption [Canada model] ..................................................... 350 W/440 VA [Other models] .................................................................... 360 W • Standby Power Consumption ...................................... 0.1 W or less • AC Outlets [Australia model] ......................................... 1 (100 W maximum) [Canada model] ................................... 2 (Total 100 W maximum) [Europe model] ..................................... 2 (Total 50 W maximum) • Dimensions (W x H x D).................................. 435 x 161 x 391 mm (17.1 x 6.3 x 15.4 in) • Weight .................................................................. 11.2 kg (24.7 lbs) • Rated Output Voltage/Output Impedance OUT (REC) ........................................................... 200 mV/1.2 kΩ SUBWOOFER ............................................................ 4 V/1.2 kΩ • Volume Control ........................... Mute/–80 dB to +16 dB/1 dB step VIDEO SECTION • Video Format (Gray Back) [Canada model] .................................................................... NTSC [Other models] ........................................................................ PAL • Video Format (Video Conversion) ................................. NTSC/PAL • Rated Input Voltage Composite ..................................................................1 Vp-p/75 Ω S-video (Y) .................................................................1 Vp-p/75 Ω S-video (C) ..........................................................0.286 Vp-p/75 Ω Component (Y) ..........................................................1 Vp-p/75 Ω Component (PB, PR) .................................................0.7 Vp-p/75 Ω GPL/LGPL This product includes software code subject to the GNU General Public License (GPL) or the GNU Lesser General Public License (LGPL). The copy, distribution, or change of this software code is licensed under the terms of the GPL or the LGPL. The source code is available at the following website: http://www.global.yamaha.com/download/ • Signal to Noise Ratio ................................................ 50 dB or more The source code is also available on a physical media (such as a CD-ROM) at actual cost. Contact: AV products division, YAMAHA CORPORATION, 10-1 Nakazawa-cho, Hamamatsu 430-8650, Japan • Frequency Response (MONITOR OUT) Component ............................................... 5 Hz to 60 MHz, –3 dB In principle, the source code is offered for 3 years from the day of purchase. 106 En ■ GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the Program, and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not apply to those sections when you distribute them as separate works. But when you distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based on the Program, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of this License, whose permissions for other licensees extend to the entire whole, and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote it. Version 2, June 1991 Copyright (C) 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc. 59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307 USA Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document, but changing it is not allowed. Preamble The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to share and change it. By contrast, the GNU General Public License is intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free software–to make sure the software is free for all its users. This General Public License applies to most of the Free Software Foundation’s software and to any other program whose authors commit to using it. (Some other Free Software Foundation software is covered by the GNU Library General Public License instead.) You can apply it to your programs, too. Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your rights to work written entirely by you; rather, the intent is to exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or collective works based on the Program. In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Program with the Program (or with a work based on the Program) on a volume of a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under the scope of this License. 3. When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not price. Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for this service if you wish), that you receive source code or can get it if you want it, that you can change the software or use pieces of it in new free programs; and that you know you can do these things. a) Accompany it with the complete corresponding machine-readable source code, which must be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange; or, To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid anyone to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender the rights. These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you distribute copies of the software, or if you modify it. b) Accompany it with a written offer, valid for at least three years, to give any third party, for a charge no more than your cost of physically performing source distribution, a complete machine-readable copy of the corresponding source code, to be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange; or, For example, if you distribute copies of such a program, whether gratis or for a fee, you must give the recipients all the rights that you have. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the source code. And you must show them these terms so they know their rights. c) Accompany it with the information you received as to the offer to distribute corresponding source code. (This alternative is allowed only for noncommercial distribution and only if you received the program in object code or executable form with such an offer, in accord with Subsection b above.) We protect your rights with two steps: (1) copyright the software, and (2) offer you this license which gives you legal permission to copy, distribute and/or modify the software. Also, for each author’s protection and ours, we want to make certain that everyone understands that there is no warranty for this free software. If the software is modified by someone else and passed on, we want its recipients to know that what they have is not the original, so that any problems introduced by others will not reflect on the original authors’ reputations. Finally, any free program is threatened constantly by software patents. We wish to avoid the danger that redistributors of a free program will individually obtain patent licenses, in effect making the program proprietary. To prevent this, we have made it clear that any patent must be licensed for everyone’s free use or not licensed at all. The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and modification follow. TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION 0. This License applies to any program or other work which contains a notice placed by the copyright holder saying it may be distributed under the terms of this General Public License. The “Program”, below, refers to any such program or work, and a “work based on the Program” means either the Program or any derivative work under copyright law: that is to say, a work containing the Program or a portion of it, either verbatim or with modifications and/or translated into another language. (Hereinafter, translation is included without limitation in the term “modification”.) Each licensee is addressed as “you”. Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not covered by this License; they are outside its scope. The act of running the Program is not restricted, and the output from the Program is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the Program (independent of having been made by running the Program). Whether that is true depends on what the Program does. 1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Program’s source code as you receive it, in any medium, provided that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep intact all the notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any warranty; and give any other recipients of the Program a copy of this License along with the Program. You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee. 2. You may modify your copy or copies of the Program or any portion of it, thus forming a work based on the Program, and copy and distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1 above, provided that you also meet all of these conditions: a) You must cause the modified files to carry prominent notices stating that you changed the files and the date of any change. b) You must cause any work that you distribute or publish, that in whole or in part contains or is derived from the Program or any part thereof, to be licensed as a whole at no charge to all third parties under the terms of this License. c) If the modified program normally reads commands interactively when run, you must cause it, when started running for such interactive use in the most ordinary way, to print or display an announcement including an appropriate copyright notice and a notice that there is no warranty (or else, saying that you provide a warranty) and that users may redistribute the program under these conditions, and telling the user how to view a copy of this License. (Exception: if the Program itself is interactive but does not normally print such an announcement, your work based on the Program is not required to print an announcement.) You may copy and distribute the Program (or a work based on it, under Section 2) in object code or executable form under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you also do one of the following: The source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to it. For an executable work, complete source code means all the source code for all modules it contains, plus any associated interface definition files, plus the scripts used to control compilation and installation of the executable. However, as a special exception, the source code distributed need not include anything that is normally distributed (in either source or binary form) with the major components (compiler, kernel, and so on) of the operating system on which the executable runs, unless that component itself accompanies the executable. If distribution of executable or object code is made by offering access to copy from a designated place, then offering equivalent access to copy the source code from the same place counts as distribution of the source code, even though third parties are not compelled to copy the source along with the object code. 4. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Program except as expressly provided under this License. Any attempt otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense or distribute the Program is void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this License. However, parties who have received copies, or rights, from you under this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance. 5. You are not required to accept this License, since you have not signed it. However, nothing else grants you permission to modify or distribute the Program or its derivative works. These actions are prohibited by law if you do not accept this License. Therefore, by modifying or distributing the Program (or any work based on the Program), you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so, and all its terms and conditions for copying, distributing or modifying the Program or works based on it. 6. Each time you redistribute the Program (or any work based on the Program), the recipient automatically receives a license from the original licensor to copy, distribute or modify the Program subject to these terms and conditions. You may not impose any further restrictions on the recipients’ exercise of the rights granted herein. You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties to this License. 7. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent infringement or for any other reason (not limited to patent issues), conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you cannot distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you may not distribute the Program at all. For example, if a patent license would not permit royalty-free redistribution of the Program by all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you, then the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to refrain entirely from distribution of the Program. If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any particular circumstance, the balance of the section is intended to apply and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other circumstances. It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any patents or other property right claims or to contest validity of any such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting the integrity of the free software distribution system, which is implemented by public license practices. Many people have made generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed through that system in reliance on consistent application of that system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he or she is willing to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot impose that choice. APPENDIX-i This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to be a consequence of the rest of this License. 8. 9. If the distribution and/or use of the Program is restricted in certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces, the original copyright holder who places the Program under this License may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding those countries, so that distribution is permitted only in or among countries not thus excluded. In such case, this License incorporates the limitation as if written in the body of this License. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions of the General Public License from time to time. Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns. Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Program specifies a version number of this License which applies to it and “any later version”, you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of that version or of any later version published by the Free Software Foundation. If the Program does not specify a version number of this License, you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software Foundation. 10. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Program into other free programs whose distribution conditions are different, write to the author to ask for permission. For software which is copyrighted by the Free Software Foundation, write to the Free Software Foundation; we sometimes make exceptions for this. Our decision will be guided by the two goals of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software and of promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally. You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or your school, if any, to sign a “copyright disclaimer” for the program, if necessary. Here is a sample; alter the names: Yoyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all copyright interest in the program ‘Gnomovision’ (which makes passes at compilers) written by James Hacker. <signature of Ty Coon>, 1 April 1989 Ty Coon, President of Vice This General Public License does not permit incorporating your program into proprietary programs. If your program is a subroutine library, you may consider it more useful to permit linking proprietary applications with the library. If this is what you want to do, use the GNU Library General Public License instead of this License. ■ GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE Version 2.1, February 1999 Copyright (C) 1991, 1999 Free Software Foundation, Inc. 59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307 USA Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document, but changing it is not allowed. [This is the first released version of the Lesser GPL. It also counts as the successor of the GNU Library Public License, version 2, hence the version number 2.1.] NO WARRANTY Preamble 11. The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to share and change it. By contrast, the GNU General Public Licenses are intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free software–to make sure the software is free for all its users. 12. BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE PROGRAM “AS IS” WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE THE PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER PROGRAMS), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS How to Apply These Terms to Your New Programs If you develop a new program, and you want it to be of the greatest possible use to the public, the best way to achieve this is to make it free software which everyone can redistribute and change under these terms. To do so, attach the following notices to the program. It is safest to attach them to the start of each source file to most effectively convey the exclusion of warranty; and each file should have at least the “copyright” line and a pointer to where the full notice is found. <one line to give the program’s name and a brief idea of what it does.> Copyright (C) <year> <name of author> This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or (at your option) any later version. This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License for more details. You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307 USA. Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail. If the program is interactive, make it output a short notice like this when it starts in an interactive mode: Gnomovision version 69, Copyright (C) year name of author Gnomovision comes with ABSOLUTELY NO WARRANTY; for details type ‘show w’. This is free software, and you are welcome to redistribute it under certain conditions; type ‘show c’ for details. The hypothetical commands ‘show w’ and ‘show c’ should show the appropriate parts of the General Public License. Of course, the commands you use may be called something other than ‘show w’ and ‘show c’; they could even be mouse-clicks or menu items–whatever suits your program. APPENDIX-ii This license, the Lesser General Public License, applies to some specially designated software packages–typically libraries–of the Free Software Foundation and other authors who decide to use it. You can use it too, but we suggest you first think carefully about whether this license or the ordinary General Public License is the better strategy to use in any particular case, based on the explanations below. When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom of use, not price. Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for this service if you wish); that you receive source code or can get it if you want it; that you can change the software and use pieces of it in new free programs; and that you are informed that you can do these things. To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid distributors to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender these rights. These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you distribute copies of the library or if you modify it. For example, if you distribute copies of the library, whether gratis or for a fee, you must give the recipients all the rights that we gave you. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the source code. If you link other code with the library, you must provide complete object files to the recipients, so that they can relink them with the library after making changes to the library and recompiling it. And you must show them these terms so they know their rights. We protect your rights with a two-step method: (1) we copyright the library, and (2) we offer you this license, which gives you legal permission to copy, distribute and/or modify the library. To protect each distributor, we want to make it very clear that there is no warranty for the free library. Also, if the library is modified by someone else and passed on, the recipients should know that what they have is not the original version, so that the original author’s reputation will not be affected by problems that might be introduced by others. Finally, software patents pose a constant threat to the existence of any free program. We wish to make sure that a company cannot effectively restrict the users of a free program by obtaining a restrictive license from a patent holder. Therefore, we insist that any patent license obtained for a version of the library must be consistent with the full freedom of use specified in this license. Most GNU software, including some libraries, is covered by the ordinary GNU General Public License. This license, the GNU Lesser General Public License, applies to certain designated libraries, and is quite different from the ordinary General Public License. We use this license for certain libraries in order to permit linking those libraries into nonfree programs. When a program is linked with a library, whether statically or using a shared library, the combination of the two is legally speaking a combined work, a derivative of the original library. The ordinary General Public License therefore permits such linking only if the entire combination fits its criteria of freedom. The Lesser General Public License permits more lax criteria for linking other code with the library. We call this license the “Lesser” General Public License because it does Less to protect the user’s freedom than the ordinary General Public License. It also provides other free software developers Less of an advantage over competing non-free programs. These disadvantages are the reason we use the ordinary General Public License for many libraries. However, the Lesser license provides advantages in certain special circumstances. For example, on rare occasions, there may be a special need to encourage the widest possible use of a certain library, so that it becomes a de-facto standard. To achieve this, non-free programs must be allowed to use the library. A more frequent case is that a free library does the same job as widely used non-free libraries. In this case, there is little to gain by limiting the free library to free software only, so we use the Lesser General Public License. In other cases, permission to use a particular library in non-free programs enables a greater number of people to use a large body of free software. For example, permission to use the GNU C Library in non-free programs enables many more people to use the whole GNU operating system, as well as its variant, the GNU/Linux operating system. 3. Although the Lesser General Public License is Less protective of the users’ freedom, it does ensure that the user of a program that is linked with the Library has the freedom and the wherewithal to run that program using a modified version of the Library. The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and modification follow. Pay close attention to the difference between a “work based on the library” and a “work that uses the library”. The former contains code derived from the library, whereas the latter must be combined with the library in order to run. TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION 0. This License Agreement applies to any software library or other program which contains a notice placed by the copyright holder or other authorized party saying it may be distributed under the terms of this Lesser General Public License (also called “this License”). Each licensee is addressed as “you”. A “library” means a collection of software functions and/or data prepared so as to be conveniently linked with application programs (which use some of those functions and data) to form executables. The “Library”, below, refers to any such software library or work which has been distributed under these terms. A “work based on the Library” means either the Library or any derivative work under copyright law: that is to say, a work containing the Library or a portion of it, either verbatim or with modifications and/or translated straightforwardly into another language. (Hereinafter, translation is included without limitation in the term “modification”.) “Source code” for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to it. For a library, complete source code means all the source code for all modules it contains, plus any associated interface definition files, plus the scripts used to control compilation and installation of the library. Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not covered by this License; they are outside its scope. The act of running a program using the Library is not restricted, and output from such a program is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the Library (independent of the use of the Library in a tool for writing it). Whether that is true depends on what the Library does and what the program that uses the Library does. 1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Library’s complete source code as you receive it, in any medium, provided that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep intact all the notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any warranty; and distribute a copy of this License along with the Library. You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee. 2. You may modify your copy or copies of the Library or any portion of it, thus forming a work based on the Library, and copy and distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1 above, provided that you also meet all of these conditions: a) The modified work must itself be a software library. b) You must cause the files modified to carry prominent notices stating that you changed the files and the date of any change. c) You must cause the whole of the work to be licensed at no charge to all third parties under the terms of this License. d) If a facility in the modified Library refers to a function or a table of data to be supplied by an application program that uses the facility, other than as an argument passed when the facility is invoked, then you must make a good faith effort to ensure that, in the event an application does not supply such function or table, the facility still operates, and performs whatever part of its purpose remains meaningful. (For example, a function in a library to compute square roots has a purpose that is entirely well-defined independent of the application. Therefore, Subsection 2d requires that any application-supplied function or table used by this function must be optional: if the application does not supply it, the square root function must still compute square roots.) These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the Library, and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not apply to those sections when you distribute them as separate works. But when you distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based on the Library, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of this License, whose permissions for other licensees extend to the entire whole, and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote it. Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your rights to work written entirely by you; rather, the intent is to exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or collective works based on the Library. In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Library with the Library (or with a work based on the Library) on a volume of a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under the scope of this License. You may opt to apply the terms of the ordinary GNU General Public License instead of this License to a given copy of the Library. To do this, you must alter all the notices that refer to this License, so that they refer to the ordinary GNU General Public License, version 2, instead of to this License. (If a newer version than version 2 of the ordinary GNU General Public License has appeared, then you can specify that version instead if you wish.) Do not make any other change in these notices. Once this change is made in a given copy, it is irreversible for that copy, so the ordinary GNU General Public License applies to all subsequent copies and derivative works made from that copy. This option is useful when you wish to copy part of the code of the Library into a program that is not a library. 4. You may copy and distribute the Library (or a portion or derivative of it, under Section 2) in object code or executable form under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you accompany it with the complete corresponding machinereadable source code, which must be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange. If distribution of object code is made by offering access to copy from a designated place, then offering equivalent access to copy the source code from the same place satisfies the requirement to distribute the source code, even though third parties are not compelled to copy the source along with the object code. 5. A program that contains no derivative of any portion of the Library, but is designed to work with the Library by being compiled or linked with it, is called a “work that uses the Library”. Such a work, in isolation, is not a derivative work of the Library, and therefore falls outside the scope of this License. However, linking a “work that uses the Library” with the Library creates an executable that is a derivative of the Library (because it contains portions of the Library), rather than a “work that uses the library”. The executable is therefore covered by this License. Section 6 states terms for distribution of such executables. When a “work that uses the Library” uses material from a header file that is part of the Library, the object code for the work may be a derivative work of the Library even though the source code is not. Whether this is true is especially significant if the work can be linked without the Library, or if the work is itself a library. The threshold for this to be true is not precisely defined by law. If such an object file uses only numerical parameters, data structure layouts and accessors, and small macros and small inline functions (ten lines or less in length), then the use of the object file is unrestricted, regardless of whether it is legally a derivative work. (Executables containing this object code plus portions of the Library will still fall under Section 6.) Otherwise, if the work is a derivative of the Library, you may distribute the object code for the work under the terms of Section 6. Any executables containing that work also fall under Section 6, whether or not they are linked directly with the Library itself. 6. As an exception to the Sections above, you may also combine or link a “work that uses the Library” with the Library to produce a work containing portions of the Library, and distribute that work under terms of your choice, provided that the terms permit modification of the work for the customer’s own use and reverse engineering for debugging such modifications. You must give prominent notice with each copy of the work that the Library is used in it and that the Library and its use are covered by this License. You must supply a copy of this License. If the work during execution displays copyright notices, you must include the copyright notice for the Library among them, as well as a reference directing the user to the copy of this License. Also, you must do one of these things: a) Accompany the work with the complete corresponding machine-readable source code for the Library including whatever changes were used in the work (which must be distributed under Sections 1 and 2 above); and, if the work is an executable linked with the Library, with the complete machinereadable “work that uses the Library”, as object code and/or source code, so that the user can modify the Library and then relink to produce a modified executable containing the modified Library. (It is understood that the user who changes the contents of definitions files in the Library will not necessarily be able to recompile the application to use the modified definitions.) b) Use a suitable shared library mechanism for linking with the Library. A suitable mechanism is one that (1) uses at run time a copy of the library already present on the user’s computer system, rather than copying library functions into the executable, and (2) will operate properly with a modified version of the library, if the user installs one, as long as the modified version is interface-compatible with the version that the work was made with. c) Accompany the work with a written offer, valid for at least three years, to give the same user the materials specified in Subsection 6a, above, for a charge no more than the cost of performing this distribution. d) If distribution of the work is made by offering access to copy from a designated place, offer equivalent access to copy the above specified materials from the same place. e) Verify that the user has already received a copy of these materials or that you have already sent this user a copy. For an executable, the required form of the “work that uses the Library” must include any data and utility programs needed for reproducing the executable from it. However, as a special exception, the materials to be distributed need not include anything that is normally distributed (in either source or binary form) with the major components (compiler, kernel, and so on) of the operating system on which the executable runs, unless that component itself accompanies the executable. APPENDIX-iii It may happen that this requirement contradicts the license restrictions of other proprietary libraries that do not normally accompany the operating system. Such a contradiction means you cannot use both them and the Library together in an executable that you distribute. 7. NO WARRANTY 15. BECAUSE THE LIBRARY IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE LIBRARY, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE LIBRARY “AS IS” WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE LIBRARY IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE LIBRARY PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION. 16. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE THE LIBRARY AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE LIBRARY (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE LIBRARY TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER SOFTWARE), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. You may place library facilities that are a work based on the Library side-by-side in a single library together with other library facilities not covered by this License, and distribute such a combined library, provided that the separate distribution of the work based on the Library and of the other library facilities is otherwise permitted, and provided that you do these two things: a) Accompany the combined library with a copy of the same work based on the Library, uncombined with any other library facilities. This must be distributed under the terms of the Sections above. b) Give prominent notice with the combined library of the fact that part of it is a work based on the Library, and explaining where to find the accompanying uncombined form of the same work. 8. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, link with, or distribute the Library except as expressly provided under this License. Any attempt otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense, link with, or distribute the Library is void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this License. However, parties who have received copies, or rights, from you under this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance. 9. You are not required to accept this License, since you have not signed it. However, nothing else grants you permission to modify or distribute the Library or its derivative works. These actions are prohibited by law if you do not accept this License. Therefore, by modifying or distributing the Library (or any work based on the Library), you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so, and all its terms and conditions for copying, distributing or modifying the Library or works based on it. 10. 11. Each time you redistribute the Library (or any work based on the Library), the recipient automatically receives a license from the original licensor to copy, distribute, link with or modify the Library subject to these terms and conditions. You may not impose any further restrictions on the recipients’ exercise of the rights granted herein. You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties with this License. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent infringement or for any other reason (not limited to patent issues), conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you cannot distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you may not distribute the Library at all. For example, if a patent license would not permit royalty-free redistribution of the Library by all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you, then the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to refrain entirely from distribution of the Library. If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any particular circumstance, the balance of the section is intended to apply, and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other circumstances. It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any patents or other property right claims or to contest validity of any such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting the integrity of the free software distribution system which is implemented by public license practices. Many people have made generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed through that system in reliance on consistent application of that system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he or she is willing to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot impose that choice. This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to be a consequence of the rest of this License. 12. 13. If the distribution and/or use of the Library is restricted in certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces, the original copyright holder who places the Library under this License may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding those countries, so that distribution is permitted only in or among countries not thus excluded. In such case, this License incorporates the limitation as if written in the body of this License. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions of the Lesser General Public License from time to time. Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns. Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Library specifies a version number of this License which applies to it and “any later version”, you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of that version or of any later version published by the Free Software Foundation. If the Library does not specify a license version number, you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software Foundation. 14. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Library into other free programs whose distribution conditions are incompatible with these, write to the author to ask for permission. For software which is copyrighted by the Free Software Foundation, write to the Free Software Foundation; we sometimes make exceptions for this. Our decision will be guided by the two goals of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software and of promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally. APPENDIX-iv END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS How to Apply These Terms to Your New Libraries If you develop a new library, and you want it to be of the greatest possible use to the public, we recommend making it free software that everyone can redistribute and change. You can do so by permitting redistribution under these terms (or, alternatively, under the terms of the ordinary General Public License). To apply these terms, attach the following notices to the library. It is safest to attach them to the start of each source file to most effectively convey the exclusion of warranty; and each file should have at least the “copyright” line and a pointer to where the full notice is found. <one line to give the library’s name and a brief idea of what it does.> Copyright (C) <year> <name of author> This library is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version. This library is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU Lesser General Public License for more details. You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public License along with this library; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307 USA Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail. You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or your school, if any, to sign a “copyright disclaimer” for the library, if necessary. Here is a sample; alter the names: Yoyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all copyright interest in the library ‘Frob’ (a library for tweaking knobs) written by James Random Hacker. <signature of Ty Coon>, 1 April 1990 Ty Coon, President of Vice That’s all there is to it! LIST OF REMOTE CONTROL CODES LISTE DES CODES DE COMMANDE LISTE DER FERNBEDIENUNGSCODES LISTA DEI CODICI DI TELECOMANDO LISTA DE CÓDIGOS DE MANDO A DISTANCIA LIJST MET AFSTANDSBEDIENINGSCODES СПИСОК КОДОВ ДИСТАНЦИОННОГО УПРАВЛЕНИЯ CABLE TV RECEIVER ABC 10003 ADB 11230, 11269 AICHI DENSHI11512 AMSTRAD 11222 AUNA 11230, 11269 AUSTAR 10276 BIRMINGHAM CABLE COMMUNICATIONS 10276 BRITISH TELECOM 10003 CABLE & WIRELESS 11068 DX ANTENNA 11500, 11502 FASTWEB 11630 FRANCE TELECOM 10817, 11734 FREEBOX 11482 FUJITSU 11497 GENERAL INSTRUMENT 10003, 10276 GOLDEN CHANNEL 11110 HOMECHOICE11590 JERROLD 10003, 10276 MACAB 10817 MADRITEL 11230 MASPRO 11510 MOTOROLA 10276, 11106, 11483 MR ZAP 11112 MR. ZAP 11112 NEC 11496 NOKIA 11569 NOOS 10817, 11624 NTL 10003, 11060, 11068 ONO 11068 OPTUS 10276 PACE 11060, 11068, 11577 PANASONIC 10375, 11488 PHILIPS 10817 PIONEER 11021, 11500 PVP STEREO VISUAL MATRIX 10003 SAGEM 10817, 11112, 11624 SAMSUNG 11060, 11666 SATBOX 10375 SCIENTIFIC ATLANTA 11510 SONY 11460 STARCOM 10003 SUMITOMO 11500, 11503, 11504 SUPERCABLE 10276 TELE DANMARK 11016 TELEWEST 11068 THOMSON 11110, 11734 TORX 10003 TOSHIBA 11509 TRI-VISION 11257 UNITED CABLE 10003 UPC 11582 US ELECTRONICS 10276 CABLE/PVR COMBINATION FRANCE TELECOM11734 FREEBOX 11482 MOTOROLA 11106 NOKIA 11569 NOOS 11624 SUPERCABLE 10276 THOMSON 11734 UPC 11582 DBS/PVR COMBINATION @SAT 11300 ATSAT 11300 BRITISH SKY BROADCASTING 11175 CANALSATELLITE 11339 COMAG 11412 DIGIFUSION 11645 DIRECTV 10099, 10639 DREAM MULTIMEDIA 11237 ECHOSTAR 10610 FORCE 11194 FOXTEL 11356 GBSAT 11214 HUMAX 11176, 11427, 11670, 11675 KATHREIN 11221, 11561 MAXIMUM 11334 NOKIA 11310, 11311 OPENTEL 11412 PACE 11423, 11623 PANASONIC 11320 PHILIPS 10099 REBOX 11214 SAGEM 11253, 11307, 11692 SHARP 11489 SIEMENS 11657 SKY 11175, 11848, 11850 SKYPLUS 11412 SONY 10639 STRONG 11300 THOMSON 11534, 11900 TOPFIELD 11206, 11545 TPS 11253, 11307 ZEHNDER 11075, 11412 SATELLITE RECEIVER @SAT @SKY ABSAT ADB 11300 11334 10713 10642, 11259, 11367, 11473, 11491 AIWA 11514, 11515 AKAI 10200 ALBA 10713, 11284 ALLSAT 10200, 11017, 11043 ALLSONIC 10369 ALLTECH 10713 ALLVISION 11232, 11334, 11412 AMITRONICA 10713 AMPERE 10132 AMSTRAD 10132, 10713, 10847, 10885, 11113, 11175 ANGLO 10713 ANKARO 10369, 10713, 11279 ANTSAT 11017, 11083 ARCON 11043, 11075, 11279 ARNION 11300 ASAT 10200 ASCI 10114, 11334, 11461 ASLF 10713 ASSCOM 10853 ASTON 11129 ASTRA 10713 ASTRO 10133, 10173, 10369, 10658, 11099, 11100, 11113 ATSAT 11300 ATSKY 11334 AUDIOLINE 11429 AURORA 10879 AUSTAR 10642, 10879, 11259 AXIS 10369, 11111 B@YTRONIC 11412 BENTLEY WALKER 11017 BEST 10369 BIG SAT 11457 BLACK DIAMOND 11284 BLAUPUNKT 10173 BLUE SKY 10713 BOCA 10132, 10713, 11232, 11366, 11474 BOSTON 11251 BRAINWAVE 10658 BRITISH SKY BROADCASTING 10847, 11175 BROCO 10713 BSKYB BT BUBU SAT BUSH 10847, 11175 11296 10713 11284, 11471, 11672 CANAL DIGITAL 10853, 11622 CANAL+ 10853 CANALSATELLITE 10853, 11339, 11853 CENTREX 11457 CGV 11413 CHESS 10114, 10713, 11334 CITYCOM 10299, 10818, 11075, 11176, 11232 COLOMBIA 10132 COLUMBIA 10132 COMAG 10132, 11232, 11366, 11412, 11413, 11579 CONDOR 10369 CONRAD 10132, 10369 COSHIP 11457 CYRUS 10200 D-BOX 10873 DAEWOO 10713, 11111, 11296, 11743 DELTASAT 11075 DGTEC 11242 DIGENIUS 10299, 11161 DIGIALITY 11685 DIGIFUSION 11645 DIGIQUEST 11457, 11473 DIGISAT 11232 DIGISKY 11457 DIGITALL WORLD 11227 DIJAM 11296 DIRECTV 10099, 10639 DISTRATEL 10885, 11283, 11704 DMT 11075 DNT 10200 DREAM MULTIMEDIA 11237 DUNE 10369 DX ANTENNA 11530 ECHOSTAR 10167, 10610, 10713, 10853, 11200, 11323, 11409, 11467, 11473, 11477 EINHELL 10132, 10713 ELAP 10587, 10713, 11129, 11567 ELSAT 10713 ELTA 10200, 10369 EMME ESSE 10369 EMTECH 11214 ENGEL 10713, 11017, 11251 APPENDIX-v EURIEULT EUROLINE EUROPHON EUROSKY 10885 11251 10132, 10299 10114, 10132, 10262, 10299, 10369 EUROSTAR 10818, 10898 EUTELSAT 10713 FENNER 10369, 10713 FERGUSON 10711, 11291 FINLUX 10573 FLAIR MATE 10713 FMD 11457 FORCE 11194 FORTEC STAR 11017, 11083 FOXTEL 10879, 11356 FRACARRO 10125 FTEMAXIMAL10369, 10713, 11556 FUBA 10173, 10262, 10299, 10369, 10573, 11161, 11214 FUGIONKYO 10125 GALAXIS 10369, 10853, 11111, 11557 GARDINER 10818 GARNET 11075 GBSAT 11214 GECCO 11157, 11273, 11412 GENERAL SATELLITE 11176 GF 11043 GF STAR 11043 GLOBO 11251, 11626 GOD DIGITAL 10200 GOLD BOX 10292, 10853 GOLDEN INTERSTAR 11283 GOLDVISION 11017 GOODMANS 11246, 11284 GRUNDIG 10173, 10847, 10853, 10879, 11291 HAENSEL & GRETEL 10132 HANDAN 11622 HANSEATIC 11099, 11100 HAUPPAUGE 11672 HB 11214 HDT 11011 HE@D 11279 HIRSCHMANN10125, 10173, 10299, 10369, 10573, 11111, 11232, 11412 HITACHI 11250, 11284, 11518, 11523, 11525 HUMAX 11176, 11225, 11427, 11648, 11670, 11675, 11743 HUTH 10132, 11017, 11075 HYUNDAI 11011, 11075 ICAN 11367 ID DIGITAL 11176 ILLUSION SAT11557 IMPERIAL 11429 INGELEN 10114 INTERNATIONAL 10132 INTERSTAR 11017, 11214 APPENDIX-vi JAEGER JVC 11334 11507, 11531, 11532 K-SAT 10713 KAMM 10713 KAON 11300 KATELCO 11111 KATHREIN 10114, 10173, 10200, 10249, 10442, 10480, 10504, 10553, 10622, 10658, 10713, 10818, 10898, 11221, 11416, 11561, 11567 KENNEX 10125 KENWOOD 10853 KEY WEST 10132 KITON 10114 KOSCOM 11043 KOSMOS 10442 KREILING 10114, 10249, 10658, 11461 KREISELMEYER 10173 L&S ELECTRONIC 10132, 10369, 11043, 11334 LABGEAR 11296 LASAT 10132, 10173, 10299, 10369 LEMON 11461 LENCO 10369, 10713 LENOXX 11611 LG 11075, 11226 LIFESAT 10132, 10299, 10369, 10713, 11043 LIFETEC 10587 LODOS 11284 LOGIX 11017, 11075 LORENZEN 10132, 10299, 10867, 11161, 11579 LUPUS 10369 LUXOR 10573 LUXORIT 11681 M VISION 11557 MANATA 10132, 10713 MANHATTAN 11017, 11083 MARANTZ 10200 MASPRO 10173, 10713, 11520, 11530 MATSUI 10173, 11284 MAXIMUM 11075, 11334, 11685 MDS 11225 MEDIACOM 11206 MEDIASAT 10292, 10853 MEDION 10132, 10299, 10369, 10713, 11043, 11075, 11232, 11334, 11412, 11626 MEDISON 10713 MEGA 10200 MELECTRONIC 10818 METRONIC 10132, 10713, 10818, 10885, 11279, 11283, 11334, 11691, 11704 METZ 10173 MICRO 10713 MICRO ELEKTRONIC 10713 MICROMAXX 10299, 10369 MICROSTAR 11075 MICROTEC 10713 MORGAN'S 10132, 10200, 10713, 11232, 11412 MULTICHOICE10642, 10879 MYRYAD 10200 MYSAT 10713 NEC 11270, 11519 NEOTION 11334 NETGEM 11322 NETSAT 10099 NEUF TELECOM 11322 NEUF TV 11322 NEUHAUS 10713 NEULING 10132, 11232 NEUSAT 10587, 10713, 11279 NEVELING 11161 NEXTWAVE 11017 NIKKO 10200, 10713 NOKIA 10573, 10751, 10853, 10873, 11023, 11223, 11310, 11311, 11723 NORDMENDE 11611 OKANO 10442 OPENTEL 11232, 11412 OPTEX 10114, 10713, 11043, 11283 OPTUS 10879 ORBIS 11232, 11334, 11412 ORBITECH 10114, 10541, 11099, 11100 P/SAT 11232 PACE 10200, 10329, 10720, 10847, 10853, 10867, 11175, 11323, 11423, 11623, 11850 PACIFIC 11284 PACKARD BELL 11111 PALCOM 10299, 10587, 11161, 11409 PANASAT 10879 PANASONIC 10847, 11104, 11304, 11320, 11404, 11508, 11526, 11527, 11528 PANDA 10173 PANSAT 11011 PATRIOT 10132 PHILIPS 10099, 10133, 10173, 10200, 10292, 10818, 10853, 10898, 11114, 11118, 11672 PHONOTREND11017, 11200 PILOTIME 11339 PINO 11334 PIONEER 10292, 10329, 10352, 10853, 11308 PLASMATIC 10442 PMB PREISNER 10713 10132, 10262, 11113, 11366 PREMIER 10292 PREMIERE 10292, 10873, 11429 PRIMACOM 11111 QUADRAL 10369 QUELLE 10299 RADIOLA 10200 RADIX 11113 RCA 11291 REBOX 11214 RED STAR 10369 REGAL 11251 RFT 10200, 10541 ROADSTAR 10713, 10853 ROVER 10369, 10713 S-ZWO 11207 SAB 11251 SABA 10885 SAGEM 10820, 11114, 11253, 11307, 11690, 11691, 11692, 11694 SAMSUNG 10853, 11017, 11206, 11243, 11293, 11458, 11570 SANYO 11219 SAT CONTROL11300 SAT TEAM 10713 SATEC 10713 SATELCO 10369, 11232 SATPLUS 11100 SATSTATION 11083 SCHAUB LORENZ 11214 SCHNEIDER 11206, 11251 SCHWAIGER 10132, 10504, 10587, 10885, 11075, 11083, 11111, 11334, 11412, 11457, 11474 SCS 10299 SEDEA ELECTRONIQUE 10125, 10132, 11206, 11283 SEG 10114, 10369, 11075, 11251, 11626 SEPTIMO 10885 SERINO 10610 SERVISAT 10713, 11251 SHARP 10541, 11489, 11513, 11517 SIEMENS 10173, 11657 SILVA 10299 SKANTIN 10713 SKARDIN 10587 SKR 10713 SKT 11449 SKY 10099, 10847, 11175, 11848, 11849, 11850 SKY ITALIA 11848, 11849 SKY XL 11251, 11412 SKY+ 11175 SKYMASTER 10587, 10713, 11075, 11200, 11409, 11611 SKYMAX 10200 SKYPLUS 11232, 11334, 11412 SKYSAT 10114, 10713 SKYVISION 11334 SL 10132, 10299 SM ELECTRONIC 10587, 10713, 11200, 11409 SMART 10132, 10299, 10713, 11113, 11157, 11232, 11273, 11413 SONY 10282, 10292, 10639, 10847, 10853, 11524, 11558 SR 10132 STARLITE 10200 STREAM 11848 STRONG 10125, 10132, 10369, 10713, 10820, 10853, 10879, 11146, 11157, 11258, 11300, 11409, 11430, 11626 SUNNY 11300 SUNNY SOUND 10369 SUNSAT 10713 SUNSTAR 10132, 10369, 10642 SYSTEC 11334 TARBS 11225 TBOSTON 11457 TEAC 11225, 11227, 11251, 11322 TECHNISAT 10114, 10200, 10262, 10541, 11099, 11100, 11322 TECHNOMATE 11283, 11610 TECHNOSONIC 11672 TECHNOTREND 11429 TECHNOWELT10132 TECHSAN 11017 TECHWOOD 10114, 11284 TEKCOMM 11017 TELE SYSTEM ELECTRONIC 11611 TELECIEL 11043 TELEKA 10262 TELESTAR 10114, 11099, 11100, 11251, 11334 TELESYSTEM 11251, 11409 TELETECH 10114 TELEVES 10132, 11214, 11300 TELEWIRE 11232 TEVEBOX 11681 TEVION 10713, 11409, 11622 THOMSON 10292, 10711, 10713, 10820, 10847, 10853, 11046, 11175, 11291, 11498, 11534, 11900 TINY 11672 TIOKO 10132 TOKAI 10200 TONNA 10587, 10713, 11611 TOPFIELD 11206, 11207, 11208, 11545, 11722 TOSHIBA 11501, 11516, 11530 TPS 10820, 11253, 11307 TRIAD 10372 TRIAX 10114, 10132, 10200, 10713, 10853, 11099, 11113, 11157, 11227, 11251, 11291, 11296 TT-MICRO 11429 TURNSAT 10713 TWINNER 10713 UEC 10879 UNIDEN 11521 UNISAT 10132, 10200 UNITED 11251 UNIVERSUM 10114, 10173, 10299, 11099, 11251 VAN HUNEN 11161 VARIOSAT 10173 VEGA 10369 VENTANA 10200 VESTEL 10114, 11251 VISIONIC 10125, 11279, 11283 VISIOSAT 10114, 10713, 11129, 11457 VTECH 10818 WISI 10173, 10299, 10372, 10406, 10638 WISPLUS 11258 WORLDSAT 10114, 11214, 11251, 11323 XRYPTON 10369 XSAT 10713, 10847, 11214, 11323 XTREME 11300 YAKUMO 11413 ZEHNDER 10114, 10369, 10504, 10818, 11075, 11232, 11251, 11334, 11412, 11413 HDTV DECORDER PIONEER SHARP 11010 11010 OTHER VIDEO ACCESSORIES ABS 11272 ALIENWARE 11272 CYBERPOWER11272 GATEWAY 11272 HAUPPAUGE 11408 HEWLETT PACKARD 11272 HOWARD COMPUTERS 11272 HP 11272 HUSH 11272 IBUYPOWER 11272 LINKSYS 11272 MEDIA CENTER PC 11272 MICROSOFT 11272 MIND 11272 NIVEUS MEDIA 11272 NORTHGATE 11272 PACKARD BELL 11272 PINNACLE SYSTEMS 11447 PIONEER 11010 RICAVISION 11272 SHARP 11010 SONY 11272, 11733 STACK 9 11272 SYSTEMAX 11272 TOSHIBA 11272 TOUCH 11272 VIEWSONIC 11272 VOODOO 11272 ZT GROUP 11272 TV A.R. SYSTEMS20374, 20455 ACER 21339 ACURA 20009 ADL 21217 ADMIRAL 20093, 20163, 20264 ADVENT 20817 AGB 20516 AIKO 20009, 20264 AIM 20805 AIWA 21180 AKAI 20009, 20035, 20037, 20163, 20178, 20208, 20218, 20264, 20361, 20371, 20433, 20473, 20480, 20516, 20548, 20556, 20602, 20606, 20631, 20696, 20714, 20715, 20729, 20745, 20753, 21207 AKIBA 20037, 20218, 20455 AKITO 20037 AKURA 20009, 20037, 20218, 20264, 20412, 20668, 20714, 21037, 21982 ALBA 20009, 20037, 20163, 20218, 20355, 20371, 20418, 20443, 20487, 20668, 20714, 21037 ALL-TEL 20865 ALLSTAR 20037 AMPLIVISION 20370 AMSTRAD 20009, 20037, 20218, 20264, 20371, 20412, 20433, 20516, 21037 ANAM 20009, 20250 ANAM NATIONAL2 0250 ANDERSSON 21149, 21163 ANGLO 20009, 20264 ANITECH 20009, 20037 ANSONIC 20009, 20292, 20370, 20668 APEX DIGITAL20890, 21217 ARDEM 20037, 20714 ARISTONA 20037, 20556 ART 21037 ASORA 20009 ASUKA 20218, 20264 AUDIOSONIC 20009, 20037, 20109, 20218, 20264, 20370, 20374, 20486, 20714, 20715 AUDIOTON 20264, 20486 AUDIOWORLD20698 AWA 20009, 20108, 20606 AXXENT 20009 BAIRD 20208 BANG & OLUFSEN 20565 BASIC LINE 20009, 20037, 20218, 20374, 20455, 20556, 20668, 21037, 21163 BAUER 20805 BAUR 20037, 20361, 20512 BEAUMARK 20178 BEKO 20037, 20370, 20418, 20486, 20606, 20714, 20715, 20808, 21037 BELSON 20698 BEON 20037, 20418 BERTHEN 20668 BESTAR 20037, 20370, 20374 BESTAR-DAEWOO 20374 BLACK DIAMOND 20614, 20821, 21037, 21909 BLAUPUNKT 20170, 20195, 20200, 20327, 20455 BLUE SKY 20037, 20218, 20455, 20487, 20556, 20668, 20714, 20715, 20808, 21037, 21191 BLUESKY 21388 BOOTS 20009 BOXLIGHT 20736 BPL 20037, 20896 BRANDT 20109, 20335, 20560, 20625, 20714 BRINKMANN 20037, 20418, 20486, 20668 BTC 20218 BUSH 20009, 20037, 20208, 20218, 20264, 20355, 20361, 20371, 20374, 20487, 20556, 20614, 20617, 20660, 20668, 20698, 20714, 20778, 21037, 21243 BYDESIGN 21309, 21311 APPENDIX-vii CANTON CARAD 20218 20610, 20668, 21037 CARENA 20037, 20455 CARVER 20054, 20170 CASCADE 20009, 20037 CASIO 20037 CATHAY 20037 CCE 20037 CELEBRITY 20000 CELESTIAL 20820, 20821 CENTREX 20780 CENTRUM 21037 CENTURION 20037 CGE 20074, 20370, 20418 CHANGHONG 20821 CIMLINE 20009, 20218 CITIZEN 20060 CITY 20009 CLARIVOX 20037 CLATRONIC 20009, 20037, 20218, 20264, 20370, 20371, 20606, 20714 CLAYTON 21037 CONDOR 20009, 20037, 20264, 20370, 20411, 20418 CONIA 20754 CONRAC 20808 CONTEC 20009, 20037 CONTINENTAL EDISON 20109, 20487 COSMEL 20037 CROSLEY 20054, 20074 CROWN 20009, 20037, 20053, 20208, 20370, 20412, 20418, 20486, 20487, 20606, 20712, 20714, 20715, 21037 CS ELECTRONICS 20218 CURTIS MATHES 20054, 20060, 20093, 20145 CYBERTRON 20218 CYTRONIX 21298 D-VISION 20556 DAEWOO 20009, 20037, 20218, 20374, 20556, 20634, 20865, 20880, 21307, 21909 DAINICHI 20218 DANSAI 20009, 20035, 20037, 20208 DANSETTE 20412 DANTAX 20714, 20715 DAVIS 20736 DAYTEK 21207 DAYTON 20009, 21207 DAYTRON 20374 DE GRAAF 20208, 20548 DECCA 20037, 20516 DENKO 20264 DENON 20145, 20511 DENVER 20037, 20587, 21189 DESMET 20009, 20037 DIAMANT 20037 DIAMOND 20825 APPENDIX-viii DICK SMITH ELECTRONICS 20698 DIGATRON 20037 DIGILINE 20105, 20668 DIGITAL LIFE 20780, 20872, 20891 DIGITOR 20037, 20698 DIGIX 20880 DIXI 20009, 20037 DL 20891 DMTECH 21338 DOMEOS 20668 DOMLAND 20394 DREAM VISION 21704 DSE 20698 DUAL 20037, 20352, 20394 DVX 20891 DYNATRON 20037 E-ELITE 20218 ECCO 20773 EDISON-MINERVA 20487 EIKI 20735 ELBE 20292, 20411, 20435, 20516, 20610 ELBE-SHARP 20516 ELECTROBAND 20000 ELECTROGRAPH 21755 ELEKTA 20264 ELIN 20009, 20037, 20361, 20548 ELITE 20218 ELTA 20009, 20264 EMERSON 20037, 20178, 20361, 20370, 20371, 20486, 20714, 21909 ENVISION 21365 ERRES 20037 ESC 20037 ETRON 20001, 20009 EUROFEEL 20264 EUROMAN 20037, 20264 EUROPA 20037 EUROPHON 20516 EVOLUTION 21756 EXQUISIT 20037 FENNER 20009, 20374 FERGUSON 20037, 20053, 20109, 20195, 20335, 20443, 20548, 20560, 20625, 21037 FIDELITY 20037, 20163, 20264, 20361, 20371, 20412, 20512 FINLANDIA 20163, 20208, 20346, 20548 FINLUX 20037, 20105, 20346, 20411, 20473, 20480, 20492, 20516, 20631, 20714, 20715, 20808 FIRSTLINE 20009, 20037, 20208, 20361, 20374, 20411, 20556, 20668, 20714, 20808, 21037, 21191, 21307, 21363, 21388 FISHER 20208, 20370, 20555 FLINT 20037, 20218, 20264, 20455, 20610 FORCE 21149 FORMENTI 20037 FORTRESS 20093 FRABA 20037, 20370 FRIAC 20009, 20037, 20370, 20610 FRONTECH 20009, 20163, 20264 FUJIMARO 20865 FUJITSU 20009, 20683, 20853 FUJITSU GENERAL 20009, 20683 FUJITSU SIEMENS 21298 FUNAI 20264, 20668 GALAXI 20037 GALAXIS 20037, 20370 GATEWAY 21755, 21756 GBC 20009, 20218, 20374 GE 20093, 20178, 20560, 20625, 20735 GEC 20037, 20163, 20361, 20516 GELOSO 20009, 20374 GENERAL TECHNIC 20009 GENESIS 20009 GENEXXA 20009, 20163, 20218 GERICOM 20808, 20865, 20880, 21206, 21217, 21298 GOLDFUNK 20668 GOLDSTAR 20001, 20037, 20109, 20163, 20178, 20361, 20377, 20606, 20714, 20715 GOODING 20487 GOODMANS 20009, 20035, 20037, 20218, 20264, 20335, 20360, 20371, 20374, 20480, 20487, 20516, 20556, 20560, 20634, 20668, 20714, 20808, 20880, 21037, 21163, 21909 GORENJE 20370 GPM 20218 GRADIENTE 20053, 20170 GRAETZ 20163, 20361, 20371, 20487, 20714 GRANADA 20037, 20108, 20163, 20208, 20226, 20473, 20516, 20548, 20560 GRANDIN 20009, 20037, 20163, 20374, 20455, 20610, 20668, 20714, 20715, 20865, 20880, 21037, 21191, 21374, 21388 GRUNDIG 20037, 20195, 20443, 20487, 20556, 20587, 20740, 21223 H&B 20808 HAIER 20698, 20891 HALLMARK 20178 HANIMEX 20218 HANSEATIC 20009, 20037, 20361, 20377, 20394, 20556, 20634, 20714, 20808 HANTAREX 20009, 20037, 20516, 20829, 20865, 21338 HANTOR 20037 HARMAN/KARDON 20054 HARSPER 20865 HARWA 20773, 21196, 21269 HARWOOD 20009, 20037, 20412, 20487 HAVERMY 20093 HCM 20009, 20037, 20218, 20264, 20412, 20418 HELIOS 20865 HEMA 20009 HIKONA 20218 HINARI 20009, 20037, 20218, 20264, 20355 HISAWA 20218, 20455, 20610, 20714 HISENSE 20508, 20556, 20780, 21363 HITACHI 20037, 20105, 20108, 20109, 20145, 20163, 20178, 20225, 20473, 20480, 20481, 20492, 20516, 20548, 20578, 20634, 20744, 20797, 21037, 21149, 21194, 21576 HITACHI FUJIAN 20108 HITSU 20009, 20218, 20455, 20610 HOEHER 20714, 20865 HOME ELECTRONICS 20606 HORNYPHON 20037 HUANYU 20374 HUGOSON 20890, 21217 HUMAX 21295 HYPER 20009 HYPSON 20037, 20264, 20455, 20668, 20714, 20715, 21037 HYUNDAI 20860, 20865, 20876, 21152, 21244, 21294 IBERIA 20037 ICE 20218, 20264, 20371 ICES 20218 IIYAMA 20877, 21217 IMPERIAL 20037, 20074, 20370, 20418 INDIANA 20037 INFINITY 20054 INFOCUS 20736, 20752, 21164, 21206 INGELEN 20163, 20487, 20610, 20714 INGERSOLL 20009 INNO HIT 20009, 20516, 21163 INNOWERT 20865, 21298 INTERBUY 20037, 20264 INTERFUNK 20037, 20163, 20200, 20327, 20361, 20512 INTERNAL 20037, 21909 INTERVISION 20009, 20037, 20218, 20264, 20377, 20394, 20455, 20486, 20487 IRRADIO 20218, 20371 ISUKAI 20037, 20218, 20455 ITS 20264, 20371 ITT 20163, 20208, 20346, 20361, 20473, 20480, 20548, 20610 ITT NOKIA 20163, 20208, 20346, 20361, 20473, 20480, 20548, 20606, 20610 ITV 20037, 20264, 20374 IX 20877 JBL 20054 JCB 20000 JDV 21982 JENSEN 20817 JMB 20443, 20556, 20634 JOCEL 20712 JUBILEE 20556 JVC 20053, 20093, 20218, 20371, 20418, 20606, 20650, 20653, 20683, 20731 KAISUI 20009, 20037, 20218, 20455 KAPSCH 20163, 20361 KARCHER 20264, 20606, 20610, 20714, 20778 KATHREIN 20556 KAWA 20371 KB ARISTOCRAT 20163 KENDO 20037, 20411, 20610 KENNEDY KENNEX KIOTA KITON KNEISSEL 20435 21037 20001 20037, 20668 20037, 20292, 20374, 20411, 20435, 20556, 20610 KONKA 20037, 20218, 20371, 20418, 20587, 20641, 20714, 20754 KONTAKT 20487 KORPEL 20037 KOYODA 20009 KREISEN 20876 KYOSHU 20412, 20418 KYOTO 20163 L&S ELECTRONIC 20714, 20808 LASAT 20486 LEADER 20009 LECSON 20037 LEMAIR 20411 LENCO 20037, 20374 LEYCO 20037, 20264 LG 20037, 20178, 20442, 20556, 20698, 20714, 20715, 20829, 21146, 21148, 21191 LIESENK & TTER 20037 LIESENKOTTER 20037, 20327 LIFETEC 20037, 20218, 20374, 20668, 20714, 21037 LOCAL INDIA TV 20264, 20371, 20602 LODOS 21037 LOEWE 20037, 20136, 20292, 20512, 20516, 20633, 20790 LOGIK 20001, 20773, 20880, 21217 LOGIX 20668 LUKER 21982 LUMA 21037 LUX MAY 20009, 20037 LUXOR 20163, 20208, 20361, 20473, 20480, 20548, 20631, 21037, 21163 LXI 20054, 20156, 20178 M ELECTRONIC 20009, 20037, 20105, 20109, 20163, 20346, 20374, 20480 MADISON 20037 MAGNADYNE 20516 MAGNAFON 20516 MAGNAVOX 20054, 20780 MAGNUM 20037, 20714, 20715 MANESTH 20035, 20037, 20264 MANHATTAN 20037, 20668, 20778, 21037 MARANTZ 20037, 20054, 20412, 20556, 20704 MARK 20037, 20714, 20715 MASUDA 20009, 20218 MATSUI 20009, 20035, 20037, 20195, 20208, 20335, 20355, 20371, 20433, 20443, 20455, 20487, 20516, 20556, 20714, 21037 MATSUSHITA 20250, 20650 MAXENT 21755 MEDIATOR 20037 MEDION 20037, 20512, 20556, 20668, 20698, 20714, 20808, 20880, 21037, 21248 MEGAS 20610 MEGATRON 20145, 20178 MEI 21037 MELECTRONIC 20009, 20037, 20105, 20163, 20195, 20346, 20374, 20411, 20480, 20492, 20512, 20634, 20714 MEMOREX 20009, 20060, 20178, 20250, 21037 MERCURY 20009 METRONIC 20625 METZ 20037, 20367, 20388, 20447, 20587, 20668, 20746, 21163 MGA 20178 MICROMAXX 20037, 20668, 20808, 21037 MICROSTAR 20808 MIKOMI 21149 MINATO 20037 MINERVA 20108, 20487, 20516 MINOKA 20412 MITSUBISHI 20037, 20093, 20108, 20178, 20250, 20512, 20556, 21037 MIVAR 20292, 20516, 20609 MONACO 20009 MORGAN'S 20037 MOTOROLA 20093 MTC 20060, 20370, 20512 MTLOGIC 20714 MULTITEC 20037, 20486, 20668, 21037 MULTITECH 20009, 20037, 20264, 20486 MURPHY 20163 MUSIKLAND 20218 MYRYAD 20556 NAD 20156, 20178, 20361 NAIKO 20037, 20606, 21982 NAT 20226 NATIONAL NEC 20226 20009, 20053, 20156, 20170, 20374, 20455, 20587, 20704, 21704 NECKERMANN 20037, 20200, 20327, 20370, 20411, 20418, 20556 NEI 20037, 20371 NEOVIA 20865, 20876, 21206, 21318, 21338, 21371, 21373, 21376, 21390 NETSAT 20037 NETTV 21755 NEUFUNK 20037, 20218, 20556, 20610, 20714 NIKKAI 20009, 20035, 20037, 20218, 20264 NIKKO 20178 NOKIA 20163, 20208, 20346, 20361, 20374, 20473, 20480, 20548, 20606, 20610, 20631 NORCENT 21365 NORDMENDE 20037, 20109, 20195, 20560, 20714 NORMEREL 20037 NOVATRONIC 20037, 20105, 20374 OCEANIC 20163, 20208, 20361, 20473, 20548 OKANO 20009, 20037, 20370 OMEGA 20264 OMNI 20891 ONIMAX 20714 ONWA 20218, 20371, 20433 OPTIMUS 20250, 20650 OPTONICA 20093 ORION 20037, 20355, 20412, 20443, 20516, 20556, 20714, 20880 ORLINE 20037, 20218 ORMOND 20668, 21037 ORSOWE 20516 OSAKI 20037, 20218, 20264, 20355, 20374, 20412, 20556 OSO 20218 OSUME 20037, 20218 OTTO VERSAND 20037, 20093, 20109, 20226, 20361, 20512, 20556 PACIFIC 20443, 20556, 20714, 21037 PALLADIUM 20037, 20370, 20411, 20418, 20714 APPENDIX-ix PALSONIC 20001, 20037, 20264, 20418, 20698, 20773 PANAMA 20037, 20264 PANASHIBA 20001 PANASONIC 20037, 20163, 20226, 20250, 20361, 20367, 20516, 20548, 20650, 20853, 21210, 21310 PANAVISION 20037, 20411 PATHE CINEMA 20163 PAUSA 20009 PENNEY 20060, 20156, 20178 PERDIO 20037, 20163 PHILCO 20037, 20054, 20074, 20145, 20370, 20418 PHILIPS 20009, 20037, 20054, 20200, 20361, 20374, 20556, 20772, 21756 PHOENIX 20037, 20486 PHONOLA 20037 PIONEER 20037, 20109, 20163, 20361, 20486, 20512, 20679, 20760 PIONIER 20486 PLANTRON 20009 PLAYSONIC 20037, 20714, 20715 POLAROID 20865 PORTLAND 20374 POWERPOINT 20037, 20487, 20698 PRANDONI-PRINCE 20361, 20516 PRIMA 20264, 20412 PRINSTON 21037 PRINZ 20361 PROFEX 20009, 20163, 20361 PROFI 20009 PROFITRONIC 20037 PROLINE 20037, 20411, 20625, 20634, 21037 PROSONIC 20037, 20668, 20714 PROTECH 20009, 20037, 20264, 20418, 20486, 20668, 21037 PROTON 20178 PROVISION 20037, 20556, 20714 PROXIMA 20735 PYE 20037, 20374, 20556 QUADRAL 20218 QUASAR 20009, 20250, 20650, 20865 QUELLE 20037, 20074, 20200, 20327, 20361, 20512, 20668, 21037 R-LINE 20037 RADIALVA 20218 APPENDIX-x RADIOLA 20037, 20556 RADIOMARELLI 20037, 20516 RADIOSHACK 20037, 20178 RADIOTONE 20009, 20037, 20264, 20412, 20668, 21037 RCA 20093, 20625, 20679 REALISTIC 20178 REDIFFUSION 20346, 20361, 20548 REFLEX 20037, 20668, 21037 RELISYS 20865, 20876, 20877, 20878, 21206, 21207, 21268, 21298 REOC 20714 REVOX 20037 REX 20163, 20264, 20411 RFT 20037, 20264 RINEX 20773 ROADSTAR 20009, 20037, 20218, 20264, 20418, 20668, 20714, 21037, 21189 ROVER 20877 ROWA 20698, 20712 ROYAL LUX 20335, 20412 SABA 20109, 20163, 20250, 20335, 20361, 20498, 20516, 20548, 20560, 20625, 20714 SAGEM 20455, 20610, 20830, 21313 SAISHO 20009, 20264, 20516 SAIVOD 20037, 20668, 20712, 21037, 21163, 21982 SAKAI 20163 SALORA 20163, 20208, 20361, 20480, 20516, 20548, 20631 SALSA 20335 SAMBERS 20516 SAMPO 21755 SAMSUNG 20009, 20037, 20060, 20163, 20178, 20208, 20264, 20370, 20482, 20556, 20587, 20618, 20644 SANSUI 20037, 20727, 20729, 20861 SANTON 20009 SANYO 20088, 20108, 20170, 20208, 20370, 20555, 20704, 20735 SBR 20037, 20556 SCEPTRE 21217 SCHAUB LORENZ 20361, 20374, 20486, 20548, 20606, 20714, 21191 SCHNEIDER 20037, 20163, 20218, 20352, 20361, 20371, 20394, 20556, 20668, 20714, 21037 SCOTCH 20178 SCOTLAND 20163 SCOTT 20178 SEARS 20054, 20156, 20178 SEAWAY 20634 SEELVER 21037 SEG 20009, 20037, 20218, 20264, 20487, 20634, 20668, 21037, 21163 SEI 20516 SEI-SINUDYNE 20037, 20516 SELECO 20163, 20264, 20346, 20371, 20411, 20435 SEMP 20156 SENCORA 20009 SENTRA 20035 SERINO 20093, 20455, 20610 SHARP 20053, 20093, 20200, 20491, 20516, 21163, 21193 SHENG CHIA 20093 SHINTOSHI 20037 SHIVAKI 20037, 20443 SIAREM 20516 SIEMENS 20037, 20195, 20200, 20327 SIERA 20556 SIESTA 20370 SILVA 20037, 20361 SILVA SCHNEIDER 20037 SILVER 20361, 20715 SILVERCREST 21037 SINGER 20009, 20335, 20433, 20435 SINOTEC 20773 SINUDYNE 20516 SKY 20037, 20880 SKYSONIC 20696 SLIDING 20865, 20880, 21318, 21374, 21388 SLX 20668 SMARAGD 20487 SOEMTRON 20865, 21298 SOLAVOX 20037, 20163, 20361, 20548 SONAWA 20218 SONIKO 20037 SONITRON 20208, 20370 SONOKO 20009, 20037 SONOLOR 20163, 20208, 20361, 20548 SONTEC 20009, 20037, 20370 SONY 20000, 20037, 20053, 20093, 20145, 20156, 20170, 20250, 20353, 21100, 21505, 21751 SOUND & VISION 20374 SOUNDESIGN 20178 SOUNDWAVE 20037, 20418, 20715 SPECTRA 20009 SSANGYONG 20009 STANDARD 20009, 20037, 20218, 20374, 21037 STARLITE 20009, 20037, 20264 STENWAY 20218 STERN 20163, 20411 STEVISON 21982 STRATO 20009, 20037, 20264 STRONG 21149, 21163 SUNKAI 20355, 20455, 20487, 20610, 20865 SUNSTAR 20009, 20037, 20264, 20371 SUNWOOD 20037 SUPERLA 20516 SUPERSCAN 20093 SUPERSONIC 21189 SUPERTECH 20009, 20037, 20218 SUPRA 20009 SUPREME 20000 SUSUMU 20218, 20335 SVA 20587, 20865, 20872 SYLVANIA 20054 SYSLINE 20037 T+A 20447 TANDBERG 20367 TANDY 20093, 20163, 20218 TARGA 21307 TASHIKO 20163 TATUNG 20037, 20516, 21756 TCM 20714, 20808 TEAC 20009, 20037, 20170, 20178, 20264, 20412, 20418, 20455, 20512, 20668, 20698, 20712, 21037, 21149, 21755, 21909 TEC 20009, 20037 TECH LINE 20037, 20668 TECHNICS 20250, 20556, 20650 TECHNISAT 20556 TECHNISSON 20714 TECHNOSONIC 20556 TECHWOOD 21163 TECNIMAGEN 20556 TEDELEX 20009, 20891 TEKNIKA 20054, 20060 TELECOR 20394 TELEFUNKEN 20037, 20074, 20109, 20335, 20346, 20486, 20498, 20560, 20625, 20714, 20896 TELEFUSION 20037 TELEGAZI 20037 TELEMAGIC 20735 TELESONIC TELESTAR TELESYSTEM TELETECH 20037 20037, 20556 20876 20009, 20037, 20668, 21037 TELEVIEW 20037 TEMPEST 20009 TENNESSEE 20037 TENSAI 20009, 20037, 20105, 20218, 20371, 20374, 20377, 20715, 21037 TENSON 20009 TEVION 20556, 20668, 20714, 20808, 21037, 21248, 21298 TEXET 20009, 20218, 20374 THOMSON 20037, 20109, 20335, 20560, 20625 THORN 20035, 20037, 20074, 20109, 20335, 20361, 20512 TINY 21269 TINY DIGITAL 20660 TMK 20178 TOKAI 20009, 20037, 20163, 20374, 20668, 21037 TOKAIDO 21037 TOKYO 20035 TOMASHI 20218 TONGTEL 20780 TOSHIBA 20035, 20060, 20109, 20156, 20195, 20241, 20508, 20618, 20650, 20714, 20736, 21163, 21164, 21704 TRANS CONTINENS 20037, 20668, 21037 TRANS-CONTINENTS 20865, 21374 TRANSONIC 20009, 20037, 20587, 20698, 20712 TRIDENT 20516 TRISTAR 20218 TRIUMPH 20346, 20516, 20556 TVTEXT 95 20556 UHER 20037, 20374, 20418, 20480, 20486 ULTRAVOX 20037 UNIC LINE 20037, 20455 UNITED 20037, 20714, 20715, 21037 UNIVERSAL 20037 UNIVERSUM 20009, 20037, 20074, 20105, 20170, 20200, 20264, 20327, 20346, 20361, 20370, 20411, 20418, 20473, 20480, 20492, 20512, 20618, 20631, 20668, 21037, 21163 UNIVOX 20037, 20163 V2MAX 20865 V7 VIDEOSEVEN 21376, 21755 V7VIDEOSEVEN 20880 VESTEL 20037, 20556, 20668, 21037, 21163 VICTOR 20053, 20653 VIDEOCON 20508 VIDEOLOGIC 20218 VIDEOLOGIQUE 20218 VIDIKRON 20054, 20735 VIDTECH 20178 VIEWPIA 20876 VIEWSONIC 20797, 21755 VIORE 21207 VISION 20037 VIZIO 21756 VOXSON 20163, 20178, 20418 WALTHAM 20037, 20109, 20163, 20418, 20443, 20668, 21037 WARDS 20000, 20054, 20060, 20156, 20178 WATSON 20009, 20037, 20218, 20394, 20668, 21037 WAYCON 20156 WEGA 20037 WELLTECH 20714 WESTINGHOUSE 20890 WHARFEDALE 20037, 20556 WHITE WESTINGHOUSE 20037, 21909 WINDSOR 21037 WINDY SAM 20556 WORLD-OF-VISION 20865, 20877, 20880, 20890, 21298 X-VIEW 21191 XENIUS 20634 XLOGIC 20860 XORO 21196, 21217, 21243 XRYPTON 20037 YAMADA 21340 YAMAHA 20650, 20769, 20797, 21405, 21406, 21407, 21576 YAMISHI 20455 YAPSHE 20250 YOKAN 20037 YOKO 20009, 20037, 20218, 20264 ZANUSSI ZENITH 20264 20178, 21909 PVR ABS 31972 ALIENWARE 31972 CYBERPOWER 31972 DELL 31972 GATEWAY 31972 HEWLETT PACKARD 31972 HOWARD COMPUTERS 31972 HP 31972 HUSH 31972 IBUYPOWER 31972 JVC 31279 LINKSYS 31972 MEDIA CENTER PC 31972 MICROSOFT 31972 MIND 31972 NIVEUS MEDIA31972 NORTHGATE 31972 PANASONIC 31244, 31807, 31808, 31809 PHILIPS 31340 SONY 31636, 31972 STACK 9 31972 SYSTEMAX 31972 TAGAR SYSTEMS 31972 TOSHIBA 30828, 31008, 31972 TOUCH 31972 VIEWSONIC 31972 VOODOO 31972 ZT GROUP 31972 VCR ABS ACCENT ADMIRAL ADVENTURA ADYSON AIKO AIWA 31972 30072 30048 30000 30072 30278 30000, 30032, 30037, 30307, 30348, 30352 AKAI 30041, 30106, 30240, 30315, 30348, 30352, 30642 AKIBA 30072 AKURA 30072 ALBA 30000, 30072, 30081, 30278, 30315, 30348, 30352 ALIENWARE 31972 ALLSTAR 30081 AMERICA ACTION 30278 AMSTRAD 30000, 30072, 30278 ANAM 30037, 30162, 30226, 30240 ANAM NATIONAL 30162, 30226 ANITECH 30072 ANSONIC 30000 ARISTONA 30081 ASA ASHA ASUKA AUDIOSONIC AUDIOVOX AVP AWA BAIRD 30037, 30081 30240 30037, 30038 30278 30037, 30278 30000, 30352 30043 30000, 30041, 30104, 30106 BASIC LINE 30072, 30104, 30278 BEAUMARK 30240 BEKO 30104 BELL & HOWELL 30104 BESTAR 30278 BLACK DIAMOND 30642 BLACK PANTHER 30278 BLAUPUNKT 30034, 30081, 30162, 30226 BLUE SKY 30037, 30072, 30278, 30348, 30352, 30480, 30642 BONDSTEC 30072 BRANDT 30041, 30206, 30320, 30321 BRANDT ELECTRONIQUE 30041 BRINKMANN 30348 BROKSONIC 30348 BUSH 30000, 30072, 30081, 30278, 30315, 30348, 30352, 30642 CALIX 30037 CARREFOUR 30045 CARVER 30081 CASIO 30000 CATHAY 30278 CCE 30072, 30278 CGE 30000 CIMLINE 30072 CITIZEN 30037, 30278 CLATRONIC 30000, 30072 COLT 30072 COMBITECH 30352 CONDOR 30278 CRAIG 30037, 30072, 30240 CROWN 30037, 30072, 30278, 30480 CURTIS MATHES 30041, 30162 CYBERNEX 30240 CYBERPOWER31972 CYRUS 30081 DAEWOO 30045, 30278, 30352, 30637, 30642 DANSAI 30072, 30278 DANTAX 30352 DE GRAAF 30042, 30048, 30081, 30104, 30166 DECCA 30000, 30067, 30081, 30352 DEITRON 30278 DELL 31972 DENKO 30072 DENON 30042 DIAMANT 30037 APPENDIX-xi DICK SMITH ELECTRONICS 30642 DIGITOR 30642 DSE 30642 DUAL 30000, 30041, 30081, 30278, 30348 DUMONT 30000, 30081, 30104 DYNATECH 30000 ELBE 30038, 30278 ELCATECH 30072 ELECTROHOME 30037 ELECTROPHONIC 30037 ELIN 30240 ELSAY 30072 ELTA 30072, 30278 EMEREX 30032 EMERSON 30000, 30037, 30043, 30045, 30072, 30278, 30637 ESC 30240, 30278 FERGUSON 30000, 30041, 30278, 30320, 30321 FIDELITY 30000, 30072, 30240, 30352 FINLANDIA 30000, 30037, 30042, 30043, 30048, 30081, 30104, 30106, 30166, 30226 FINLUX 30000, 30042, 30081, 30104 FIRSTLINE 30037, 30043, 30045, 30072, 30278, 30348, 30480 FISHER 30104 FLINT 30348 FRONTECH 30072 FUJI 30033 FUJITSU 30000, 30045 FUNAI 30000 GALAXIS 30278 GARRARD 30000 GATEWAY 31972 GE 30048, 30240, 30320 GEC 30081 GENERAL 30045 GENERAL TECHNIC 30348 GENEXXA 30104 GOLDHAND 30072 GOLDSTAR 30037, 30038, 30480 GOODMANS 30000, 30037, 30072, 30081, 30278, 30348, 30352, 30637, 30642 GPX 30037 GRADIENTE 30000 GRAETZ 30041, 30104, 30240 GRANADA 30000, 30037, 30042, 30048, 30081, 30104, 30226, 30240 GRANDIN 30000, 30037, 30072, 30278 APPENDIX-xii GRUNDIG 30034, 30072, 30081, 30226, 30320, 30347, 30348, 30352 HANIMEX 30352 HANSEATIC 30037, 30038, 30081 HARLEY DAVIDSON 30000 HARMAN/KARDON 30038, 30081 HARWOOD 30072 HCM 30072 HEWLETT PACKARD 31972 HINARI 30041, 30072, 30240, 30278, 30352 HISAWA 30352 HISCHITO 30045 HITACHI 30000, 30037, 30041, 30042, 30081, 30166, 30240 HOEHER 30278, 30642 HORNYPHON 30081 HOWARD COMPUTERS 31972 HP 31972 HUGHES NETWORK SYSTEMS 30042 HUSH 31972 HYPSON 30000, 30037, 30072, 30278, 30480 IBUYPOWER 31972 IMPERIAL 30000 INGERSOLL 30240 INNO HIT 30072 INTERBUY 30072 INTERFUNK 30081, 30104 INTERNAL 30278, 30637 INTERNATIONAL 30037, 30278, 30642 INTERVISION 30000, 30278 IRRADIO 30072, 30081 ITT 30041, 30104, 30106, 30240 ITV 30037, 30278 JBL 30278 JENSEN 30041 JMB 30348, 30352 JOYCE 30000 JVC 30041, 30067, 30206, 31008, 31279 KAISUI 30072 KAMBROOK 30037 KARCHER 30081, 30278, 30642 KEC 30037, 30278 KENDO 30072, 30106, 30278, 30315, 30348, 30642 KENWOOD 30038, 30041, 30067 KLH 30072 KNEISSEL 30037, 30278, 30348, 30352 KODAK 30037 KORPEL 30072 KYOTO 30072 LENCO 30278 LEYCO 30072 LG LIFETEC LINKSYS LLOYD'S LOEWE 30037, 30480 30348 31972 30000 30037, 30081, 30162, 31562 LOGIK 30072, 30106, 30240 LUX MAY 30072 LUXOR 30043, 30048, 30104, 30106, 30315 LXI 30037 M ELECTRONIC 30000, 30038 MAGNASONIC30278 MAGNAVOX 30000, 30081, 30642 MAGNIN 30240 MAGNUM 30642 MANESTH 30045, 30072, 30081 MARANTZ 30038, 30081 MARK 30000, 30278 MARTA 30037 MASTEC 30642 MASTER'S 30278 MATSUI 30240, 30348, 30352 MATSUSHITA 30162, 30226 MEDIA CENTER PC 31972 MEDION 30348, 30352, 30642 MELECTRONIC 30000, 30037, 30038 MEMOREX 30000, 30037, 30048, 30104, 30162, 30240, 30307, 30348 MEMPHIS 30072 METRONIC 30081 METZ 30037, 30081, 30162, 30226, 30347, 30836, 31562 MGA 30043, 30240 MGN TECHNOLOGY 30240 MICORMAY 30348 MICROSOFT 31972 MIND 31972 MINOLTA 30042 MITSUBISHI 30043, 30048, 30067, 30081, 30480, 30642 MOTOROLA 30048 MTC 30000, 30240 MULTITEC 30037 MULTITECH 30000, 30072 MURPHY 30000 MYRYAD 30081 NAD 30104 NAIKO 30348, 30642 NATIONAL 30226 NEBULA ELECTRONICS 30033 NEC 30037, 30038, 30041, 30067, 30104, 30278 NECKERMANN 30081 NESCO 30072 NIKKAI 30072, 30278 NIKKO 30037 NIKON 30034 NIVEUS MEDIA 31972 NOBLEX 30240 NOKIA 30041, 30042, 30048, 30081, 30104, 30106, 30240, 30278, 30315 NORDMENDE 30041, 30067, 30320, 30321 NORTHGATE 31972 OCEANIC 30000, 30041, 30048, 30081, 30104, 30106 OKANO 30072, 30278, 30315, 30348 OLYMPUS 30226 ONIMAX 30642 OPTIMUS 30037, 30048, 30104, 30162 ORBIT 30072 ORION 30348, 30352 OSAKI 30000, 30037, 30072 OSUME 30072 OTTO VERSAND 30081 PACE 30352 PACIFIC 30000, 30348, 30642 PACKARD BELL 31972 PALLADIUM 30037, 30041, 30072, 30348 PALSONIC 30000, 30072, 30642 PANASONIC 30162, 30226, 30836, 31244, 31562, 31807, 31808, 31809 PATHE CINEMA 30043 PATHE MARCONI 30041 PENNEY 30037, 30038, 30042, 30240 PENTAX 30042 PERDIO 30000 PHILCO 30038, 30072 PHILIPS 30081 PHOENIX 30278 PHONOLA 30081 PILOT 30037 PIONEER 30042, 30067, 30081, 30162 POLK AUDIO 30081 PORTLAND 30278, 30637 PRINZ 30000 PROFITRONIC 30081, 30240 PROLINE 30000, 30278, 30320, 30642 PROSONIC 30278 PROTEC 30072 PROTECH 30081 PROVISION 30278 PYE 30081 QUASAR 30162, 30278 QUELLE 30081 RADIALVA 30037, 30048 RADIOLA 30081 RADIONETTE 30037 RADIOSHACK 30000, 30037 RADIX 30037 RANDEX 30037 RANK ARENA 30041 RCA 30042, 30048, 30106, 30240, 30320 REALISTIC 30000, 30037, 30048, 30104 REOC 30348 REX 30041 RFT 30072 RICAVISION 31972 RICOH 30034 ROADSTAR 30037, 30072, 30081, 30240, 30278 ROYAL 30072 SABA 30041, 30206, 30278, 30320, 30321 SAISHO 30348 SALORA 30043, 30104, 30106 SAMSUNG 30045, 30240 SANKY 30048 SANSUI 30000, 30041, 30067, 30072, 30106 SANYO 30048, 30067, 30104, 30240 SAVILLE 30240, 30278, 30352 SBR 30081 SCHAUB LORENZ 30000, 30041, 30104, 30106, 30315, 30348 SCHNEIDER 30000, 30037, 30042, 30072, 30081, 30240, 30278, 30348, 30352, 30642 SCOTT 30043, 30045 SEARS 30000, 30037, 30042, 30104 SEAWAY 30278 SEG 30072, 30081, 30240, 30278, 30637, 30642 SEI 30081 SELECO 30037, 30041 SEMP 30045 SENTRA 30072 SHARP 30037, 30048 SHINTOM 30072, 30104 SHIVAKI 30037 SHOGUN 30240 SIEMENS 30037, 30081, 30104, 30320, 30347 SIERA 30081 SILVA 30037 SILVER 30278 SINGER 30045, 30072 SINUDYNE 30081, 30352 SMARAGD 30348 SONNECLAIR 30072 SONTEC 30037 SONWA 30642 SONY 30000, 30032, 30033, 30034, 30106, 31032, 31636, 31972 SOUNDWAVE 30037, 30348 SSANGYONG 30072 STACK 9 STERN STS SUNKAI SUNSTAR SUNTRONIC SUNWOOD SUPRA SYLVANIA 31972 30278 30042 30278, 30348 30000 30000 30072 30037 30000, 30043, 30081 SYMPHONIC 30000 SYSTEMAX 31972 T+A 30162 TAGAR SYSTEMS 31972 TANDBERG 30278 TANDY 30000, 30104 TASHIKO 30000, 30037, 30048, 30081, 30240 TATUNG 30000, 30041, 30043, 30048, 30081, 30348, 30352 TCHIBO 30348 TCM 30348 TEAC 30000, 30037, 30041, 30278, 30307, 30637, 30642 TEC 30072 TECH LINE 30072 TECHNICS 30081, 30162, 30226 TEDELEX 30642 TEKNIKA 30000, 30037 TELEAVIA 30041 TELEFUNKEN 30041, 30206, 30278, 30320, 30321, 30642 TELERENT 30226 TELETECH 30000, 30072, 30278 TENOSAL 30072 TENSAI 30000, 30072, 30278 TEVION 30348, 30642 TEXET 30278 THOMAS 30000 THOMSON 30041, 30067, 30278, 30320, 30321 THORN 30037, 30041, 30104 TMK 30240 TOKAI 30037, 30072 TOPLINE 30348 TOSHIBA 30041, 30042, 30043, 30045, 30081, 30352, 30828, 31008, 31972 TOTEVISION 30037, 30240 TOUCH 31972 TOWADA 30072 TRADEX 30081 UHER 30240 ULTRAVOX 30278 UNITECH 30240 UNITED 30348 UNIVERSUM 30000, 30037, 30081, 30104, 30106, 30240, 30348 VECTOR 30045 VECTOR RESEARCH 30038 VICTOR 30041, 30067 VIDEO CONCEPTS 30045 VIDEO TECHNIC 30000 VIDEOMAGIC 30037 VIDEOSONIC 30240 VIEWSONIC 31972 VILLAIN 30000 VOODOO 31972 WARDS 30000, 30033, 30038, 30042, 30045, 30048, 30072, 30081, 30240 WATSON 30081, 30352, 30642 WHITE WESTINGHOUSE 30072, 30278, 30637 WORLD 30348 XR-1000 30000, 30072 YAMAHA 30038 YAMISHI 30072, 30278 YOKAN 30072 YOKO 30037, 30240 ZENITH 30000, 30033, 30034, 30637 ZT GROUP 31972 ZX 30348, 30352 DVD PLAYER 3D LAB 40539 A-TREND 40714 ACOUSTIC SOLUTIONS 40713, 40730, 41450 AEG 40770, 40788, 40790 AIRIS 40672, 41005, 41107 AIWA 40533, 40641 AKAI 40766, 40770, 40788, 40790, 40898, 41115, 41233 AKI 41005 AKURA 40898, 41140, 41170, 41233, 41367 ALBA 40539, 40672, 40695, 40713, 40730, 41140 ALCO 40790 ALIZE 41151 ALL-TEL 41451 ALLEGRO 40869 AMITECH 40770, 40850 AMOI 40852 AMPHION MEDIA WORKS 40872 AMSTRAD 40713 AMW 40872 ANSONIC 40759, 40831 APEX DIGITAL40672, 41004, 41020, 41833 ARIANET 40818 AUDIOSONIC 41265 AUDIOVOX 40790 AUVIO 40843, 41090 AVIOUS 41165 AXION 40730 BASE 41451 BASIC LINE 40713 BAZE 40898, 41165 BBK 40862 BEL CANTO DESIGN 41571 BELLAGIO 41004 BLACK DIAMOND 40713, 40766, 40833 BLUE PARADE40571 BLUE SKY 40651, 40672, 40695, 40713, 40804, 40843 BOGHE 41004 BOMAN 40898 BRAINWAVE 40770, 41115 BRANDT 40503, 40651 BROKSONIC 40695 BUSH 40516, 40672, 40695, 40713, 40730, 40831, 40833, 40879, 41128, 41165 CAMBRIDGE AUDIO 41109 CCE 40730 CELESTIAL 41020 CENTREX 40672, 41004 CENTRUM 40713, 40779, 41005 CGV 40751, 41115 CINEA 40831, 40841 CINETEC 40713 CINEVISION 40833, 40869, 41483 CLASSIC 40730 CLATRONIC 40672, 40788, 40818, 41165 CLAYTON 40713 COBY 40730, 40852, 41107, 41165 CODEX 41233 COMPACKS 41107, 41265 CONIA 40852 CONTINENTAL EDISON 40831 CRAIG 40831 CROWN 40770, 41115 CRYPTO 41228 CYBERCOM 40831 CYBERHOME 40714, 40816, 41023 CYTRON 40651 D-VISION 41115 DAENYX 40872 DAEWOO 40705, 40714, 40770, 40833, 40869, 40872 DAEWOO INTERNATIONAL 40872 DALTON 41036, 41107 DANSAI 40770, 41115 DANTAX 40539, 40713, 40723, 40790 DAYTEK 40872, 41005 DAYTON 40872 DCE 40831 DECCA 40770, 41115 DENON 40490, 40634, 41282, 41634 DENVER 40788, 40898, 41107, 41165, 41450 DESAY 40843, 41090 APPENDIX-xiii DIAMOND 40651, 40768 DICK SMITH ELECTRONICS 40833, 41483 DIGATRON 41009 DIGIHOME 40713 DIGITOR 41005 DIGITREX 40672 DIK 40831 DINAMIC 40788 DISNEY 40675 DIVIDO 40705 DK DIGITAL 40831 DMTECH 41271 DRAGON 40831 DREAMX 41151 DSE 40833, 41483 DUAL 40651, 40665, 40713, 40730, 40779, 40790, 40831 DURABRAND 40713, 40831 EASY HOME 40857 ECC 40730 ECLIPSE 40723, 40751 ELFUNK 40850 ELIN 40770 ELLION 40850 ELTA 40672, 40770, 40788, 40850, 41115, 41151 ELTAX 40766 EMERSON 40591, 40675, 40705 ENTERPRISE 40591 ENZER 41228 EUROLINE 40788, 41115, 41233 FENNER 40651 FERGUSON 40651, 40898 FINLUX 40591, 40672, 40741, 40751, 40770, 41165 FIRSTLINE 40713, 40843, 40869 FISHER 40670 FUNAI 40675, 40695 FUSION 40862 GE 40522 GLOBAL SOLUTIONS 40768 GO VIDEO 40741, 40744, 40833, 40869, 41075, 41483 GOLDSTAR 40591, 40741 GOODMANS 40651, 40713, 40723, 40730, 40790, 40833, 40879, 41004, 41140 GRAETZ 40665 GRAN PRIX 40831, 40898 GRANDIN 40713, 41233 GRUNDIG 40539, 40651, 40670, 40695, 40705, 40713, 40775, 40790, 41004, 41036, 41128 GRUNKEL 40770 H&B 40818, 40841, 40850, 41233 H&B 40713, 40818, 40841, 40850, 41233 HANSEATIC 40741, 40790 APPENDIX-xiv HARMAN/KARDON 40702 HCM 40788 HDT 40705 HENSS 40713 HIMAX 40843 HITACHI 40573, 40664, 40713 HITEKER 40672 HOEHER 40651, 40713, 40831 HOME ELECTRONICS 40730 HOME TECH INDUSTRIES 41107, 41451 HOYO 40665 HYUNDAI 40766, 40850, 41228 INGELEN 40788 INTEGRA 40627 ISP 40695 JATON 40665 JBL 40702 JDB 40730 JDV 41367 JMB 40695 JVC 40503, 40539, 40558, 40623, 40867 KANSAI 41107 KANSAS TECHNOLOGIES 41233 KAWASAKI 40790 KENDO 40713, 40831 KENNEX 40713, 40770, 40898 KENWOOD 40490, 40534 KIIRO 40770 KINGAVON 40818 KISS 40665, 40841, 41523 KLH 40790, 41020 KOSS 40651 KXD 40857 LAWSON 40768 LENCO 40651, 40713, 40770, 41165 LEXIA 40768 LG 40591, 40741, 40790, 40801, 40869 LIFETEC 40651, 40831 LIMIT 40768 LITEON 41058 LODOS 40713 LOEWE 40511, 40539, 40741 LOGIX 40705 LUKER 41367 LUMATRON 40695, 40705, 40741, 40833, 41115 LUNATRON 40741 LUXMAN 40573 LUXOR 40713, 41004 MAGNAVOX 40503, 40539, 40675, 40713, 41140 MAGNEX 40723, 41165 MAJESTIC 41107 MANHATTAN 40705, 40713 MARANTZ 40539 MARK 40713 MARQUANT 40770 MATSUI 40651, 40672, 40695, 40713, 41004 MAXIM 40713, 40872 MBO 40730 MDS 40713 MECOTEK 40770 MEDION 40630, 40651, 40831, 40879, 41107, 41345 MEI 40790 MEMOREX 40695, 40831 METZ 40525, 40571, 40713 MICO 40723, 40751, 41223 MICROBOSS 40718 MICROMEDIA 40503, 40539 MICROMEGA 40539 MICROSOFT 40522 MICROSTAR 40831 MINAX 40713 MINERVA 40705 MINOKA 40770 MINOWA 41165 MIRROR 40879 MITSUBISHI 40713, 41521 MIZUDA 40770, 40818 MONYKA 40665 MPX 40843 MTLOGIC 41265 MUSTEK 40730 MX ONDA 40651, 40751, 41223 NAD 40741 NAIKO 40770, 41004, 41367 NEC 40785, 40869 NEOVIA 41271 NEUFUNK 40665 NEVIR 40770, 40831, 41197 NORCENT 40872, 41107, 41265 NORDMENDE 40831 NU-TEC 41228 OLIDATA 40672 ONKYO 40503, 40627, 40792 OPTIM 40843 OPTIMUS 40525 ORAVA 40818 ORBIT 40872 ORION 40695, 41006, 41128, 41233 ORITRON 40651 ORMOND 40713 P&B 40818, 41451 PACIFIC 40695, 40713, 40759, 40768, 40790, 40804, 40831 PACKARD BELL 40831 PALLADIUM 40695, 40779 PALSONIC 40672, 40852 PANASONIC 40490, 41282 PARAMOUNT PICTURES 40779 PEEKTON 40898 PHILCO 40788 PHILIPS 40503, 40539, 40675 PHILO 41345 PHONOTREND41165 PIONEER 40525, 40571, 41571 PLAYGO 41265 PLU2 40850, 41090 POLAROID 41020 POLK AUDIO 40539 PORTLAND 40770 POWERPOINT 40872 PRIMA 40766 PRIMA ELECTRONIC 40766 PRINZ 40831 PRISM 40705, 41006 PRO2 41107, 41345 PROLINE 40651, 40672, 40833, 41004 PROSCAN 40522 PROSON 40713 QWESTAR 40651 RADIONETTE 40741, 40869 RAITE 40665 RCA 40522, 40571, 40790 REC 40490, 40766 RED STAR 40759, 40763, 40770, 40788, 40898, 41107, 41345 REDSTAR 40763, 40898 REOC 40768 REVOY 40841 RIO 40869 ROADSTAR 40713, 40730, 40818, 40833, 40879, 40898, 41006 RONIN 40872 ROTEL 40558, 40623 ROWA 40516, 40872, 41004 SABA 40651 SAIVOD 40759, 40831, 41367 SALORA 40741 SAMSUNG 40490, 40573, 40744, 41075 SANSUI 40695, 40751, 40768 SANTOSH 41115 SANYO 40670, 40695, 40713, 40873 SCAN 40705, 40850 SCANMAGIC 40730 SCHAUB LORENZ 40770, 40788, 41115, 41151 SCHNEIDER 40539, 40651, 40705, 40713, 40779, 40788, 40790, 40804, 40831 SCIENTIFIC LABS 40768 SCOTT 40651, 40672, 40718, 41005, 41036, 41233 SEG 40665, 40713, 40763, 40768, 40872 SHANGHAI 40672 SHARP 40630, 40675, 40713, 41256 SHERWOOD 40741, 40770 SHINSONIC 40533 SILVA 40788, 40898 SILVA SCHNEIDER 40831, 40898 SINGER 40751 SKANTIC 40539, 40713 SKYMASTER 40730, 40768 SKYWORTH 40766, 40898 SLIDING 41115 SM ELECTRONIC 40730, 40768 SMART 40705, 40713, 40718 SONIC BLUE 40869 SONY 40533, 40573, 40772, 40864, 41033, 41633 SOUND COLOR 41233 SOUNDMASTER 40768 STANDARD 40651, 40768, 40788, 40831, 40898 STARLOGIC 41005 STARMEDIA 40818, 41005 STEVISON 41367 STRONG 40713 SUNKAI 40770, 40850 SUNSTECH 40831 SUNWOOD 40788, 40898 SUPERVISION 40768 SVA 40672 SYLVANIA 40675 SYMPHONIC 40675 SYNN 40768 TANDBERG 40713 TATUNG 40770 TEAC 40516, 40571, 40695, 40741, 40759, 40768, 40790, 40809, 40833, 41006, 41197, 41483 TEC 40898 TECHNICS 40490 TECHNIKA 40770, 40831, 41115, 41165 TECHNISSON 41115 TECHNOSONIC 40730, 41115 TECHWOOD 40713 TEDELEX 41228 TELETECH 40713, 40768 TENSAI 40651, 40770 TEVION 40651, 40833, 40898, 41036, 41170, 41382 THETA DIGITAL 40571 THOMSON 40522 TOKAI 40665, 40788, 40790, 40898 TOM-TEC 41450 TOSHIBA 40503, 40695 TRANS-CONTINENTS 40831, 40872, 41165, 41327 TREDEX 40804, 40843 TRUVISION 40857 UMAX 41151 UNITED 40672, 40695, 40788, 41115, 41165, 41228 UNIVERSUM 40591, 40713, 40741, 40779, 40790, 40869 UPTEK 40763 UPXUS 41345 URBAN CONCEPTS 40503 VENTURER 40790 VESTEL 40713 VIETA 40705, 41265 VIEWMASTER40862 VOXSON 40730, 40831 VTREK 41228 WAITEC 41151 WELKIN 40831 WELLINGTON 40713 WELTSTAR 40713 WHARFEDALE 40751, 40790 WILSON 40831, 41233 WINDSOR 40713 WINDY SAM 40573 WOXTER 41005, 41151 XBOX 40522 XENIUS 40790 XLOGIC 40768 XMS 40770 XORO 41183 YAKUMO 41004 YAMADA 40872, 41004, 41151 YAMAHA 40490, 40539, 41282, 41543 YAMAKAWA 40665, 40872 YUKAI 40730 ZENITH 40503, 40591, 40741, 40869 ZENNOX 41265 ZOECE 41265 LD PLAYER AIWA 40203 CARVER 40064, 40194 DENON 40059 FUNAI 40203 HARMAN/KARDON 40194 HITACHI 40395 KENWOOD 40258 MAGNAVOX 40194, 40217 MARANTZ 40064, 40194 MITSUBISHI 40059 NAD 40059 NAGSMI 40059 OPTIMUS 40059 PANASONIC 40204 PHILIPS 40064, 40194 PIONEER 40059 POLK AUDIO 40194 QUASAR 40204 REALISTIC 40203 SALORA 40064 SHARP 40001 SONY 40193, 40201 TECHNICS 40204 TELEFUNKEN 40059 THETA DIGITAL 40194 VICTOR 40245 WARDS 40059 YAMAHA 40217 DVD RECORDER APEX DIGITAL51056 BOGHE 51221 DENON 50490 DICK SMITH ELECTRONICS 51730 DIGITREX 51056 DSE 51730 ELTAX 51321 FUNAI 50675 GATEWAY 51158 GO VIDEO 50741, 51158, 51730 H&B 51235, 51421 HITACHI 51664 JVC 51164, 51275 KREISEN 51421 LG 50741 LITEON 51158, 51416, 51440, 51456 LOEWE 50741 MAGNAVOX 50646 MEDION 51347 MICO 51221 MITSUBISHI 51403 MUSTEK 51730 NEC 51404 PANASONIC 50490, 51010, 51011 PHILIPS 50646, 51158, 51818 PIONEER 50631, 51475, 51476 RCA 50522 RELISYS 51347 SAMSUNG 50490 SENSORY SCIENCE51158 SHARP 50630, 50675, 51419, 51550, 51556 SINUDYNE 51221 SONY 51033, 51069, 51070, 51433 SYLVANIA 50675 TANGENT 51321 TEVION 51227 THOMSON 50551 TOSHIBA 51510 VICTOR 51275 XORO 51221 YAMADA 51056, 51158, 51416 YAMAHA 51544 ZENITH 50741 CD PLAYER ADC ADCOM ADVANTAGE AIWA AKAI 60018 60234 60032 60157 60156, 60362, 60643 ALTO 60625 ANAM 60362 ARCAM 60157 ARISTON 60625 AUDIO DYNAMICS 60018 AUDIO RESEARCH 60157 AUDIOLAB 60157 AUDIOMECA 60157 AUDIOTON 60157 BUSH 60643 CAIRN 60157 CALIFORNIA AUDIO LABS 60029, 60303 CAMBRIDGE 60157, 60625 CAMBRIDGE AUDIO 60625 CARVER 60157, 60179, 60299 CCE 60643 COPLAND 60393 CYRUS 60157 DENON 60003, 60034, 60626 DKK 60000 DMX ELECTRONICS 60157 DUAL 60003 ECLIPSE 60625 EROICA 60481 FIDELITY 60625 FISHER 60179 GARRARD 60393, 60643 GEMINI 60625 GENEXXA 60032, 60426 GOLDMUND 60157 GOLDSTAR 60643 GOODMANS 60362, 60625 GRUNDIG 60157 GTX 60362 HARMAN/KARDON 60157, 60173, 60426 HCM 60625 HIRO 60625 HITACHI 60032 INTEGRA 60101 KENWOOD 60028, 60157, 60190, 60626 KRELL 60157 KYOCERA 60018 LINN 60157 LG 71208 LOEWE 60157 LUXMAN 60093 MAGNAVOX 60157 MARANTZ 60029, 60157, 60626 MATSUI 60157, 60643 MCS 60029 MEMOREX 60032 MERIDIAN 60157 MICROMEGA 60157 MIRO 60000 MISSION 60157 MITSUBISHI 60156 MTC 60625 MUSICAL FIDELITY 60393 MYRYAD 60157 NAD 60000, 60299, 60721 NAGAOKA 60018 NAIM 60157 NAKAMICHI 60147 NEC 60234 NIKKO 60362, 60625 NSM 60157 ONKYO 60101, 61327 OPTIMUS 60000, 60032, 60179, 60426 ORION 60393 PANASONIC 60029, 60303 PHILIPS 60157, 60626 PINK TRIANGLE 60625 PIONEER 60032, 60101 POLK AUDIO 60157 PROTON 60157 QED 60157 APPENDIX-xv G CD RECORDER DENON HHB JVC 70626, 70766 70192 71294 KENWOOD LG MARANTZ NAD PHILIPS PIONEER RCA SONY TDK TEAC VICTOR YAMAHA 70626 71208 70626 71208 70626 70192, 71087 70420 70000 71208 70420 70072, 71294 70888, 71292 MD RECORDER DENON KENWOOD OPTIMUS PIONEER SHARP SONY TECHNICS YAMAHA 70873 70681 71063 71063 70861, 71684 70490 71078 70490, 70888, 71909 TAPE DECK AIWA 70029, 70197 AKAI 70189, 70283 ARCAM 70076 CARVER 70029 DENON 70076 EROICA 70189 GARRARD 70308, 70309 GRUNDIG 70029 HARMAN/KARDON 70029 INKEL 70070 JVC 70244, 70273 KENWOOD 70070, 70205 MAGNAVOX 70029 MARANTZ 70029 MITSUBISHI 70189, 70283 MYRYAD 70029 ONKYO 70135, 70282 OPTIMUS 70027, 70220 ORION 70308, 70309 PANASONIC PHILIPS PIONEER POLK AUDIO RADIOLA RCA REVOX SANSUI SHARP SONY TEAC TECHNICS THORENS VICTOR WARDS YAMAHA 70229 70029, 70229 70027, 70220 70029 70029 70027, 70220 70029 70029 70205, 70231 70170, 70243 70283, 70289, 70308, 70309 70229 70029 70244, 70273 70027, 70029 70097, 70205, 70524 TUNER ACOUSTIC SOLUTIONS 81467 AIWA 80158, 80189 AKAI 80115, 80609 ANAM 80281, 80609 ARCAM 80189 CAIRN 80189 CAMBRIDGE 80189 CAMBRIDGE AUDIO 81455, 81647 CARVER 80189 DENON 80004, 80273 DUAL 80004 GARRARD 80281 GOLDMUND 80189 GOLDSTAR 80281 GOODMANS 80609 GRADIENTE 80281 GRUNDIG 80189, 80281 HARMAN/KARDON 80110, 80189 INKEL 80027, 80066 JBL 80110 JVC 80074 KENWOOD 80027, 80645 LG 80281 LINN 80189 © 2006 YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA 6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A. YAMAHA CANADA MUSIC LTD. 135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA YAMAHA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H. SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, GERMANY YAMAHA ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A. RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE YAMAHA ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD. YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD18 7GQ, ENGLAND YAMAHA SCANDINAVIA A.B. J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN YAMAHA MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD. 17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA LOEWE 80189 MAGNAVOX 80189 MARANTZ 80189 MEMOREX 80014 MICROMEGA 80189 MUSICAL FIDELITY 80445 MYRYAD 80189 NAD 80320, 80609 NIKKO 80609 ONKYO 80103, 80119 PANASONIC 80309, 80518 PHILIPS 80189 PIONEER 80014 POLK AUDIO 80189 RADIOLA 80189 RESTEK 80189 REVOX 80140, 80189 SANSUI 80189, 80609 SHERWOOD 80066 SIEMENS 80609 SONIC 80281 SONY 80158 SOUNDWAVE 80609 TEAC 80110, 80609 TECHNICS 80309, 80518, 81135 TECHWOOD 80281, 80609 THORENS 80189 UNIVERSUM 80189, 80281, 80609 VICTOR 80074 WARDS 80014, 80158, 80189 YAMAHA 80293, 81908 (TUNER ID1) 81916 (TUNER ID2) 81917 ZENITH 80281 HTR-N5060 QUAD 60157 QUASAR 60029 RADIOLA 60157 RADIOTONE 60625 RCA 60032, 60179 REALISTIC 60179 RESTEK 60157 REVOX 60157 ROTEL 60157, 60897 SAE 60157 SAMSUNG 60524 SANSUI 60157, 60625 SANYO 60179 SEG 60625 SHARP 60034 SHERWOOD 60426 SIEMENS 60157, 60362 SIMAUDIO 60157 SONIC FRONTIERS 60157 SONY 60000 STS 60018 SUPERTECH 60625 SYNERGY 60625 TAG MCLAREN 60157 TANDY 60032 TEAC 60362, 60393, 60625, 60643 TECHNICS 60029, 60207, 60303 TECHWOOD 60362 THORENS 60157 THULE AUDIO60157 TOSHIBA 60299, 60481 TRAXDATA 60626 UNIVERSUM 60157, 60362, 60524 WARDS 60000, 60032, 60157, 60179 YAMAHA 60036, 61907 YBA 60625 HTR-N5060 AV Receiver Ampli-tuner audio-vidéo OTHER AUDIO ACCESSORIES YAMAHA (iPod) 81981 YAMAHA (NET/USB) 81982 All rights reserved. Printed in Malaysia WG73970 OWNER’S MANUAL MODE D’EMPLOI BEDIENUNGSANLEITUNG MANUALE DI ISTRUZIONI MANUAL DE INSTRUCCIONES GEBRUIKSAANWIJZING ИНСТРУКЦИЯ ПО ЭКСПЛУАТАЦИИ
  • Page 1 1
  • Page 2 2
  • Page 3 3
  • Page 4 4
  • Page 5 5
  • Page 6 6
  • Page 7 7
  • Page 8 8
  • Page 9 9
  • Page 10 10
  • Page 11 11
  • Page 12 12
  • Page 13 13
  • Page 14 14
  • Page 15 15
  • Page 16 16
  • Page 17 17
  • Page 18 18
  • Page 19 19
  • Page 20 20
  • Page 21 21
  • Page 22 22
  • Page 23 23
  • Page 24 24
  • Page 25 25
  • Page 26 26
  • Page 27 27
  • Page 28 28
  • Page 29 29
  • Page 30 30
  • Page 31 31
  • Page 32 32
  • Page 33 33
  • Page 34 34
  • Page 35 35
  • Page 36 36
  • Page 37 37
  • Page 38 38
  • Page 39 39
  • Page 40 40
  • Page 41 41
  • Page 42 42
  • Page 43 43
  • Page 44 44
  • Page 45 45
  • Page 46 46
  • Page 47 47
  • Page 48 48
  • Page 49 49
  • Page 50 50
  • Page 51 51
  • Page 52 52
  • Page 53 53
  • Page 54 54
  • Page 55 55
  • Page 56 56
  • Page 57 57
  • Page 58 58
  • Page 59 59
  • Page 60 60
  • Page 61 61
  • Page 62 62
  • Page 63 63
  • Page 64 64
  • Page 65 65
  • Page 66 66
  • Page 67 67
  • Page 68 68
  • Page 69 69
  • Page 70 70
  • Page 71 71
  • Page 72 72
  • Page 73 73
  • Page 74 74
  • Page 75 75
  • Page 76 76
  • Page 77 77
  • Page 78 78
  • Page 79 79
  • Page 80 80
  • Page 81 81
  • Page 82 82
  • Page 83 83
  • Page 84 84
  • Page 85 85
  • Page 86 86
  • Page 87 87
  • Page 88 88
  • Page 89 89
  • Page 90 90
  • Page 91 91
  • Page 92 92
  • Page 93 93
  • Page 94 94
  • Page 95 95
  • Page 96 96
  • Page 97 97
  • Page 98 98
  • Page 99 99
  • Page 100 100
  • Page 101 101
  • Page 102 102
  • Page 103 103
  • Page 104 104
  • Page 105 105
  • Page 106 106
  • Page 107 107
  • Page 108 108
  • Page 109 109
  • Page 110 110
  • Page 111 111
  • Page 112 112
  • Page 113 113
  • Page 114 114
  • Page 115 115
  • Page 116 116
  • Page 117 117
  • Page 118 118
  • Page 119 119
  • Page 120 120
  • Page 121 121
  • Page 122 122
  • Page 123 123
  • Page 124 124

Yamaha HTR-N5060 de handleiding

Categorie
AV-ontvangers
Type
de handleiding